JP6799360B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

Conventionally, a game machine to which a decorative substrate on which a light emitting body is mounted is attached (for example, Patent Document 1) has been proposed. The player is provided with a variation of the effect using the light emission effect by the light emitter.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)

However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a new embodiment that suppresses a decline in the interest of the game by producing light emission.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in the interest in playing games .

The present invention
A gaming machine that draws lots based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and gives profits to the player based on the result of the lottery.
The luminous body used for the production in the process of the game,
A light emitting decorative substrate on which the light emitting body is mounted and
With
As the light emitting body, it has a side view type specific light emitting body capable of irradiating in a direction parallel to the surface of the substrate to be mounted.
As the light emitting decorative substrate, a specific light emitting decorative substrate on which the specific light emitting body is mounted is provided.
The specific light emitting decorative substrate has a front mounting surface on which the specific light emitting body is mounted and a back mounting surface on which the specific light emitting body is not mounted.
A white coating film is provided on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting decorative substrate on which the specific light emitting body is mounted, and a specific notation portion corresponding to the specific light emitting body is a yellow paint on the white coating film. Formed by
The specific illuminant has a white exterior.
Further, the specific light emitting body is characterized in that it can emit light in multiple colors.
Further, an electronic component different from the light emitting body is mounted on at least one of the front mounting surface and the back mounting surface of the specific light emitting decorative substrate.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It shows another form, and is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 9 is a sectional view taken along line YY of FIG. 39 including a partially enlarged view. It is an exploded perspective view of a foul cover unit including a partially enlarged exploded view which shows another form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional plan view which includes the partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional plan view which includes the partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operation line invalidating member, and (b) is a sectional plan view of the foul cover unit. It is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) and (b) are enlarged views of the main part of FIG. 45 showing the normal flow of the game ball (foul ball), and (c) is an enlarged view of the main part of FIG. 45 showing the reverse movement prevention state of the illegal ball. .. It is a top view of the foul cover unit. It is a top view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) is an enlarged view of the Z portion of FIG. 49, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z portion of FIG. 49 showing a state in which the foul ball passes. (A) and (b) are enlarged views of the Z portion of FIG. 49 showing a state in which the operation line is invalidated. (A) and (b) show the state in which the operation line invalidation member is electrified, and are enlarged views corresponding to the Z portion of FIG. 49 showing the state in which the operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of the main part which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operating ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is a rear view of the payout device for demonstrating the rotation position of a payout vane. It is a rear view of the payout device for demonstrating the prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 119 (a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 119 (a) viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame is distributed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which shows the vicinity of a tank rail enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. FIG. 11 is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view cut along the line CC of FIG. 117 (a). Another configuration of the present invention in which metal powder countermeasures are taken (configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the second embodiment). Another configuration of the present invention in which metal powder countermeasures are taken (configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the third embodiment). Another configuration of the present invention in which metal powder countermeasures are taken (configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the fourth embodiment). Another configuration of the present invention in which metal powder countermeasures are taken (configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the fifth embodiment). It is a front view of the game board which made the game panel opaque in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 130 from the front. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel is transparent. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball is distributed, and the obstacle nail by making the game panel opaque. It is a front view which shows the vicinity of the attacker unit in the game board enlarged. It is a front view of the front component and a game panel in a game board. It is a perspective view which looked at the front component and a game panel from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the front component and a game panel from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at from the front by disassembling the front component and a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the front component and a game panel and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the game panel shown with the board cover removed, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the lower panel decorative board in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the decorative pattern of a game panel, a front component and a table unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the relationship between a decorative pattern in a game panel and an obstacle nail. It is an enlarged view which shows the installation mode of the upper left panel decorative substrate. It is an enlarged view which shows the game panel in the modification. It is a front view of the front effect unit in the modification. It is a front view of the panel plate in a modification. (A) is a front view of a panel board in which a decorative pattern different from that of FIG. 143 is formed, and (b) is a front view showing the panel board of (a) together with a front unit. It is a front view which shows the nail adjustment film for adjusting the obstacle nail planted in the game panel. It is a front view of the main body frame which shows with the game board attached. (A) is an enlarged explanatory view showing a state before the nail adjusting film is attached to the game board, and (b) is an enlarged explanatory view showing a state where the nail adjusting film is attached to the game board. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of the wiring route from a function display unit in a main control board. It is a front view of the front production unit. It is a front view which shows the state which made the 1st picture luminescent decoration in the front effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 2nd pattern is luminescent decoration in the front effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 2nd picture of the front effect unit different from this embodiment was light-emitting and decorated. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the under-back movable decorative body provided in the under-back effect unit in the back unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the movable under-back decorative body provided in the under-back effect unit as viewed from behind. It is a front view which shows the movement of the movable decorative body under the back. It is a schematic perspective view of the internal structure of the back left movable decorative body and the like. It is a front view which shows the movement of the back left movable decorative body of the back left production unit in a back unit. From the normal state, raise the back lower movable decoration of the back right production unit from the standby position and move the back lower moving arm to the back left movable decoration of the back left production unit and the back right movable decoration of the back right production unit. The height is set, and the back upper movable decoration of the back right production unit is lowered from the standby position, and the back upper moving arm is the same as the back left movable decoration of the back left production unit and the back upper right movable decoration of the back right production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state of height. FIG. 165 shows a state in which the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the upper left movable decorative body on the back, the lower left movable decorative body on the back, the upper right movable decorative body on the back, and the lower right movable decorative body on the back are rotated. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back left moving arm of the back left effect unit and the back right moving arm of a back right effect unit to the second state from a normal state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back upper left movable decoration body, the back left lower movable decoration body, the back upper right movable decoration body, and the back right lower right movable decoration body from the state of FIG. 167 to the second state. From the normal state, move the back left moving arm to the right and the back right moving arm to the left, as well as the back upper left movable decoration and the back right lower movable decoration, and the back left lower movable decoration and the back upper right movable decoration. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the effect image is displayed on the effect display device after rotating the body so that it faces each other. From the normal state, the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back right lower movable decoration were moved to the second united position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state. From the state shown in FIG. 170, the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back right lower movable decoration are moved to the first united position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 1st picture is light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate of a front effect unit. It is a timing diagram which shows the production example which executes the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of a game panel and the first picture in the light guide plate of a front effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 2nd picture is light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate of a front effect unit. It is a timing diagram which shows the production example which executes the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of a game panel and the second pattern in the light guide plate of a front effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the 2nd picture of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from FIG. 172 and FIG. In addition to illuminating the first pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit, the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back right lower It is a front view of the game board which shows the movable decorative body moved to the 2nd united position. In addition to illuminating the first pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit, the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back right lower It is a front view of the game board which shows the movable decorative body moved to the first united position. The second pattern is luminescently decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from that of FIG. 178, and the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, and the back upper right It is a front view of the game board which shows the movable decorative body and the movable decorative body at the lower right of the back in a state which moved to the first united position. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit. It is sectional drawing of XX line of FIG. 182. It is the A arrow view of FIG. 182. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the connection relationship with a panel drive board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 186. It is a figure which shows the structure of the frame ground board. It is a circuit diagram explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of a power supply board. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of a power supply board. It is a B arrow view of FIG. 190. This is silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board (No. 1). This is silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of a power supply board (No. 2). It is a perspective view explaining the outline of the discontinued electronic component. This is a configuration for measures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a payout control board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of wiring to a substrate treated as a main substrate. It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided in a door frame. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the part D of FIG. 202. It is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. It is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D'part of FIG. 204 or the D'part of FIG. 205. It is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D ″ part of FIG. 207. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with the magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 210. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 213. It is the flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit following FIG. 214. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. This is a modified example of the payout device. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for the lottery process for the jackpot, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for the lottery process for the type of jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big prize opening opening and closing processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a hold notice determination table used for determining the hold notice pattern at 1 o'clock on hold, and (B) is a hold notice determination table used for determining the hold notice pattern at 2 o'clock on hold. ) Is a hold notice determination table used for determining the hold notice pattern at 3 o'clock on hold. (D) is a hold notice determination table used for determining the hold notice pattern at 4 o'clock on hold. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the effect pattern set as the first hold change effect. This is a specific example of the effect on the effect display device at the time of executing the first hold change effect. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the effect pattern set as the second hold change effect. This is a specific example of the effect on the effect display device when the second pending change effect is executed. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the effect pattern set as the third hold change effect. This is a specific example of the effect on the effect display device when the third pending change effect is executed. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the stock effect over a plurality of fluctuations when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined. (A) is a type of operation effective time, (B) is a scenario determination table used for determining a scenario determination pattern at 4 o'clock on hold, and (C) is a determination of a scenario determination pattern at 3 o'clock on hold. It is a scenario determination table used for. This is a concrete example of the effect on the effect display device at the time of executing the stock effect and the operation effect. This is a concrete example of the effect on the effect display device at the time of executing the stock effect and the operation effect. (A) is a type of the mode immediately before the operation, (B) is a scenario determination table used for determining the scenario determination pattern at 4 o'clock on hold, and (C) is the determination of the scenario determination pattern at 3 o'clock on hold. It is a scenario determination table used for. This is a specific example of the effect in the effect display device at the time of executing the stock effect and the operation effect that stock the contents of the mode immediately before the operation. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification when a specific period occurs after the execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation. This is a specific example of the effect of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 when the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation and the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification are executed. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the look-ahead effect at the time of stop and the unfortunate effect during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol. This is a concrete example of the effect of the effect display device at the time of executing the look-ahead effect at the time of stop and the unfortunate effect using the temporary stop period of the lost symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the dialogue notice as an example of a button-related effect executed by an effect display device. It is a timing chart of the dialogue notice shown in FIG. 259. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation trigger pseudo-error effect as an example of a button-related effect executed by the effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-operation pseudo error effect as an example of a button-related effect executed by an effect display device. (A) is a timing chart of the operation trigger pseudo error effect shown in FIG. 261, and (B) is a timing chart of the non-operation pseudo error effect shown in FIG. 262. It is a schematic diagram of the handling of a conductor floating with respect to the earth provided in various production units provided in a game board. This is an example of a variation pattern pattern table. This is an example of dividing the first index determination table into two parts. This is another example of dividing the first index determination table into two. This is an example of the first promotion lottery table. This is an example of the second index determination table. This is an example of the second promotion lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of a barbell reach production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of a barbell reach production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of a barbell reach production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of a barbell reach production. This is an example of the effect color selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the bulletin board notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the bulletin board notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline of the bulletin board notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline of the bulletin board notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the look-ahead effect using the bulletin board rehearsal effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the bulletin board notice effect using a pressing operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the bulletin board notice ghost effect using a pressing operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the bulletin board notice effect using the central pressing operation part and the rotation operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the bulletin board notice effect using the central pressing operation part and the rotation operation part.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 13. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position as viewed from the front right. is there. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be seen from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 106) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side in the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated to the front, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer circumference of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the metal main body frame reinforcement frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550. After the payout unit 560 for paying out the received game ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640 that covers the side, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. It is attached to the rear surface of the plate-shaped game panel 1100 which is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the game area 5a, the board holder 1200 which is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the center of the game area 5a in front view are arranged. A game display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a peripheral control unit 1500 configured as a transparent board box arranged on the back side of the game panel 1100 and on the back side of the effect display device 1600, and a game. It includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the panel 1100 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B ( For example, it is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 for granting a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.

Further, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, or displays the front effect unit 2600 and the backside effect according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. The player can be entertained by performing movable effects and light emitting effects by various production units such as the unit 3100, the back-up effect unit 3200, the back-left effect unit 3300, and the back-right effect unit 3400.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling them. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the recess 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontally extending portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the notch 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the rear side to the left. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted into the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly as viewed from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent the pinching.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forward protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and compressed. This is to prevent the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 22 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a, and extending downward from the edge of the front extending portion 51b from the left side to the front side and the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 described later of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And the foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game of driving into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. 32A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and the like. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the board 104, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And the foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c, in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, penetrate the front and rear of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h, which is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. With a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length of the tubular portion 102a in the axial direction and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 99). And a part of (see FIG. 100) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. The purpose is to relay the connection between the decorative substrate 413 of the window decoration, the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it is behind a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled so as to be along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 23 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular cylinder lock 130 that is attached to the rear side of a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 23 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 36A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. The rear cover 142 one by one a ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a, and the ball feeding member 143 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 by partitioning between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a (a state of staying in the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is rotatably attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. In the ball feeding operation paddle 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b, which is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b extending upward. A transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c (see FIG. 36B) that projects downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation paddle 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B in the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). The state) and the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 185) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment such that it is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the ball pulling member 143 or the weight portion 143d which are rotatably supported by the shaft. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b under the normal state, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation paddle 143c is moved downward with the operation transmission unit. Will move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball pulling member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It can be prevented from bouncing off at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 36B and the like) that is recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The operation line invalidating member 700, which is the first fraud prevention means, is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. There is. Here, disabling the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated by cutting or pinching (pinching and stopping), entwining (winding), or adhering with hot melt or the like. It means to put it in a state.

The operation line nullification member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and is separated vertically at a substantially center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. Inclined portions 703 formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip side (right end side when viewed from the front) of the portions 701 and the second piece portion 702 and the sides of the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 facing each other. And have. The first piece 701 of the operation line invalidation member 700 is bent so that the right end in the front view projects rearward with respect to the flat plate surface of the operation line invalidation member 700 in FIG. 36 (a). On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same surface as the flat plate surface of the operation line invalidation member 700. As a result, in a plan view, the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 form a shearing portion 700v that spreads in a V shape toward the right.

When the operation line nullification member 700 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, a V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 is formed in the ball hitting supply port 142a. It will be in a state of communication with.

According to the operation line invalidation member 700, an illegal ball (game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. Or a synthetic resin ball having almost the same diameter as that) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540, and is projected to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. When the operation line is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or when an illegal act such as moving an illegal ball in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the ball launching device 540 plays a game. The operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 by the momentum of the fraudulent ball launched (struck) with a strength that can reach the region 5a. Then, the narrowed portion of the sheared portion 700v formed by the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 can be cut like scissors, thereby invalidating the operation line and using an illegal ball. It is possible to deter the fraudulent activity that was being carried out.

The first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described form, but may be another form. For example, if the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is cut or narrowed to prevent fraudulent activity, the metal plate may be bent into a form different from the above, or the bent operation line nullifying member 700 may be formed. It may be provided, or a resin molded member having a shape capable of cutting or narrowing the operation line attached to the illegal ball may be provided in place of the metal plate.

When the illegal ball is made of a synthetic resin such as acrylic, the metal game ball at the above-mentioned standby position (on the above-mentioned partition portion 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). ) Is detected, and the detection signal is added to the driving conditions of the ball feeding solenoid 145, which is an electric feeding means, to prevent the firing of an illegal ball itself. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not drive the ball feeding.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 is launched by the ball launching device 540 with a force weaker than a predetermined force (launching force that can reach the game area 5a) (launching force that cannot reach the game area 5a), and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is launched. The purpose is to guide the game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the inside to the lower plate 202, and to guide the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. ..

As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a which is an opening for the ball of the dish unit 200. It is possible to communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a that communicates with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the penetrating ball passage 150a in the front view. It is equipped with a full tank ball receiving port 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and although it is launched from the launch rail 544 by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, the momentum is insufficient. The foul ball receiving portion 150c that receives the game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into the foul ball falling port 1013 formed between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the game area 5a, and the front view right. The game ball B, which is open toward the front near the lower corner and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the rail ball receiving portion 150c, is discharged forward, and the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the ball of the dish unit 200. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d that communicates with the ball discharge port 150d, and a communication passage 150h that connects the ball discharge port 150d (strictly speaking, the storage passage 150e described later) and the foul ball receiving portion 150c. The connecting passage 150h includes an upper passage wall 150i arranged below the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with a slope opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately one game ball from the upper passage wall 150i. It is composed of a lower passage wall 150j arranged in parallel with a space between the two, and the start end portion opens upward to the downwardly inclined end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the end portion thereof with respect to the storage passage 150e. Open downwards.

A series of passages from the foul ball drop port 1013 established between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the connecting passage 150h and the storage passage 150e are returned. It is a passage, and the return passage portion 1014 is formed by these series of elements.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the working protrusion 613a of 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 109). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as a second fraud prevention means for suppressing fraud caused by the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached, and similarly, the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 The foul ball drop port 1013 opened between the two is provided with operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S as a third fraud prevention means.

The second operation line invalidating member 7000 provided on the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, which is enlarged in FIG. 40. As shown in the figure, the convex portions 7001 on both sides are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and are fixed (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Further, for safety reasons, the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 cover and accommodate the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, and the like are difficult to contact.

The specific operation line invalidation member 7000 includes the same components as the operation line invalidation member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece portion 701 of FIG. 36. A V-shape that opens in the direction facing the flow direction of the ball in the connecting passage 150h by the one piece 7010 and the second piece 7020 extending from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702. The sheared portion 7000v of the above is formed.

In the foul cover unit 150 of the embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40, the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidation member 7000 is the lid member 152 constituting the foul cover unit 150. It is arranged so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface, and at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150 g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h, toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000. A tapered guide portion 150k capable of guiding the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on the upper surface thereof, and is directed toward the lid member 152 side at the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The width narrows toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka descending to the operation line invalidating member 7000 side and the first inclined portion 150ka. It has a second inclined portion 150 kb having a narrowed tip shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L) and a tapered guide portion 150 kb. Then, when the operation line L, which is tensioned by the rolling of the illegal ball Q or the tension from the outside, slides into the guide portion 150k in a winding shape, the tension applied to the operation line L causes the first inclined portion 150ka to the second. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidation member 7000 by sliding the inclined portion 150 kb of the above. As a result, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidation member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of the normal foul ball and the guidance of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In addition, in order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corner portions of the first inclined portion 150 ka and the second inclined portion 150 kb of the guide portion 150 k may be formed in a curved shape.

Since the second operation line invalidating member 7000 provided on the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is provided by using the space communicating from the lower plate ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The attached illegal ball Q is allowed to enter the game area 5a, and the operation line L protruding from the lower plate ball supply port 211c is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q, or is illegal. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as moving the ball Q in and out of the first starting port or the like.

For example, a fraudulent act such as pushing the fraudulent ball Q into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c using a special tool such as a cell plate, causing it to flow backward and sending it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540 (hereinafter, “illegal act” When "A") is performed, when the illegal ball Q goes over the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and heads for the launch position of the launch rail 544, Pulled by it (tension is applied), the operation line L wraps around in a U-turn along the folded portion. Then, the operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidation member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v by the first piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020, and finally. Since the operation line L cannot be operated as a result of being disconnected, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q.

Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and the ball is intentionally made into a foul ball to be a ball opening, the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Even when a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as "cheating act B") is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball that has become a foul ball is grabbed and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a. The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled (tension is applied) by the subsequent firing of the illegal ball Q and is operated. L is pressed against the folded-back portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as above, and as a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q. It will be possible. It should be noted that FIGS. 39 and 40 are explanatory views assuming a case where cheating B is committed. Further, for the above-mentioned fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidating member 700 or the like, which is the first fraud prevention means, cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent ball Q which becomes a foul ball (for example, it becomes a foul ball). Even if the fraudulent ball Q is fired with a certain degree of strength, the operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means), so this embodiment reinforces the fraud countermeasure by the first fraud prevention means. It also has the effect of Therefore, when targeting fraudulent activity B, the operation line invalidating member 700, 7000 as the first and second fraud prevention means, and further, the operation line invalidating member 7000H as the third fraud prevention means described later. , 7000S is preferably used in combination as appropriate, and one unit of the first operation line invalidation member 700 and another second operation line invalidation member 7000 or the third operation line invalidation member 7000H, 7000S. It is recommended to install it together with the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the first operation line invalidation member 700 and the second operation line invalidation member 7000 are provided together on the door frame 3 side and in a state where they are not exposed to the outside, so that they are inconspicuous. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble, it is difficult for fraud countermeasure information to be leaked. Further, since the operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000 have a decrease in sharpness and the like affect the crime prevention performance, it is easy to maintain the crime prevention performance if they are replaced together with the door frame 3.

By the way, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000, which are the first and second fraud prevention means described above, cut the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v to invalidate the operation line L, but sandwich the operation line L. That is, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022, and the flexible operation line L cannot be pushed or pulled or is difficult to push or pull, and the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be easily operated. It may be invalidated as follows.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is formed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined by the shaded portions in the enlarged view of FIG. 41, and the metal plates 7011 and 7022 are formed. The first half of the non-joint portion at the tip of the non-joint portion is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joint portion is used as a holding portion 7044. Such an operation line invalidation member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and further, for safety reasons, the unit main body 151 is prevented so as to be difficult to touch the hands of employees, game machine assemblers, and the like. And the lid member 152 covers and accommodates it from the outside.

According to the operation line invalidation member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q, and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c are pulled. When wrapping around the folded part in a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the folded part, and the holding portion of the latter half of the non-joint portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022. It is pinched and pinched by 7044 like tweezers.

As a result, the fraudulent ball Q that has flowed back from the lower plate ball supply port 211c due to the above-mentioned fraudulent act A reaches the launch position of the launch rail 544, or the fraudulent ball Q that is intentionally made into a foul ball by the fraudulent act B. It becomes possible to suppress the arrival of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the ball, and even if it reaches there, the operation line L is sandwiched between the operation line invalidation member 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it only loosens there, and as a result, the amount of extension of the operation line L cannot be adjusted (the illegal ball Q hanging in the game area 5a). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to deter fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q.

In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joining portion at the tips of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is used as a holding portion 7044. However, instead of this, one metal plate is bent so as to overlap the plate surfaces, and the tip portion of one of the bent plate surfaces is expanded in a V shape to introduce the introduction guide portion 7033 (guidance portion). ), And the sandwiching width portion of both plate surfaces may be the sandwiching portion 7044. As a result, it is possible to improve the assembly work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate while achieving the same effect as the above-mentioned fraud deterrent effect.

Further, the operation line invalidation member 7000 that sandwiches the operation line L is not shown, but a double-sided tape is installed in the gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. 42, or an adhesive having a property of not hardening is filled. The adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be adhered to the adhesive portion to be immobile.

Further, the operation line invalidation member 7000 for sandwiching the operation line L is changed from the above-mentioned one composed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. 43, and this coil spring is replaced with a coil spring. It may be installed and formed so that the guiding direction of the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k and its own central axis are substantially orthogonal to each other. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb is fitted between the adjacent coils of the coil spring and is sandwiched.

Note that the coil spring has a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when no load is applied, such as a tension coil spring or a torsion coil spring, but it is necessary to install the coil spring in a compressed state like a compression coil spring. Compared to this, it is advantageous in terms of installation work.

Further, the coil spring may be installed in a straight state when no load is applied, but as shown in FIG. 43, the coil spring is installed by being curved in a direction in which the coils on the approach side of the operation line L are slightly expanded. This is preferable because the operation line L can enter smoothly. As described above, when the operation line invalidation member 7000 is formed by the coil spring, it can be manufactured at low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

Further, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted into the above-mentioned operation line invalidation member 7000 through the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c), and the cell plate closes the guide portion 150k to the operation line invalidation member 7000. Further fraudulent work is conceivable, but in order to deal with this, in the above-described embodiment, the course change portion of the return passage portion 1014 of the foul ball (in the present embodiment, the portion corresponding to directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c). A slit 1015 is formed in the cell plate (foreign matter) into which the cell plate (foreign matter) enters (see FIG. 39). As a result, it is possible to prevent further illicit work in which a foreign object is inserted through the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k. As a countermeasure against illegal work in which a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted through the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted as in the slit 1015 described above. Not limited to the one that forms the intake port, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 39, a configuration is provided in which a protruding obstacle portion 1016 is provided to prevent foreign matter such as a cell plate from colliding with the guide portion 150k. As a result, a higher degree of fraud prevention may be achieved.

Further, the first and second operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure that waits for the entry of the operation line L and invalidates the members, but FIGS. 49, 50, and 51. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D that positively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be used.

49, 50, and 51 show one specific example of the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, and the operation line invalidation member 7000D is a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). It is oscillatingly attached to the course change portion (corner portion corresponding to directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c).

That is, in FIG. 49, the operation line invalidation member 7000D has a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped invalidating portion 2646 projecting vertically to the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645. It has a shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the invalidation portion 2646 and the invalidation portion 2646 intersect, and an arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648 centered on the shaft hole 2647 projecting to the right from the upper edge of the invalidation portion 2646. The support shaft 2649 planted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture of FIG. 50 (a) in FIG. 50 (b). Can swing to release posture. Further, the operation line invalidation member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2660 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the invalidating portion 2646 sandwiching the shaft hole 2647, and the ball receiving portion 2645 is urged by the balance weight 2660. The ball receiving posture shown in FIG. 50 (a) was maintained in a state where no external force (specifically, the load of one game ball) was applied to the ball receiving portion 2645, while the load of one game ball was applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. At the time, it swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 50 (b).

Further, the end edge of the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is an intersection side portion 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the invalidating member 7000D swings in the release posture shown in FIG. 50 (b), the intersection side portion 2651 is fitted into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the above dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball passes through the connecting passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. 50 (a). Immediately after flowing down and changing the course downward at the course changing section, the ball is placed on the ball receiving section 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of the foul ball, the operation line nullification member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 50 (b). Then, the foul ball resting on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is released to the downstream storage passage 150e, so that the operation line invalidation member 7000D released from the foul ball is attached with the balance weight 2660. It returns to the original ball receiving posture by the force.

In rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may be generated at one time, but even in such a case, while the previous foul ball is processed by the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the latter foul ball is as shown in FIG. 50 (b). It is stopped by the arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648, and the operation line nullification member 7000D is reactivated before being continuously processed. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul balls are generated at the same time, they can be processed one by one without any problem.

Next, the above-mentioned fraudulent act B (a plurality of fraudulent balls Q are connected to the operation line L and one of them is launched from the hit ball supply port 142a) to the foul cover unit 150 provided with the dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D. By intentionally firing the illegal ball weakly, it is made into a foul ball and taken out from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball, and further, the operation line L connected to the illegal ball is grasped and the subsequent illegal ball is performed. When the fraudulent ball Q (a fraudulent act of firing the ball Q into the game area 5a) flows in, the fraudulent ball Q flows down the connecting passage 150h as shown in FIG. 51 (a) and changes its course downward at the course change section. Immediately after that, it is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the illegal ball Q, the operation line invalidating member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 51 (b). At this time, the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D also rotates, and the intersection side portion 2651 of the end edge crosses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side, but the intersection side portion 2651 When crossing the foul ball return passage, the operation line L passing through the passage naturally also crosses, so that the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. 51 (b) and cannot move. Stop). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot fall, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidation member 7000D is in a position that cannot be reached even if a hand is put in from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for the ball, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q that stops at this position is taken out from the outside.

If the operation line L is meandered between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 to make it difficult for the operation line L to reverse, it is in a state of being captured by the operation line invalidation member 7000D. It is also difficult to pull the illegal ball Q back to the hit ball supply port 142a side. As a result, the illegal ball Q remaining on the operation line invalidation member 7000D can be stored and recovered as a evidence ball.

The above-mentioned dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D utilizes the own weight of the illegal ball Q, but even if the operation line invalidation member 7000D is operated by the electric drive means as shown in FIG. Good.

That is, in the operation line invalidation member 7000D of FIG. 52, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 as an electric drive means is connected to the portion provided with the balance weight 2660 described above, and the ball detector is connected to the invalidation unit 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when a game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and it is detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises and the operation line invalidating member 7000D changes from the ball receiving posture to the release posture. When the game ball is released from the ball receiving unit 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655 (the signal changes from the presence or absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered to operate the operation line. The nullification member 7000D is adapted to return from the release posture to the ball receiving posture.

When a normal foul ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the generation and release of the foul ball are detected by the change of the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 receives the change. In order to operate appropriately, the foul balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the operation line invalidation member 7000D using its own weight.

On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operation line. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646, and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since the emission signal is not emitted from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stops at the ascending position. Therefore, since the fraudulent ball Q cannot be taken out from the target ball opening, fraudulent activity can be prevented.

The dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D described above cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade at the intersecting side portion 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646. be able to. Further, since the operation line invalidation member 7000D of the embodiment has a function of preventing the illegal ball Q from entering from the opening side of the ball while the ball receiving portion 2645 is blocking the return passage portion 1014, the illegal ball described later will be described. It can also be used as a measure to prevent reverse movement. Therefore, it exhibits a higher fraud prevention function.

Further, in the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, in addition to the above-described configuration, for example, the invalidation portion is formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retreats to open and close the connecting passage 150h, and the tip of the shutter plate is formed. Is a crossing side that crosses the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the connecting passage 150h and downstream of the movable area of the crossing side, and passes through the movable area of the crossing side. The invalid ball Q is detected by this ball detector to activate the invalidation unit, and the operation line L is pinched or cut at the intersection crossing the connecting passage 150h. May be good.

Further, the above-mentioned dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D can also be applied to the first operation line invalidation member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operating line nullifying member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the illegal deterrent effect can be surely enhanced.

Further, FIG. 53 is a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, which winds up the operation line L and invalidates it.

That is, the operation line invalidation member 7000D is a square ring-shaped invalidation portion 2646 mounted in the connecting passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be able to rotate about a rotation shaft 2656 in a direction orthogonal to this passage. The motor 2657, which is an electric drive means for rotating the disabling portion 2646, and the horizontal bar crossing the connecting passage 150h of the disabling portion 2646 are provided as the crossing side portion 2651 downstream from the movable (rotation) region of the crossing side portion 2651. It is composed of a ball detector 2655 and a ball detector 2655, and each time a foul ball is detected by the ball detector 2655, the invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once.

When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with such an operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball enters the connecting passage 150h and passes through the nullification section 2646, and the foul ball detects the ball. When detected by the vessel 2655, the invalidation unit 2646 idles once, but the foul ball flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside through the ball opening.

On the other hand, when the fraudulent ball Q due to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the fraudulent ball Q goes under the invalidation unit 2646. Since the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation, the operation line L winds around the invalidation unit 2646. Therefore, since the fraudulent ball Q stops within the connecting passage 150h, there is no risk of it falling into the hands of a fraudulent person.

The ball detector 2655 that detects the illegal ball Q may be displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q, and in such a case, the illegal ball Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary idle rotation of the operation line invalidation member 7000D that winds up the operation line L described above.

As described above, the description of the embodiment relating to the dynamic operation line nullification member includes the following technical ideas.

"The game area where you play with the game ball and
A ball launcher that launches a game ball,
A launch passage portion that forms a launch ball passage that communicates with the game area from the launch position of the ball launcher.
A return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting the foul ball drop opening opened in the middle of the launch ball passage and the ball opening for discharging the game ball to the outside in front of the machine.
Equipped with fraud prevention means that can prevent the operation of the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball from the front of the machine.
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that clamps, cuts, or winds the operation line to invalidate it.
The operation line nullification member includes an intersection side portion of the game ball that crosses the foul ball return passage, and operates the intersection side portion after the illegal ball has passed through the movable region of the intersection side portion to operate the foul ball. A gaming machine characterized in that the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage is pinched, cut, or wound up at the intersection so as to cross the return passage. "

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10, 11, 39, 47, and 48, the third fraud prevention means provided at the foul ball drop port 1013 described above is the end (termination) of the launch rail 544. The operation line invalidation member 7000H provided on the part) and the operation line invalidation member 7000S provided on the end portion (specifically, the resin rail base 1001x) of the outer rail 1001.

The operation line nullification member 7000H provided at the protruding end of the launch rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is combed so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge. It is covered with the safety cover part 1017 arranged in. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover portion 1017.

Therefore, as described above, an illegal act such as pushing the illegal ball Q from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the return passage portion 1014 using a special tool such as a cell plate to cause the illegal ball Q to flow backward and send it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the launch rail 544 and rolls due to the inclination toward the launch position, it is pulled by it (tension is applied) and the operation line L becomes the operation line invalidation member. It is cut by touching the cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and the ball is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball. Even when a fraudulent act B is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball Q is grasped and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a, the fraudulent ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage portion 1014 is used. Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidation member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

On the other hand, the operation line invalidating member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wire rods in a brush shape as shown in FIGS. 10, 39 and 47. It's a rush.

According to the operation line invalidation member 7000S, the illegal ball Q tentatively hangs in a state where it reaches the game area 5a and is connected to the operation line L, and the end of the operation line L is a lower plate ball supply port which is an opening for a ball. Even if an illegal person is grasping through the 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside in order to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L is caused by the tension between the wires of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. Since it gets in between, even if the force of the hand operating the operation line L is loosened in order to lower the illegal ball Q, the operation line L is not slippery due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. The movement of the hand loosened from is not transmitted to the illegal ball Q. That is, since the fraudulent ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, as a result, fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q can be suppressed.

As described above, as the third fraud prevention means, the operation line nullification member 7000H on the launch rail 544 side is effective at the initial stage of fraud A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line nullification member 7000S on the side exerts its effect, a higher fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

Of course, it is also possible to use either one of the operation line invalidation member 7000H and 7000S alone, and a specific invalidation member of the operation line invalidation member 7000H and the operation line invalidation member 7000S is also implemented. The forms may be exchanged with each other, or the same invalidating member may be adopted.

Further, in addition to the case where the operation line invalidation members 7000H and 7000S are made into separate parts and attached to the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 as in the embodiment, for example, the metal plate constituting the launch rail 544 is appropriately processed to invalidate the operation line. The chemical member 7000H is integrally formed, or the wire is integrally formed on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or the corner of the rail base 1001x is V-grooved as shown in FIG. 8B. The pinching portion 7000Sv may be engraved and the operation line L may be attracted to the depth of the groove of the pinching portion 7000Sv to be pinched.

Furthermore, the operation line invalidation member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line invalidation member 7000 as shown in FIG. 48, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. , 7022, and the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001 may be provided with a guide portion 150k including a first inclined portion 150 ka and a second inclined portion 150 kb.

As described above, with respect to the embodiment in which the second operation line invalidating member 7000 for invalidating the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014, and also the third operation line invalidating member 7000 is fouled. Although the embodiment provided in the ball drop opening 1013 has been described, the present invention is, of course, not limited to the above-described embodiment.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h, that is, at the entrance portion of the connecting passage 150h. The line nullification member 7000 is provided at the exit portion of the connecting passage 150h (see arrow z in FIG. 39), is provided on the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. 38 (a), or outside the foul ball drop port 1013. The operation line L is a portion where the operation line L abuts on a part of the return passage portion 1014 and bends, such as being provided at the start end of the rail 1001 and the end of the launch rail 544, and the operation line L is the weight of the illegal ball Q or the like. It may be provided at any position in the return passage portion 1014, provided that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it tries to be stretched straight by receiving a tension due to a pulling force by an illegal person. The operation line invalidation member 7000 of the embodiment is installed at a position where the player cannot touch even if the player inserts a fingertip through the opening for the ball, and this position is the safety aspect of the player and the operation line invalidation. It is preferable in consideration of the crime prevention aspect that makes it difficult to illegally work on the chemical member 7000 itself.

Further, in the embodiment, the operation line invalidation member 7000 is provided so as to be offset to one side of the connecting passage 150h, but as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the operation line invalidation member 7000 is provided to fill the passage width. The cutting blade may be arranged. In FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the end portion of the bottom wall 150 g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the start end portion of the connecting passage 150h are made into a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is an operator. It is designed not to touch. In this case, the cutting blade of the operation line invalidating member 7000 uses a well-known folding blade structure or a chip structure, which is installed in the sheath-shaped holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and with the unit main body 151. If the loading port 1019 and the discharging port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152, and the cutting blade is pushed out in a tokoroten manner so that the old and new can be replaced, the sharpness can always be maintained. In addition, in FIGS. 44A and 44B, reference numeral 1021 is a pinching secant line portion for the operation line L cut into the valley portion of the safety cover portion 1017, and the operation line L may bite into the pinching secant line portion 1021. It has become like. Therefore, even if the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can bite into the pinching secant line portion 1021 such as the bottom wall 150 g, so that the certainty of fraud prevention is ensured. improves.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate is shown, but there is also a game machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where there is no lower plate). In the case of, the fraudulent act of invading the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached into the game area 5a by using the space communicating from the upper plate ball supply port (opening for the ball) to the game area 5a (the above-mentioned fraudulent act A, There is a risk of fraudulent activity similar to B). In the case of such a game machine, it is exemplified that a second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in the space communicating from the upper plate ball supply port to the game area 5a, as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with one second fraud prevention means, but a plurality of second fraud prevention means may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the above-described embodiment are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (each of the folded portions) has a second such as the above-described embodiment. The fraud prevention means of 2 may be provided. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the deterrent effect of fraudulent activity using the fraudulent ball Q.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with a metal plate as a second fraud prevention means, but a resin molded product having the same configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Alternatively, the molding itself of the foul cover unit 150 may be made into a special shape so as to function as a second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment is not provided, and instead, a taper provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150 g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h. A slit-shaped catching portion is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage portion 1014 so that the operation line L can be captured in the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the shaped guide portion 150k. The operation line L attached to the fraudulent ball Q may be sandwiched by the capturing portion which is the narrowest portion of the guiding portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, the same fraud deterrent effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the fraudulent ball Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidation member 7000, but as a special measure against the above-mentioned fraudulent act A, the figure is shown. In 45, 46, and 49, an illegal ball that prevents the intrusion of the illegal ball Q from the ball opening (prevents the reverse / reverse flow of the illegal ball Q) without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. By providing a reverse movement prevention means, fraud due to the fraudulent ball Q is prevented.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a special tool such as a cell plate (foreign matter) for pushing an illegal ball Q into the course change portion (the portion directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c) of the return passage portion 1014. Not only that, it can be exemplified that the attracting portion 1022 for attracting the fraudulent ball Q itself to another passage and blocking the movement is provided (first fraudulent ball reversal prevention means). As a result, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of regurgitating the fraudulent ball Q such as the fraudulent act A described above without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. In addition, a capture valve that can swing only in the direction in which the backflowing illegal ball Q enters the attracting portion 1022 at the inlet portion of the attracting portion 1022 (allows the intrusion into the attracting portion 1022 and from the attracting portion 1022). A one-sided valve that makes it impossible to leave (not shown) may be provided, whereby traces of using the fraudulent ball Q and evidence of cheating can be left.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, it is exemplified that a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the flow direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the backflow (backflow) of the illegal ball Q. Yes (second illegal ball reverse prevention means). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of regurgitating the fraudulent ball Q such as the above-mentioned fraudulent act A without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. The operation line nullification member 7000D of FIG. 49 is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023.

Further, the static operation line invalidation member and the dynamic operation line invalidation member described above may of course have both.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an operation line invalidation member different from the first operation line invalidation member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014, but such an operation line invalidation member is provided, for example, a foul ball drop port 1013. It may be provided between the launch position and the launch position, or between the foul ball drop port 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 115). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 115).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and the like. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of the flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and the flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof projects downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 54 and the like. FIG. 54A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. It is provided with a handle cover 185 attached to a cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the one end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is viewed clockwise through the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are formed in the three groove portions 181c, respectively. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d that project outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the front view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is dented in the shape and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges round forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 is attached. The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting by the player is detected and the handle 182 or the like of the player is subjected to the static electricity. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 determines. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before the single-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and projecting forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For the ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The entire dish unit 200 bulges forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has a ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5-1. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center on the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes rearward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Guidance passage portion 201a (FIG. 62). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) to play a game. The static electricity charged on the sphere B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction projects forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and opens the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 on the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. A unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball, is provided.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow with the rear open. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is upper on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth below the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view with the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission part 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted. The handle insertion port 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted through the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance / exit 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the plate ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through opening 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through port 213b.

[3-5-3d. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish lower left decorative board 283, the dish lower right decorative board 288, and the operation unit relay board 392. It is for doing. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The rear surface of the dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211 when it is attached to the dish unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 62 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the lent out game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card that was put into the machine.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has transparency, a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the lent game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231 and a front base 231 that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231. It includes a slider 232 and. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removal button 222, and the lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 after the upper plate ball removal. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the rear base 241 in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 attached so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

The rear base 241 projects upward from the portion where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward to the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass. A game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a ball removal taxiway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view from the portion in which the upper plate ball-extracting slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It opens on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. It includes an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end of the spring 243 is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball removal button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball ejection port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is moved through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 and the upper plate ball extraction unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate main body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are respectively formed on the front surface. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut out upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer circumference of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched at a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. A production operation unit formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5-4c. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It includes a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with slits extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball pulling button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removing lid 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removing hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removing lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5-4e. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish upper left reflector 272 that is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is provided with a dish upper left decorative substrate 273 which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plate upper left decorative substrate 273 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the plate upper left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a plate upper right decoration 276, and a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decoration 276. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative substrate 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulge 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of this dish is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the plate upper right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4f. Lower left decoration unit of the plate and lower right decoration unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decorative unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right dish 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right dish 275, respectively. Be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285, in cooperation with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is provided with a dish lower left decorative substrate 283, which is attached to the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view, and is on the left side. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. In the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, a semicircle that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate, and the right end is the lower left decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has translucency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286. It includes a reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 that is attached to the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right and rear at the right end, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the dish is formed in a milky white color.

The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 286 on the lower right of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate seems to have the right end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decorative body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate emits light. The entire front surface of the can be luminescent and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70 and the like. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 68A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the outer circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes an operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5-5a. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the light are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in the shape of a semicircle at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled into the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semicircular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a dish center upper decorative body 312a and a dish center upper decorative body 312a below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is provided. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending the split surface toward the center in a semi-arc shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. In the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the upper surface with light toward the front (outside). Is implemented. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the upper surface with light toward the front (outside). Is implemented. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be luminescently decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semi-arc shape, the dish When the LED of the upper center decorative substrate 314 and the LED of the lower center decorative substrate 316 of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be light-emitting and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the upper left decorative body 312a of the plate is continuous with the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the lower upper decorative body 312b of the plate is the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the right of the plate. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper portion is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. It includes a portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from below, and the portion on the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer circumference of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially matching the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5-5c. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and FIG. 71 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are rotatably attached around the axis extending vertically to the ring mounting base 331 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the 332, and the rotation base 332 that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward. It is provided with a regulating ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is provided with a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates vertically at a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotating base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs forming the outer and upper parts of the ring extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of ring outer upper covers 335 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The decorative portion 335b is provided, and the outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer lower cover 336 of the ring has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower parts in a circle extends in an annular shape, and the outer lower surface portion 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b, which is arranged in a plurality of units. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the outer lower cover 336 of the ring is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming an inner and upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a tubular surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotary base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75 and the like. FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It has 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the spacing between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the operation ring drive motor 342 causes the drive gear 343 to repeatedly rotate forward and reverse within a predetermined rotation angle range, thereby reciprocating and vibrating the rotation operation unit 302. it can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted, and by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, the player's rotation operation Can be loaded. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling according to the content of the player participation type production, or to give a click feeling.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 and the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which the annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and the front decorative substrate 352a formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arc shape on the front side and the semicircle on the rear side. It is composed of a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring forming the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer and lower covers 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be light-emitting decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5 g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds (sounds) such as voice, sound effects, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player feels as if the effect operation unit 300 trembles. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can provide a player with a wider variety of effects.

The vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and gives sound information so that vibration can be obtained by resonance. Here, in resonating, since it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, and the attachment method, sound information of only a specific frequency should be input. In that case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb the variation in these characteristics, the frequency of the input sound information is input as a frequency having a width instead of being a single frequency. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (sweep) in 1 Hz units for each cycle of about 8 times per second. This is intermittently input by sweeping for 1 second, and then input again after 1 second.

In the assembly work of the game machine, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game is operated for the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment. It is designed to be based on. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the power of the game machine is turned on (or when the inspector turns on the power of the game machine while operating the RAM clear switch), the main control board The command 1310 clears the RAM and initializes it is transmitted (output) to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. Upon receiving this command, the peripheral control board performs a vibration speaker operation confirmation process for inspecting (operation confirmation) the vibration speaker. By this vibration speaker operation confirmation process, the inspector can confirm the sound (sound) such as voice and music by the vibration speaker 354, and can also confirm the vibration of the effect operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354. ..

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78 and the like. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. FIG. 78 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 78 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference, and is arranged on a target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363, the upper base 363, and the button unit base 361 are movably attached by a pair of guide shafts 362 in the vertical direction, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted to urge the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370, and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached. The elevating cam member 371 that elevates and elevates the elevating base 364 by rotating, and the elevating drive gear. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 above the elevating base 364. The center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed tubular shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It includes a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button main body 373 and the central button cover 375 form a central pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer circumference of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and moves up and down so as to cover the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 is composed of an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380 to form an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the pressure detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is provided with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 is vertically penetrated in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to elevate in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which projects downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 78). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 is a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. It includes a pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrudes rearward from the bottom 373b and is inserted into the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central port 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaquely formed. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative substrate 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can illuminate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 has an annular substrate portion 378a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364, and a tubular portion 378 that extends upward from the inner circumference of the substrate portion 378a. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 78A, the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position where the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 79 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 78A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. In the state where the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81 (c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 78 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. The cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 78B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the elevating base 364 is restricted from moving further upward. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moving upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position while assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 81 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the center button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. The pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 because it is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the central button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force equal to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 78B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5-5i. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, pressure detection sensor 381, elevating detection sensor 382, and relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 There is.

[3-5-5j. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81 and the like. FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 81A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 81B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 81C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 79, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated to vibrate by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is not only rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342, but can also be rotated by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are separated in the circumferential direction, is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. At the same time, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be made heavy and a click feeling can be given.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lower position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like the steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 80, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302 can be light-emitting and decorated. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressure is detected. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 81 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 81 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 81 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation unit 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be an obstacle to perform the rotation operation. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative substrate 404, and is composed of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Has been done. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc protruding forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

The door frame left side unit 400 has a width in the left-right direction and a depth in the front-rear direction formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and makes it appear that a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414, which is inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415 which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically and the door frame right side base 411 and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flattened in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It includes an inner panel on the right side of the door frame and 417, which extend in a shape and penetrate in the left-right direction to form a through-hole 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It is provided with a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative member 412 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The decorative member 412 in the side window is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion inside the side window is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the decorative member 412 for the side window, and the decorative member 412 for the side window is formed on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame. It is attached to the portion behind the connecting base 412a of. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a through which the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward are formed.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and back and forth, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, the through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative substrate 419, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. Has been done. In the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The decorative body 419 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be decorated by light emission. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (edge of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. Therefore, the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled and the opposite side is radiated. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as an adjacent player to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be looked into, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and the attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 and the like. FIG. 88 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame viewed from the front, FIG. 88 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back, and FIG. 88 (c) shows the top lower cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top bottom plate 454, which is connected to the lower end of the door frame, is attached.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459, which is arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. Cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It includes a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends move downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely notched from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward becomes smaller in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent form so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer surfaces of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91 and the like. FIG. 91 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, plate upper right decorative body 276, plate center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, and the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer circumference of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. Door frame left side unit 400 door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 410 door frame right side decorative body having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the lower center decoration body 312b 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302, the outer circumference. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. FIG. 92 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame, which are attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B inside, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that can be opened and closed on the rear side and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and an outer frame 2 and the main body that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It includes a frame 4 and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and having a single guide passage extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, and a first attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. Between one rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided at the position of.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a gaming ball guided by the one guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 100 and the like. FIG. 99A is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer circumference of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a in which the shape of the front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It is provided with a mounting portion 501c and a game board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the part 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501g and the main frame base 501 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501g. It includes a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i that penetrates back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, and the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extension portion 501j that is rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 100 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. It is located in (see FIG. 100 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 100 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line in contact with the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the above is rotatably attached.

The upper hinge body 510 of the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and regulates the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 101 and the like. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle 182 is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls to the rail ball receiving portion 150c of the lower rail cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the rail cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 102 and the like. FIG. 102A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 102B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the rear. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and has a top plate portion 551a whose front-rear direction extends to the left and right with a substantially constant width, and a top plate portion whose width in the front-rear direction from the front left side of the top plate portion 551a is the top plate portion. The left plate portion 551b having substantially the same width and extending downward long, and the right plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction from the front view right side of the top plate portion 551a extending downward with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a. , The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b are substantially constant to the right. The left side plate portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, the inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side portion 551e of the back plate portion to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and the left side plate portion 551b. A connecting plate portion 551h that connects the bottom plate portion 551g extending from the front portion of the lower side to the right to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. And have. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape. On the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate, a convex portion 551da protruding rearward is formed at a portion separated by a predetermined length from the lower side thereof in the left-right direction.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in an opaque black color, and is formed in the left-right direction to be approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction. In addition, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is molded from a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward to form a single guide passage. Has been done. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the one guide passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface. It has become so. The cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is bent downward from the front side to the rear side (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in an opaque white color, and are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. .. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque white color, and is formed at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555. One end of the rail cover 554 side is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 110). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, thereby forming the inside of the tank rail 553. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque red color, and is slidably attached to the left side in the vicinity of the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding to, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be closed to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged decreases downward from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape with multiple bends. A part of the plurality of bent stepped portions is formed as a substrate accommodating portion 551aa for mounting the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k molded of a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal board 558 has a mounting surface thereof and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, the external terminals XCN1 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side when the payout base unit 550 is viewed from the back). The board is housed so that the payout base 551 is viewed from the front and the mounting surface is perpendicular to the rear of the payout base 551 so that 10 external terminals called XCN10 are exposed.)) It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 is horizontal with the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5) are mounted facing downward. When the payout base 551 is viewed from the front, the payout base 551 is arranged in front of the external terminal plate 558, attached to the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, and covered with the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground substrate 559 is in a state of being accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 housed in the space formed by the board accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

Of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm). On the other hand, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 9.8 mm). In a state where the frame grounding board 559 is housed and mounted inside the board housing part 551aa and the external terminal board 558 is mounted on the rear surface of the board housing part 551aa, the frame grounding board 559 is viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1. Is hidden by the presence of the external terminal board 558 and difficult to see, but among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground board 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 are in a state of protruding from the lower side of the external terminal board 558, and the pachinko machine It can be visually recognized from the back surface of No. 1 (see, for example, FIG. 93). Although the height of the ground terminal ECN3 is as high as 13.4 mm as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the ball rectifying member 556 and is difficult to see. The heights of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are as low as 7 mm as described above, and cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558. It is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame grounding board 559 is for temporarily collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (grounding) to the island equipment of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. 103 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 104 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the guide passage of one of the tank rails 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 includes one payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the one guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and one payout passage 580a branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. It has a passage 580b, and in a normal state, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball removal lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is discharged from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow and is open to the front, and the front side of the guidance unit base 571 is closed. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 110).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so that the movable piece member 573 can move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108 and the like. FIG. 105 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 106 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 106 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the payout device for explaining the rotation position of the payout blade. FIG. 108 is a rear view of a payout device for explaining prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. In addition, in order to explain the rotation position of the payout blade, FIG. 107 is a visible description of a payout gear member and a part of various gears that cannot be seen from the back surface of the payout device, and is the subject of the description. A small circle is attached to the bottom portion of the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. Here, the configuration of the payout device 580 will be described first, and then the rotation position of the payout blade, the prevention of ball clogging, and the prevention of ball dropout will be described.

[4-7-2a. Dispensing device configuration]
The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear. The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing. The payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded in an opaque black color. The rear lid 582 of the dispensing device is made of polycarbonate resin and is transparently molded. Therefore, the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a and the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 can be visually recognized from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent back lid 582 of the payout device.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) that is attached and the spur gear-shaped that is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583 that mesh with the drive gear 585. A spur gear-shaped second gear that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z1: 20) and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. Multiple transmission gears 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20), spur gear-shaped payout gears 588a and payout gears 588a (number of teeth Z3: 24) meshing with the second transmission gear 587, extending outward. The payout gear member 588 which has the detection piece 588b and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the payout gear between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. Detects the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the member 588 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590. The payout motor 584 is step-driven under the control of the payout control board 633. When the payout motor 584 is step-driven, the payout motor 584 steps-rotates the rotation axis at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in the present embodiment) accordingly. That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and are molded in an opaque black color. The payout blade 589 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded into an opaque white color.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded into an opaque white color. The ball pulling lever 593 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque red color.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 105, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the payout detection sensor 591.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view, in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end. A part of the inner wall of the passage forming the payout passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension, and a ball clogging prevention portion 581r is projected in a rib shape toward the ball removal passage 580b at the branching portion. The upper surface of the 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the payout passage 580a are formed in the same plane to form a downwardly inclined surface in the rear view. A detailed description of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r will be described later.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b having an arc shape extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having an arc shape extending concentrically outward from the rotation axis in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrowed between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the game ball B at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a, and is recessed in the outer peripheral portion of the cylindrical shape with an arc. By forming the ball accommodating portions 589b at equal intervals, three blade pieces 589a forming a peak and three ball accommodating portions 589b forming a valley are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 106). In this way, the ball can be pulled out by opening the ball pulling passage 580b using the ball pulling lever 593.

When the ball is pulled out by raising the ball pulling lever 593 to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B is in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592. However, it will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the ball pulling movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball pulling passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 projecting into the ball pulling passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the pulling movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball pulling movable piece 592, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7-2b. Rotation position of payout blade]
As described above, the payout device 580 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585. Number of teeth Z1: 20), spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z2: 20), spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a that meshes with the second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth) It is provided with a payout gear member 588 having Z3: 24) and a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588, and the like. When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted so as to rotate the payout blade 589 via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. Will be done.

Here, the rotation speed of the payout gear member 588 is such that the rotation speed of the payout motor 584 is reduced by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. .. The reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by calculation by mechanics. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor excited by 2-2 phase excitation having a rotation shaft that rotates 18 degrees in one step rotation (the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 20 steps and 360 degrees ( = 18 degrees x 20 steps), the payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, is 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees x reduction ratio n) when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates by one step. It will rotate. As a result, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the payout blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 54 steps), and when one rotation (360 degrees rotation), 4.5. It will rotate extra degrees.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, the payout blade 589 is rotated by 364.5 degrees, so that the payout blade 589 is rotated once (360 degrees). It is necessary to rotate the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 in steps of 53.333 ... (= 360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees), and step drive to the payout motor 584 corresponding to one rotation (360 degree rotation) of the payout blade 589. The number of steps, which is the number of times of, is not an integer.

That is, in the present embodiment, three ball accommodating portions 589b are formed on the payout blade 589 at equal intervals, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is step-driven and rotated by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle. The payout blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 (that is, the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is 1). When the step rotation (rotation by 18 degrees), the payout blade 589 rotates 6.75 degrees), so that the payout blade 589 can send out one game ball B every 120 degree rotation, and payout. In order to rotate the blade 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 in steps of 17.777 ... (= 120 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 18-step rotation, which is an integer rounded up after the decimal point, is set as the number of step drives to the payout motor 584, which is commensurate with the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589. By rotating the 589 over 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees (= 18 steps rotation x 6.75 degrees)), the rotation position of the payout blade 589 to the position where the next game ball B is received. Can be rotated.

Although the payout blade 589 can pay out three game balls B for each rotation (360 degree rotation), only one game ball B may be paid out, for example, tobacco tar or dust. Since the blade rotation detection sensor 590 may erroneously detect the rotation position of the payout blade 589 due to the above, the origin of the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set every time one game ball B is paid out. Is preferable. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is set to 18 steps, which is an integer rounded up to the nearest whole number. The payout blade 589 is rotated over 120 degrees (actually, it is rotated by 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation x 6.75 degrees)), and it is paid out every time one game ball B is paid out. The process of setting the origin of the rotation position of the blade 589 is performed to improve the accuracy of the rotation position of the payout blade 589.

Further, as described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, so that every time one game ball is paid out. Even if the error is accumulated, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, so that one game ball can be played. The accumulated error can be reset each time it is paid out. As a result, even if an error occurs every time one game ball is paid out due to the influence of cigarette tar or dust, the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time one game ball is paid out. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an error to occur in the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game ball.

Further, as described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, so that every time one game ball is paid out. The positioning position is different every time. As a result, the contact positions between the game ball and the payout blade 589 are different each time, so that the positions where tar and dust are attached can be dispersed. Of course, if the reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is By detecting with a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, the cumulative error is reset when it accumulates to some extent. As a result, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is guaranteed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feed rotating portion that accepts and sends out the game ball is changed each time the game ball is discharged to disperse the position where the tar and dust adhere to the sling and dust. On the other hand, it is possible to have a strong payout device 580. As described above, the payout device 580 has one payout passage 580a. Therefore, when the payout speed of the game ball is the same as that of the payout device having the payout blades in the payout passages of Article 2, the payout blades 589 of the payout device 580 having the payout passage 580a of Article 1 in the present embodiment. Needs to rotate twice as fast. Then, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the payout passage 580a of Article 1 in the present embodiment collides with the game ball and the payout blade 589 as compared with the payout device having the payout blades in the payout passages of Article 2. Since the number of times is doubled, there is a high possibility that tobacco tar and dust will adhere to the payout blade 589.

In the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, the payout blade 589 exceeds one rotation as described above. Therefore, one rotation of the payout blade 589 is regarded as 54 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. If the control is performed to determine and manage the set, an angle difference of 4.5 degrees will occur with respect to one rotation of the payout blade 589 every 54 steps of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. For example, 80 sets In the case of, the angle difference is finally accumulated up to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of balls to be paid out of the game ball B is increased by 3.

As described above, the payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120-degree regions having a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. .. As described above, the detection piece 588b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 so that the above-mentioned angle difference does not occur. As a result, one game ball B is set as one management range by setting a 120-degree region having a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed as one management range. It can be managed as an operation to pay out one by one.

Specifically, first, of the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588, the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed. Since it is in a state, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated in 9 steps as a light-shielding range (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps) rotation of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588). Since the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed, the light receiving range is the 9-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. It is managed as (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) rotation of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588).

That is, in the present embodiment, the region of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 is defined as the region of 60 degrees in which the detection piece 588b is formed as a light-shielding range, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated in 9 steps. It is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584, with the region of 60 degrees where the piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range, for the payout of one ball of the game ball B. The rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 18 steps.

When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 9 steps, the payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps), which is a light-shielding range of 60 degrees. Since the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 can rotate slightly larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, the 60 degree region (shading range) where the detection piece 588b is formed and It is possible to reliably discriminate the region (light receiving range) of 60 degrees in which the detection piece 588b is not formed.

Here, a method of setting the origin of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. As shown in FIG. 107A, the payout control board 633 is in a state in which the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 transitions the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 from the cutoff state to the non-cutoff state (“first edge”). The "detection state") is set with the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as point A. At this point A, the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589 restricts the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589.

The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which is obtained by rotating the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the point A, as the origin as shown in FIG. 107 (b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which is obtained by rotating the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 from the origin by 4 steps, as point B. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 is in a state in which the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state (referred to as “second edge detection state”). In the region where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 rotates from the point A to the origin and the point B, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the light receiving range (that is, the above-mentioned payout gear) Of the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the member 588, the 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed).

The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which is obtained by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 9 steps from the point B, as the above-mentioned point A again. At this time, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 at the origin is moved to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. In the region where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 rotates from the point B to the point A, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), a light-shielding range (that is, the above-mentioned payout gear member 588) Of the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the above, the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed).

Here, the control of the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes the payout control side power-on processing at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs). The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the steady-state process when the initial setting process and the interrupt start setting are executed in the payout control side power-on processing. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after the interrupt start setting is set, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processes such as payout motor control process, history creation process, and origin setting process in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process.

The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation with a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the history creation process to confirm whether or not a detection signal is input from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms. The payout control board 633 of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is based on the detection signals from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed this time and the previous time, every 4 ms when the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation is excited and switched. The result of confirming whether the detection piece 588b is in the blocking state or the non-blocking state of the optical axis is checked from the least significant bit to the most significant bit of the history information having an 8-bit width. After bit-shifting toward the bits one by one, if the confirmation results of this time and the previous time are in a state where the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, when the confirmation results of this time and the previous time are both in a state where the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, or when the confirmation results of this time and the previous time are different (for example, this time and the previous time). One of the confirmation results is when the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is a state where the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590. If there is), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

As described above, in the history creation process, the payout control board 633 updates and creates the history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms when the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation is excited and switched. The payout control board 633 executes an origin setting process for setting the rotation position of the payout blade 589 to the origin based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. When the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the payout motor control process to rotate the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A, as described above, Since the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located in the region of 60 degrees where the detection piece 588b described above is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is detected. 588b is in a non-blocking state.

Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having an 8-bit width, the detection piece 588b is the blade rotation detection sensor 590 immediately before the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A. Since the optical axis of the above is changed from the blocked state to the non-blocked state (first edge detection state), 00000001B (“B” indicates bit information. The same shall apply hereinafter) is set. .. Then, when the rotation position of the payout blade 589 advances from the point A to the origin, 00111111B is set in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having an 8-bit width. In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 extracts the data from 8 times before to 5 times before as the calculation result by performing the first mask processing on the history information with the first determination value of 11110000B. Later (here, the calculation result becomes 00110000B by the first mask processing), by further performing the second mask processing of the second determination value of 00010000B on the extracted data, five times before the history information. The data is taken out as the calculation result (here, the calculation result becomes 00010000B by the second mask processing), and when the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotation position of the payout blade 589 is not at the origin, and the payout blade is determined. While the current rotation position of the 589 is not set as the origin, if the value is not 0, it is determined that the current rotation position of the payout blade 589 is at the origin and the current rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set as the origin.

When the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set as the origin in the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the origin. Then, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set to point B, and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at point B (that is, the shading range is exceeded). This process ends as it is in a total of 13 steps of rotation in which the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set to point A again. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the time until the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by a total of 13 steps elapses. An origin detection prohibition time is provided for prohibiting the origin setting for the payout blade 589.

The payout control board 633 excites and switches the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms by executing the payout motor control process. As shown in FIG. 107, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at point A, and the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is the origin. The time is 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the origin, and the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set to B. The time to be a point is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point B (that is, the shading range is set. The time to set the rotation position of the payout blade 589 (which is within the light receiving range again) to point A again is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 step rotation). As described above, the payout of one ball of the game ball B is performed by 18-step rotation of the rotation axis of the payout motor 584. Therefore, the time required for paying out one ball of the game ball B is paid out. By rotating the rotation shaft of the motor 584 in 18 steps, it becomes 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18 steps).

Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a number of game balls corresponding to the amount of rotation of a payout rotating body that receives and sends out game balls by driving a payout motor has been proposed (for example, special feature). Kai 2004-041261 (paragraph [0052], and FIG. 4)). In the game machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by the output of the data drive data for four steps to pay out one game ball. ing. In pachinko machines installed in pachinko parlors, it is inevitable that cigarette tar and dust adhering to the game balls will adhere to the inside of the payout device. Further, since the dispensing device is not disassembled and cleaned, a dispensing device that is strong against tobacco tar and dust is required. By the way, in the game machine of this document, since the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by driving four steps of the payout motor and pay out one game ball, accurate operation can be expected, but the game It can be seen that the contact position between the sphere and the payout rotating body is the same every time. For this reason, there is a problem that the position where tobacco tar and dust adhere is fixed and easily deposited.

[4-7-2c. Ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention]
Next, prevention of ball clogging and prevention of ball omission will be described with reference to FIG. 108. Here, the prevention of ball clogging at the time of ball removal will be described first, and then the prevention of ball removal due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described.

As described above, the ball pulling lever 593 can be positioned at the rising end so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 can rotate to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened. You can do it. When the ball is pulled out, the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable. At this time, in a state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), a part of the passage inner wall forming the payout passage 580a from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. A total of four game balls B are parked up to the rib-shaped ball clogging prevention portion 581r, which has a predetermined distance dimension and projects toward the ball removal passage 580b. As for this predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B anchored on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and is on the downstream side (that is, the payout blade 589 exists). It has a length located on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a). As a result, a rib-shaped ball clogging prevention portion in which a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the payout passage 580a is projected from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 toward the ball ejection passage 580b having a predetermined distance dimension. When a plurality of game balls B are stopped in the payout passage 580a up to 581r, a part of the last game ball B to be stopped is in a state of protruding toward the ball removal passage 580b in the ball clogging prevention unit 581r. That is, the predetermined distance dimension is formed so as to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. The game ball B flowing down along the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a described above collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. Even so, the length is such that it can flow down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. In this way, a part of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stays on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r in a state of protruding toward the ball removal passage 580b (in other words, ball clogging prevention). The width of the ball-extracting passage 580b is restricted to the width at which one game ball B can flow down (depending on the length of a part of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the portion 581r protruding toward the ball-extracting passage 580b). You can do it.

Further, as described above, the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is formed so that the upper surface thereof and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the payout passage 580a are formed in the same plane so as to be a downwardly inclined surface in the rear view.

That is, when the ball is pulled out while the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the game ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a. However, even if the ball collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is a downwardly inclined surface in the rear view. The center (center of gravity) of the game ball B (that is, the rearmost game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is located on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and on the downstream side. It is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r from popping due to a collision and flowing down toward the ball removal passage 580b. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a from causing ball clogging in the vicinity of the left end of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r.

As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is passed along the ball removal path (main body side guide wall 581a and rear lid side guide wall 582a). The flow path of the game ball B on the side) is restricted to the width at which one game ball B can flow down as the width of the ball removal passage 580b as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 108 (a). This makes it possible to prevent ball clogging. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent ball clogging when the ball is pulled out. In the present embodiment, the width of the ball ejection passage 580b is set to be from the minimum width: 12 mm to the maximum width: 14 mm, although it varies depending on the rotation position of the payout blade 589, and the rotation of the payout blade 589. The position is set to 13 mm when the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging is likely to occur in a place where the width of various passages is narrowed from a place wider than twice the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) to a little narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball (for example, 21 mm).

Next, prevention of ball dropout due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described. In a state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. At the same time, the game ball B is connected to the game ball B in a state where the subsequent game ball B is in contact with the game ball B and is stopped in the payout passage 580a. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end toward the bottom, and slightly to the right from there. After bending diagonally downward, it bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589.

Therefore, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B in contact with the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is the center of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 (the center of gravity). The position is slightly shifted to the left side of the position (center of gravity), and in a state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is followed. Due to the ball pressure due to the weight of the game ball B, a rightward force (that is, a force rotating clockwise) acts on the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589.

In such a state, when the payout motor 584 is de-energized, it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589, and is housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. The game ball B will flow down (delivered) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and the ball will come off.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the payout motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is the payout blade 589 even if it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the payout van 589. The shape of the payout passage 580a on the right side of the payout blade 589 is formed in the rear view so that it can be stopped by rotating 6 steps from the origin.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 108 (c), when the payout motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stops. The outer circumference of the blade piece 589a having an arc shape of the payout blade 589 and the S1 point where the game ball B abutting on the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 abuts on the side wall of the payout passage 580a. Of the surface, the ball accommodating portion 589b in which the game ball B is accommodated is closer to the side (that is, the ball accommodating portion 589b in which the game ball B is accommodated, and the ball accommodating portion 589b and the subsequent game ball B are not accommodated. Of the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a connecting the portion 589b, the S2 point that abuts on the ball accommodating portion 589b side where the game ball B is accommodated from the center of the outer peripheral surface is leaned against each other. The shape of the payout passage 580a is formed. As a result, a ball pressure can be generated to press the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 can be stopped by rotating 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from coming off due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

When the payout control board 633 starts controlling the payout motor 584 in a state where the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stops, it rotates 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. Therefore, it is in a state of being rotated by 2 steps in the shading range (9 steps) beyond the point B which is rotated by 4 steps from the origin and advanced as shown in FIG. 107 (d). However, when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates in 13 steps (the remaining 7 steps rotate + 5 steps from point A because it rotates 2 steps out of 9 steps shown in FIG. 107 (d)), the payout blade 589 rotates. The game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 flows down (delivered) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and is reliably detected by the payout detection sensor 591. ing. Therefore, even when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is deviated from the origin of the payout blade 589 (rotates by 6 steps and advances) and stops, the number of balls to which the game ball B is paid out does not become excessive.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the payout control board 633 can be used for pressing the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200, or for a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. In response to this, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202), so that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or has a power failure. At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs momentarily), the payout motor 584 is first controlled so as not to return the rotation position of the payout blade 589 to the origin. This causes an excessive number of balls to be paid out by the game ball B in a state where the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is deviated from the origin of the payout blade 589 (rotates by 6 steps and advances) and is stopped. This is to prevent this.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downwardly discharged from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e, which is open downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 110).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are respectively upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 110. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

A predetermined number of ball tanks 552 opened upward are detected by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. Is discharged from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 into the upper plate 201.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the lowering end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball pulling movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball pulling movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 111 to 115 and the like. FIG. 111A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 111B is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from below. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 115 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a is directed forward by the speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622 and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It includes an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it steps backward in a stepped manner. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. In this enclosure 624, since the front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, a large sound with deep bass can be output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through-hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates back and forth is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and. The power supply board cover 631 is shaped with a transparent synthetic resin so that the power supply board 630 can be visually observed through the power supply board cover 631 without removing the power supply board cover 631 from the rear base 626. There is. The island facility in the game hall has a transformer (not shown), which steps down the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 volt (AC100 V) to the AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supply voltage for the game machine. AC24V, which is stepped down in the island equipment of the game hall, is supplied to the power supply board 630 via a power cord (not shown). The power supply board 630 creates various power sources (various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from AC24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall and supplies them to various boards. Further, although the power supply board 630 originally has to be supplied with a power supply voltage for a game machine of AC24V, there is a possibility that a commercial power supply voltage of AC100V is supplied and destroyed due to an erroneous connection of a power cord (not shown). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the power supply unit 620c can be replaced by using a Phillips screwdriver which is a general tool (note that the power supply unit 620c is fastened without using a general tool such as a Phillips screwdriver. It can also be configured so that the tool can be manually operated and attached / detached).

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. (See 115) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202).

The payout control board box 632 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The payout control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are transparently molded from the polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the payout control board 633 (whether or not illegal modification has been performed, or an illegal IC is mounted. Whether or not it is done) can be confirmed from the outside of the payout control board box 632. Further, the payout control board box 632 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. When the payout control board box 632 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the payout control board box 632 is then paid out. In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the payout control board box 632. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect the illegal opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrent force against the illegal act on the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 that is attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and around the axis extending vertically, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600. When the left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600, it is formed on the upper side of the back cover 640.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the contact portion 640a which is lowered one step forward is formed on the upper side. In the state of being assembled to the frame 4, the rear surface is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same surface as the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 (the rear surface of the convex portion 551da formed on the back plate upper portion 551d described above). There is. Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a is in contact with the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate of the payout base 551, and the contact portion is in contact with the rear surface. , It is covered with a convex portion 551da formed so as to project from the upper portion 551d of the back plate.

The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically, except for the contact portion 640a. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units 651 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the state where the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 projects forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 124. FIG. 117 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 117 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 118 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the main body frame in a perspective view viewed from the rear. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on the ball tank, and FIG. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 119 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 124 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 553, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It has.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left side of the front view. Further, in the plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side, and then moves to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. ..

In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left-right direction with respect to the bottom surface of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a and the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a in the front view at the portion where the upper side is closed (in this embodiment, about Three rectangular notch portions 553aa having (30 mm) are formed with a predetermined interval (about 10 mm in this embodiment). Due to the rectangular notch 553aa, the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a is added with the thickness of the rear wall (about 2.5 mm in this embodiment) from the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a to the front, and is about 7 mm. A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate of the main guide portion 553a upward from the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a (in the present embodiment). , About 2.5 mm) is added to form a rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction, and these rectangular holes are formed in communication with each other.

In the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 into the tank rail 553, the metal powder is peeled off from the game ball B and falls due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adheres to the main guide portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is obstructed, so that the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B to the payout device 580, and the payout of the game ball B is stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B naturally falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa, so that the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the main guide portion 553a due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. As a result, the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a, and a cotton rod is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall, which is caused by wear of the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a. By performing the work of removing the metal powder, the metal powder can be removed from the main induction portion 553a.

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions are aligned in the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball shavings) can be less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball gummy) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 can be visually recognized. When a movable defect occurs in various production units, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, and belt can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the above-mentioned phase It can produce the same effect as the effect.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to be the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because it is tilted so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is lowered in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball and is on the bottom surface. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the discharge portion 551j. It covers the upper side of an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. It is provided with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501 m, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. On both outer sides of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o in the left-right direction, the upper ends are higher than the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o and extend in a strip-like shape in the front-rear direction, and the outside of the game ball B in the left-right direction. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the two is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. Regarding the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so as to move forward toward the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end from the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552 g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide part of the tank rail.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552 g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the front left portion of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that goes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552 g The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in the front view from a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in a plan view. The enclosed area has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outward and vertically on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552 g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located behind (protruding) the ball tank 552. )doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be stepped backward from a height lower than the detour passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a state of being assembled in the main body frame 4. After extending backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 553 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 121. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side thereof is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to the supply from the island facility, first of all, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest of the uppermost edges of the outer circumference, is exceeded. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and can be discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by inclining the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 122). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shavings) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 123, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m beyond the overflow portion 552 f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the detour passage 552 g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h in which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and being bitten by the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since the game balls are changed so as to coincide with each other, as the plurality of game balls B move toward the downstream side in the bulge portion 553b, they can be aligned so as to be aligned with respect to the width direction. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 122) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 122, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, causing a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) of the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

Further, while the ball tank 552 is molded from a conductive resin, the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later are molded from a non-conductive resin. In the present embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the tank rail 553 has the same polarity as the peripheral control board box. It repels and is not drawn to the peripheral control board box.

[4-12. Composition of metal powder measures]
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via a plurality of notch portions 553a formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Can be avoided, the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view cut along the line CC of FIG. 117 (a), and is a schematic view of the configuration of measures against metal powder. In FIG. 125, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the portion of the game board 5 necessary for explanation is shown as a cross-sectional view.

When metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the cutouts 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble may occur and the peripheral control unit 1500 may malfunction or malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with an IC such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM described later, and the peripheral data ROM board described later is provided with an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin spacing of these ICs becomes smaller, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 becomes narrower, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 increases, so that the spacing of various connectors becomes narrower. As a result, the distance between the connector and the special connector is narrowed, so it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

First, as shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, the deviation toward the rear (in this embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). It is arranged so that it is offset by the distance dimension of.

As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 on which the tank rail 551 is arranged is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape that bends downward in accordance with the direction). The upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are substantially on the same surface. It is designed to be placed. Further, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The contacted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate.

As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553a is received and adhered by the top plate portion 551a, or is received and adhered by the convex portion 551da. You can do it. Further, the contacted portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 are in surface contact is projected rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. Since it is covered by the convex portion 551da formed, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553a abuts on the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. To prevent the peripheral control unit 1500 from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It has become.

In this way, the top plate portion 551a and the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 are made of metal of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Prevents powder from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves that can be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600 (rear side) is misaligned (in the present embodiment, the distance dimension is about half the diameter of the game ball B). Due to the arrangement (that is, the structure is such that the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly under the notch 553aa), electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553. It is effective as a measure against metal powder that can prevent.

Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, whereas the upper side and the left side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later). Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, the metal powder of the game ball B temporarily adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). However, it is possible to make it difficult to invade the inside of the cover body 1501.

Further, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed with a square-shaped FAN mounting recess described later having a square shape for mounting the air-cooled fan FAN on the central side thereof, and is formed on a plurality of concentric circles on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are formed along the line. Further, the cover body 1501 has seven connector holes, which will be described later, provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 along the lower side thereof, and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume control switch. The volume control holes are formed respectively, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501. The volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. Further, in a state where the liquid crystal output board described later is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed from these two connector holes.

When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to control the peripherals. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 allow air from the outside of the unit 1500 to pass through. , The gaps formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501), the volume adjustment switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the cover. Through the volume control hole formed in the body 1501, the gap formed in, the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board, and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501). , Will be taken in.

The sum of the areas (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess of the cover body 1501 is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and the above-mentioned. Gap (seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510, seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501), a gap formed in the gap, a volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and formed in the cover body 1501. From the sum of the volume adjustment hole, the gap formed in, the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board, the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, and the area in the gap formed in). It's getting smaller. Therefore, when the wing portion of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. , A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small when the air is taken in. As a result, it is possible to prevent heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B from invading the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the ventilation hole 1501az under the influence of the air flow.

Incidentally, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, this rotation causes the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 to be sucked toward the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the wings. Since the air flow velocity increases due to the rotation of the wings of the game ball B, it is highly probable that heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B will be sucked into the inner space of the cover body 1501 due to the influence of the air flow. Due to electrical troubles (short circuits) caused by metal powder, defects (failures) occur in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 mounted inside the cover body 1501 and various electronic parts provided in various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Become.

Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protruding portion along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, a heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is air-cooled. The game ball can be configured to have a function as an eaves to prevent being sucked into the fan FAN, and by forming a protruding portion along the vicinity of the upper side of the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501. It can be configured to have a function as an eaves to prevent heavy powder called metal powder of B from being sucked into the air-cooled fan FAN, and the air-cooled fan FAN has a thin distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction. (That is, the air-cooled fan FAN having a distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction that is shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the FAN mounting recess) is selected and formed on the cover body 1501. When the air-cooled fan FAN is housed in the FAN mounting recess, the inner wall of the FAN mounting recess has a function as a shelter to prevent heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B from being sucked into the air-cooled fan FAN. can do. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

Next, another configuration of the present invention in which a metal powder countermeasure is taken that an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B can be avoided (hereinafter, "metal powder countermeasure according to the second to fifth embodiments"). (Structure) will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 is a configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment. FIG. 127 is a configuration of a metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment. FIG. 128 is a configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 126 to 129, the same reference numerals are given to the members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (hereinafter, referred to as “the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the first embodiment”). The outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the portion of the game board 5 necessary for explanation is shown as a cross-sectional view.

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 551 is arranged in the front-rear direction is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above. The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in accordance with (from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion 551d of the back plate are arranged. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same surface.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 353 is arranged is in front of the top plate portion 551a. Although a plurality of steps are formed in which the top plate portion 551a is bent downward from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and is directed upward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged above the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553. The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 are arranged on substantially the same surface. The rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 arranged on substantially the same surface as the tank rail 553 is formed by branching from a portion to which the effect display device 1600 is attached and extending rearward.

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. It is in a state of contact with the mounting recess 3010da formed in the above surface, and the contacted portion is covered with an upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 551 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 and the tank rail is arranged. While the rear surface of the 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. In a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back box in the back unit 3000. It differs from the rear surface 3010d of 3010 in that it is arranged on substantially the same surface. Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 when the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. The difference is that the contact portion is in contact with the surface of 3010 da, and the contacted portion is covered by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010 da.

Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portions 553a formed in the main guide portion 553a is received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It is designed to be able to adhere. Further, the contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting recess 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in surface contact is formed by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. Since it is covered, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553a abuts on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (back unit 3000). It is designed so that it cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010.

As described above, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 fell from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notches 553a formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder of the game ball B is directed toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eave that can prevent it from falling. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the second embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa is located behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, in order to improve the cooling effect, it is desirable that the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later).

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 551 is arranged in the front-rear direction is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above. The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in accordance with (from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion 551d of the back plate are arranged. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same surface.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 353 is arranged is in front of the top plate portion 551a. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in the direction from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the upper part of the back plate 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is closer to the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to project below the notch portion 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a are in contact with the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged in the above. Are arranged on the same surface.

As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 551 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 and the tank rail is arranged. While the rear surface of the 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate are arranged on substantially the same surface, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. , The bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 are substantially on the same surface. It differs in that it is placed in. Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed by projecting rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is bent so as to be arranged below the tank rail 553. The top surface of the top plate 551a is in contact with the end surface of the top plate 551a, and the upper surface of the bent top plate 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a are arranged on the same surface. It differs in that it is done.

Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portions 553a formed in the main guide portion 553a is the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553. And on the upper surface of the contact portion 640a of the back cover 640, it can be received and adhered. Further, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other. As a result, since a gap is not formed, the game panel of the game board 5 is exposed to the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It has become like.

In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder may fall toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves that can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

The front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other. As a result, no gap is formed, but the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is in close contact with the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553. The back cover 640 also has a positional relationship in which the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 is closely submerged under the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640. Since no gap is formed between the contact portion 640a to be formed and the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 in close contact with each other, the main guide portion is provided through the notch portion 553aa. From the close portion of the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from 553a to the outside, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (after the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It is designed so that it cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the side).

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa is located behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, in order to improve the cooling effect, it is desirable that the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later).

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 551 is arranged in the front-rear direction is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above. The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in accordance with (from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion 551d of the back plate are arranged. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same surface.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 353 is arranged is in front of the top plate portion 551a. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in the direction from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the upper part of the back plate 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is directed from the rear surface to the rear of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to project by a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-third of the diameter of the game ball B).

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. On the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged in the above, the convex portion 551ab formed by projecting downward is in contact with the convex portion 551ab, and the contacted portion is in contact with the tank rail 553. It is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a, which is arranged below.

As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 551 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 and the tank rail is arranged. While the rear surface of the 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate are arranged on substantially the same surface, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. The point that the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to project slightly rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. Is different. Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is arranged below the tank rail 553 and is bent. On the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a, the convex portion 551ab formed so as to project downward is in contact with the convex portion 551ab, and the contacted portion is arranged below the tank rail 553. The difference is that it is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a.

Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portions 553a formed in the main guide portion 553a is a bent top plate portion arranged below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached at 551a. Further, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640, and the convex portion 551ab formed below the tank rail 553 and projected downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a. Since the contacted portion where the surface contacts is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553, the contact portion falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. Attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B abuts. It is designed so that it cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). As well as functioning as an eaves that can prevent the above, it also functions as a saucer for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a that functions as an eaves arranged below the tank rail 553 is used as a separate member (another structural component) of the top plate portion 551a. It can also be configured to be mounted on.

Further, when the top plate portion 551a is a separate member (another structural component), it may be a mechanism that can be detached or moved from the mounting position and returned to the mounting position for the purpose of removing the attached metal powder. In this case, by making the top plate portion 551a a different color from the surrounding members, it is possible to clarify the mechanism portion that can be detached or moved from the mounting position and returned to the mounting position, improving the ease of work of removing the adhering metal powder. Let me.

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the fourth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa is located behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, in order to improve the cooling effect, it is desirable that the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later).

[Comparison between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 551 is arranged in the front-rear direction is directed from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a as described above. The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward in accordance with (from the front to the rear), and the back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged. And are arranged on substantially the same surface.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is in front of the top plate portion 551a. Although a plurality of steps are formed in which the top plate portion 551a is bent downward from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and is directed downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to project downward with respect to the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a.

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the contact portion formed by greatly bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4. The front surface of the 640a is arranged parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a arranged so as to project downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. It is in contact.

Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is a gutter-shaped main guide. It is in a state of being in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a, which is arranged parallel to the front wall of the portion 553a and is arranged so as to project downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. The contacted portions are arranged so as to be largely displaced forward from the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

As described above, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 551 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553 and the tank rail is arranged. While the rear surface of the 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate are arranged on substantially the same surface, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. , The bent top plate portion 551a is not arranged below the tank rail 553, and the upper side of the back cover 640 is greatly bent forward in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4. The difference is that the portion 640a is arranged. Further, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The contacted portion is in contact with the rear surface, and the contacted portion is covered with the convex portion 551da formed so as to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate. In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4 is the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a. It is in a state of being in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged in parallel and is arranged so as to project downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a, and this contacted portion is the main. The difference is that they are arranged with a large deviation in front of the notch portions 553aa formed in the guide portion 553a.

Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portions 553a formed in the main guide portion 553a is the upper side of the back cover 640 arranged below the tank rail 553. The side can be received and adhered on the upper surface of the contact portion 640a formed by being greatly bent toward the front. Further, it is arranged parallel to the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a, and is arranged so as to project downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. The contacted portions that come into surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a are arranged so as to be largely displaced forward from the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, and are in contact with each other, so that there is a gap. Is not formed. Therefore, from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the notch portion 553a abuts, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000). It is designed so that it cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the 3010.

In this way, the abutting portion 640a formed by the upper side of the back cover 640 being largely bent forward is provided from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via a plurality of notched portions 553a formed in the main guiding portion 553a. The metal powder of the dropped game ball B is attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eave that can prevent it from falling toward it, and also functions as a saucer for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures according to the fifth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa is located behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, in order to improve the cooling effect, it is desirable that the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later).

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including a tank rail for guiding a game ball from a ball tank to the downstream side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). The tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter that falls from the holes provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board placed below the tank rail, electrical troubles may occur and the control board may malfunction or malfunction. It was. In recent control boards, as the number of control targets increases, the pin spacing of the connectors becomes narrower, and as the number of connectors increases, the connector spacing becomes narrower, and the IC pin spacing becomes smaller. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 to 137. FIG. 130 is a front view of a game board in which the game panel is opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 130 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board in a state where the game panel is transparent. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the game panel is made opaque to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nails. FIG. 137 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the attacker unit on the game board.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. The purpose is to perform a game that enjoys the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 136) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. Further, the game board 5 is a game performed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 115, 185, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 141 and the like), which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 includes a panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and various sensors provided on the game board 5, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510. A panel drive board 1720 for driving a decorative board and a drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 for accommodating a panel relay board 1710 and a panel drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 on the left side in the rear view, and is detachably attached to the rear surface in the effect display device 1600 on the right side in the rear view.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002, and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200. It is attached to the side slope 2300 and the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. It is attached to the attacker unit 2400, which is above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a frame-like shape having a gate portion 2003. It includes a center accessory 2500 and a front effect unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the frame of the center accessory 2500.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the attacker unit 2400, and a second that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. It includes a start opening sensor 2402 and a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005. Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a game received in the first starting port 2002. It includes a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the sphere B and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 (see FIG. 185).

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back lower effect unit 3100 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and a back upper effect unit 3200 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back right effect unit 3400 attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided. ..

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 to 142. FIG. 138 is a front view of the front component and the game panel in the game board, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the front component and the game panel disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the front component and the game panel disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only with an open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch of the panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the panel plate 1110 and the like of the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. That is, through the front component 1000, the portion overlapping the decorative pattern 1150, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 144).

Further, the front component 1000 is provided with a columnar boss portion 1020 projecting forward at four corners on the front surface. These four boss portions 1020 are for positioning the front constituent members 1000 in a stacked state to prevent the load from shifting when only the plurality of front constituent members 1000 are transported.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 138 to 145 and the like. FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the game panel shown with the board cover removed, and FIG. 143 (b) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the lower panel decorative board in (a). FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative pattern of the game panel and the front component and the front unit. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing the relationship between the decorative pattern on the game panel and the obstacle nail.

The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

Further, the game panel 1100 includes a panel decorative substrate 1130 on which a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are mounted, and a substrate on which the panel decorative substrate 1130 is attached to the panel holder 1120. It is equipped with a cover 1135. The panel decorative substrate 1130 is composed of an upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and a lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view. The board cover 1135 is composed of an upper left board cover 1136 for attaching the upper left panel decorative board 1131 to the panel holder 1120 and a lower left board cover 1137 for attaching the lower left panel decorative board 1132 to the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and rear, and the upper edge and the lower edge are separated from each other in the left-right direction, so that the plate thickness is thin. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions 1114 and the like. The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion 1114 is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw 1125 or the engaging piece 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

In the panel plate 1110, as shown in FIG. 143 (a) and the like, a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset to the upper right of the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The width is wide so that the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side and the right side are narrow widths where a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel plate 1110 is provided with a decorative pattern 1150 formed by a plurality of linear grooves on the rear surface. The decorative pattern 1150 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of horizontal lines extending horizontally at regular intervals, a plurality of upper right diagonal lines rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise at the same intervals as the plurality of horizontal lines, and horizontal lines and upper right diagonal lines. It is a geometric pattern composed of a plurality of upper left diagonal lines rotated 60 degrees clockwise at the same intervals as a plurality of horizontal lines passing through the intersection with. In other words, the decorative pattern 1150 is a geometric pattern in which a plurality of equilateral triangle contours formed by a horizontal line, an upper right diagonal line, and an upper left diagonal line are arranged in a constant pattern. This decorative pattern 1150 has two equilateral triangle contour parts on the left and right sides of the first starting port 2002 and three equilateral triangle contour parts near the upper end of the inner rail 1002 when assembled on the game board 5. Inside each of the above, a pattern consisting of the outlines of two equilateral triangles of different sizes is further provided.

Further, the decorative pattern 1150 formed by the plurality of linear grooves is formed in a V shape having an acute angle in cross section. In this decorative pattern 1150, even in a state where various LEDs mounted on the game panel 1100 are not lit (including a state in which the power of the game machine 1 is not turned on), the presence of a linear groove is present in the game in front of the game. It is formed at a depth exceeding a predetermined depth (1 mm in this embodiment) so that it can be visually recognized from the human side, and the contour of an equilateral triangle is formed by a combination of a plurality of linear grooves having different traveling directions. The inside of the game area 5a is decorated by making the geometric pattern made of the above identifiable from the front player side. Further, when the panel plate 1110 emits light from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and light is incident on the inside (side surface) of the panel plate 1110, a geometric pattern consisting of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles is formed. Light is reflected by the plurality of linear grooves (light is reflected by the surface portion forming an acute angle), and the decorative pattern 1150 can be light-emitting and decorated. Further, in this decorative pattern 1150, even when the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 is not emitted, other light emitted behind the panel plate 1110 is emitted from the rear of the linear groove or diagonally from the rear. When incident, light is reflected by the multiple linear grooves that make up the geometric pattern consisting of the contours of multiple equilateral triangles (light is reflected by the acute-angled surface), and it corresponds to the amount of light entering. The decorative pattern 1150 can be light-emitting-decorated in an aspect (emission density, reflection density or brightness). Even if other light emitted behind the panel plate 1110 is incident from behind the linear groove or diagonally behind, if the amount of light entering is extremely small, the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 is used by the player. It becomes difficult to recognize.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a back upper left movable decoration body 3310, a back left lower movable decoration body 3320, a back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and a back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are provided behind the panel plate 1110. Further, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is provided with the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a on which the LED 3311aa is mounted, and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 is provided with the back left lower front decorative substrate 3321a on which the LED 3321aa is mounted. The body 3410 is provided with a back upper right front stage decorative substrate 3411a on which the LED 3411aa is mounted, and the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 is provided with a back right lower front stage decorative substrate 3421a on which the LED 3421aa is mounted.

Then, when the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, 3421aa provided on the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are emitted, the light is emitted. Light is incident on linear grooves located in front or diagonally forward, and light is reflected by multiple linear grooves that form a geometric pattern consisting of the contours of multiple equilateral triangles (at acute-angled surfaces). Light is reflected), and if the amount of incoming light is such that the player can recognize the luminescent decoration of the decorative pattern 1150, the decorative pattern 1150 is luminescently decorated in an manner corresponding to the amount of incoming light. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LEDs 3311aa provided on each of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 behind the panel plate 1110. , 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa are provided at positions suitable for luminescent decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110, so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be luminescently decorated by emitting light with an amount of light exceeding a specific brightness. It has become.

The positions where light emitting means such as LEDs provided behind the panel plate 1110 and capable of emitting and decorating the decorative pattern 1150 are provided, the distance from the panel plate 1110 (distance from the back surface of the panel plate 1110), and the like are as described above. It is not limited to the above, and may be appropriately determined according to the brightness of the light emitting means, the distance from the groove of the decorative pattern 1150, and the like. That is, if the brightness of the light emitting means is too high, the light emission of the light emitting means becomes conspicuous and the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, the brightness of the light emitting means and the panel plate 1110 have a proportional positional relationship (the higher the light emitting intensity, the more the panel plate). The distance from the back of 1110 becomes far). If you want the player to notice the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150, make the light emitting means emit light with a light amount that does not exceed a specific brightness, and if you do not want the player to notice the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150. The light emitting means may be made to emit light with an amount of light exceeding a specific brightness to make the light emitting means stand out.

The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 has a radiation portion 1151 that mainly reflects the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside and the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside. It is composed of a radiation light guide unit 1152 that reflects and guides light along a line. The radiating light guide unit 1152 satisfies at least one of a deeper groove depth and a longer peripheral length in cross section as compared with the radiating unit 1151. The radiation light guide unit 1152 is formed so as to connect (or intersect) a plurality of radiation units 1151, and diffusely reflects the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside in the panel plate 1110. , Can guide light in the direction of the groove extension. That is, the radiating light guide unit 1152 plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiating units 1151 connected by itself to the other, whereby the arrangement portion and the number of arrangements of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be increased. Within the limited range, the photosensitivity (ratio of the amount of light radiated (reflected) forward) of the entire decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is increased. Specifically, as shown by the two-point chain line in FIG. 143 (a), the radiating light guide unit 1152 is normally derived from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132. Light is guided to the radiating portion 1151 arranged outside the range of the light region 1103, the radiating portion 1151 is made to emit light, and the photosensitivity of the entire decorative pattern 1150 is increased.

As a result, the radiation light guide portion 1152 has more radiation than the radiation portion 1151 of the decoration pattern 1150 formed in the portion where the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is difficult to reach (the portion outside the normal light guide region 1103). It is possible to allow light to reach and decorate the emitting unit 1151 with a sufficient amount of light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is made to emit light, the light incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152, and from the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles. The decorative pattern 1150 formed in the pattern of the geometric pattern can be radiated and decorated with uniform brightness over substantially the entire area.

In the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. The plurality of obstacle nails N have a specific obstacle nail N1 that has an important role in the game. As shown in FIG. 145, the specific obstacle nail N1 is arranged near the warp entrance 2501, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the gate portion 2003. If the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or bent due to contact with the game ball B, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the warp entrance 2501 or the general winning opening 2001 changes, so that the game hall side It is a target for constant maintenance so that there is no distortion.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, the decoration prohibited area 1104 is set within a predetermined range (for example, a radius of 1.5 mm to 3 mm) centered on the specific obstacle nail N1, and the decoration pattern 1150 is within the range. The radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152 are not formed. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily seen, and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted. Further, since the groove of the radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152 is not formed in the decoration prohibited area 1104 around the specific obstacle nail N1, it is specified in order to adjust the specific obstacle nail N1 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the obstacle nail N1 is hit, the force is transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152, and it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1110 from cracking or cracking.

Further, among the obstacle nails N excluding the specific obstacle nail N1, the obstacle nail N planted at the portion overlapping with the decorative pattern 1150 is not shown, but the tip planted on the panel plate 1110. However, it protrudes inside the groove constituting the decorative pattern 1150. Therefore, when the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 is made to emit light and the light is incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110, the light is irradiated from the groove of the decorative pattern 1150 to the tip of the obstacle nail N protruding inside the groove. Then, the light is reflected by the inclined tip of the obstacle nail N, and the tip of the obstacle nail N can be made to shine. As a result, the obstacle nail N can be made to shine, and the player can be shown a light emitting effect that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. In the game area 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 may be intentionally overlapped with the obstacle nail N planted in a special portion, whereby the decorative pattern 1150 may be combined with the light emitting decoration. The obstacle nail N in a special part can be made to shine, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the obstacle nail N in a special part, and the game ball B aimed at the special obstacle nail N can be driven. The operation can be performed.

In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 composed of linear grooves is formed by cutting the panel plate 1110. Further, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed before the formation of the planting hole for planting the obstacle nail N. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cutting debris discharged from the formation of the decorative pattern 1150 from clogging the planting hole, and the obstacle nail N can be planted in a good condition.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in the present embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1123 which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion 1123 having substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a penetrating through port 1121.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion 1123 and the plurality of protruding pins 1124 which are projected forward from the holding step portion 1123 and are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws 1125 that elastically engage with the engaging step portion 1114 of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion 1123. It includes a pair of engaging pieces 1126 that engage with the two engaging steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110, respectively. In the panel holder 1120, the engaging step portion 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 is engaged with the engaging piece 1126 from diagonally above the front, and then the upper part of the panel plate 1110 is moved rearward to move the upper part and the lower left side. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion 1114 of the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion 1123. At this time, the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 has two board mounting recesses 1127 that are recessed from the front to the rear in the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the front view outside the holding step portion 1123, and the rear side of the respective board mounting recesses 1127. It is provided with two connector recesses 1128, which are recessed from the front to the front. The upper left board cover 1136 to which the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is attached and the lower left board cover 1137 to which the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is attached are attached to the two board mounting recesses 1127 from the front, respectively. The upper board mounting recess 1127 is located behind the function display unit 1400. Further, the lower substrate mounting recess 1127 is located behind the certificate stamp affixing portion 1012 in the front component 1000. The lower substrate mounting recess 1127 has an engaging claw 1125 that engages with the engaging step 1114 at the lower left diagonal portion of the panel plate 1110 protruding from the boundary side with the holding step 1123.

In the connector recess 1128 of the panel holder 1120, the connection connector 1131a of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 mounted on the board mounting recess 1127 and the connection connector 1132a of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 penetrate the rear wall of the board mounting recess 1127. The size is such that a sufficiently large space for a finger to enter is formed around the connector 1131a and the connector 1132a in a state of being projected inward. As a result, it is possible to easily connect and disconnect the connection cable (not shown) to the connection connector 1131a and the connection connector 1132a.

The panel decorative substrate 1130 is composed of an upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decorative substrate 1132. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a are mounted on the front surface of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131. The plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 are arranged along the upper left diagonal portion on the peripheral edge of the panel plate 1110, with the uppermost side facing right and the lowermost side facing downward. It is mounted so as to irradiate light, and the rest is mounted so as to irradiate light toward the lower right so as to be perpendicular to the diagonal portion on the upper left of the panel plate 1110. A connector 1131a projecting rearward is attached to the rear surface of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131.

A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a are mounted on the front surface of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132. As shown in FIG. 143 (b), the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is notched so as to avoid the lower engaging claw 1125 in the panel holder 1120, and a plurality of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is formed while avoiding the notched portion. The panel decorative LED 1130a of the above is mounted so as to irradiate light upward, to the right, and to the upper right. A connector 1132a projecting rearward is attached to the rear surface of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132.

The panel decorative substrate 1130 is formed of a white member so as to be inconspicuous from the front. Further, the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are side view type wide-angle full-color LEDs, and can also irradiate light forward.

The panel decorative substrate 1130 is arranged so that the front surface (plate surface) on which the side view type panel decorative LED 1130a is mounted is parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110. As a result, the size of the panel decorative board 1130 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner than that of the panel board 1110, the panel decorative board 1130 can be attached to the panel holder 1120 without any problem, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100). The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be light-emitting decorated while suppressing the increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel decorative substrate 1130 has a plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110, and is large enough to be larger than the size of the panel decorative LED 1130a mounted on the plate surface (front surface). It is the board surface of. In other words, the panel decoration substrate 1130 has an area (surplus) in which the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, which are 40 to 100 times larger than the LED mounting area occupied by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be mounted, are not mounted. Area). As a result, the mounting strength of the panel decorative board 1130 can be increased, and even if vibrations or shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 act, the panel decorative board 1130 and the panel board 1110 It is possible to prevent the displacement of the positional relationship of the above, and it is possible to suppress the deviation of the optical axis of the panel decorative LED 1130a and prevent a problem in the incident of light on the panel plate 1110.

Further, since the panel decorative board 1130 is mounted on the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, vibrations and shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are performed. However, it is difficult to transmit to the panel decorative substrate 1130. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the vibration and the like acting on the panel decorative substrate 1130 (panel decorative LED 1130a), suppress the deterioration of the durability of the panel decorative LED 1130a, and the panel decorative substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110. It is possible to prevent the displacement of the positional relationship of the above, and it is possible to suppress the deviation of the optical axis of the panel decorative LED 1130a and prevent a problem in the light incident on the panel plate 1110.

A panel decorative board 1130 is attached to the rear side of the board cover 1135. The substrate cover 1135 is formed to be frosted glass-like translucent so that the panel decorative substrate 1130 attached to the rear side is difficult to recognize, and is formed so as to diffuse the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a. There is. As a result, it is possible to reduce that the light (leakage) emitted forward from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 illuminates the player and causes the player to feel dazzling. It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

In the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, a decorative pattern 1150 composed of a plurality of equilateral triangle contours is formed on a transparent panel plate 1110, which is transparent and has a three-dimensional effect as compared with the conventional decoration by a printing sheet. The decoration can be shown to the player. Then, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is made to emit light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be made to emit light, and the game ball B in the game area 5a which has not been seen in the conventional pachinko machines is generated. It is possible to show the player the luminous decoration of the distribution area.

Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 is formed only in the decorative pattern forming region 1101 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a circulates in various flow paths, the decorative pattern 1150 is applied to the entire game area 5a. Compared with the case where the decorative pattern is formed, the cost related to the formation of the decorative pattern 1150 can be reduced.

Further, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is arranged behind the function display unit 1400, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is made to emit light, the function display unit 1400 is displayed. It is possible to illuminate from the rear, and it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the function display unit 1400 (function display unit), which has not been found in conventional pachinko machines, is light-emitting and decorated.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), most (more than half) of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is covered by the function display unit 1400 so that it cannot be seen. Therefore, a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is visible without being obscured by the function display unit 1400. That is, not only the upper left board cover 1136 attached to the surface of the upper left panel decorative board 1131, but also a part of the panel decorative LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the upper left panel decorative board 1131 on the back of the upper left board cover 1136. Is not obscured by the function display unit 1400 and can be visually recognized. As a result, the panel decoration LED 1130a can be visually confirmed in the state where the game board 5 is assembled in the manufacturing process, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to install the upper left panel decoration board 1131. Further, in the example of FIG. 146 (A), since a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is also arranged so as to be visible, the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a is decorated with the panel plate 1110. The light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be visually observed through the upper left substrate cover 1136 when the brightness of the panel decoration LED 1130a is adjusted, without going through the light emitting decoration of the pattern 1150.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the side wall portion of the upper left board cover 1136 and the side surface of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 can be visually recognized from the side of the game board 5 in the state where the game board 5 is assembled. However, since the side surface of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is thin, it is difficult to distinguish it, and the side wall portion of the upper left substrate cover 1136 is provided, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the panel decorative LED 1130a. Therefore, it is difficult to confirm that the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the panel decorative LED 1130a are installed from the side of the game board 5. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be seen from the front of the game board 5, it can be confirmed that the panel decoration LED 1130a is surely installed, and the panel decoration LED 1130a is forgotten to be installed. Can be reliably prevented. By not providing a part of the side wall portion of the upper left substrate cover 1136, at least a part of the panel decorative LED 1130a may be visible from the side of the game board 5.

Further, at least a part of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 may be arranged so as not to be covered by the function display unit 1400. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 146 (B), the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame. Only the part that is difficult for the player to see when the door frame 3 is attached to the 4 and the door frame 3 is closed (a part of the game board 5 on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 (left end in the drawing) side) is covered by the function display unit 1400. You may not let it break. As a result, in the manufacturing process, not only the upper left board cover 1136 attached to the surface of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 but also the upper left panel decorative board 1131 can be visually confirmed, so that the upper left panel decorative board 1131 can be forgotten to be installed. In addition to being able to prevent, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed in the game store, that is, in the state where the player can play, the upper left board cover 1136 and the upper left panel decorative board 1131, Further, the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 can be made difficult to see.

Further, since the panel decoration LED 1130a is hard to be seen by the player, it is possible to prevent the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a from interfering with the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 when the panel decoration LED 1130a is made to emit light. .. As described above, in this example, the panel decoration LED 1130a is a side view type and irradiates the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the panel decoration LED 1130a from directly directing to the player, and the function display unit 1400. It is possible to prevent misidentification with the LED (status indicator, ordinary symbol indicator, ordinary hold indicator). Further, since the direct light due to the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a is stronger than the indirect light due to the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110, the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 does not go through. In the state where it is visually observed, the effect of the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 may be diminished by being disturbed by the strong light emitted by the panel decoration LED 1130a (notice the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a itself). .. As described above, the light emitted from the panel decorative LED 1130a and the panel decorative LED 1130a is made difficult to be seen by the player through the upper left substrate cover 1136, so that the panel can be displayed through the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110. The light emission of the decorative LED 1130a can be visually recognized, and the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be noticed. It is sufficient that at least a part of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is visible when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, and a part of the panel decorative LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is partially visible. It may be in a state where it can be seen, or it may be in a state where everything cannot be seen. That is, it is sufficient that at least the portion of the plate surface portion of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 that is exposed without mounting any mounting component is visible.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is arranged behind the certificate stamp attaching portion 1012, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is made to emit light, the certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 The attached certificate stamp (not shown) can be illuminated from behind to emit light, and the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the certificate stamp is lit up and decorated, which is not possible with conventional pachinko machines.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is formed large (widely) with respect to the certificate stamp attached to the certificate stamp attaching portion 1012, and a part of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is not covered by the certificate stamp. It is visible. That is, not only the lower left board cover 1137 attached to the surface of the lower left panel decorative board 1132, but also a part of the panel decorative LED 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative board 1132 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 on the back of the lower left board cover 1137. Is also visible without being covered by a certificate stamp. As a result, the lower left panel decorative board 1132 can be visually confirmed in the state where the game board 5 is assembled in the manufacturing process, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to install the lower left panel decorative board 1132. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 is also arranged so as to be visible, the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a is emitted from the panel plate 1110. It can be visually observed through the lower left substrate cover 1137 without passing through the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150, and when the brightness of the panel decorative LED 1130a is adjusted, the light emission of the panel decorative LED 1130a can be visually performed through the lower left substrate cover 1137.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the side wall portion of the lower left board cover 1137 and the side surface of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 can be visually recognized from the side of the game board 5 in the state where the game board 5 is assembled. However, since the side surface of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is thin, it is difficult to distinguish it, and the side wall portion of the lower left substrate cover 1137 is provided, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the panel decorative LED 1130a. Therefore, it is difficult to confirm from the side of the game board 5 that the lower left panel decorative board 1132 and the panel decoration LED 1130a are installed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be seen from the front of the game board 5, it can be confirmed that the panel decoration LED 1130a is surely installed, and the panel decoration LED 1130a is forgotten to be installed. Can be reliably prevented. By not providing a part of the side wall portion of the lower left substrate cover 1137, at least a part of the panel decorative LED 1130a may be visible from the side of the game board 5.

Further, the lower left portion of the game board 5 on which the lower left panel decoration board 1132 is installed is a position that is difficult to be visually recognized in the game, and the panel decoration LED 1130a is a side view type and irradiates the game area 5a to decorate the panel. In order to prevent the light emission of the LED 1130a for panel directing to the player, it is difficult for the player to see the strong light due to the light emission of the LED 1130a for panel decoration, and the LED 1130a for decoration of the panel is displayed through the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110. The light emission of the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized, and the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be noticed. It is sufficient that at least a part of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 can be seen when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, and a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be seen. However, all of them may be invisible. That is, at least the portion of the plate surface portion of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 that is exposed without mounting any mounting component may be visible.

As described above, in this example, at least a part of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132, which are attached to the game board 5 and on which the panel decoration LED 1130a is mounted, is visually observed when the game board 5 is viewed from the front. You can do it. Therefore, the panel decoration LED 1130a can be visually confirmed in the state where the game board 5 is assembled in the manufacturing process, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to install the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132. That is, even if the upper left panel decorative board 1131 or the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is forgotten to be installed in the manufacturing process of the game machine, the presence or absence of a defect can be found by visually observing a part of the visible part from the outside. It becomes easy and early, and it is possible to eliminate factors that reduce the interest, such as the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 not being luminescent and decorated during the game progress process. Further, when the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 are not installed, the space where the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 should be installed is vacant, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The back is visible through the panel holder 1120. Of the installation areas of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 in the panel holder 1120, at least the portion that is visible without being covered by the function display unit 1400 or the certificate stamp, and is the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and When installing the lower left panel decorative board 1132, a sticker or drawing with characters or figures that call attention should be applied to the part that is covered by the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 and is difficult to see. In this case, the forgetting to install the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 may be recognized at a glance. Further, among the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, the panel decoration LED 1130a that can be visually recognized may be a top view type. In this case, the front surface of the top view type panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated toward the player. A cover member for relaxation may be provided. As a result, when the panel decoration LED 1130a is made to emit light, it is possible to prevent the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a from interfering with the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110.

Further, although the side view type LED is used as the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132, a top view type LED may be used. In this case, the upper left After the board cover 1136 is attached to the surface of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 (the surface on which the panel decorative LED 1130a is mounted), the panel decorative LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is perpendicular to the side surface of the panel board 1110. The upper left board cover 1136 may be attached to the panel holder 1120 substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a so as to irradiate light, or the lower left board cover 1137 may be attached to the surface of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 (panel decoration). After mounting on the surface on which the LED1130a is mounted), the lower left board cover 1137 is mounted on the game board so that the panel decorative LED1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative board 1132 irradiates light perpendicular to the side surface of the panel board 1110. It may be attached to the panel holder 1120 substantially perpendicular to the surface of 5a.

Further, in this case, the upper left board cover 1136 and the lower left board cover 1137 are composed of a bottom portion attached substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a and a side wall portion extending substantially perpendicularly from the end portion of the bottom portion. Therefore, the bottom portion may not be provided in the portion through which the light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a passes so that the irradiation light of the panel decoration LED 1130a is not blocked by the bottom portion. Further, in this case, the upper left board cover 1136 and the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left board cover 1137 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 can be visually recognized from the front of the game board 5 with the game board 5 assembled. However, by not providing a part of the side wall portion of the upper left board cover 1136 and the lower left board cover 1137, at least a part of the panel decorative LED 1130a may be visible from the side of the game board 5. .. When the upper left board cover 1136 and the lower left board cover 1137 are attached to the panel holder 1120 substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a, the upper left from the side of the game board 5 with the game board 5 assembled. The back surface of the panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 (the side on which the panel decorative LED 1130a is not mounted) becomes visible, and the panel decorative LED 1130a cannot be visually recognized. Since it can be visually recognized, it can be indirectly confirmed that the panel decoration LED 1130a is installed.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, a condenser lens, a diffusion lens, or the like is not arranged between the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the side surface of the panel plate 1110. As a result, the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a is directly irradiated to a wide range on the side surface of the panel plate 1110, and the light can be incident on a wide range inside the panel plate 1110, so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be formed. It can be beautifully luminescent and decorated. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the condensing lens and the diffusing lens are not arranged by using the wide-angle LED, but the condensing lens and the diffusing lens may be arranged. Further, when arranging the diffusion lens, a narrow-angle or medium-angle LED may be used instead of the wide-angle LED. When the condensing lens or the diffusing lens is not arranged, the side surface of the side surface of the panel plate 1110 to be irradiated with the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is formed in the same shape as the diffusing lens to decorate the panel. The light incident on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 from the lens 1130a may be diffused and guided to the inside of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, the uneven diffusion portion 1110a may be formed on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 to be irradiated with the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a. In this example, the irradiation position corresponding to each panel decoration LED 1130a is formed to have a convex shape, and the light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a is diffused and guided to the inside of the panel plate 1110. As a result, the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided over a wider range with a small number of LEDs, and the light emitting decoration over a wide range of the game panel 1100 becomes possible.

The side surface of the portion irradiated with the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a may be formed in the same shape as the condenser lens. For example, the irradiation position corresponding to each panel decoration LED 1130a is formed to have a concave shape. Then, the light emitted from the panel decorative LED 1130a may be condensed and guided to the inside of the panel plate 1110. By condensing the light incident on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 from the panel decoration LED 1130a and guiding it to the inside of the panel plate 1110 in this way, it is possible to increase the amount of light of the target light emitting decoration. Further, the side surface of the portion of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated is formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens, and the same as the diffusion lens among the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. The side surface of the part where the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a is irradiated except for the panel decorative LED 1130a which irradiates the portion formed in the shape of the above (other than the side surface formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens). All side surfaces may be used, or some side surfaces other than the side surface formed in the same shape as the diffusing lens) may be formed in the same shape as the condenser lens. That is, the shape similar to that of the diffusing lens or the shape similar to that of the condensing lens may be appropriately formed depending on the position and range of the decorative pattern to be luminescent and the amount of light to be decorated by luminescent.

Further, the shape similar to the diffusion lens formed on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 can change the degree of diffusion by changing the shape. Specifically, for a convex portion formed with a predetermined protrusion amount corresponding to the irradiation position of the panel decorative LED 1130a, the degree of diffusion is increased by increasing the protrusion amount, and the protrusion amount of the convex portion is reduced. It is possible to weaken the degree of diffusion. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the degree of diffusion can be changed according to the position and range of the decorative pattern to be luminescent and decorated, the amount of light to be luminescent, and the like. That is, although the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided in a wider range by increasing the degree of diffusion, the amount of light is weakened, and the range in which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided by reducing the degree of diffusion is narrowed. Since the amount of light is increased, it is possible to realize the light emitting decoration in a desired mode by appropriately setting the degree of diffusion according to the position and range of the decorative pattern to be light emitted and the amount of light to be used for the light emitting decoration. It should be noted that the convex portion formed corresponding to the irradiation position of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a may be formed with a predetermined protrusion amount for each panel decoration LED 1130a, whereby the decorative pattern for light emission decoration may be formed. The degree of diffusion can be set for each panel decoration LED 1130a according to the position and range, the amount of light emitted and decorated, and the like, and the decorative pattern can be illuminated and decorated.

Similarly, the shape similar to that of the condensing lens formed on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 can change the degree of condensing by changing the shape. Specifically, with respect to the concave portion formed with a predetermined concave amount corresponding to the irradiation position of the panel decorative LED 1130a, the degree of light collection is increased by increasing the concave amount, and the concave amount of the concave portion is reduced. By doing so, it is possible to weaken the degree of light collection. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to change the degree of light collection according to the position and range of the decorative pattern to be light-emitting and decorated, the amount of light to be light-emitting and decorated, and the like. That is, although the amount of light can be strengthened by increasing the degree of light collection, the range in which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided is narrowed, and the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is guided by weakening the degree of light collection. Since the amount of light can be increased, the amount of light emitted can be increased. Therefore, the degree of light collection can be appropriately set according to the position and range of the decorative pattern to be decorated with light emission, the amount of light to be decorated with light emission, and the like. Can be realized. In addition, the concave portion formed corresponding to the irradiation position of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a may be formed with a predetermined amount of dent for each panel decoration LED 1130a, and the decorative pattern for light emission decoration may be formed. The degree of light collection can be set for each panel decoration LED 1130a according to the position and range, the amount of light to be luminescent, and the like, and the decorative pattern can be luminescent.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the diffusion portion 1110a formed on the panel plate 1110 by the front component 1000 is visually recognized by the player. I'm in a difficult situation. As described above, the front component 1000 in the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a function of hiding the diffusion portion 1110a formed on the panel plate 1110 so as to be difficult for the player to see.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel holder 1120 is provided with the panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) for luminescent decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. When changing to a panel board 1110 with other different decorative patterns in order to change the model of the game board 5 or make a minor change to the model, it can be handled only by replacing the panel board 1110. The holder 1120, the front component 1000, the panel decorative substrate 1130, and the substrate cover 1135 can be used as common parts. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 with the other decorative pattern 1150, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel decorative board 1130 is mounted in the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, and the panel decorative board 1130 and the panel board 1110 are separately mounted. I am trying to install it. As a result, the panel holder 1120 from which the board cover 1135 and the panel decorative board 1130 have been removed can be used for a pachinko machine (game board) having a normal panel board 1110 to which the decorative pattern 1150 is not applied. The 1120 and the front component 1000 can be common parts. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 with the other decorative pattern 1150, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. be able to. When used in a model having a panel plate 1110 not provided with the decorative pattern 1150, a dummy board cover 1135 may be attached to the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, or the panel holder 1120 may be used. You may use it with the substrate cover 1135 and the panel decorative substrate 1130 attached.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game panel 1100 is formed by a plurality of members of the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120, but the game panel 1100 may be formed by one member. As shown in FIG. 147 (A), a through hole 1110A1 is formed in a part of the outside of the game area 5a partitioned by the outer rail 1001 of the flat plate-shaped game panel 1100, and a panel decorative substrate is formed in the through hole 1110A1. The side surface of the through hole 1110A1 may be irradiated with light from the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the panel decoration substrate 1130 by arranging the 1130 toward the inside of the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 147 (B). As described above, at least a part of the outer side of the game area 5a partitioned by the outer rail 1001 of the flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 is made thinner than the other parts to form the step portion 1110B1 which is thicker than the other parts. The panel decorative substrate 1130 may be arranged in a thin portion to irradiate the side surface of the step portion 1110B1 from the panel decorative LED 1130a mounted on the panel decorative substrate 1130 toward the inside of the game area 5a. In this way, the game panel 1100 itself is formed with an arrangement portion for arranging the panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) at a position relatively close to the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the game panel 1100 without disturbing the game. By doing so, light can be incident on the game panel 1100 at a position close to the decoration pattern 1150, which makes it possible for the player to recognize sufficient light emitting decoration without hindering the progress of the game.

Further, the region forming the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1 (a region thinner than the other regions) is an opening formed in the center of the gaming region 5a (panel plate 1110 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example). It is formed in a size smaller than the opening (corresponding to the opening 1112) formed in the vicinity of the central portion of the game panel 1100, and is formed according to the range of the decorative pattern formed in the game panel 1100. For example, when the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 is formed at least near the center on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a or over a wide range above and below, the upper left portion of the game panel 1100 (the pachinko machine 1 of this example). A through hole 1110A1 and a step portion 1110B1 are formed in the upper left panel decorative board 1131 (the part where the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is installed) and the lower left (the part where the lower left panel decorative board 1132 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is installed), and the game panel 1100 When the decorative pattern of is formed only on the upper left side of the center accessory 2500 of the game area 5a, it is placed on the upper left portion of the game panel 1100 (the portion where the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is installed). When the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1 are formed and the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 is formed only on the lower left side of the center accessory 2500 of the game area 5a, the lower left part of the game panel 1100 (the pachinko machine of this example). A through hole 1110A1 and a step portion 1110B1 are formed in the lower left panel decorative board 1132 of 1), and the panel decorative board 1130 is arranged in the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1 and mounted on the panel decorative board 1130. Light may be emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a toward the inside of the gaming area 5a.

Further, the panel decorative substrate 1130 is formed of a white member so as to be inconspicuous from the front. Further, the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the panel decoration board 1130 is a side view type wide-angle full-color LED, and the panel decoration board 1130 irradiates the side surface (side wall) of the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1 with light. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the panel decorative substrate 1130 according to the range of the decorative pattern formed on the game panel 1100 and the degree of brightness of the light emitting decoration. That is, basically, when the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 is formed over a wide range of the game area 5a, more LEDs are mounted than when the game area 5a is formed only in a narrow range. In order to increase the brightness of the light emitting decoration, the number of mounted LEDs is increased.

Further, of the side surfaces (side walls) of the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1, the side surface (side wall) on which the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a is irradiated has the same shape as the diffuser portion 1110a and the condenser lens. The light collecting portion may be formed. As a result, the degree of diffusion and the degree of light collection can be set according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be luminescent and the amount of light to be luminescent, and the luminescent decoration can be realized in a desired manner. Further, the number of LEDs mounted can be suppressed by appropriately setting the degree of diffusion and the degree of light collection, and it becomes possible to realize a wide range of light emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 while suppressing the manufacturing cost of the game machine. .. Further, the front component 1000 may be attached in front of the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1, whereby the diffusion portion 1110a formed in the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1 is hidden by the front component 1000, and the diffusion portion The 1110a can be made difficult to see from the player.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as described above, the panel decorative substrate 1130 is arranged outside the gaming area 5a partitioned by the outer rail 1001 of the flat plate-shaped gaming panel 1100, and the panel mounted on the panel decorative substrate 1130. It is configured to irradiate light from the decorative LED 1130a toward the inside of the gaming area 5a, but in addition to or in place of this, a panel decorative substrate is provided in the opening formed inside the gaming area 5a. The panel decoration LED mounted on the panel decoration substrate may be arranged to irradiate light toward the inner wall of the opening (toward the outside of the game area 5a). For example, as shown in FIG. 148, the panel decorative substrate is arranged inside the opening 1112 formed near the central portion of the panel plate 1110, and the panel decorative LED mounted on the panel decorative substrate is connected to the central portion of the panel plate 1110. Light may be applied toward the inner wall of the opening 1112 formed in the vicinity.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example has a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 formed along the edge of the opening 1112 formed near the central portion of the panel plate 1110 and a frame of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with a front effect unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside, and a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 2601 that closes the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. Injecting light from the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601 and the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern on which a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610, which are decorated by emitting light by incident light from the upper surface of the light plate 2601, are mounted. A decorative substrate for the second pattern 2622 on which a plurality of LEDs 2621 for the second pattern 2620 are light-emitting and decorated with light is provided between the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601 and the LED 2621 to collect the light from the LED 2621. It includes a plurality of condensing lenses 2623 for illuminating, and a panel decoration substrate 2622A on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 2621A for incident light from the side surface of the game panel 1100 are mounted.

Further, a top view type full-color LED is mounted on the panel decorative board 2622A and the second pattern decorative board 2622, and each is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a. Has been done. Further, the panel decorative substrate 2622A and the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern are in opposite directions (the LED 2621 mounted on the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern is at the center of the opening 1112 formed near the center of the panel plate 1110. The panel decorative LED 2621A mounted on the panel decorative substrate 2622A irradiates light in the direction, and irradiates light toward the outside of the opening 1112 formed near the center of the panel plate 1110). It is arranged back to back so as to irradiate. Further, the panel decorative substrate 2622A and the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern are arranged on the back of the frame portion of the center accessory 2500. Further, the panel decorative substrate 2622A and the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern are provided with side view type connection connectors on the front side (the surface on which the panel decoration LED2621A and the LED2621 are mounted), and each connection connector can be used. The connection cables electrically connected via the cables are bundled, routed along the frame portion of the center accessory 2500, and then bent rearward to be connected to the panel drive board 1720.

In this way, the panel decorative substrate 2622A and the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern are not arranged so that the mounting surfaces of the LEDs (panel decorative LEDs 2621A, LED2621) are substantially parallel to the game board 5a, but the LEDs. Since the mounting surfaces of (panel decorative LEDs 2621A and LED2621) are arranged so as to be substantially perpendicular to the game board 5a, the side surfaces of the thin panel decorative board 2622A and the second pattern decorative board 2622 are of the game machine. It faces the front side, and is left and right compared to the case where the panel decorative board 2622A or the second pattern decorative board 2622 is arranged so that the mounting surface of the LED (panel decoration LED2621A, LED2621) faces the front side of the game machine. Since the installation width in the direction can be narrowed, the panel decorative substrate 2622A, the panel decorative LED 2621A, and the second pattern are provided by the frame portion of the center accessory 2500 provided in front of the panel decorative substrate 2622A and the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern. The decorative substrate 2622 and the LED 2621 can be hidden, and the panel decorative substrate 2622A and the panel decorative LED 2621A and the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 and the LED 2621 can be made difficult to see from the player.

The side view type LED may be mounted on one or both of the panel decorative board 2622A and the second pattern decorative board 2622. In this case, the lateral direction of the board on which the side view type LED is mounted. The width of the board is installed so as to fit in the frame portion of the center accessory 2500 provided in front of the center, and the board on which the top view type LED is mounted is placed on the back side of the board on which the side view type LED is mounted. It may be arranged so as to be substantially vertical. As a result, the panel decorative substrate 2622A, the panel decorative LED 2621A, and the second pattern are provided by the frame portion of the center accessory 2500 provided in front of the panel decorative substrate 2622A and the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern (the front side of the game machine). The decorative substrate 2622 and the LED 2621 can be hidden, and the panel decorative substrate 2622A and the panel decorative LED 2621A and the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 and the LED 2621 can be made difficult to see from the player.

Although the panel plate 1110 is not shown in FIG. 148, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a part of the frame portion of the center accessory 2500 is arranged so as to cover the front of the panel plate 1110. The panel decoration LED2621A mounted on the panel decoration substrate 2622A is provided close to the inner wall of the opening of the panel plate 1110 and irradiates light toward the inner wall of the opening (toward the outside of the gaming area 5a). It is designed to do.

Further, the unit is not limited to the opening 1112 formed near the central portion of the panel plate 1110 and to which the center accessory 2500 is attached, and in addition to or in place of this, a unit such as a winning opening arranged in the game area 5a. A panel decoration substrate on which a panel decoration LED is mounted may be provided. For example, it is attached to the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. The attacker unit 2400 is configured to include a panel decoration substrate on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs for incident light from the side surface of the game panel 1100 are mounted (unitized), and the inner wall of the opening 1112 to which the attacker unit 2400 is mounted. The light may be irradiated toward (toward the outside of the game area 5a). Further, in this case, the panel decorative substrate and the panel decorative LED may be arranged on the back of the outer edge portion of the attacker unit 2400 (the portion where the mounting portion to be attached to the game panel 1100 is formed), whereby the panel may be arranged. The decorative substrate and the panel decorative LED can be hidden by the attacker unit 2400, and the panel decorative substrate and the panel decorative LED can be made difficult to see from the player.

Further, the panel decorative substrate is arranged in the opening formed inside the game area 5a, and the panel decorative LED mounted on the panel decorative substrate is directed toward the inner wall of the opening (toward the outside of the game area 5a). ) Even when irradiating light, the portion of the inner wall of the opening to which the light from the panel decoration LED is irradiated may be formed in the same shape as the diffuser lens or the condenser lens. As a result, the degree of diffusion and the degree of light collection can be set according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be luminescent and the amount of light to be luminescent, and the luminescent decoration can be realized in a desired manner. Further, the number of LEDs mounted can be suppressed by appropriately setting the degree of diffusion and the degree of light collection, and it becomes possible to realize a wide range of light emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 while suppressing the manufacturing cost of the game machine. .. Further, the inner wall of the opening formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens or the condenser lens is arranged behind the outer edge portion of the attacker unit 2400 (the portion where the attachment portion to be attached to the game panel 1100 is formed). Also, with such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to see the inner wall of the opening formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens or the condenser lens.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 is used to make the back of the panel plate 1110 visible, but a cell on which a pattern such as a character, a character, or a figure is drawn is drawn. At least of the panel board 1110 by attaching the sheet to the front surface (rolling surface of the game ball) or the back surface of the panel board 1110, or by directly printing a pattern such as a character on the front surface or the back surface of the panel board 1110. The back surface may be difficult to see for some parts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, a cell sheet on which the pattern of the sword 1110b is partially drawn may be attached to the surface of the panel plate 1110. Further, in this example, a cell sheet having translucency is used, and although it is difficult to visually recognize the back part even in the pattern portion, the light emitted from the back part is not blocked. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back of a part of the blade 1110ba of the sword 1110b drawn on the cell sheet can be visually recognized (for example, the target part is transparent or cut). A decorative pattern is formed on a part of the panel plate 1110 corresponding to this part (such as being pulled out) so that it can be visually recognized through the cell sheet or from the cut-out part of the cell sheet. Then, the pattern (sword 1110b) drawn on the cell sheet and the decorative pattern formed on the panel board 1110 are combined to represent one pattern.

Further, the decorative pattern formed on the panel plate 1110 is a radiating portion that mainly reflects the light radiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside and radiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside. The decorative pattern, which is composed of a radiating light guide that reflects light forward and guides light along a line, and is formed on a part of the blade 1110ba, even when the panel decoration LED 1130a is not emitted. It is designed so that it can be visually recognized from the player side in front. Then, the decorative pattern formed on a part of the blade 1110ba is combined with the pattern drawn on the cell sheet (sword 1110b in this example) to decorate the game area 5a. As a result, a part of the sword 1110b (a part of the blade 1110ba in this example) drawn on the cell sheet to decorate the game area 5a by emitting light of the panel decoration LED 1130a is light-emitting and decorated, and a part of the blade 1110ba It is possible to make a brilliant luminescent decoration, which makes the player guess something will happen and enhances the game's interest. It should be noted that it is not necessary that all the regions of the cell sheet have translucency, and at least the region overlapping the decorative pattern formed on the panel plate 1110 (the region to be light-emitting decorated) has translucency. It suffices as long as it is formed so that the light emitting decoration by the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized when the panel decoration LED 1130a is made to emit light, and a non-translucent region (such as blocking light from the rear) is partially formed. Area) may be included.

Further, the decorative pattern of the panel plate 1110 may be formed in an area other than the blade 1110ba. In this case, the panel plate 1110 is decorated from the front player side in a state where the panel decorative LED 1130a is not emitted. Although it is difficult to visually recognize the pattern, by causing the decorative pattern of the panel plate 1110 to emit light, the light emitting decoration by the decorative pattern of the panel plate 1110 comes to emerge through the cell sheet. That is, when the panel decoration LED 1130a is made to emit light, the blade 1110ba of the sword 1110b is light-emittingly decorated, and the panel plate 1110 is light-emittingly decorated with a predetermined decoration pattern.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a decorative pattern is formed on the panel plate 1110 so as to form a part of a pattern such as a character drawn on the cell sheet and the panel decorative LED 1130a is made to emit light, the cell sheet is emitted. It is possible to illuminate and decorate a part of the pattern such as the character drawn in. As a decorative pattern of the panel plate 1110 that constitutes a part of the pattern of the character or the like drawn on the cell sheet, a predetermined part of the pattern of the character or the like drawn on the cell sheet (for example, the blade 1110ba of the sword 1110b or the eyes of the character). Etc.), as well as the outline and shadow of the character or other pattern drawn on the cell sheet, and the decoration (a pattern that expresses a sense of depth) to make the character or other pattern drawn on the cell sheet appear three-dimensional. May be good.

Further, the decorative pattern of the panel plate 1110 is also formed in the rear portion of the center accessory 2500, in other words, the portion arranged in the front so as to cover the frame portion of the center accessory 2500 in the panel plate 1110. That is, the effect display device 1600 is arranged on the panel plate 1110 and behind it, and the decorative pattern is formed even in the vicinity of the opening whose front is blocked by the light guide plate 2601. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a is made to emit light, it is possible to emit light and decorate the vicinity of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 provided in front of the effect display device 1600 described later. Light emitting decoration is performed in association with the effect to be executed (so that the display of the effect display device 1600 and the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 are continuously connected to the light emitting decoration outside the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601). be able to. On the other hand, since the panel plate 1110 provided at a position not covered by the effect display device 1600 is light-emitting and decorated to emit light around the effect display device 1600, the panel decoration LED 1130a does not interfere with the display of the effect display device 1600. Can be made to emit light to decorate the panel plate 1110 with a predetermined decorative pattern.

Further, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are arranged on the back side of the panel plate 1110 in the standby state, which will be described later, and the player It is difficult to see from. Further, the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa mounted on the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 are the back upper left movable decoration. It is possible to emit light in the standby state of the body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420, and the panel plate is made to emit light by emitting these LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, 3421aa. The cell sheet can be luminescently decorated with a decorative pattern formed on the panel plate 1110 by irradiating light from the rear of the 1110. In this way, the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa mounted on the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are panel plates 1110. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the cell sheet can be luminescently decorated with a decorative pattern formed on the panel plate 1110 when used as a backlight of the panel plate 1110. ..

[5-2-1. Second Embodiment of the decoration pattern in the game panel]
Subsequently, in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, the decoration is different from the decoration pattern 1150 shown in FIGS. 143 to 145 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "decoration pattern 1150 according to the first embodiment"). The panel plate 1110 on which the pattern 1160 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “decorative pattern 1160 according to the second embodiment”) is formed will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 (a) is a front view of a panel board on which a decorative pattern different from that of FIG. 143 is formed, and FIG. 150 (b) is a front view showing the panel board of (a) together with a front unit.

As shown in FIG. 150, the decorative pattern 1160 according to the second embodiment has a V-shaped cross section formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110, similarly to the decorative pattern 1150 according to the first embodiment. There is. The decoration pattern 1160 can be visually recognized from the player side in front of the panel decoration substrate 1130 even when the panel decoration LED 1130a is not emitted, and decorates the inside of the game area 5a. The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be decorated by emitting light by causing the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 to emit light and causing light to enter the inside of the panel plate 1110.

As shown in the figure, this decorative pattern 1160 has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate portion 2003, a side slope 2300, and a warp entrance 2501 of a center accessory 2500 on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. A radiation portion 1161 that reflects light incident on the inside from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 to the front is formed in a rear portion such as the above. As a result, when the decoration pattern 1160 (radiating portion 1161) is light-emittingly decorated, the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the side slope 2300, the warp entrance 2501 of the center accessory 2500, etc. Can be luminescently decorated from behind, making them stand out.

Although not shown, the decorative pattern 1160 may be formed with a plurality of radiating light guide portions that guide the light from the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 to the radiating portion 1161. Further, the decorative pattern 1160 may be combined with the decorative pattern 1150.

[5-2-2. Adjustment of obstacle nails in the game panel]
Subsequently, the adjustment of the plurality of obstacle nails N in which the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is planted will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153 and the like. FIG. 151 is a front view showing a nail adjusting film for adjusting an obstacle nail planted in a game panel. FIG. 152 is a front view of the main body frame shown in a state where the game board is attached. FIG. 153 (a) is an enlarged explanatory view showing a state before the nail adjustment film is attached to the game board, and FIG. 153 (b) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged state where the nail adjustment film is attached to the game board. is there.

In the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 136 and the like, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the game area 5a in a predetermined gauge arrangement. More specifically, the plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, which is between the inner circumference of the frame of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and the outer circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. It is installed.

By the way, when the game is performed, the game balls B driven into the game area 5a frequently come into contact with the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a, so that the operating time is long. Indeed, the distortion of the obstacle nail N becomes large. Then, when the distortion of the obstacle nail N becomes large, the flow path of the game ball B changes from the state at the time of manufacture, and the winning openings (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large) It becomes difficult for the game ball B to be accepted in the winning opening 2005, etc., or it becomes difficult for the game ball B to pass through the gate portion 2003, so that the player cannot enjoy the game and the interest in the game is lowered. There was a problem. Alternatively, as the distortion of the obstacle nail N increases, the game ball B is more likely to be accepted into the winning opening, and the payout of the game ball B increases, which imposes a burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine is installed. There was a problem that the number increased. Further, when the distortion of the obstacle nail N becomes large, some players recognize that the game ball B is difficult to enter the winning opening just by looking at the board surface of the game board 5, and as a pachinko machine to play. , There was a problem that the operating rate of pachinko machines decreased due to avoiding games with pachinko machines.

To deal with such problems, on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, a hammer that hits the obstacle nail N and a nail adjustment in which a gauge ball having the same diameter as the game ball B is attached to the tip of an elongated rod. The strain of the obstacle nail N is adjusted regularly by using a gauge. However, in the adjustment using the nail adjusting gauge, the distorted obstacle nail N is adjusted by intuition and experience, so that the adjustment of the obstacle nail N tends to vary. In addition, the adjustment of the obstacle nail N may be performed not only by a skilled technician who is called a nail technician, but also by an inexperienced technician. There was a problem that it took.

In response to such a problem, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a nail adjusting film 1170 as shown in FIG. 151 is prepared. The nail adjusting film 1170 has a transparent resin film having a front pattern 1171 which is the same as the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000) and a nail pattern 1172 which is the same as the obstacle nail N. , Is printed. The nail pattern 1172 is drawn on a circle having substantially the same diameter as the head of the obstacle nail N. Further, the nail adjusting film 1170 has an identification unit 1173 that indicates a specific obstacle nail N1 that plays an important role in the game among the plurality of obstacle nails N. The identification unit 1173 is a circular pattern having a diameter one size larger than that of the nail pattern 1172. As a result, the specific obstacle nail N1 is drawn in a double circle with the nail pattern 1172 and the pattern of the identification unit 1173, and can be identified at a glance. Further, the identification unit 1173 is drawn with circles of different line types according to the importance of the specific obstacle nail N1. Here, the importance of the specific obstacle nail N1 is divided into "most important" and "important", and "most important" is drawn with a dotted line (broken line) and "important" is drawn with a dotted chain line. (See the enlarged view of FIG. 151).

The resin films constituting the nail adjusting film 1170 include polyethylene terephthalate film, polyethylene naphthalate film, polypropylene film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film, polyimide film, polyphenylene sulfide film, nylon film, aramid film, polyethylene film, and celluloid. Film, etc. can be mentioned. In the present embodiment, as the resin film constituting the nail adjusting film 1170, a material that easily generates (charges) static electricity is used. The nail adjustment film 1170 is only one embodiment, and has a front pattern 1171 equivalent to the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000) and a nail pattern 1172 same as the obstacle nail N. However, if it is printed, a sheet-shaped or plate-shaped nail adjusting surface material having low flexibility may be applied instead of the nail adjusting film 1170.

The nail adjusting film 1170 has a positioning fixing portion 1174 for fixing the positioning to the game board 5. The positioning and fixing portion 1174 of the present embodiment is a hole into which four boss portions 1020 (see FIG. 152) protruding forward from the front surface of the front component 1000 are inserted.

The positioning and fixing portion 1174 may be configured to support the nail adjusting film 1170, and is not limited to the hole into which the boss portion 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted. The front component 1000 and the game board A hole for inserting a game board lock member 505, a payout passage opening / closing door 613, a door frame hook 652, an outer frame unlocking lever 656, etc., which protrudes forward in the main body frame 4 to which 5 is attached from the front .. Alternatively, the positioning fixing portion 1174 is set as the upper part (upper side) of the nail adjusting film 1170, and is inserted into the gap between the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 and the upper end of the game board 5 to be positioned and fixed. Is also good. Further, when the positioning fixing portion 1174 is set to the left side of the nail adjusting film 1170 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted. By doing so, the pachinko machine 1 is inserted into the groove 530a (see FIG. 152) of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 to prevent an unauthorized tool from being inserted into the inside from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. It may be fixed.

Next, a method of adjusting the obstacle nail N using the nail adjusting film 1170 will be described. It is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, and the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4. In this state, the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 is covered with the nail adjusting film 1170 from the front, and the boss portion 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted through the positioning fixing portion 1174 to the game board 5. The nail adjustment film 1170 is positioned and fixed. In the present embodiment, since the nail adjusting film 1170 is made of a material that is easily charged, the nail adjusting film 1170 is attached to the front surface of the front component 1000 by static electricity when the game board 5 is charged. Therefore, the nail adjusting film 1170 can be positioned and fixed by this static electricity and supported by the front surface of the game board 5. Further, the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side slope 2300, the attacker unit 2400, and the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 are substantially the same as the tip (head) on the non-embedded side of the obstacle nail N. A flat portion having a planar shape having a height of 2 is provided in the vicinity of the obstacle nail N, and the nail adjusting film 1170 can be positioned and fixed by the boss portion 1020 while maintaining a straight surface without bending.

When the nail adjustment film 1170 is positioned and fixed to the front surface of the game board 5 and viewed from the front, the front pattern 1171 of the nail adjustment film 1170 can be aligned with the shapes of the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000. The deviation of the nail adjustment film 1170 can be confirmed. In this state, the head of the obstruction nail N can be seen through the transparent nail adjustment film 1170. When the obstacle nail N is distorted, the circle of the nail pattern 1172 and the circle of the head of the obstacle nail N are not concentric, and the centers of the circles do not coincide with each other ( (See FIG. 153 (b)). Thereby, the obstacle nail N to be adjusted can be easily determined.

Then, when adjusting the distorted obstacle nail N, the nail adjustment film 1170 is rolled up, the corresponding obstacle nail N is hit with a hammer, and then the nail adjustment film 1170 is covered with the circle of the nail pattern 1172 and the obstacle. The deviation of the head of the nail N from the circle is confirmed, and this is repeated so that the circle of the head of the obstacle nail N is concentric with the circle of the nail pattern 1172. Further, when adjusting the obstacle nail N, since the identification portion 1173 indicating the specific obstacle nail N1 is drawn on the nail adjustment film 1170, the specific obstacle nail N1 is carefully adjusted.

As described above, according to the nail adjusting film 1170 of the present embodiment, the same front pattern 1171 as the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000 is drawn, so that the front pattern 1171 matches the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000. By doing so, the alignment of the nail adjusting film 1170 with respect to the game board 5 can be easily performed. Further, since the identification portion 1173 showing the specific obstacle nail N1 that plays an important role in the game is drawn on the nail adjustment film 1170, the position of the specific obstacle nail N1 that requires careful adjustment can be easily determined. It can be determined. Further, since the nail adjusting film 1170 includes a positioning fixing portion 1174 into which the boss portion 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted, the nail adjusting film 1170 can be easily positioned and fixed to the game board 5. Therefore, by adjusting the obstacle nail N according to the nail adjustment film 1170, it is possible to reduce the variation in the adjustment of the obstacle nail N, and even an inexperienced technician can easily adjust the obstacle nail N. , The work time required for adjusting the obstacle nail N can be shortened.

In the nail adjustment film 1170, the identification portion 1173 is shown to have a circle pattern having a diameter larger than the circle of the nail pattern 1172, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific obstacle nail N1 is indicated by an arrow. , Color-coded.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152, a predetermined member provided on the front surface side of the game board 5 has a plurality of reference portions used for further facilitating the alignment of the nail adjusting film 1170 with respect to the front surface of the game board 5. P1 to P4 are provided. These plurality of reference portions P1 to P4 are drawn so as to be numbered inside the star-marked pattern together with the star-marked pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 151, a plurality of reference patterns R1 to R4 imitating each of the plurality of reference portions P1 to P4 are printed on the nail adjustment film 1170 together with the same front pattern 1171 as in the front view of the game board 5. Has been done. The reference patterns R1 to R4 are printed on the nail adjusting film 1170 so as to coincide with the corresponding reference portions P1 to P4 in a state where the game board 5 is covered with the nail adjusting film 1170 from the front. The guideline patterns R1 to R4 imitate all the pictures drawn on the guideline parts P1 to P4, but the nails are adjusted so as to imitate only a part of the pictures drawn on the guideline parts P1 to P4. It may be printed on film 1170.

According to the above, when the nail adjustment film 1170 is put on the game board 5 from the front, the guide patterns R1 to R4 may be aligned with each of the guide portions P1 to P4, and the game board 5 may be covered. On the other hand, the nail adjusting film 1170 can be easily aligned. Further, since the front pattern 1171 has a pattern having the same shape as the member on which the reference portions P1 to P4 are drawn, the reference portions P1 to P4 are drawn using the reference portions P1 to P4 as markers. If the front pattern 1171 coincides with the member, it is possible to more reliably confirm whether or not the position of the nail adjusting film 1170 is displaced with respect to the game board 5. According to such a method, when the nail adjusting film 1170 is put on the game board 5 from the front, whether or not the boss portion 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted into the positioning fixing portion 1174. Regardless, the nail adjusting film 1170 can be aligned with the game board 5.

Further, the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on a member fixed to the front surface side of the game board 5. As a specific example, the guide part P1 is on the lower left side of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (near the warp entrance 2501), the guide part P2 is on the first starting port 2002, the guide part P3 is on the big winning opening 2005, and the upper right side of the gate part 2003. A reference portion P4 is provided on a member provided outside the game area 4a located in. Since these members are fixed to the front side of the game board 5, the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a continues to come into contact with the center accessory 2500, the first starting port 2002, the large winning opening 2005, and the like. Even so, the position does not shift, and it is possible to prevent the nail adjusting film 1170 from becoming difficult to align with the game board 5. Further, since the member (member outside the game area) provided outside the game area 4a located on the upper right side of the gate portion 2003 does not come into contact with the game ball B that has flowed down the game area 5a in the first place, such a member The guide portion P4 provided at the portion does not shift in position, and by using the guide portion P4, it is possible to prevent the nail adjusting film 1170 from becoming difficult to align with the game board 5. Further, when the reference portion is provided on the member provided outside the game area 4a (the member outside the game area), the member provided with the reference portion (the member outside the game area) has the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. It may be provided in a portion covered by a decorative portion (excluding the glass plate 162) of the door frame 3 when closed. As a result, an unauthorized person who illegally obtained the nail adjustment film 1170 during the business of the amusement park (hall), etc., closed the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and placed the nail adjustment film on the glass plate 162. It can be difficult to align the 1170, and some fraudulent activity (such as helping to confirm that the nail is in a suitable state for other fraudulent activities) is performed using the illegally obtained nail adjustment film 1170. Can be deterred.

The guide portions P1 to P4 may be provided on a member fixed to the front side of the game board 5, and in addition to the first starting port 2002 and the large winning opening 2005, for example, another winning opening (second starting opening). It may be provided in 2004, the general winning opening 2001) or the gate portion 2003. Further, as a member fixed to the front side of the game board 5, for example, reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on a decorative body (including a light emitting decorative body that is light-emittingly decorated by an LED) having a predetermined decoration. You may. Further, in this example, the flat panel plate 1110 is transparent, but a cell on which a predetermined pattern is drawn is attached before or after the panel plate 1110, and a cell having a predetermined pattern is attached to the cell at a visible position. Parts P1 to P4 may be provided. Since such a cell is attached to the panel plate 1110, the position does not shift. Further, it is preferable that the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on at least two or more of the members fixed to the front surface side of the game board 5. In this way, by using at least two or more members, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of misalignment of the nail adjusting film 1170 when aligning the nail adjusting film 1170 with respect to the game board 5. it can.

As described above, the reference portions P1 to P4 may be provided on the member fixed to the front side of the game board 5, but for a wind turbine capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball B, the game board 5 Although it is a member fixed to the front side of the wind turbine, when the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a comes into contact with the member, the nail supporting the wind turbine may bend and it may be difficult to align the nail adjustment film 1170. Therefore, the guide parts P1 to P4 are not provided.

Further, the reference parts P1 to P4 are drawn so as to be numbered inside the star-marked pattern together with the star-marked pattern, and such a vertically asymmetrical or left-right asymmetrical pattern is drawn. It is preferable that it is drawn. Further, as shown in FIG. 152, the reference portions P1 to P4 are preferably drawn in a dark color. In such a case, the reference parts P1 to P4 can be easily found, and it becomes easy to match the reference patterns R1 to R4 with each of the reference parts P1 to P4, so that the game board 5 can be matched. The nail adjusting film 1170 can be easily aligned.

Similarly, the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on members that are asymmetrical or vertically asymmetrical, such as members such as the center accessory 2500, the first starting port 2002, and the grand prize opening 2005. Further, the reference portions P1 to P4 are made so that the members such as the center accessory 2500, the first starting port 2002, and the big winning opening 2005 are painted in a dark color, and are darker than the other members. It is preferably provided on the member. Even in such a case, the member provided with the reference portions P1 to P4 can be easily found, and it becomes easy to match the reference patterns R1 to R4 with each of the reference portions P1 to P4. The nail adjusting film 1170 can be easily aligned with the game board 5.

Further, the guide portions P1 to P4 are provided so as to be located in the vicinity of the specific obstacle nail N1 that plays an important role in the game among the plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5. For example, when the guide portions P1 to P4 are provided at positions separated from the specific obstacle nail N1, even if the nail adjustment film 1170 is aligned with the guide portions P1 to P4 as markers, the nail adjustment film 1170 is printed. The nail pattern 1172 and the pattern of the identification unit 1173 are likely to be displaced from the regular position of the specific obstacle nail N1, but the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided so as to be located in the vicinity of the specific obstacle nail N1. By doing so, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of deviation from the regular position of such a specific obstacle nail N1.

Further, it is preferable to provide at least two reference portions P1 to P4. For example, the nails are adjusted with respect to the game board 5 so that the two reference portions R1 to R4 match the two reference portions P1 to P4. By aligning the film 1170, the nail adjusting film 1170 can be more reliably aligned with the game board 5. When the nail adjustment film 1170 is aligned with the two guide parts P1 to P4 as markers, the two guide parts P1 to include the nail pattern 1172 printed on the nail adjustment film 1170 and the pattern of the identification part 1173. The pattern provided between or around P4 is less likely to be displaced from the regular position of the obstacle nail N or the specific obstacle nail N1. For this reason, among the plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5, many specific obstacle nails N1 that play an important role in the game are provided between or around the two reference portions P1 to P4. As described above, it is preferable that the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided.

Further, the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on members having a flat shape with no uneven surface, such as members such as the center accessory 2500, the first starting port 2002, and the large winning opening 2005. Further, the reference portions P1 to P4 are substantially flush with the tips of a plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5, such as members such as the center accessory 2500, the first starting port 2002, and the large winning opening 2005. It is provided on the member whose surface is formed so as to be. In such a case, only a part of the nail adjustment film 1170 does not come into contact with the game board 5, and it is easy to match the reference patterns R1 to R4 with each of the reference portions P1 to P4. Therefore, the nail adjusting film 1170 can be easily aligned with the game board 5. It should be noted that the reference portions P1 to P4 are not limited to the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side slope 2300, the attacker unit 2400, and the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5, and are not limited to the front component 1000 and the like. , May be provided in other parts.

Further, in this example, the nail adjustment film 1170 is substantially the same as the game board 5 so that the same front pattern 1171 as the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000) can be printed. Although a resin film having a size is used, a resin film having a size smaller than the size of such a game board 5 (for example, A4 size) may be used. For example, the A4 size nail adjustment film 1170 has a nail pattern 1172 and an identification unit 1173 corresponding to the specific obstacle nail N1 that plays an important role in the game among the plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5. In addition to the above-mentioned pattern, a reference pattern R1 to R4 corresponding to the reference portions P1 to P4 located in the vicinity of the specific obstacle nail N1 and a pattern corresponding to the member provided with the reference portions P1 to P4 are appropriately provided. You can print it. Further, for example, the A4 size nail adjustment film 1170 is extracted only from the parts necessary for nail adjustment so as to include the specific obstacle nail N1, the reference parts P1 to P4, and the members provided with the guide parts P1 to P4. Therefore, the printing may be performed separately on a plurality of nail adjusting films 1170, or may be appropriately arranged and printed on one nail adjusting film 1170. As described above, when a resin film having substantially the same size as the game board 5 is used as the nail adjustment film 1170, it becomes difficult to carry the nail adjustment film 1170, or the nail adjustment film is used with respect to the game board 5. It may be difficult to align the 1170, but by using a compact resin film such as the A4 size nail adjustment film 1170, it is possible to prevent such difficulty from occurring. Further, when extracting only the portion necessary for nail adjustment, it is preferable that at least two or more reference portions P1 to P4 are provided in the extracted portion. As a result, regardless of whether the number of the nail adjustment films 1170 is a plurality of sheets or one sheet, for example, the nail adjustment films are aligned so that the two reference patterns R1 to R4 match the two reference portions P1 to P4. By aligning the nail adjustment film 1170 with the portion extracted from the nail adjustment film 1170, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be more reliably aligned with the portion extracted with the nail adjustment film 1170.

Further, in view of making it difficult to illegally align the nail adjusting film 1170 from above the glass plate 162 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4 as described above, the door window 101a 271 on the upper left of the plate, 276 on the upper right of the plate, 312a on the center of the plate, 404 on the left side of the door frame, 410b on the side window of the side window decoration member 412, and right side decoration on the door frame. The body 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 are partially provided with projecting portions having a shape protruding toward the center side of the game area (central portion of the glass plate 162), and these projecting portions abut against the glass plate 162. Alternatively, they may be provided so as to be close to each other. By doing so, even if the nail adjustment film 1170 has a size smaller than the size of the game board 5 (for example, A4 size), the alignment itself is achieved by contact with the protruding portion on the glass plate 162. With the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4, some fraudulent activity (for example, whether the nail is suitable for other fraudulent activities) using the illegally obtained nail adjustment film 1170 It can be prevented from being performed (such as helping to confirm the door).

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 185) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are transparently molded of polycarbonate resin, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or an unauthorized IC is mounted. Whether or not it is done) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the beta body, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2506, a second starting port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a general winning opening sensor 2401, and a general winning opening sensor 3001. , The first start port sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130, 132, 140, 142, 154 and the like. FIG. 154 is a schematic explanatory view of wiring routing from the function display unit on the main control board.

As shown in FIG. 130, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 input to the connection connector 1400a arranged so as to project rearward from the upper side of the back surface thereof, and is in a gaming state (game status). , Ordinary lottery results, special lottery results, etc. are displayed.

[5-5-1. Function display unit configuration]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and two for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B to the gate unit 2003. It includes a normal symbol display made of LEDs and a normal hold display made of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. It is equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-5-2. Noise countermeasures]
Here, a plurality of wirings by electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 and transmitting a control signal from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "wiring"). There is.) Will be described in detail.

As described above, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. As shown in FIG. 132, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is pulled from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. When it is turned, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is put together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, respectively, after the game panel 1100. It is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower side, and is pulled downward along the right side side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. It is turned.

Then, when the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and the function display unit connector MFCN is bent along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After being routed to the lower part of, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

In this way, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a long wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5, the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward toward the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, is routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the main control board box 1320. In the region where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 115. Will be placed in.

Further, as described above, the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is arranged behind the function display unit 1400. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 142, the wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131, bends upward on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. Then, it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010, and is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state of being close to (or in contact with) the above-mentioned wiring FCBL. Then, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is gathered together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and below the peripheral control unit 1500. It is routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Then, the wiring UPCBL is separated from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500, and is bent toward the left side along the upper side side of the drive board unit 1700. It is routed, routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, and then electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

In this way, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the panel drive board 1720 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, the upper right of the game board 5. The wiring FCBL routed from the corner to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and moves up and down along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the direction are grouped together and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Similar to the wiring FCBL described above, the region where the wiring UPCBL is routed in this way is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 115 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. It will be placed in front of the payout unit 560.

As described above, the payout unit 560 is composed of a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the guided game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

Further, as described above, the game ball B is polished in the island equipment of the game hall or rubbed against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to cause electromagnetic noise. Is released. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which can retain the game ball B, and the surrounding area.

Further, the main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. I have. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"), and such a built-in reset The forced reset by the circuit is a mechanism that cannot be invalidated by controlling it by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and again executes the main control side power on power processing described later. Will be reset. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a always occurs, so that it is built in the main control MPU 1310a as described later. The contents of the RAM will be completely erased (cleared). That is, if it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, RAM clear will be executed when the main control MPU 1310a is started again.

Further, in the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is adopted as the main control MPU 1310a package, and when the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are released. The main control board 1310 is in a state of protruding from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface). That is, the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a project toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

In this way, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are attached and their surroundings. Therefore, when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to electrostatic discharge, the function display is arranged in front of the payout unit 560. The wiring FCBL that electrically connects the unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 may be invaded, and the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 that are arranged behind the function display unit 1400 are electrically connected. Wiring may invade UPCBL. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may pop out and invade the wiring UPCBL, and conversely, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may pop out and invade the wiring FCBL.

For example, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is assumed to be mainly in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is routed in a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, the right side of the main control board box 1320 and about from the upper side of the main control board box 1320. Bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper or lower side of the main control board box 1320 where it has a quarter length), from the center to the left side of the lower side of the main control board 1310. After passing above the function display unit connector MFCN arranged closer to the main control board box 1320, the function display unit connector MFCN is bent toward the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320. When electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. Then, when passing through the region in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, electromagnetic noise is mainly transmitted through the wiring FCBL. The main control MPU 1310a may invade various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the control board box 1320, and the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the invading electromagnetic noise.

If a wiring accommodating groove is formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 instead of the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the wiring FCBL , The function is displayed after being accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove instead of the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320. It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic noise invades the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodating groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU1310a When passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the above, electromagnetic noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. The main control MPU 1310a may invade various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the direction, and the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the invading electromagnetic noise.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, the function display unit has a positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a. The connector MFCN for the main control board 1310 is arranged from the center of the lower side to the left side, and the main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. .. That is, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line of the main control MPU 1310a passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, whereas this center is provided. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

As a result, the main control MPU1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, so that the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is mainly controlled by the function display unit connector MFCN. It is possible to prevent the MPU 1310a from invading various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space that separates the MPU 1310a from the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, by arranging the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic wave noise invades the wiring FCBL, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected. , On the main control board 1310, or in the space where the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310, the electromagnetic wave noise invading through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated. ing. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged so that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter, referred to as “first wiring separation distance dimension”). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so that the electromagnetic waves that have entered the wiring FCBL This is to prevent noise from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding from the wiring FCBL toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the first wiring separation distance dimension.

Further, as described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is located in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. On the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 without being routed (or accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200). When it is routed downward along, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and after being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN. Since it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, the wiring FCBL routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and the wiring FCBL projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is possible to secure a large distance dimension (hereinafter, referred to as "second wiring separation distance dimension") from the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a. The second wiring separation distance dimension has a larger distance dimension than the first wiring separation distance dimension. As a result, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL penetrates into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrudes from the wiring FCBL toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a second wiring separation distance dimension. It can be prevented from doing so. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL, but the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to connect in a targeted manner. In this case, it is preferable that the panel relay board 1710 is provided with an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL described above (that is, a plurality of control signals transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide elements capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic noise in each of the wiring FCBLs). As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation results of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs), and as a filter circuit, a signal having a larger waveform width than such a waveform width is obtained. Designed to pass through.

In addition to resistors and filter circuits, EMC countermeasure components (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned as such elements. When coils and beads are used, electricity is supplied to a plurality of wiring FCBLs. They are inserted so as to be connected in series, and when a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wiring FCBLs. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit composed of a combination of a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wiring FCBLs, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. The circuits configured by combining the above may be inserted respectively.

Further, the panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the game board 5, and the large winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5. Large winning opening sensor 2403, general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5. The two wires from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects the above are electrically connected and integrated. That is, in the panel relay board 1710, in addition to the two wirings from various sensors, the wiring FCBL from the function display unit 1400 is also electrically connected and integrated. The two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The two wires from the sensor 2402 are directly electrically connected to the respective predetermined connectors of the main control board 1310 without passing through the panel relay board 1710.

In the panel relay board 1710, in addition to the two wires from the various sensors, the wiring FCBL from the function display unit 1400 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector 1710a shown in FIG. 132. There is. Therefore, when the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 can reduce electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. By providing an element that can be removed (that is, by providing an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise for a plurality of wiring FCBLs that transmit control signals from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400. ), It is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the two wires from various sensors.

In the present embodiment, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the panel drive board 1720 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length as described above. In particular, the wiring UPCBL routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward from the rear surface of the back box 3010 to form the back box 3010. Since a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface are grouped together and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, wiring is performed in this way. Similar to the wiring FCBL described above, electromagnetic noise may enter the region where the UPCBL is routed. As described above, this wiring UPCBL is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. After being routed above the predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector, so that the influence of electromagnetic noise due to the wiring UPCBL extends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500. There is a risk.

Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but the connectors CN2 to CN7 (see FIG. 182) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. CN8 and CN9 are arranged (see FIG. 182). Various corresponding wirings are electrically connected to such connectors CN2 to CN9. For this reason, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring UPCBL are arranged so as to intersect or come into contact with each other (a straddling arrangement), so that electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL pops out to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When it invades various electrically connected wirings, it is affected by the electromagnetic noise that has invaded the wiring UPCBL, and the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 is disturbed (for example, a pattern such as a black screen). Disturbance occurs).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 so as to be separated from the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. There is. As a result, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 is not arranged so as to intersect or come into contact with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Specifically, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not come into contact with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9, and is electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Does not come into contact with some of the various wirings connected to. In this embodiment, in order to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit described above, various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310 intersect or come into contact with the wiring UPCBL. It is arranged so as not to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the wiring UPCBL which is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. As a positional relationship with the mounting position of the peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. 154 (described later), the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510. .. That is, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are arranged. It is arranged to separate.

As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged away from the wiring UPCBL which is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 and mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 through a space that separates the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a. It is possible to prevent invasion of various pins. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged apart from the wiring UPCBL which is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, even if electromagnetic noise invades the wiring UPCBL, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected by the wiring UPCBL on the peripheral control board 1510 or in a space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC1510a. It is possible to attenuate the electromagnetic noise that enters. In this respect as well, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 are electrically connected via a wiring (not shown), and the wiring and the wiring UPCBL intersect or come into contact with each other. Since the arrangement is not such that it is arranged (a straddle arrangement), the electromagnetic noise that invades through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated in the panel drive board 1720, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted from the panel drive board 1720 via the wiring. It becomes extremely difficult to penetrate into the peripheral control board 1510, and the influence of electromagnetic noise does not reach the peripheral control board 1510. In this respect as well, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In the present embodiment, in the panel drive substrate 1720, the electromagnetic wave noise invading through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated by the ground (solid earth), but further, an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise is provided. (That is, elements capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic noise for a plurality of wiring UPCBLs that transmit control signals from the panel drive board 1720 to the upper left panel decorative board 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400, respectively. It is preferable to provide it). Thereby, the electromagnetic wave noise invading through the wiring UPCBL can be reliably attenuated or removed in the panel drive substrate 1720. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation results of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs), and as a filter circuit, a signal having a larger waveform width than such a waveform width is obtained. Designed to pass through.

In addition to resistors and filter circuits, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned as such elements. When coils and beads are used, electricity is applied to a plurality of wiring UPCBLs. They are inserted so as to be connected in series, and when a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wiring UPCBLs. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit composed of a combination of a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wiring UPCBLs, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. The circuits configured by combining the above may be inserted respectively.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine in which a display device (display unit) for displaying a normal figure fluctuation display game, a special figure fluctuation display game, a game state display, etc. is arranged on the surface of a game board has been proposed (for example, a special figure). Open 2016-154676 (paragraph [0014], paragraph [0070], FIG. 2, and FIG. 21). This display device (display unit) is displayed and controlled by the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device. By the way, when electromagnetic wave noise invades the wiring that electrically connects the display device (display unit) and the game control device (game control means), it enters the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device via this wiring. There was a risk of affecting it.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 134 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 and the like that control an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, and other boards (peripheral data ROM board, liquid crystal output board described later) and the like. ing. The configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 projecting outward from the upper surface and a lower fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130, 131, 133, 134, 136 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates through and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, which can accept the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. ing. The general winning opening 2001 on the left side is arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side is arranged near the right end in the game area 5a and lower than the center in the vertical direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the upper right corner of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side and higher than the first starting port 2002. The grand prize opening 2005 is arranged on the left side of the second starting port 2004 at a height between the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 (four general winning openings 2001) are winning openings (ball entrances) having similar uses, and the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate portion 2003 have similar uses. It is a similar winning opening (ball entry opening). Here, briefly explaining that the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate portion 2003 are winning ports (ball entry ports) having similar uses, the first starting port 2002 is a game ball B. The first special lottery result is obtained by executing the lottery by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the acceptance of the game ball B, and the second starting port 2004 is the main based on the acceptance of the game ball B. The second special lottery result is obtained by executing the lottery by the main control board 1310 of the control unit 1300, and the gate portion 2003 is the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the passage of the game ball B. This is because the result of the ordinary lottery can be obtained by executing the lottery by.

The table unit 2000 is mounted in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the side and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side slope, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200. It is attached to the right side of the front view of the 2300 and the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. A frame-shaped center accessory that is mounted above the attacker unit 2400, the start port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a gate portion 2003. It includes 2500 and a front effect unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the frame of the center accessory 2500.

[5-8-1. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted. The start port unit 2100 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and the rear side (decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144).

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first starting port 2002 is the center described later. It is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The start port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the taxiway in the back unit 3000. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 185).

The first start port sensor 3002 includes a first start port sensor main side (hereinafter, referred to as “first start port sensor main side 3002a”) and a first start port sensor slave side (hereinafter, “first start”). It is described as "mouth sensor slave side 3002b"), and the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b are at least erroneous detection prevention distance dimensions (14 mm in this embodiment). It has a large distance dimension as compared with the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball.) They are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction by more than that. Since the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b use the same non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port When the sensor slave side 3002b is arranged so as to be equal to or less than the false detection prevention distance dimension, the game ball B passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a is moved to the first start port together with the first start port sensor main side 3002a. It may be detected by the sensor slave side 3002b, and the game ball B passing through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b is detected by the first start port sensor slave side 3002b together with the first start port sensor main side 3002a. Because there are cases.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b are arranged apart by a dimensional distance (43 mm in the present embodiment) larger than the false detection prevention distance dimension. As a result, when the first start port sensor main side 3002a detects the game ball B passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, the electrical influence of the detection extends to the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. As a result, the physical structure allows the first start port sensor slave side 3002b to erroneously detect that the game ball B has not yet passed through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. When the first start port sensor slave side 3002b detects a game ball B that can be prevented and passes through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b, the electrical effect of the detection. Is extended to the first start port sensor main side 3002a, so that the first start port sensor main side 3002a is in a state where the game ball B has already passed through the first start port sensor main side 3002a. The physical structure can prevent erroneous detection. In this way, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is detected by the first start port sensor main side 3002a by first passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, and then the first start port sensor slave. After passing through the side 3002b and being detected by the first start port sensor slave side 3002b, the sensor is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

In the present embodiment, the first start is started by adopting the first start port sensor 3002 composed of two sensors (double sensors), the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. The game ball B received in the mouth 2002 can be reliably detected. An illegal ball (game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball or a synthetic resin ball having the same diameter) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. ) Is detected and notified by the first start port sensor 3002 composed of two sensors (double sensors), a detailed description of the fraud detection process will be described later.

[5-8-2. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be received at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

In the side unit 2200, the rightmost general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at the same height as the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 on the intermediate side in the left-right direction is on the right side. It opens upward at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001, and the leftmost general winning opening 2001 opens toward the upper left of the front view at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001 on the intermediate side. There is.

The side unit 2200 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and the rear side (decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 are in a state of protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the taxiway of the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 185).

[5-8-3. Side slope]
The side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so that the right end is lowered when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the shelf portion 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

The side slope 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right. The side slope 2300 is formed to be transparent as a whole, and the rear side (decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144).

[5-8-4. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 is formed to be substantially entirely transparent, and the rear side (decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144). The attacker unit 2400 includes one of the four general winning openings 2001, the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 136 and the like).

The attacker unit 2400 has an external shape in front view, which is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction. The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward in the upper right corner, and is capable of opening upward at a position to the left of the general winning opening 2001. (2) Starting port 2004 is arranged. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward is arranged at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004.

In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than that of the game ball B. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and opens upward, and the large winning opening 2005 is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It is five times as wide and opens upward.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a second starting port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 185).

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starting door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starting door 2004 and the second starting door 2411 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003. The starting port solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to a special lottery result or a second special lottery result.

As shown in FIG. 137, the attacker unit 2400 has an upper right left passage 2421 and an upper right right passage 2422 and an upper right right passage 2422 on which the game balls B can flow downward on both the left and right sides of the general winning opening 2001 arranged in the upper right. The upper right left guide shelf 2423, which is inclined to the left so as to merge with the upper right left passage 2421 from the downstream end of the general winning opening 2001, and the lower right lower left guide shelf 2423. The upper guide shelf 2424 of the second starting port extending to the left from directly below the upper right left passage 2421 toward the second starting port 2004, and the left end side of the second starting port 2004 to be lowered. From the second starting port lower guide shelf 2425 extending to the left and the portion below the second starting port lower guidance shelf 2425 that is spaced from the left end to the left of the second starting port lower guidance shelf 2425. The large winning opening upper guide shelf 2426 extending to the left so as to be lower toward the large winning opening 2005, and the lower side of the large winning opening extending to the left so as to be lower from the left end to the left end side of the large winning opening 2005. It is equipped with a guide shelf 2427.

Further, the attacker unit 2400 opens to the left on the right end side of the second starting port upper guide shelf 2424, and guides the game ball B below the second starting port 2004 and the large winning opening 2005. A central left passage that opens upward between the passage 2428, the lower guide shelf 2425 of the second starting port, and the upper guide shelf 2426 of the large winning opening, and guides the game ball B below the large winning opening 2005. 2429 and.

The second starting port door 2411 is formed in a plate shape extending to the left and right so that the left end is lowered as well as extending back and forth, and the second starting port 2004 is opened upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. Can be opened and closed. The second starting port door 2411 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction near the upper end of the second starting port 2004. The second start port door 2411 closes the second start port 2004 by moving forward, and guides the game ball B that has been distributed through the upper guide shelf 2424 of the second start port to the left, and then guides the second start port to the left. It can be delivered onto the lower guide shelf 2425. The second start port door 2411 is driven by the start port solenoid 2412 and retracts backward to open the second start port 2004 and accept the game ball B that has flowed down to the second start port 2004. it can. The second start port door 2411 closes the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second start port 2004 when the start port solenoid is ON (when energized). Let me.

The grand prize opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape that extends back and forth and extends left and right so that the left end is lowered, and opens and closes the grand prize opening 2005 that opens upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. It is possible. The large winning opening door 2413 closes the large winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and guides the game ball B that has been distributed through the large winning opening upper guidance shelf 2426 to the left, and then guides the game ball B to the left, and then the large winning opening lower guidance shelf. It can be delivered to 2427. In addition, the large winning opening door 2413 opens the large winning opening 2005 by retreating by driving the attacker solenoid 2414, and the game ball B circulated through the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is used as the large winning opening 2005. Can be accepted. The large winning opening door 2413 closes the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the large winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

With the attacker unit 2400 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 is located below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 described later (slightly to the left of the lower side). The second starting port 2004 is located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and the grand prize opening 2005 is located below the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500. Further, when attached to the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N exist between the lower end of the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (general winning opening 2001).

Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the game ball B is moved from the stage 2503. Even if it is released, it will not be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (right guide passage 2510) of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Downstream of the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, the upper right left passage 2421, the general winning opening 2001, and the upper right right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left, and the game ball that flows down the right side of the center accessory 2500. B will enter any of them.

When the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is received by the general winning opening 2001, after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401. , It is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. On the other hand, when the game ball B enters the upper right left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 or the upper right right passage 2422 on the right side without being accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it falls on the upper guide shelf 2424 of the second starting port. Then, it is distributed to the second starting port 2004 side (left side). When the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411, the left end side of the second starting port door 2411 is inclined so as to be low, so that the left end side on the second starting port door 2411 is left. The second start port lower guide shelf 2425 is circulated, and the second start port lower guide shelf 2425 is discharged from the left end to the left. If the second starting port 2004 is opened when the game ball B passes through the guide shelf 2424 above the second starting port, the game ball B is accepted into the second starting port 2004 with a high probability.

After being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. If the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not accepted by the second starting port 2004, it is released to the left large winning opening 2005 side via the guide shelf 2425 below the second starting port. .. When the game ball B released from the upper right left passage 2421 to the second start port upper guide shelf 2424 enters the central right passage 2428 from the right end side of the second start port upper guide shelf 2424, the second start port 2004 , There is no chance of being accepted into the big winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening 2002, and the game is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The second starting port lower guide shelf 2425 is arranged above the large winning opening 2005 and the first starting port 2002, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are located on the left side of the second starting port lower guidance shelf 2425. Has been planted. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the guide shelf 2425 on the lower side of the second starting port flows down to any of the first starting port 2002 side, the big winning opening 2005 side, and the central left passage 2429 side. Become. If the large winning opening 2005 is closed by the large winning opening door 2413 when flowing down to the large winning opening 2005 side, it is guided to the left by the large winning opening door 2413, and the large winning opening lower guide shelf 2427 is pushed. It is released to the left through. When the large winning opening door 2413 that closes the large winning opening 2005 is retracted and the large winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball B that has flowed down from the guidance shelf 2425 below the second starting opening to the large winning opening 2005 side. However, it is accepted in the grand prize opening 2005. After being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

The game ball B that has entered the central left passage 2429 from the lower guide shelf 2425 of the second starting port and the game ball B that has been released to the left from the lower guide shelf 2427 of the grand prize opening are played through the out port 1008. It is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the panel 1100.

The game ball B that has flowed down from the guide shelf 2425 on the lower side of the second starting port to the side of the first starting port 2002 via the obstacle nail N may be received by the first starting port 2002. The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the first start port sensor 3002 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. On the other hand, the game ball B that has not been accepted by the first start port 2002 passes through the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

[5-8-5. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, etc., and slightly above the center of the front view, and is a panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is mounted on the front of 1110. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. it can. Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

In the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It is not possible to invade.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that the warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter and the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released. It includes a warp outlet 2502 that is open inside, and a stage 2503 that can roll the game ball B discharged from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then discharge it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). When attached to 1110), the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is formed in a wavy shape so as to be slightly higher than both the left and right sides. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center of the left-right direction and the lowest portion (valley) on both the left and right sides are lowered toward the front. Therefore, the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from those parts.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) at the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is located on the right side of the front component 1000 in a part slightly below the upper right corner in the front view (a part directly below the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 when assembled on the game board 5). A gate space forming portion 2505 that forms a space having a predetermined size through which the game ball B can flow between the rail 1005 and the game ball B from the downstream end of the gate space forming portion 2505 along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in the front view. It is provided with a right guide passage 2510 that allows the flow down, guides it slightly to the left near the lower end, and then discharges it downward.

The center accessory 2500 is provided with a gate portion 2003 in the center of the gate space forming portion 2505, and a gate sensor 2506 for detecting a game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is attached. The gate space forming portion 2505 has a size that allows the game ball B to be distributed on both the left and right sides of the gate portion 2003. In the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted above the gate portion 2003.

The right guide passage 2510 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510 is located slightly to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. There is.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the distance between the right side of the center of the upper outer peripheral surface and the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is formed so as to be far apart. As a result, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505 and the right guide passage 2510 And always circulate and flow down above the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, in order for the game ball B to pass through the gate portion 2003, it is necessary to hit the game ball to the right, and by hitting the right when the big winning opening 2005 is open, there is a high probability that the game ball will reach the big winning opening 2005. B can be accepted.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a sub-function display unit 2520 in a frame in the upper right corner. The sub-function display unit 2520 has a plurality of full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2520 is interlocked with the normal symbol display, the first special symbol display, and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the gate unit is determined by LED lighting / blinking, emission color, and the like. The normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B to 2003, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are displayed. Is what you do.

Since the center accessory 2500 is substantially entirely transparent, the flange-shaped portion that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is also transparently formed. Therefore, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear panel plate 1110 is visually recognized from the front through the center accessory 2500 as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 144. be able to. As a result, when assembled on the game board 5, the interrupted portion between the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the table effect unit 2600 described later is made as narrow as possible. It is possible to enhance the continuity between the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 to give a sense of unity.

[5-8-6. Table production unit]
Next, the table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158 and the like. FIG. 155 is a front view of the front effect unit. FIG. 156 is a front view showing a state in which the first pattern is light-emitting decorated in the front effect unit, and FIG. 157 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern is light-emitting decorated in the front effect unit. FIG. 158 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern of the front effect unit, which is different from the present embodiment, is luminescent and decorated.

The front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500, and allows light to be incident from the transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 2601 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500 and the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601. For the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 on which a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 are luminescent and decorated with light, and for the second pattern 2620 which is luminescent and decorated by incident light from the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601. The second pattern decorative substrate 2622 on which the plurality of LEDs 2621 of the above are mounted, and the plurality of condensing lenses 2623 provided between the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601 and the LED 2621 to collect the light from the LED 2621. It has. The LEDs 2611 and LED2621 are full-color LEDs.

The light guide plate 2601 has a first pattern 2610 (see FIG. 156) formed by innumerable uneven upper reflection portions that reflect only light from above and forward only light from the right direction. It includes a second pattern 2620 (see FIG. 157), which is formed by a myriad of uneven right reflecting portions to be reflected. That is, the front effect unit 2600 can display the first pattern 2610 by emitting light when the LED of the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 emits light, and when the LED 2621 of the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 emits light, the first pattern 2610 emits light. The two patterns 2620 can be displayed by light emission.

In the light guide plate 2601, the innumerable upper reflection portions forming the first pattern 2610 and the innumerable right reflection portions forming the second pattern 2620 are finely formed with irregularities, and the first When the LED 2611 of the decorative substrate 2612 for the pattern and the LED 2621 of the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern are not emitted, they appear transparent, and various decorative bodies and effect display devices 1600 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side. The effect image and the like displayed on the screen can be visually recognized in good condition.

The plurality of upper reflecting portions forming the first pattern 2610 and the right reflecting portions forming the second pattern 2620 are in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621. It has a flat surface that extends and is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate 2601. The upper reflection part and the right reflection part are recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The upper reflection unit and the right reflection unit reflect the light incident from the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2601. On the other hand, the light incident from the uncorresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 is reflected in the direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2601. Therefore, only the light from the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 can reach the eyes of the player located in front of the light guide plate 2601.

A plurality of LEDs 2611 mounted on the lower surface of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and are arranged in four groups of the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d. It is divided. The first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are arranged so as to make two rounds of a predetermined number (here, three) from the left.

As shown in FIG. 156, the first pattern 2610 is a pattern related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The first pattern 2610 is a pattern composed of a plurality of equilateral triangles bounded by each extension of the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the upper left diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 (see FIG. 172). .. The first pattern 2610 is a pattern of six large triangles having substantially the same size as an equilateral triangle formed by gathering four contours of one equilateral triangle in the decorative pattern 1150, and the contour of one equilateral triangle in the decorative pattern 1150. It is composed of multiple small triangular patterns that fit inside the. The six large triangle patterns are arranged in a circular shape around the center of the game area 5a so that the entire pattern is a hexagon, and a plurality of small triangle patterns surround the six large triangle patterns. Have been placed.

The large triangle pattern of the first pattern 2610 seems to be a state in which a plurality of equilateral triangles of different sizes are eccentric toward the apex side near the center of the game area 5a, and are overlapped so as to be smaller in order. It is formed in a nice pattern. The small triangular pattern of the first pattern 2610 is formed in a pattern in which the contour lines of equilateral triangles are arranged concentrically.

The first pattern 2610 has a first pattern portion 2610a composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the first LED 2611a and a second pattern portion 2610b composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the second LED 2611b. And the third pattern portion 2610c composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the third LED2611c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d composed of a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the fourth LED2611d. It is configured.

The large triangle pattern in which a plurality of equilateral triangles having different sizes in the first pattern 2610 are superposed has the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c so that the sizes become smaller in order. , The fourth pattern portion 2610d, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c are eccentrically overlapped with respect to the center side of the game area 5a. Occasionally, the small triangle pattern consisting of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles in the first pattern 2610 has the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the first pattern portion 2610c so that the sizes become smaller in order. The four pattern portions 2610d are arranged concentrically in this order.

As shown in FIG. 157, the second pattern 2620 is a pattern having a guide (message) to the player composed of the characters “CHANGE!”.

As a second embodiment of the front effect unit 2600, the second pattern 2630 as shown in FIG. 158 may be displayed by light emission. The second pattern 2630 is a pattern related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The second pattern 2630 is a geometric pattern pattern in which the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the upper left diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 are extended by a thick width (see FIG. 176).

Next, the light emitting effect by the table effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED 2611a of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the first pattern portion 2610a, and the remaining second pattern portion 2610b and the third pattern portion are emitted. Since the 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the second pattern 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the first pattern portion 2610a appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the second LED 2611b of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the second pattern portion 2610b, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a and the third Since the pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the second pattern 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern portion 2610b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, when the third LED 2611c of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the third pattern portion 2610c, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a and the second Since the pattern portion 2610b, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the second pattern 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the third pattern portion 2610c appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the fourth LED 2611d of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a and the second Since the pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the second pattern 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth pattern portion 2610d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

Then, in the first pattern 2610, in the large triangular pattern portion, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the first pattern portion 2610a, and the second pattern portion 2610b and the third pattern portion 2610c are eccentrically overlapped with respect to the center side of the game area 5a, and in the small triangular pattern portion, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c , The fourth pattern portion 2610d, which is concentrically arranged toward the center. Therefore, when the first LED2611a, the second LED2611b, the third LED2611c, and the fourth LED2611d are made to emit light in this order, the first pattern is emitted. The light is emitted in the order of the part 2610a, the second picture part 2610b, the third picture part 2610c, and the fourth picture part 2610d, and a light emitting effect like an animation that moves from the outside to the center is performed. Can be done.

On the other hand, when the fourth LED 2611d, the third LED 2611c, the second LED 2611b, and the first LED 2611a are made to emit light in this order, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the third pattern portion 2610c, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the first pattern portion 2610a are in that order. It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect such as an animation that emits light and moves from the center side to the outside.

Further, when the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are made to emit light in different colors, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are generated. , Each can emit different colors.

Further, when a plurality of LEDs 2621 of the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern are made to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front in the second pattern 2620, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a and the second pattern Since the portions 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern 2620 appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the second pattern 2620 composed of the characters "CHANGE!" Can be made to emit light by the plurality of LEDs 2621.

As described above, according to the front effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns (first pattern portion 2610a, second pattern portion 2610b, third pattern portion 2610c, third pattern portion 2610c, th. Since the four pattern portions 2610d) can be made to emit light, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display an animation or the like, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, since it is possible to easily secure a large space behind the light guide plate 2601, another production unit can be arranged in that space, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be enhanced. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, since the light guide plate 2601 allows the semi-transparent first pattern 2610 to appear in front of the back unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600 to show a light emitting decoration that moves like an animation, a conventional light guide plate is used. It can give a strong impact to the player who is accustomed to the light emission effect, which can surprise and entertain the player, and also make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, in the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630, since the patterns are related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, the inside and outside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 are continuous. The decoration with a sense of unity can be shown to the player, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

Further, since only the player seated in the front front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emitting display of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 by the light guide plate 2601 well, other games away from the front. It is difficult for a person to see the light emitting display of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620, and it is difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2601 is being performed. It is possible to suppress the attention of other players, and it is possible to play the game without worrying about other players, so that the game can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 159 and the like. FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and the start opening unit 2100. (1) A first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the start port 2002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 185). ..

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back lower effect unit 3100 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and a back upper effect unit 3200 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back right effect unit 3400 attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided. ..

Further, the back unit 3000 receives the game ball B received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, respectively, and downward. It is provided with a taxiway for discharging into the substrate holder 1200 of the above.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached, near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side (see FIGS. 133 and 134).

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

[5-9-1. Backside production unit]
Next, the underside effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162 and the like. FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view of the under-back movable decorative body provided in the under-back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the under-back movable decorative body provided in the under-back effect unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 162 is a front view showing the movement of the lower back movable decorative body. The underside effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

The under-back effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the under-back movable decorative body 3110 having an equilateral triangle bottom and a triangular pyramid shape pointed forward, and the effect display device 1600, and has a back surface in the center in the left-right direction. The lower back moving arm 3130 (see FIG. 165 and the like) and the lower back moving arm 3130, to which the lower movable decorative body 3110 is attached and both ends in the left-right direction are supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the lower back moving arm 3130 are moved in the vertical direction. It is equipped with an under-back elevating mechanism 3150 for moving.

The lower back movable decorative body 3110 includes a disk-shaped decorative body base 3111 attached to the lower back moving arm 3130, and a lower back rotation drive motor attached to the rear surface of the decorative body base 3111 with the rotation axis protruding forward. The 3112, the drive gear 3113 attached to the rotating shaft of the lower back rotary drive motor 3112, the transmission gear member 3114 rotated by the drive gear 3113 and rotatably attached to the decorative body base 3111, and the decorative body. A rear base 3115 that is rotatably supported by the base 3111 and has a flat plate shape and a substantially regular triangular outer shape, a rear decorative portion 3116 that is attached to the front surface of the rear base 3115 and is rotated by the transmission gear member 3114, and a rear decoration. A middle-stage base 3117 that is arranged in front of the portion 3116 and is rotatably supported by a rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and rotated by a drive gear 3113, and a middle-stage decorative portion 3118 attached to the front surface of the middle-stage base 3117. The front decorative portion 3119, which is arranged in front of the middle decorative portion 3118 and penetrates the middle decorative portion 3118, the middle base 3117, and the rear decorative portion 3116 and has the rear end attached to the decorative base 3111, and the decorative base. The under-back rotation detection sensor 3120, which is attached to the rear surface of the 3111 to detect the rotation position of the rear-stage base 3115, and the under-back rear decoration, which is attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 3111 to illuminate the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 The substrate 3121 is attached to the front decorative portion 3119 between the middle base 3117 and the middle decorative portion 3118, and the back lower front decorative substrate 3122 for luminescent decoration of the middle decorative portion 3118 and the front decorative portion 3119 is provided. ing.

The lower back rotation drive motor 3112 is attached to the decorative body base 3111 at a position eccentric from the center of the disk-shaped decorative body base 3111 so that the rotation axis projects forward. The transmission gear member 3114 is attached to the decorative body base 3111 so that the center of rotation is eccentric with respect to the center of the disk-shaped decorative body base 3111. The transmission gear member 3114 has a spur gear-shaped first gear portion 3114a that meshes with the drive gear 3113, and a spur gear-shaped second gear portion 3114b that integrally rotates on the front side of the first gear portion 3114a. .. The first gear portion 3114a meshes with the drive gear 3113, and the second gear portion 3114b meshes with the rear gear portion 3116d of the rear stage decorative portion 3116 described later.

The rear-stage base 3115 includes a bearing hole 3115a into which the outer periphery of the disk-shaped decorative base 3111 is slidably inserted, and a detection piece 3115b detected by the under-back rotation detection sensor 3120. The rear base 3115 constitutes the bottom surface of the triangular pyramid-shaped lower back movable decorative body 3110.

The rear-stage decorative portion 3116 is formed in the shape of the rear side when the triangular pyramid pointed forward is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and the three side plate portions having a trapezoidal shape with a narrow front side and a flat plate shape. It is composed of 3116a and an equilateral triangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 3116b connecting the front end sides of the three side plate portions 3116a. The rear-stage decorative portion 3116 is formed in a container shape in which the rear side is open by three side plate portions 3116a and one front plate portion 3116b, and the rear-stage base 3115 is closed at the rear end so that the open rear side is closed. Is installed. Further, the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 has a bearing hole 3116c having a diameter smaller than that of the decorative body base 3111 and penetrating the front and rear at the center of the front plate portion 3116b, and a bearing hole 3116c formed on the rear side of the front plate portion 3116b. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped rear gear portion 3116d that penetrates. The barrel portion 3117b of the middle stage base 3117, which will be described later, is inserted into the bearing hole 3116c so as to be relatively rotatable. The rear gear portion 3116d meshes with the second gear portion 3114b of the transmission gear member 3114. The rear-stage decorative portion 3116 is formed so as to have translucency.

The middle base 3117 is an equilateral triangular and flat plate-shaped main body 3117a smaller than the front plate 3116b of the rear decorative portion 3116, penetrates the center of the main body 3117a, and is cylindrical from the rear surface of the main body 3117a to the rear. It includes a protruding axle cylinder portion 3117b and a spur gear-shaped middle gear portion 3117c formed at the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the axle cylinder portion 3117b. The axle tube portion 3117b is inserted into the bearing hole 3116c of the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 so as to be relatively rotatable. The middle gear portion 3117c meshes with the drive gear 3113.

The outer shape of the middle decorative portion 3118 is formed in an intermediate shape when a triangular pyramid pointed forward is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and three side plate portions 3118a having a trapezoidal shape with a narrow front side and a flat plate shape. It is composed of an equilateral triangular and flat front plate portion 3118b connecting the front end sides of the three side plate portions 3118a. The middle-stage decorative portion 3118 is formed in a container shape in which the rear side is open by three side plate portions 3118a and one front plate portion 3118b, and the middle-stage base 3117 is closed at the rear end so that the open rear side is closed. (Main body 3117a) is attached. Further, the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 is provided with a through hole 3118c that penetrates back and forth at the center of the front plate portion 3118b. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed so as to have translucency.

The outer shape of the front-stage decorative portion 3119 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape narrowed forward. The front-stage decorative portion 3119 includes a columnar front-stage shaft portion 3119a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface of the triangular pyramid. The front shaft portion 3119a is inserted into the shaft cylinder portion 3117b of the middle base 3117 so as to be relatively rotatable, and the rear end is attached to the decorative base 3111. The front-stage decorative portion 3119 is formed so as to have translucency.

A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction are mounted on the front surface and the rear surface of the back bottom rear decorative substrate 3121. The front lower back decorative substrate 3122 has a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that irradiate light outward in the normal direction and a plurality of full-color LEDs (top view type) that irradiate light forward. ) And are implemented. The lower back front decorative substrate 3122 is attached to the front shaft portion 3119a of the front decoration portion 3119.

The lower back moving arm 3130 is formed to have a length straddling the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is attached to the center of the front surface. Further, a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted in a row on the front surface of the lower back moving arm 3130. In order to increase the rigidity of the lower back moving arm 3130, a metal reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm (not shown) is provided so as to cover the back side thereof. Of both ends of the reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm in the left-right direction, one of which is arranged near the lower back elevating drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 186) is made of metal and can be slid in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. A metal cylindrical rod that is attached to the lower back moving arm slide rail 3151ns (see FIG. 264 (a)) and is not placed near the lower back elevating drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 186). Sliding part for the lower back movement arm (not shown) that slides along (moves while sliding the surface of the metal columnar rod along the longitudinal direction of the columnar rod) (even if it is molded with a conductive resin) Alternatively, it may be molded from a non-conductive resin.) Is attached. In addition, both ends in the left-right direction of the back lower movement arm reinforcing plate may be configured to be attached to metal slide rails 3151ns and 3151ns for the back lower movement arm, respectively.

The lower back elevating mechanism 3150 is attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower back elevating mechanism 3150 is a rod-shaped lower back that rotates about one end side by being driven by the lower back elevating drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 186) and the lower back elevating drive motor 3151. It is equipped with an elevating arm. The tip of the lower back lifting arm is connected to the lower back moving arm 3130, and by rotating the lower back lifting arm by the lower back lifting drive motor 3151, the lower back moving arm 3130 is moved via the lower back lifting arm. It can be raised and lowered.

Subsequently, the operation of the underside effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the under-back effect unit 3100 forms one triangular pyramid by matching the vertices of the respective triangles of the rear-stage decorative portion 3116, the middle-stage decorative portion 3118, and the front-stage decorative portion 3119 of the under-back movable decorative body 3110. Along with the formation, one apex of the triangle is facing upward. Further, in a normal state, the lower back moving arm 3130 is located at the lower moving end by the lower back raising / lowering mechanism 3150. In this normal state, the pointed apex of the front end of the triangular pyramid in the lower back movable decoration 3110 is located at substantially the same height as the stage 2503 in the center accessory 2500, and most of the lower back movable decoration 3110. Is in a standby position located below the effect display device 1600. In this state, the lower back moving arm 3130 and the lower back elevating mechanism 3150 are located behind the lower left decorative body 3380 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the lower right decorative body 3480 of the back right effect unit 3400, which will be described later. , It is invisible from the front (see Fig. 135, etc.).

In a normal state, when the lower back moving arm 3130 is moved to the upper moving end by the lower back raising / lowering drive motor 3151 via the lower back raising / lowering arm, the upper apex of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is the game area in the front view. It is in the state of the first united position located near the center of 5a (see FIG. 170).

The under-back effect unit 3100 moves the under-back movable decorative body 3110 to the most downwardly-moved standby position (original position) and the most upwardly by the under-back elevating mechanism 3150 via the under-back moving arm 3130. It can be freely moved up and down with and from the united position. In the present embodiment, the second united position is set, in which the distance of 1/7 of the total moving distance from the standby position to the first united position is moved from the first united position to the standby position side.

In the normal state, the under-back effect unit 3100 forms one triangular pyramid by matching the vertices of the respective triangles of the rear-stage decorative portion 3116, the middle-stage decorative portion 3118, and the front-stage decorative portion 3119 of the under-back movable decorative body 3110. In addition to being formed, one apex of the triangle is in a state of facing upward (see FIG. 162 (a) and the like). In this state, the detection piece 3115b of the rear base 3115 is detected by the back bottom rotation detection sensor 3120, and the original position (standby position) of the rear decoration portion 3116 and the middle decoration portion 3118 of the back bottom movable decorative body 3110. Become.

Then, when the drive gear 3113 is rotated by the under-back rotary drive motor 3112 in a state where the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the first united position, the second united position, or the like, the drive gear 3113 has the first gear portion. The transmission gear member 3114 with which the 3114a is engaged rotates in the direction opposite to the drive gear 3113, and is engaged with the second gear portion 3114b of the transmission gear member 3114 via the rear gear portion 3116d of the rear decoration portion 3116. , The rear-stage decorative portion 3116 rotates in the direction opposite to that of the transmission gear member 3114. That is, the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 rotates in the same direction as the drive gear 3113. On the other hand, in addition to the first gear portion 3114a of the transmission gear member 3114, the middle gear portion 3117c of the middle stage base 3117 is meshed with the drive gear 3113, and the middle stage decorative portion 3118 is the drive gear via the middle stage gear portion 3117c. It rotates in the opposite direction to 3113. Since the front-stage decorative portion 3119 is attached to the decorative body base 3111, the front-stage decorative portion 3119 does not rotate even if the drive gear 3113 is rotated by the lower back rotation drive motor 3112 (FIG. 162 (b). reference).

Therefore, when the lower back rotation drive motor 3112 is driven, the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 rotate in opposite directions while the front-stage decorative portion 3119 remains stopped. In the present embodiment, each gear ratio is set so that when the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 makes one rotation, the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 makes two rotations.

Further, in the under-back effect unit 3100, the under-back movable decorative body 3110 is made to emit light as appropriate by the LEDs mounted on the under-back movable decorative substrate 3121 and the under-back front decorative substrate 3122, respectively. The light emitting decoration can be performed, and the rear decoration part 3116 and the middle decoration part 3118 can be light-emitting decorated even while rotating.

Further, in the under-back effect unit 3100, the under-back moving arm 3130 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs provided on the under-back moving arm 3130, and a plurality of under-back moving arms 3130 can be decorated. By causing the LEDs to emit light in order toward the lower back movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect such that light flows to the lower back movable decorative body 3110. Further, by making the plurality of LEDs of the lower back moving arm 3130 emit light in order so as to move away from the lower back movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect such that light flows from the lower back movable decorative body 3110.

[5-9-2. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 159 and the like. The back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back-up effect unit 3200 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the effect display device 1600 and the back-up movable decorative body 3210 having a regular triangle bottom and a triangular pyramid shape pointed forward, and the back surface is in the center of the left-right direction. The upper movable decorative body 3210 is attached, and the back upper moving arm 3230 (see FIG. 165 and the like) and the back upper moving arm 3230, which are supported so that both ends in the left-right direction can be moved in the vertical direction, are moved in the vertical direction. It is equipped with a back-up elevating mechanism 3250 for moving.

The upper back movable decorative body 3210 has the same configuration as the lower back movable decorative body 3110. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back-up movable decorative body 3210 is attached to the disc-shaped decorative body base attached to the back-up moving arm 3230 and the rear surface of the decorative body base with the rotation axis protruding forward. The back-up rotary drive motor 3212 (see FIG. 186), the drive gear attached to the rotary shaft of the back-up rotary drive motor 3212, and the drive gear, which are rotated by the drive gear and rotatably attached to the decorative base. The rear decorative part 3216, which is rotatably supported by the transmission gear member and the rear base, which is flat and has a substantially regular triangular outer shape, and which is attached to the front surface of the rear base and is rotated by the transmission gear member. And the middle stage base which is arranged in front of the rear stage decoration part 3216 and is rotatably supported by the rear stage decoration part 3216 and rotated by the drive gear, and the middle stage decoration part 3218 attached to the front surface of the middle stage base. , The front decorative portion 3219, which is arranged in front of the middle decorative portion 3218 and whose rear end is attached to the decorative base through the middle decorative portion 3218, the middle base, and the rear decorative portion 3216, and the decorative base. The backside rotation detection sensor 3220 (see FIG. 186), which is attached to the rear surface to detect the rotation position of the rear stage base, and the back surface, which is attached to the front surface of the decorative body base and for emitting and decorating the rear stage decorative portion 3216 The rear decorative substrate is attached to the front decorative portion 3219 between the middle base and the middle decorative portion 3218, and the back upper front decorative substrate for luminescent decoration of the middle decorative portion 3218 and the front decorative portion 3219 is provided. There is.

The outer shape of the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 is formed in the shape of the rear side when the triangular pyramid pointed forward is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction. The rear-stage decorative portion 3116 is formed so as to have translucency. The outer shape of the middle decorative portion 3118 is formed in an intermediate shape when a triangular pyramid sharpened forward is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed so as to have translucency. The outer shape of the front-stage decorative portion 3119 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape narrowed forward. The front-stage decorative portion 3119 is formed so as to have translucency.

A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction are mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the lower back decorative substrate. The front lower back decorative substrate has a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction and a plurality of full-color LEDs (top view type) that irradiate light toward the front. And are implemented.

The back-up moving arm 3230 is formed to have a length straddling the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction, and the back-up movable decoration 3210 is attached to the center of the front surface. Further, a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted in a row on the front surface of the back-up moving arm 3230. In order to increase the rigidity of the back surface moving arm 3230, a metal reinforcing plate for the back surface moving arm (not shown) is provided so as to cover the back surface side thereof. Of both ends of the reinforcing plate for the back-up moving arm in the left-right direction, one of which is arranged near the back-up lift drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 186) is made of metal and can be slid in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. A metal columnar rod that is attached to the slide rail 3251ns for the back-up moving arm (see FIG. 264 (a)) and is not placed near the back-up / down drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 186). Sliding part for a back-up movement arm (not shown) that slides along (moves while sliding the surface of a metal columnar rod along the longitudinal direction of the columnar rod) (even if it is molded with a conductive resin) Alternatively, it may be molded from a non-conductive resin.) Is attached. In addition, both ends in the left-right direction of the back-up moving arm reinforcing plate may be configured to be attached to the metal back-up moving arm slide rails 3251ns and 3251ns, respectively.

The back-up elevating mechanism 3250 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back-up elevating mechanism 3250 is a rod-shaped back-up that rotates about one end side by being driven by the back-up elevating drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 186) and the back-up elevating drive motor 3251. It is equipped with an elevating arm. The tip of the back-up lifting arm is connected to the back-up moving arm 3230, and by rotating the back-up lifting arm by the back-up lifting drive motor 3251, the back-up moving arm 3230 is moved via the back-up lifting arm. It can be raised and lowered.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up effect unit 3200 will be described. In a normal state, the back-up effect unit 3200 forms one triangular pyramid by matching the vertices of the respective triangles of the back-up movable decorative body 3210, the rear-stage decorative portion 3216, the middle-stage decorative portion 3218, and the front-stage decorative portion 3219. Along with the formation, one apex of the triangle is facing downward. In this state, since the upper back movable decorative body 3210 has the same configuration as the lower back movable decorative body 3110, a detection piece (not shown) corresponding to the detection piece 3115b of the rear base 3115 of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is on the back side. It is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3220, and also becomes the original position (standby position) with the rear-stage decorative portion 3216 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3218 of the back-up movable decorative body 3210. Further, in a normal state, the back-up moving arm 3230 is located at the upper moving end by the back-up elevating mechanism 3250. In this normal state, the sharp apex of the front end of the triangular pyramid in the back-up movable decoration 3210 is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, and the back-up movable decoration 3210. Most of them are in the standby position located above the effect display device 1600. In this state, the back upper moving arm 3230 and the back upper elevating mechanism 3250 are located behind the back upper left decorative body 3370 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back upper right decorative body 3470 of the back right effect unit 3400, which will be described later. It is invisible from the front (see Fig. 135, etc.).

In a normal state, when the back-up moving arm 3230 is moved to the lower moving end by the back-up lifting drive motor 3251 via the back-up lifting arm, the lower apex of the back-up movable decoration 3210 is played in the front view. It is in the state of the first united position located near the center of the region 5a (see FIG. 170).

In the back-up effect unit 3200, the back-up movable decoration body 3210 is moved to the most upward position (original position) and the most downward position via the back-up movement arm 3230 by the back-up elevating mechanism 3250. It can be freely moved up and down with and from the united position. In the present embodiment, the second united position is set, in which the distance of 1/7 of the total moving distance from the standby position to the first united position is moved from the first united position to the standby position side.

When the back-up rotation drive motor 3212 was driven in the state where the back-up movable decorative body 3210 was moved to the first united position, the second united position, or the like, the back-up effect unit 3200 stopped the front-stage decorative portion 3219. In the same state, the rear-stage decorative portion 3216 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3218 rotate in opposite directions. In the present embodiment, each gear ratio is set so that when the rear-stage decorative portion 3216 makes one rotation, the middle-stage decorative portion 3218 rotates twice.

Further, in the back-up effect unit 3200, the back-up movable decorative body 3210 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decorative substrate and the back-up front decorative substrate. Even when the decorative portion 3216 and the middle decorative portion 3218 are rotating, the light emitting decoration can be performed.

Further, in the back-up effect unit 3200, the back-up movement arm 3230 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs provided on the back-up movement arm 3230, and the back-up movement arm 3230 has a plurality of LEDs. By causing the LEDs to emit light in order toward the back-up movable decoration body 3210, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light flows through the back-up movable decoration body 3210. Further, by causing the plurality of LEDs of the back-up movable arm 3230 to emit light in order so as to move away from the back-up movable decoration body 3210, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light flows from the back-up movable decoration body 3210.

[5-9-3. Back left production unit]
Next, the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159, 163, 164 and the like. FIG. 163 is a schematic perspective view of the internal structure of the back left movable decoration body and the like, and FIG. 164 is a front view showing the movement of the back left movable decoration body of the back left effect unit in the back unit. In FIG. 163, some members are represented as wire frames so that the internal structure can be easily understood, and the symbols relating to the internal structures of the plurality of movable decorations other than the back left movable decoration are shown in parentheses. ..

The back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

The back left effect unit 3300 extends in the vertical direction straddling the triangular pyramid-shaped back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 with the tip directed to the right, and the effect display device 1600, and is movable on the back upper left. The back left moving arm 3330 and the back left moving arm 3330 are movably attached to the decorative body 3310 and the lower left movable decorative body 3320, and both ends in the vertical direction are supported so as to be movable in the left and right directions. It is equipped with a back left traverse mechanism 3350 that moves in a direction. The upper left movable decorative body 3310 on the back and the lower left movable decorative body 3320 on the back have an equilateral triangular outer shape when viewed from the front. Further, the triangular pyramid-shaped back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are inclined so that their tips are positioned forward in the left-right direction.

Further, the back left effect unit 3300 has a flat plate-shaped back left back decorative plate 3360 extending in the left-right direction in front of the upper end of the back left moving arm 3330 and extending in the left-right direction under the back decoration plate. The upper left decorative body 3370 on which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed, and the lower left on the back on which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed extending in the left-right direction in front of the lower end of the back left moving arm 3330. It is provided with a decorative body 3380.

The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is rotatably attached to the trapezoidal base decoration portion 3311 whose front view shape is narrowed to the right and the right side surface of the base decoration portion 3311, and the tip is directed to the right. A triangular pyramid-shaped front-stage decorative portion 3312, a back upper left rotation drive motor 3313 (see FIG. 186) mounted inside the base-stage decorative portion 3311 for rotating the front-stage decorative portion 3312, and a base stage. The back upper left base decoration substrate which is attached to the inside of the decoration part 3311 to illuminate the base decoration part 3311 and the front upper decoration part 3312 which is attached to the right side surface of the base decoration part 3311 and emit light decoration It is provided with a back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a for making the back upper left. The base decoration portion 3311 and the front decoration portion 3312 are formed so as to have translucency.

A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration portion 3311 to which the back upper left base decoration substrate is attached are mounted. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the left side of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 are mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a. ing.

The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper left rotary drive motor 3313 is the rotation of the main gear (not shown) which is attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the back upper left rotary drive motor 3313 and the front decorative portion 3312. The rotation of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 is performed via a back upper left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) that meshes with a slave gear (not shown) that is attached to and fixed to the shaft. A magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape is arranged and fixed on the left side surface of the front stage decoration portion 3312 facing the right side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3311 in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3312. Specifically, the magnet 3312a is located near the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312 and on the left side surface of the front decoration portion 3312 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312. It is arranged vertically to the front, and is housed in the internal space of the pre-decorative portion 3312 so that its left surface does not protrude from the left surface of the pre-decorative portion 3312 toward the right surface of the base decorative portion 3311. Is fixed. The magnet 3312a is arranged near the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312, which is a phenomenon in which the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312 resonates due to the rotation of the front decoration portion 3312 by the back upper left rotation drive motor 3313. It is a position that does not generate.

Since the magnet 3312a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft of the front-stage decorative portion 3312, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper left rotation drive motor 3313 is advanced via the back upper left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) described above. When it is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration portion 3312 and the first stage decoration portion 3312 starts rotating, its trajectory becomes a circular orbit.

Therefore, on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a, at a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (opposing the magnetic surface of the magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape), a Hall element and A back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, which is composed of peripheral circuits and can detect changes in magnetic poles, is mounted. The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a circuit used to specify the rotation position of the front decoration portion 3312 and set the original position by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3312a fixed to the front decoration portion 3312. A detailed explanation will be given later. The original position (standby position) of the rotation position of the first decorative portion 3312 is, for example, the position shown in FIGS. 145, 159, 164 (a), etc., and the base decorative portion 3311 and the first stage It can be mentioned that the vertices of the triangles of the decorative portion 3312 match to form one triangular pyramid.

The base decorative portion 3311 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is not shown in detail, but on the rear surface, the first mounting boss protruding from the center to the rear near the bottom (left side) and the first mounting It is equipped with a second mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part to the right of the boss to the rear, and a third mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part above the first mounting boss to the rear. .. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is movably attached to the back left moving arm 3330 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

The lower left movable decorative body 3320 is rotatably attached to the trapezoidal base decoration portion 3321 whose front view shape is narrowed to the right and the right side surface of the base decoration portion 3321, and the tip is directed to the right. A triangular pyramid-shaped front-stage decorative portion 3322, a back left lower left rotary drive motor 3323 (see FIG. 186) mounted inside the base-stage decorative portion 3321 for rotating the front-stage decorative portion 3322, and a base stage. The lower left base decorative substrate on the back left, which is attached to the inside of the decorative portion 3321 to illuminate the base decorative portion 3321, and the front decorative portion 3322, which is attached to the right side of the base decorative portion 3321, is luminescently decorated. It is provided with a back left lower front stage decorative substrate 3321a for making it. The base decoration portion 3321 and the front decoration portion 3322 are formed so as to have translucency.

A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration portion 3321 to which the base decoration board is attached are mounted on the lower left base decoration substrate. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3321a (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3321aa (1) to 3321aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the left side of the front-stage decorative portion 3322 are mounted on the back left lower front-stage decorative substrate 3321a. ing.

The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the lower left back rotary drive motor 3323 is the rotation of the main gear (not shown) which is attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the lower left back rotary drive motor 3323 and the front decorative portion 3322. The rotation of the front decorative portion 3322 is performed via a lower left back rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) that meshes with a slave gear (not shown) that is attached to and fixed to the shaft. On the left side surface of the front stage decoration portion 3322 facing the right side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3321, a magnet 3322a having a small cylindrical shape is arranged and fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3322. Specifically, the magnet 3322a is located near the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3322 and on the left side surface of the front decoration portion 3322 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3322. It is arranged vertically to the front, and is housed in the internal space of the pre-decorative portion 3322 so that its left surface does not protrude from the left surface of the pre-stage decorative portion 3322 toward the right surface of the base-stage decorative portion 3311. Is fixed. The magnet 3322a is arranged near the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3322, which is a phenomenon in which the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3322 resonates due to the rotation of the front decoration portion 3322 by the back left lower left rotation drive motor 3323. It is a position that does not generate.

Since the magnet 3322a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft of the front-stage decorative portion 3322, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back left lower left rotation drive motor 3323 is advanced via the back left lower rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) described above. When it is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration portion 3322 and the first stage decoration portion 3322 starts to rotate, its locus becomes a circular orbit.

Therefore, on the lower left front decorative substrate 3321a on the back left, at a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (opposing the magnetic surface of the magnet 3322a having a small cylindrical shape), a Hall element and A back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab which is composed of peripheral circuits and can detect a change in magnetic poles is mounted. The back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab is a circuit used to specify the rotation position of the front decoration portion 3322 and set the original position by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3322a fixed to the front decoration portion 3322. A detailed explanation will be given later. The original position (standby position) of the rotation position of the first-stage decorative portion 3322 is, for example, the position shown in FIGS. 145, 159, and 164 (a), and the base-stage decorative portion 3321 and the first-stage decorative portion 3321. It can be mentioned that the vertices of the triangles of the decorative portion 3322 coincide with each other to form one triangular pyramid.

The base decorative portion 3321 of the lower left movable decorative body 3320 on the back is not shown in detail, but on the rear surface, the first mounting boss protruding from the center to the rear near the bottom (left side) and the first mounting It is equipped with a second mounting boss that projects cylindrically from the part to the right of the boss to the rear, and a third mounting boss that projects from the part below the first mounting boss into a columnar shape to the rear. .. The lower left movable decorative body 3320 is movably attached to the back left moving arm 3330 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

The back left moving arm 3330 extends in the vertical direction and is attached to the moving arm base 3331 to which the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are movably attached and the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical center. It is provided with a back left movable decorative body 3310 and a back left moving drive motor 3332 for moving the back left lower left movable decorative body 3320.

Although detailed illustration of the back left moving arm 3330 is omitted, a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the back left moving drive motor 3332 and a vertical direction above the center of the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical direction. An upper slider that is slidably mounted to and has an upper rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear, and an upper slider that is slidably mounted vertically below the center of the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical direction. It comprises a lower slider having a lower rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear from the opposite side of the upper rack gear.

In the movable arm base 3331, the upper first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3311 in the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is slidably inserted and the second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3311 slide It is provided with an upper second slit that can be inserted into the base and an upper third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3311 is slidably inserted. The upper first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The upper second slit extends downward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees about the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then extends downward in a straight line. The upper third slit extends downward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees about the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then extends downward in a straight line.

Further, the moving arm base 3331 has a lower first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3321 in the lower left movable decoration body 3320 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3321. It is provided with a lower second slit that is slidably inserted and a lower third slit that is slidably inserted into the third mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3321. The lower first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The lower second slit extends upward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then extends linearly upward. The lower third slit extends upward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then extends linearly upward. The lower first slit, lower second slit, and lower third slit are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit with respect to the horizontal line passing through the center of the rotation axis of the back left moving drive motor 3332. And are formed line-symmetrically.

On the upper slider, the second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3311 in the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is mounted near the upper end. On the lower slider, the second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3321 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 is mounted near the lower end.

Further, one of the two ends of the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical direction, which is arranged in the vicinity of the back left transverse drive motor 3351 provided in the back left transverse mechanism 3350 described later, can slide in the left and right direction by a predetermined distance dimension. Attached to the metal slide rail 3351ns for the back left moving arm (see FIG. 264 (b)) and not located near the back left transverse drive motor 3351, the other is along a metal columnar rod (not shown). Sliding part for the back left moving arm (moving while sliding the surface of the metal columnar rod along the longitudinal direction of the columnar rod) (may be molded with a conductive resin) , May be molded with a non-conductive resin.) Is attached. It should be noted that both ends of the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical direction may be configured to be attached to the metal slide rails for the back left moving arm 3351ns and 3351ns, respectively.

The back left transverse mechanism 3350 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back left traverse mechanism 3350 includes a back left traverse drive motor 3351 and a rod-shaped back left traverse arm that rotates about one end side by being driven by the back left traverse drive motor 3351. ing. The tip of the back left traverse arm is connected to the back left movement arm 3330, and by rotating the back left traverse arm by the back left traverse drive motor 3351, the back left movement arm 3330 is moved via the back left traverse arm. It can be rampant.

A hologram sticker is attached to the front surface of the back left back decorative plate 3360. The lower left side of the back upper left decorative body 3370 is attached at substantially the same height as the upper edge of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The upper left side of the lower left decorative body 3380 is attached at substantially the same height as the lower edge of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The front end of each of the back left back decorative plate 3360, the back upper left decorative body 3370, and the back left lower decorative body 3380 is attached at substantially the same position as the front end of the back box 3010, and the back lower effect unit is arranged at the rear. The back-up movement arm 3130 of the 3100, the back-up movement arm 3230 of the back-up effect unit 3200, and the like can be hidden from the front invisible.

Further, the back left back decorative plate 3360 is located behind the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and is a panel in cooperation with the back right back decorative plate 3460 described later. The decorative pattern 1150 formed on the board 1110 is made easy to see from the player side (front).

Subsequently, the operation of the back left effect unit 3300 will be described. First, the movements of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 will be described. In a normal state, the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are positive in front view with the respective base decorative portions 3311 and the base decorative portion 3321. It is in the state of the rotation position forming a triangle. In this state, when the back upper left rotary drive motor 3313 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower rotary drive motor 3323 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are driven, respectively, the front stage decorative portion 3312 and the front stage decorative portion are driven. The 3322 can be rotated (see FIG. 166).

Next, the movements of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 with respect to the back left moving arm 3330 will be described. In the initial state of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3331. It is located at the top of each. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 are horizontally arranged, and the base side (left side) of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 extends vertically and the tip is to the right. It is facing (see FIG. 164 (a)). From the initial state, when the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back left moving drive motor 3332 and the upper slider is moved downward via the upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back upper left movable decoration 3310 Since the second mounting boss of the above is mounted on the upper slider, the second mounting boss is pulled downward, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 rotates clockwise around the first mounting boss. Will be done.

At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 extend downward in each arc shape in the upper second slit and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3331. Sliding to. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the lower end of the arcuate portion in the upper second slit by the upper slider that moves downward, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 moves in the clockwise direction around the first mounting boss. It is in a state of being rotated 30 degrees to, and a state in which the tip is directed to the lower right (second state) (see FIG. 164 (b)). In this state, the lower side of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is in a horizontally extended state.

When the back left upper left movable decoration body 3310 is rotated 30 degrees in the clockwise direction by moving the upper slider downward, and the upper slider moves further downward by driving the back left moving drive motor 3332, the back upper left movable decoration The body 3310 will move downward in a rotating posture. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3331. It slides inside each to the lower end of each and stops moving downward. In this state, the lower side of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is in a state of approaching the center of the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical direction (first state) (see FIG. 164 (c)).

From this state, when the back left moving drive motor 3332 is driven in the opposite direction and the upper slider is moved upward via the pinion gear, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the first state moves in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned movement. To return to the initial state.

On the other hand, in the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third of the moving arm base 3331. It is located at the bottom of each of the slits. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the lower left movable decoration body 3320 are arranged horizontally, and the base side (left side) of the lower left movable decoration body 3320 on the back left extends vertically and the tip is to the right. It is facing (see FIG. 164 (a)). From the initial state, when the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back left moving drive motor 3332 and the lower slider is moved upward via the lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 Since the second mounting boss of the above is mounted on the lower slider, the second mounting boss is pulled upward, and the lower left movable decorative body 3320 on the back turns counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. It will move.

At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the lower left movable decorative body 3320 on the back upper side of the lower second slit and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3331 extending in an arc shape. Sliding to. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the upper end of the arcuate portion in the lower second slit by the lower slider that moves upward, the lower left movable decorative body 3320 on the back left counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. The state is rotated 30 degrees in the direction, and the tip is facing the upper right (second state) (see FIG. 164 (b)). In this state, the upper side of the lower left back movable decorative body 3320 is in a horizontally extended state.

Back left lower movable by moving the lower slider upward With the decorative body 3320 rotated 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction, when the lower slider moves further upward by driving the back left movement drive motor 3332, the back left lower movable The decorative body 3320 moves upward in a rotating posture. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3331. It slides inside each to the upper end of each and stops moving upward. In this state, the upper side of the lower left back movable decorative body 3320 is in a state of approaching the center of the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical direction (first state) (see FIG. 164 (c)).

From this state, when the back left moving drive motor 3332 is driven in the opposite direction and the lower slider is moved downward via the pinion gear, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in the first state moves in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned movement. To return to the initial state.

Since the upper rack gear of the upper slider and the lower rack gear of the lower slider mesh with the pinion gear with the pinion gear rotated by the back left moving drive motor 3332 in between, the pinion is formed by the back left moving drive motor 3332. When the gear is rotated, the upper slider and the lower slider move in different directions up and down. As a result, the back left upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 are moved by the back left movement drive motor 3332 at the same time. Therefore, when the back left movable drive motor 3332 is driven from the initial state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, which are separated from each other vertically and whose tips face to the right, approach each other. After rotating in the direction of moving to the second state, the whole moves in the direction of approaching each other and moves to the first state.

Next, the movement of the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left effect unit 3300 will be described. In the initial state of the back left moving arm 3330, the portion to which the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are attached is located at the moving end to the left. In this state, the back left moving arm 3330 is located on the left side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view. In this state, when the back left traverse arm is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the back left traverse drive motor 3351 of the back left traverse mechanism 3350, the back left movement arm 3330 is moved to the right by the back left traverse arm. It can be moved to the moving end. In the state where the back left moving arm 3330 is located to the right moving end (first state), the parts to which the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are attached are the left and right of the effect display device 1600. It is located at a distance of about 1/3 from the left end side to the right with respect to the width in the direction (see FIG. 170).

As shown in FIG. 164, the back left moving arm 3330 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends to the right, and in the first state where the right end is located at the right moving end, the back lower effect unit 3100 It is located at the center of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper effect unit 3200 in the left-right direction.

The back left moving arm 3330 can be moved by the back left traversing mechanism 3350 between the position of the initial state which is the left moving end and the position of the first state which is the right moving end. In the present embodiment, the position of the second state is moved by about two-thirds to the right from the position of the initial state with respect to the total movement distance between the position of the initial state and the position of the first state. Is set (see FIG. 169).

In the back left effect unit 3300, in the normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are in the initial state, and are arranged in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, respectively. The base sides of the base decoration portion 3311 and the base decoration portion 3321 of the above are vertically extended, and their respective tips are directed to the right. Further, in the normal state, the back left moving arm 3330 is located at the left moving end in the initial state by the back left transverse mechanism 3350.

In this normal state, the base sides of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, which are the initial states, are located near the left end in the back box 3010, and the respective base stage decorative portions 3311 and the base are located. The stage decoration unit 3321 is located near the left end of the effect display device 1600, and the respective front stage decoration units 3312 and the front stage decoration unit 3322 are located in front of the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are each in the standby position in the initial state (FIG. 135, etc.). See).

As shown in FIG. 164, the back left moving arm 3330 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends to the right, so that the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right from the position in the second state (the first). When it is moved to the position in one state), it comes into contact with the movable decorative body 3210 on the back of the standby position. Therefore, when moving the back left moving arm 3330 to the right moving end (second state), it is necessary to move the back upper movable decorative body 3210 downward from the standby position. Further, when the back left movable ornament 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are directed to the right (initial state) and the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right moving end, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 The tip of the sword abuts on the back-up movable ornament 3210 which has been moved downward from the standby position. Therefore, it is necessary to move the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 to the position of the first state or the position of the second state so that the tip faces the lower right.

Further, in the initial position of the back left moving arm 3330, the base sides of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are located near the left end in the back box 3010, so that the back left moving When the drive motor 3332 rotates the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 in the initial state so as to be in the second state, the respective base sides hit the left side surface in the back box 3010. Get in touch. Therefore, when the back left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 are rotated from the initial state to the second state side by the back left moving drive motor 3332, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right from the position in the initial state. It is necessary to move it toward you.

In the back left effect unit 3300, the back upper left base decorative board and the back upper left front decorative board of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back left lower base decorative board and the back left lower front decorative board of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320. By appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the back surface to emit light, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 can be light-emitting and decorated.

In the present embodiment, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are located in the initial state, respectively, and the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 are located. The position of is the standby position. Further, the positions of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are located in the first state, respectively. Is the first coalescence position. Further, the positions of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are located in the second state, respectively. Is the second coalescence position.

[5-9-4. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 and 163. The back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

The back right effect unit 3400 extends in the vertical direction across the triangular pyramid-shaped back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 with the tip directed to the left, and the effect display device 1600. The back right moving arm 3430 and the back right moving arm 3430, in which the movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 are movably attached, and both ends in the vertical direction are supported so as to be movable in the horizontal direction, respectively. Is provided with a back-right traversing mechanism 3450 that moves the vehicle in the left-right direction (see FIG. 167). The rear right upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 have an equilateral triangular outer shape when viewed from the front. Further, the triangular pyramid-shaped back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are inclined so that their tips are positioned forward in the left-right direction.

Further, the back right effect unit 3400 has a flat plate-shaped back right back decorative plate 3460 extending in the left-right direction in front of the upper end of the back right moving arm 3430 and extending in the left-right direction under the back decoration plate. The back right decorative body 3470 in which a three-dimensional truss-shaped decoration is formed, and the back right in which a three-dimensional truss-shaped decoration is formed extending in the left-right direction in front of the lower end of the back right moving arm 3430. It includes a lower decorative body 3480 and.

The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is rotatably attached to the trapezoidal base decoration portion 3411 whose front view shape is narrowed to the left and the right side surface of the base decoration portion 3411, and the tip is directed to the left. A triangular pyramid-shaped front decorative portion 3412, a back upper right rotary drive motor 3413 (see FIG. 187) mounted inside the base decorative portion 3411 for rotating the front decorative portion 3412, and a base stage. The back upper right base decoration substrate which is attached to the inside of the decoration part 3411 to make the base decoration part 3411 emit light, and the front decoration part 3412 which is attached to the left side surface of the base decoration part 3411 and emits light decoration. It is provided with a decorative substrate 3411a on the upper right side of the back surface for making the substrate. The base decorative portion 3411 and the front decorative portion 3412 are formed so as to have translucency.

A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration portion 3411 to which the base decoration board is mounted are mounted on the back upper right base decoration substrate. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3411aa (1) to 3411aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the right side of the front-stage decorative portion 3412 are mounted on the back upper right front-stage decorative substrate 3411a. ing.

The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper right rotary drive motor 3413 is the rotation of the main gear (not shown) which is attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the back upper right rotary drive motor 3413 and the front decorative portion 3412. The rotation of the pre-stage decorative portion 3412 is performed via a back upper right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) that meshes with a slave gear (not shown) that is attached to and fixed to the shaft. On the right side surface of the front stage decoration portion 3412 facing the left side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3411, a magnet 3412a having a small cylindrical shape is arranged and fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3412. Specifically, the magnet 3412a is located near the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3412 and on the right side surface of the front decoration portion 3412 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3412. It is arranged vertically to the front, and is housed in the internal space of the pre-decorative portion 3412 so that its right surface does not protrude from the right surface of the pre-stage decorative portion 3412 toward the left side surface of the base-stage decorative portion 3411. Is fixed. The magnet 3412a is arranged near the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3412, which is a phenomenon in which the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3412 resonates due to the rotation of the front decoration portion 3412 by the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413. It is a position that does not generate.

Since the magnet 3412a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft of the front-stage decorative portion 3412, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 is advanced via the back upper right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) described above. When it is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration portion 3412 and the first stage decoration portion 3412 starts rotating, its trajectory becomes a circular orbit.

Therefore, on the back upper right front stage decorative substrate 3411a, at a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (opposing the magnetic surface of the magnet 3412a having a small cylindrical shape), a Hall element and A back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, which is composed of peripheral circuits and can detect changes in magnetic poles, is mounted. The back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab is a circuit used to specify the rotation position of the front decoration portion 3412 and set the original position by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3412a fixed to the front decoration portion 3412. A detailed explanation will be given later. The original position (standby position) of the rotation position of the first-stage decorative portion 3312 is, for example, the position shown in FIGS. 145 and 159, respectively, of the base-stage decorative portion 3411 and the first-stage decorative portion 3412. It can be mentioned that the vertices of the triangles match to form one triangular pyramid.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base decorative portion 3411 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 has a first mounting boss protruding from the center to the rear near the bottom (right side) in a columnar shape and a first mounting on the rear surface. It is equipped with a second mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part to the left of the boss to the rear, and a third mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part above the first mounting boss to the rear. .. The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is movably attached to the back right moving arm 3430 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

The lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is rotatably attached to the trapezoidal base decoration portion 3421 whose front view shape is narrowed to the left and the left side surface of the base decoration portion 3421, and the tip is moved to the left. A triangular pyramid-shaped front-stage decorative portion 3422, a back right lower right rotary drive motor 3423 (see FIG. 187), which is mounted inside the base-stage decorative portion 3421 and for rotating the front-stage decorative portion 3422, It is attached to the inside of the base decoration part 3421 and is attached to the lower right base decoration substrate on the back right for making the base decoration part 3421 emit light, and is attached to the left side surface of the base decoration part 3421 and is attached to the front decoration part 3422. It is provided with a back right lower right front stage decorative substrate 3421a for luminescent decoration. The base decorative portion 3421 and the front decorative portion 3422 are formed so as to have translucency.

The lower right base decoration substrate on the back is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration portion 3421 to which the substrate is attached. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3421a (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3421aa (1) to 3421aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the right side of the front-stage decorative portion 3422 are mounted on the lower right front-stage decorative substrate 3421a on the back. Has been done.

The rotation of the output shaft (rotational shaft) of the lower right back rotary drive motor 3423 is performed by a main gear (not shown) that is attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the lower right back rotary drive motor 3423 and the front decorative portion 3422. The rotation of the pre-stage decorative portion 3422 is performed via a lower right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) that meshes with a slave gear (not shown) that is attached and fixed to the rotation shaft of the above. On the right side surface of the front stage decoration portion 3422 facing the left side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3421, a magnet 3422a having a small cylindrical shape is arranged and fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration portion 3422. Specifically, the magnet 3422a is located near the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3422 and on the right side surface of the front decoration portion 3422 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3422. It is arranged vertically to the front, and is housed in the internal space of the pre-decorative portion 3422 so that its right surface does not protrude from the right surface of the pre-stage decorative portion 3422 toward the left side surface of the base-stage decorative portion 3421. Is fixed. The magnet 3422a is arranged near the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3422, and the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3422 resonates due to the rotation of the front decoration portion 3422 by the back right lower right rotation drive motor 3423. It is in a position where the phenomenon does not occur.

Since the magnet 3422a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft of the front-stage decorative portion 3422, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back right lower right rotation drive motor 3423 is via the back right lower right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) described above. When it is transmitted to the rotation axis of the first-stage decorative portion 3422 and the first-stage decorative portion 3422 starts to rotate, its trajectory becomes a circular orbit.

Therefore, on the lower right front decorative substrate 3421a on the back right, at a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (opposing the magnetic surface of the magnet 3422a having a small cylindrical shape), a Hall element, A back right lower right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab, which is composed of peripheral circuits and can detect changes in magnetic poles, is mounted. The back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab is used to specify the rotation position of the front decoration portion 3422 and set the original position by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3422a fixed to the front decoration portion 3422. It is a circuit, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. The original position (standby position) of the rotation position of the first-stage decorative portion 3422 is, for example, the position shown in FIGS. 145 and 159, respectively, of the base-stage decorative portion 3421 and the first-stage decorative portion 3422. It can be mentioned that the vertices of the triangles match to form one triangular pyramid.

The base decorative portion 3421 of the lower right movable decorative body 3420 on the back is not shown in detail, but on the rear surface, the first mounting boss projecting from the center to the rear near the bottom (right side) and the first It is equipped with a second mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part to the left of the mounting boss to the rear, and a third mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the part below the first mounting boss to the rear. There is. The lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is movably attached to the back right moving arm 3430 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

The back right moving arm 3430 extends in the vertical direction and is attached to the moving arm base 3431 to which the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are movably attached, and the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction center. It is equipped with a back right movable decorative body 3410 and a back right moving drive motor 3432 for moving the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420.

Although detailed illustration of the back right moving arm 3430 is omitted, a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the back right moving drive motor 3432 and a vertical direction above the center of the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction. An upper slider that is slidably mounted to and has an upper rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear, and an upper slider that is slidably mounted vertically below the center of the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction. It comprises a lower slider having a lower rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear from the opposite side of the upper rack gear.

In the movable arm base 3431, the upper first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3411 in the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is slidably inserted and the second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3411 slide. It is provided with an upper second slit that can be inserted into the base and an upper third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3411 is slidably inserted. The upper first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The upper second slit extends downward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees about the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then extends downward in a straight line. The upper third slit extends downward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees about the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then extends downward in a straight line.

Further, the moving arm base 3431 has a lower first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3421 in the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3421. It is provided with a lower second slit into which the is slidably inserted, and a lower third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3421 is slidably inserted. The lower first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The lower second slit extends upward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then extends linearly upward. The lower third slit extends upward in an arc shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then extends linearly upward. The lower first slit, lower second slit, and lower third slit are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit with respect to the horizontal line passing through the center of the rotation axis of the back right moving drive motor 3432. And are formed line-symmetrically.

On the upper slider, the second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3411 in the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is mounted near the upper end. The lower slider has a second mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3421 of the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 mounted near the lower end.

Further, one of the two ends of the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction, which is arranged in the vicinity of the back right transverse drive motor 3451 provided in the back right transverse mechanism 3450 described later, can slide and move in the left and right direction by a predetermined distance dimension. Attached to a metal slide rail for the back right moving arm 3451ns (see FIG. 264 (b)) and not located near the back right transverse drive motor 3451, the other is along a metal columnar rod (not shown). Sliding part for the back right moving arm (moving while sliding the surface of the metal columnar rod along the longitudinal direction of the columnar rod) (may be molded with a conductive resin) , May be molded with a non-conductive resin.) Is attached. It should be noted that both ends of the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction may be configured to be attached to the metal slide rails for the back right moving arm 3451ns and 3451ns, respectively.

The back right traversing mechanism 3450 is attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back right traverse mechanism 3450 includes a back right traverse drive motor 3451 and a rod-shaped back right traverse arm that rotates about one end side by being driven by the back right traverse drive motor 3451. ing. The tip of the back right traversing arm is connected to the back right moving arm 3430, and by rotating the back right traversing arm by the back right traversing drive motor 3451, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved via the back right traversing arm. It can be rampant.

A hologram sticker is attached to the front surface of the back right back decorative plate 3460. The lower right side of the back upper right decorative body 3470 is attached at substantially the same height as the upper edge of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The upper right side of the lower right decorative body 3480 is attached at substantially the same height as the lower edge of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The front end of each of the back right back decorative plate 3460, the back upper right decorative body 3470, and the back right lower decorative body 3480 is attached at substantially the same position as the front end of the back box 3010, and the back lower effect is arranged behind. The back-up movement arm 3130 of the unit 3100, the back-up movement arm 3230 of the back-up effect unit 3200, and the like can be hidden from the front invisible.

Further, the back right back decorative plate 3460 is located behind the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and cooperates with the back left back decorative plate 3360 to display the panel plate 1110. The decorative pattern 1150 formed in is made easy to see from the player side (front).

Subsequently, the operation of the back right effect unit 3400 will be described. First, the movements of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 will be described. In a normal state, the front-stage decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the front-stage decorative portion 3422 of the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 are viewed from the front with the base-stage decorative portion 3411 and the base-stage decorative portion 3421, respectively. It is in the state of the rotation position forming an equilateral triangle. In this state, when the back upper right rotary drive motor 3413 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower rotary drive motor 3423 of the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are driven, respectively, the front stage decorative portion 3412 and the front stage are respectively driven. The decorative portion 3422 can be rotated (see FIG. 166).

Next, the movements of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 with respect to the back right moving arm 3430 will be described. In the upper right back movable decorative body 3410, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3431. It is located at the top of each. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 are horizontally arranged, and the base side (right side) of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 extends vertically and the tip is to the left. It is suitable. From the initial state, when the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back right movement drive motor 3432 and the upper slider is moved downward via the upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 Since the second mounting boss of No. 2 is mounted on the upper slider, the second mounting boss is pulled downward, and the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right of the back rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. It will move.

At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are below the respective arc-shaped extending portions of the upper second slit and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3431. Sliding to. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the lower end of the arc-shaped portion in the upper second slit by the upper slider that moves downward, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. The state is rotated 30 degrees in the direction, and the tip is facing the lower left (second state) (see FIG. 168). In this state, the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is in a horizontally extended state.

Back upper right movable by moving the upper slider downward With the decorative body 3410 rotated 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction, when the upper slider moves further downward by driving the back right movement drive motor 3432, the back upper right is movable. The decorative body 3410 will move downward in a rotating posture. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3431. It slides inside each to the lower end of each and stops moving downward. In this state, the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is in a state of approaching the center of the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction (first state) (see FIG. 170).

From this state, when the back right moving drive motor 3432 is driven in the opposite direction and the upper slider is moved upward via the pinion gear, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the first state moves in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned movement. To return to the initial state.

On the other hand, in the lower right back movable decorative body 3420, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower first slit of the moving arm base 3431. It is located at the lower end of each of the three slits. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the lower right back movable decoration body 3420 are horizontally arranged, and the base side (right side) of the lower right back movable decoration body 3420 extends vertically and the tip is left. I'm facing towards you. From the initial state, when the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back right movement drive motor 3432 and the lower slider is moved upward via the lower rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear, the back right lower movable decoration body. Since the second mounting boss of 3420 is mounted on the lower slider, the second mounting boss is pulled upward, and the movable decorative body 3420 at the lower right of the back moves clockwise around the first mounting boss. It will rotate.

At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 refer to the portions extending in an arc shape in the lower second slit and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3431. Slide upwards. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the upper end of the arcuate portion in the lower second slit by the lower slider that moves upward, the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 rotates clockwise around the first mounting boss. The state is rotated 30 degrees in the direction, and the tip is facing the upper left (second state) (see FIG. 168). In this state, the upper side of the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is in a horizontally extended state.

When the lower right movable decorative body 3420 is rotated 30 degrees in the clockwise direction by moving the lower slider upward, and the lower slider is further moved upward by the drive of the back right moving drive motor 3432, the lower right back is moved. The movable decorative body 3420 will move upward in a rotating posture. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 are the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3431. It slides inside each of the above to the upper end of each, and the upward movement stops. In this state, the upper side of the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is in a state of approaching the center of the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction (first state) (see FIG. 170).

From this state, when the back right moving drive motor 3432 is driven in the opposite direction and the lower slider is moved downward via the pinion gear, the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 in the first state moves in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned movement. It moves and returns to the initial state.

Since the upper rack gear of the upper slider and the lower rack gear of the lower slider mesh with the pinion gear with the pinion gear rotated by the back right moving drive motor 3432 in between, the pinion is formed by the back right moving drive motor 3432. When the gear is rotated, the upper slider and the lower slider move in different directions up and down. As a result, the movement of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 by the back right movement drive motor 3432 is performed at the same time. Therefore, when the back right movement drive motor 3432 is driven from the initial state, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420, which are separated vertically and whose tips are directed to the left, have their respective tips facing each other. After rotating in the approaching direction to enter the second state, the whole moves in the direction of approaching each other to enter the first state.

Next, the movement of the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right effect unit 3400 will be described. In the initial state of the back right moving arm 3430, the portion to which the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are attached is located at the moving end to the right. In this state, the back right moving arm 3430 is located on the right side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view. In this state, when the back right traversing arm is rotated in the clockwise direction by the back right traversing drive motor 3451 of the back right traversing mechanism 3450, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved to the left by the back right traversing arm. Can be moved to the edge. In the state where the back right moving arm 3430 is located at the left moving end (first state), the portion to which the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are attached is the effect display device 1600. It is located at a distance of about 1/3 from the right end side to the left with respect to the width in the left-right direction (see FIG. 170).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back right moving arm 3430 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends to the left, and in the first state where the left end is located at the left moving end, the back lower effect unit. It is located in the center of the back-up movable decoration body 3110 and the back-up movable decoration body 3210 of the 3100 and the back-up effect unit 3200 in the left-right direction.

The back right moving arm 3430 can be moved by the back right traversing mechanism 3450 between the position of the initial state which is the right moving end and the position of the first state which is the left moving end. In the present embodiment, the position of the second state is moved to the left by about two-thirds of the total movement distance between the position of the initial state and the position of the first state. Is set (see FIG. 169).

In the back right effect unit 3400, in the normal state, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are in the initial state, and are arranged in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. The base sides of the base decoration portions 3411 and the base decoration portions 3421 are vertically extended, and the tips thereof are directed to the left. Further, in the normal state, the back right moving arm 3430 is located at the right moving end in the initial state by the back right transverse mechanism 3450.

In this normal state, the base sides of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420, which are the initial states, are located near the right end in the back box 3010, and the respective base stage decoration portions 3411 and The base decoration unit 3421 is located near the right end of the effect display device 1600, and the respective front stage decoration units 3412 and the front stage decoration unit 3422 are located in front of the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are each in the standby position in the initial state (FIG. 135). Etc.).

Since the back right moving arm 3430 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends to the left, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved from the position of the second state to the moving end to the left (the position of the first state). Then, it comes into contact with the movable decorative body 3210 on the back of the standby position. Therefore, when moving the back right moving arm 3430 to the left moving end (second state), it is necessary to move the back upper movable decorative body 3210 downward from the standby position. Further, when the back right moving arm 3430 is moved to the left moving end with the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 facing to the left (initial state), the back upper right movable decoration body The tip of the 3410 abuts on the back-up movable ornament 3210 that has been moved downward from the standby position. Therefore, it is necessary to move the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 to the position of the first state or the position of the second state so that the tip faces the lower left.

Further, in the initial position of the back right moving arm 3430, the base sides of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are located near the right end in the back box 3010, so that the back right When the movable drive motor 3432 rotates the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right side of the back and the movable decorative body 3420 on the lower right side in the initial state so as to be in the second state, the base side of each is the right side surface in the back box 3010. To abut. Therefore, when the back right moving drive motor 3432 rotates the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 from the initial state to the second state side, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved from the position of the initial state. It is necessary to move it to the left.

In the back right effect unit 3400, the back upper right base decorative board and the back upper right front decorative board of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower base decorative board and the back right lower front of the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. By appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate to emit light, the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right of the back and the movable decorative body 3420 on the lower right of the back can be light-emittingly decorated.

In the present embodiment, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, the back right lower movable decoration body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are located in the initial state, respectively, and the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration The position of the body 3420 is the standby position. Further, when the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, the back right lower movable decoration body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are located in the first state, respectively, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 The position of is the first united position. Further, when the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, the back right lower movable decoration body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are located in the second state, respectively, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 The position of is the second united position.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 165 to 171 and the like. FIG. 165 shows that the lower back movable decorative body of the lower back effect unit is raised from the standby position and the lower back movable arm is moved from the normal state to the lower left movable decorative body of the back left effect unit and the lower right movable back of the back right effect unit. The height is the same as the decorative body, and the back upper movable decorative body of the back upper effect unit is lowered from the standby position, and the back upper moving arm is moved to the back upper left movable of the back left effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state which is the same height as a decorative body. In FIG. 166, the back lower movable decoration body, the back upper movable decoration body, the back upper left movable decoration body, the back left lower movable decoration body, the back upper right movable decoration body, and the back right lower movable decoration body are rotated in the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of being.

Further, FIG. 167 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back left moving arm of the back left effect unit and the back right moving arm of the back right effect unit are moved to the second state from the normal state. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back upper left movable decoration body, the back left lower movable decoration body, the back upper right movable decoration body, and the back right lower right movable decoration body are moved from the state of FIG. 167 to the second state. It is a figure. In FIG. 169, the back left moving arm is moved to the right and the back right moving arm is moved to the left from the normal state, and the back upper left movable decoration, the back right lower movable decoration, and the back left lower movable decoration are shown. It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the movable decorative bodies on the upper right of the back are rotated so as to face each other, and then the effect image is displayed on the effect display device. FIG. 170 shows the second combined position of the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, the back upper right movable decoration, and the back right lower movable decoration from the normal state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state moved to. FIG. 171 is a first combination of the back lower movable decoration body, the back upper movable decoration body, the back upper left movable decoration body, the back left lower movable decoration body, the back upper right movable decoration body, and the back right lower movable decoration body from the state of FIG. 170. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state moved to a position.

The game board 5 includes a panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side slope 2300, an attacker unit 2400, a center accessory 2500, and the like that partition the rear end of the game area 5a. Since it is formed to be substantially transparent as a whole, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through them. , Back bottom movable decoration unit 3110 of back bottom production unit 3100 in back unit 3000, back top movable decoration body 3210 of back top production unit 3200, back left upper left movable decoration body 3310 of back left production unit 3300, back left lower movable decoration body 3320 , Back left back decorative plate 3360, back upper left decorative body 3370, back left lower decorative body 3380, back right production unit 3400 back upper right movable decorative body 3410, back right lower movable decorative body 3420, back right back decorative plate 3460, back upper right The decorative body 3470, the lower right decorative body 3480 on the back, and the like can be clearly seen.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 of the lower back effect unit 3100 is in the standby position, and the back left lower decorative body 3380 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back It faces forward from between the back right lower right decorative body 3480 of the right production unit 3400. Further, in the normal state, the back upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper effect unit 3200 is in the standby position, and the back upper left decorative body 3370 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400 are back. It faces forward from between the upper right ornament 3470. Further, in the normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 of the back left effect unit 3300 are in the standby position, and the tips are arranged vertically separated to the right. I'm out. Further, in the normal state, the back right upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 of the back right effect unit 3400 are in the standby position, and the tips are vertically separated from each other toward the left. They are lined up.

In this normal state, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 are arranged vertically symmetrically on both the upper and lower ends of the effect display device 1600 at positions to the left of the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. At the same time, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are positioned upward with respect to the vertical center of the game area 5a. Are arranged vertically and vertically around the center, and are arranged symmetrically with each other on both left and right ends of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the player side (front) in a good state.

In the game board 5, the back unit 3000 is produced according to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Back bottom movable decoration body 3110 of unit 3100, back top movable decoration body 3210 of back top production unit 3200, back left upper left movable decoration body 3310 and back left lower movable decoration body 3320, back right production unit 3400 The upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 perform a predetermined movable effect.

Specifically, as a movable effect using the back lower effect unit 3100 and the back upper effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, the back lower moving arm 3130 is moved by the back lower elevating mechanism 3150 from the normal state. , The lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the same height as the tips (vertices) facing the center side in the left-right direction, and the upper back moving arm 3230 is moved by the upper back raising / lowering mechanism 3250. , The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are moved to the same height as the tips (vertices) facing the center side in the left-right direction. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 are located in front of the effect display device 1600 so as to block the effect image of the effect display device 1600. The movement of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back can be noticed. In addition, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back right lower movable decoration body 3420, and the back lower right movable decoration body 3110 are combined with the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back upper movable decoration by the back lower left movable decoration body 3130. It is possible to make it appear that the body 3210 and the body 3210 are connected to each other by the back-up moving arm 3230, and it is possible to remind the player of a feeling that something fun will happen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 166, the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 of the back-bottom movable decorative body 3110 are connected by the back-bottom rotary drive motor 3112, and the rear-stage decorative portion 3210 is rear-stage by the back-up rotary drive motor 3212. The decorative portion 3216 and the middle decorative portion 3218 are formed by the back upper left rotary drive motor 3313 and the back left lower rotary drive motor 3323 to form the front upper decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320. The front upper right rotary drive motor 3413 and the back right lower right rotary drive motor 3423 rotate the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the front decorative portion 3422 of the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420, respectively. As a result, the inside of the game area 5a can be made to feel lively, and the player can be entertained.

At this time, when the plurality of LEDs arranged in rows on the back lower movement arm 3130 and the back upper movement arm 3230 are turned on, blinking, and extinguished so as to flow toward the center side in the left-right direction, the left and right back upper left movable decorations are formed. It seems that energy is injected into the back upper movable decoration 3210 and the back lower movable decoration 3110 from the 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration 3420 to rotate. The production can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when a plurality of LEDs arranged in a row on the back-up movement arm 3130 and the back-up movement arm 3230 are turned on, blinking, and extinguished so as to flow outward in the left-right direction, the back-up movable decorative body 3210 and the back-up movable Energy is released from the decorative body 3110 to create a game in which the left and right back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are rotated. Can be shown to others. By such an effect, it is possible to make the player feel that the expected value is increasing, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

Further, as a movable effect using the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the back left moving arm 3330 is placed in the second state by the back left traversing mechanism 3350 from the normal state. At the same time, the back right traversing mechanism 3450 moves the back right moving arm 3430 to the position of the second state. As a result, the back upper left movable decoration 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration 3420 move to the center side in the left-right direction while facing each other. Because it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 by blocking the effect image of the effect display device 1600, the player is given the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration. The movements of the body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 can be noticed, and the movements can be enjoyed.

Then, from the state of FIG. 167, as shown in FIG. 168, the back left upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 are moved from the initial state to the second state by the back left movement drive motor 3332, and the back right movement is performed. The drive motor 3432 moves the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 from the initial state to the second state. As a result, the tip of the back upper left movable decoration 3310 and the tip of the back right lower movable decoration 3420 are in a state where the tip of the back left lower movable decoration 3320 and the tip of the back upper right movable decoration 3410 face each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game. At this time, the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. The first-stage decorative portion 3422 may be rotated, or the effect display device 1600 may display an effect image connecting the tips of the respective ends.

Further, as a movable effect using the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400, as shown in FIG. 169, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right and the back right moving arm 3430 is moved to the left from the normal state. While moving toward each other, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420, and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 and the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 are rotated so as to face each other from the initial state. Then, the effect display device 1600 is made to display an effect image that connects the tips of each. As a result, an "X" -shaped production image is displayed so as to connect the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 facing each other. Because it is done, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game. At this time, the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. The first-stage decorative portion 3422 of the above may be rotated.

Further, as a movable effect using the back bottom effect unit 3100, the back top effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400, for example, as shown in FIG. 170, from the normal state to the back bottom. Move the movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 to the second united position. .. As a result, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are constant. Since they are arranged so as to gather on the circumference of the hexagon at intervals, it is possible to give an impact to the player, and the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (for example, "big hit game"). Can be made to think that may occur.

In addition, when changing from the normal state to the state of the second united position as shown in FIG. 170, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 , The back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 may be moved to the second united position all at once. Alternatively, the players may be moved to the second coalescing position in an appropriate order, and by moving to the second coalescing position in order, the player may be moved to the second coalescing position in each movement. Not only can it be thrilling and exciting, but it can also perform a variety of movable effects, making it difficult for players to get bored.

Then, from the state of FIG. 170, as shown in FIG. 171, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, And the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is moved to the first united position. As a result, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are densely arranged. Since it can be assembled to form one large hexagonal decoration, it can have a strong impact on the player, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn are "big hits". You can be confident that there is one and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the state of the first united position as shown in FIG. 171, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration The body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 may be moved to the first united position all at once from the second united position or from the normal standby position. Alternatively, the players may be moved to the first coalescing position in an appropriate order, and by moving to the first coalescing position in order, the player may be moved to the first coalescing position in each movement. Not only can it be thrilling and exciting, but it can also perform a variety of movable effects, making it difficult for players to get bored.

Subsequently, the main light emitting effect on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 172 to 176 and the like. FIG. 172 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the first pattern is luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 173 is a timing diagram showing an effect example in which the decorative pattern of the game panel and the first pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit are made to emit light. FIG. 174 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the second pattern is luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 175 is a timing diagram showing an effect example in which the decorative pattern of the game panel and the second pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit are made to emit light. FIG. 176 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the second pattern of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from that of FIGS. 172 and 174 is light-emitting and decorated. The game board 5 has a game panel 1100 and a front unit according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The front effect unit 2600 of 2000 performs a predetermined light emission effect.

Specifically, as a light emitting effect using the game panel 1100, the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is light-emitting and decorated by the light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130. As a result, a geometric pattern consisting of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles is luminescently decorated on the rear side of the area where the game ball B is distributed in the game area 5a, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. The light emission effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the table effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000, for example, as shown in FIG. 172, a plurality of light emitting effects mounted on the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 arranged above the light guide plate 2601. Of the LEDs 2611, the first LED 2611a is made to emit light, and only the first pattern portion 2610a forming a part of the first pattern 2610 is made to emit light and be decorated. As a result, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) are displayed in front of the effect display device 1600, so that nothing happens to the player. It can make you think. Further, the second LED 2611b of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, and only the second pattern portion 2610b constituting a part of the first pattern 2610 is made to emit light. As a result, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns having a size similar to that of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and different in size from the first pattern portion 2610a are displayed in front of the effect display device 1600. It can make the player think that something will happen.

Further, the third LED 2611c of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, and only the third pattern portion 2610c constituting a part of the first pattern 2610 is made to emit light. As a result, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns having a size similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in front of the effect display device 1600 and having a size different from that of the first pattern portion 2610a and the second pattern portion 2610b. Is displayed, the player can be made to think that something will happen. Further, the fourth LED 2611d of the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern is made to emit light, and only the fourth pattern portion 2610d forming a part of the first pattern 2610 is made to emit light. As a result, the size is similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in front of the effect display device 1600, and is different in size from the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c. Since the patterns of multiple equilateral triangles are displayed, it is possible to make the player think that something will happen.

Further, in the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are repeatedly emitted in this order, and the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern are repeatedly emitted. The part 2610c and the fourth pattern part 2610d are repeatedly luminescent and decorated in this order. As a result, in the first pattern 2610, in the large triangular pattern part, the first pattern part 2610a, the second pattern part 2610b, the third pattern part 2610c, the fourth pattern part 2610d, the first pattern part 2610a, and the second pattern The portion 2610b and the third pattern portion 2610c are eccentrically overlapped toward the center side of the game area 5a, and in the small triangular pattern portion, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion are overlapped. Since the 2610c and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are arranged concentrically toward the center, it is possible to show a light emitting effect like an animation that moves from the outside to the center. Not only can the player be surprised and entertained, but the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the player's expectation for the game can be raised.

Further, the fourth LED 2611d, the third LED 2611c, the second LED 2611b, and the first LED 2611a are repeatedly emitted in this order to form the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the third pattern portion 2610c, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the first pattern portion 2610a. Repeat in order to make it emit light. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect such as an animation that moves from the center side to the outside, so that the player can be surprised and entertained, and at the same time, the player can be surprised. It can make you think that there is something good, and can raise the player's expectation for the game.

When the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are made to emit light, they may be made to emit light in different colors. As a result, the rainbow-colored luminescent decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern can be shown. The switching of the part 2610d becomes easy to understand, and the animation effect can be exerted more strongly.

In the first pattern 2610, after the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are simultaneously luminescent and decorated, the first pattern portion 2610a and the second pattern portion are displayed. The 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d may be luminescently decorated in this order. As a result, initially, the stationary first pattern 2610 is light-emittingly displayed, so that the player can be made to think that it is a light-emitting decoration by the conventional light guide plate, and then the first picture 2610 is displayed. By moving like an animation, the player can be greatly surprised, and the effect of the light guide plate 2601 can be further enhanced.

FIG. 173 shows a timing diagram of an production example in which the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 and the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 are subjected to light emission decoration. In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative board 3311a at the timing t1 after the variable effect such as displaying the symbol (decorative symbol) in a variable manner on the effect display device 1600 is started. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa that illuminate and decorate the front decorative portion 3312 of the movable decorative body 3310, and the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 mounted on the back left lower front decorative substrate 3321a. Multiple full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that illuminate and decorate, and multiple full-color LEDs (side view type) that are mounted on the back right upper right front decoration substrate 3411a and illuminate and decorate the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410. ) 3411aa and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa mounted on the lower right front decorative substrate 3421a and decorating the front decorative portion 3422 of the lower right movable decorative body 3420 on the back right with the same light emitting color. (For example, red. The emission color may be different depending on the expected degree of jackpot, and the jackpot effect result is derived when the emission color is red than when the emission color is blue. You may try to increase the probability that it will be displayed.)

At this time, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a to emit and decorate the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back left lower front decorative substrate 3321a. Multiple full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that are mounted to illuminate the front decoration part 3322 of the back left lower left movable decoration body 3320, and the tip of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 mounted on the back upper right front stage decoration board 3411a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that illuminate and decorate the step decoration portion 3412, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that are mounted on the back right lower front stage decoration substrate 3421a and emit light and decorate the front stage decoration portion 3422 of the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420. The decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is light-emittingly decorated by the light emission of the full-color LED (side view type) 3421aa.

Next, the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative board 3311a at timing t2, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa that emit light and decorate the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321a mounted on the back left lower front decorative board 3321a to illuminate the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that illuminate and decorate the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the front stage of the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the back right lower front stage decorative substrate 3421a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa that emit and decorate the decoration unit 3422 are all turned off.

After that, when the timing t3 is reached, the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative board 3311a and emits a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa that emit light and decorate the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310. At the timing t4, the plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a and light emitting and decorating the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are turned off, while the back left lower. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321a, which are mounted on the front-stage decorative board 3321a and light-illuminate the front-stage decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower left movable decorative body 3320, are made to emit light, and at timing t5, the back left lower front-stage decorative board 3321a is emitted. While turning off the plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that are mounted on the lower left of the back and decorate the front decorative part 3322 of the movable decorative body 3320, the lower right of the back is mounted on the front decorative board 3421a and the lower right of the back. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa that lightly decorate the front decorative portion 3422 of the movable decorative body 3420 are made to emit light, and at timing t6, the movable decorative body is mounted on the lower right front decorative substrate 3421a on the back right. While turning off the plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa that illuminate and decorate the front decoration part 3422 of the 3420, the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 mounted on the back upper right front decoration board 3411a is turned off. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa for light emission decoration are made to emit light, and at timing t7, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411a are mounted on the back upper right front stage decorative substrate 3411a to emit light and decorate the front stage decoration portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410. Turn off the full-color LED (side view type) 3411aa.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the same control as the timings t3 to t7 at the timings t7 to t11. As a result, it is mounted on the back left upper left front decorative board 3311a and mounted on a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa, which is mounted on the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 to illuminate the front decorative portion 3312, and the back left lower front decorative board 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that illuminate and decorate the front decoration portion 3322 of the back left lower left movable decoration body 3320, and the tip of the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 mounted on the back right lower front stage decoration substrate 3421a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa that illuminate the step decoration portion 3422, and a plurality of full-color LEDs that are mounted on the back upper right front stage decoration substrate 3411a to emit light and decorate the front stage decoration portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410. Rotational light emission control for moving the light emission state in the order of (side view type) 3411aa is performed twice.

That is, the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the front decorative portion 3422 of the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410. The mode in which the light rotates in the order of the first-stage decorative portion 3412 is executed twice. In synchronization with the movement of the light emitting state (LEDs that are emitting light among the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa), the area corresponding to the light emitting state in the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is light-emitting decorated, and the game panel 1100 The light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 moves in the order of upper left, lower left, lower right, upper right, and the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is rotated.

When the peripheral control board 1510 reaches the timing t11, that is, when the rotation emission control of the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa is executed twice, all of them are turned off to eliminate the emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, and a predetermined value is obtained. It is mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 at the timing t12 based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301 within the valid period, and emits light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a to be irradiated and a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on a lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. , And a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa mounted on the back upper right front decorative substrate 3411a to illuminate the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower front. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa mounted on the step decoration substrate 3421a and light-emittingly decorating the front-stage decoration portion 3422 of the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420, and a predetermined light-emitting color (for example, red. The emission color may be different depending on the degree, and the probability that the jackpot effect result will be derived and displayed when the light emission color is red is higher than that when the light emission color is blue. It may be emitted at (may be)), and after displaying the result of the variation effect at the timing t14 (after all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (not limited to the fixed stop but may be a temporary stop)), the light is turned off.

As a result, the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is luminescently decorated. Further, in this example, when the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is light-emitting and decorated with a predetermined light-emitting color, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are made to emit light with a predetermined light-emitting color. Not only that, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a to illuminate the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower front decorative board. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421a, which are mounted on 3421a and illuminate and decorate the front-stage decorative portion 3422 of the lower right movable decorative body 3420, and a plurality of panels in synchronization with the light emission of the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a. By emitting light with the same emission color as the decorative LED 1130a, auxiliary light is supplied to a portion of the game panel 1100 that is far from the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a or that is difficult to reach from the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a. A position far from the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a or a position where light emission from the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a is difficult to reach (in this example, the right region of the center accessory 2500, and a position close to the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a). (Including those in which notches, through holes, etc. are formed between the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a and the light emission from the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a is difficult to reach). The decoration is assisted, and the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 can be lightly decorated almost uniformly.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back upper right front stage decorative substrate 3411a used for other light emitting effects (light emitting effect when the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are movable, etc.) A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that are mounted to illuminate the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and a back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the back right lower front decorative substrate 3421a. The decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is used as an auxiliary light emitting means for assisting the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 by using a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa for emitting and decorating the front-stage decorative portion 3422. Is emitted in the same emission color as the emission color of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a in synchronization with the emission of the plurality of dedicated panel decoration LEDs 1130a. Therefore, when a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are made to emit light to illuminate the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, the same light emission as the light emission color of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a is synchronized with the light emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a in color to illuminate the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower front decorative board 3421a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa, which are mounted and illuminate the front decorative portion 3422 of the lower right movable decorative body 3420, and behind the portion assisting the luminescent decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. In order to assist the light emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a by emitting light at the standby position, the number of installations of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, which is a dedicated light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, is reduced. It is possible to realize almost uniform light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 while suppressing the manufacturing cost of the machine.

When the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is light-emitting-decorated in a specific mode, the same light-emitting color as the light-emitting color of the light-emitting means is synchronized with the light-emitting light of the dedicated light-emitting means for light-emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. The auxiliary light emitting means may be made to emit light by color. Further, the specific aspect may be a predetermined emission color (for example, red) or a predetermined lighting pattern. Further, in this example, the tip of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is mounted on the back upper right front stage decorative substrate 3411a used in the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3420 when moving. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that illuminate the step decoration portion 3412, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that are mounted on the back right lower front stage decoration substrate 3421a to emit light and decorate the front stage decoration portion 3422 of the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420. The full-color LED (side view type) 3421aa and a plurality of light emitting means are used as auxiliary light emitting means, but the distance from the dedicated light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 and the dedicated light emitting means are used. The number of auxiliary light emitting means is appropriately determined according to the difficulty of reaching the light emitted from the light emitting means, the range of irradiating the auxiliary light, and the like. For example, when the range of irradiating the auxiliary light is narrow, one of the light emitting means used in the other effect may be set as the auxiliary light emitting means. Further, in the above example, an LED is used as a light emitting member provided on the movable member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting member provided on the non-movable member fixed at a predetermined position may be irradiated with auxiliary light. It may be used (as a light emitting member for partially emphasizing the decorative pattern 1150). In this case, since the position does not change, it is possible to constantly irradiate the game panel 1100 with constant light, and it is possible to perform light emission decoration with stable brightness. Further, these light emitting members (light emitting members for irradiating auxiliary light or partially emphasizing the decorative pattern 1150) are those capable of irradiating at least the region where the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is formed. Any type of LED, side view type or top view type, may be used.

The dedicated light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 may use an LED having a higher brightness than the auxiliary light emitting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emission of the auxiliary light emitting means from becoming more conspicuous than the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 because the brightness of the auxiliary light emitting means is too high.

In addition, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d mounted on the first design decorative substrate 2612 based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301 within the predetermined valid period are played. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a and LEDs 3411aa and 3421a that illuminate the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel 1100 emit light in the same emission color as the first pattern 2610a, the second pattern 2610b, and the third pattern in the first pattern 2610. The 2610c and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are simultaneously luminescent and decorated. As a result, the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600 has a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the size of the first pattern portion 2610a is different. A plurality of equilateral triangle patterns and a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns that are similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and have a size different from that of the first pattern portion 2610a and the second pattern portion 2610b. Similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns having different sizes from the third pattern portion 2610c. Since it is displayed, it is possible to perform a wide range of related luminescent decorations between the game panel 1100 around the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600, and something to the player You can make me think that it will happen.

Further, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d, which are mounted on the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern and illuminate and decorate the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601, display the result of the variation effect. It is turned off before (before all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (not limited to fixed stop but also temporary stop)). In this way, when displaying the result of the variation effect that the player pays the most attention to, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, and the second LED 2611b, which are mounted on the decorative substrate 2612 for the first pattern and emit light and decorate the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601. Since the three LEDs 2611c and the fourth LED 2611d are turned off, it is possible to prevent the display content of the effect display device 1600 from becoming difficult to see due to the light emitting decoration of the first pattern 2610 on the light guide plate 2601. On the other hand, the LEDs 1130a, 3411aa, and 3421aa that emit and decorate the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 display the result of the variation effect (after all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (not limited to the fixed stop but may be a temporary stop)). Even if the light emitting decoration of the first pattern 2610 on the light guide plate 2601 is stopped, the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 formed over a wider area than the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 is continued. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the production and a decrease in the interest in the game.

A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and a front view of the panel holder 1120. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative board 1132 arranged in the lower left corner and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110, and mounted on the back upper right front stage decorative board 3411a and movable on the back upper right. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that illuminate and decorate the front decorative portion 3412 of the decorative body 3410, and the front decorative portion 3422 of the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 mounted on the lower right front decorative substrate 3421a. The timing of turning off the plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa that emit and decorate the light is not limited to the above, but is after the lights of the plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 are turned off, and the next variable effect is produced. Is executed (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after displaying the result of the variation effect, or after the derivation display of the effect result of the variation effect (after the confirmation stop), the main control board 1310 The light may be turned off at the timing when a command (such as a variation pattern command instructing the start of the next variation effect or a command instructing the execution of a customer waiting demonstration) is received. Further, in the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate 2601 may be turned off before the reach is reached and the reach effect is started. In this case, the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is used for the reach effect. On the other hand, since the light emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 is continued even after the reach, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, at least a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel holder 1120. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are emitted over a plurality of variable effects. You may do so. For example, a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in a normal state and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and the panel holder 1120. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative board 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and the decoration of the game panel 1100 by emitting blue light. By illuminating the pattern 1150 in blue, the game area 5a is illuminated in blue, and in a short time state, it is mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and is mounted on the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the panel holder 1120, and a plurality of panels that are mounted on the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. The panel decoration LED 1130a and the panel decoration LED 1130a may be made to emit light in red, and the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 may be made to emit light in red to decorate the game area 5a in red. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the state is advantageous to the player by the light emitting decoration of the game panel 1100, and it is possible to improve the game interest of the player who recognizes that the advantageous state is being executed.

Further, in a state where a left-handed game is recommended, a plurality of panel decorations mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. LED 1130a and a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are emitted in blue. By decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 by emitting light in blue, the game area 5a is decorated by emitting light in blue, and in a state where right-handed games are recommended, it is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120. It is mounted on a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110, and on the lower left panel decorative board 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 and a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a are made to emit light in red, and the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is emitted in red. It may be decorated. As a result, the player can be made to recognize whether the right-handed game is recommended or the left-handed game is recommended, and the player is not disadvantaged.

Further, a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 for each variation effect and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and the panel holder. The emission color may be switched between a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the front view of the 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. For example, in the variation effect, the panel decoration LED 1130a is made to emit light with a blue emission color, and when the variation effect is completed and the next variation effect is started, the emission color of the panel decoration LED 1130a is switched to green. May be good. As a result, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the variable effect has been switched. The timing of switching the emission color is at least the timing before the next variation effect is executed (for example, the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after displaying the result of the variation effect, or the effect result of the variation effect. After the derivation display (after the confirmation is stopped), a command (a variation pattern command instructing the start of the next variation effect, a command instructing the execution of the customer waiting demonstration, etc.) may be received from the main control board 1310). ..

Further, in this example, since the game panel 1100 that emits light and decorates the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 that emits light and decorates the front of the effect display device 1600 are formed of different members, the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 are combined. It is possible to prevent the other from being luminescently decorated by the light incident on one, and not only can both the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 be luminescently decorated at the same time, but each can also be luminescently decorated independently. Therefore, it is possible to execute various light emitting effects such that the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 are simultaneously light-emitting and decorated, or only one of them is light-emitting and decorated.

Further, the above-mentioned light emission effect is an example, and the light emission mode such as the light emission color, the light emission timing, the light emission period, and the light emission pattern (blinking interval) is not limited to the above. That is, it is mounted on a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a and light emitting and decorating the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and mounted on the back left lower front decorative substrate 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that emit light and decorate the front stage decoration part 3322 of the back left lower left movable decoration body 3320, and the front stage of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 mounted on the back upper right front stage decorative substrate 3411a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that illuminate and decorate the decoration portion 3412, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that are mounted on the back right lower front stage decorative substrate 3421a and emit light and decorate the front stage decoration portion 3422 of the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420. A variety of light emission can be achieved by appropriately combining the light emission modes of the full-color LED (side view type) 3421aa and the plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610, which are decorated by emitting light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601. Since the production can be shown to the player, the player is less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the front effect unit 2600, for example, as shown in FIG. 174, a plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 arranged on the right side surface side of the light guide plate 2601 emit light. The second pattern 2620 is luminescently decorated. As a result, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a guide (message) for the player consisting of the characters "CHANGE!" Is displayed as the second pattern 2620, so that the guide gives the player a chance. It is possible to suggest the arrival of the game and raise the expectation for the game.

FIG. 175 shows a timing diagram of an effect example in which the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 different from that of FIG. 173 and the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 are subjected to light emission decoration. In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 at the timing t1'after the variable effect such as displaying the symbol (decorative symbol) in a variable manner is started by the effect display device 1600. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 have a predetermined emission color (for example, red. The emission color is changed according to the jackpot expectation degree. It is also possible to increase the probability that the big hit effect result will be derived and displayed when the light is emitted in the red emission color than in the case where the emission color is blue.) At the timing t2', the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are turned off. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 have a predetermined emission color (for example, red. , The emission color may be different depending on the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and the probability that the jackpot effect result will be derived and displayed when the emission color is red than when the emission color is blue is calculated. The emission color may be the same as that of the panel decorative LED 1130a, or a different emission color may be used), and when the timing t3'is reached, the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 is arranged in the lower left corner of the front view. A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the panel decorative substrate 1132 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are turned off.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs the same control as the timings t1'to t3'at the timings t3'to t5'. As a result, a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and a predetermined emission color. Alternate light emission control for alternating light emission is performed twice.

Further, when the alternate light emission control is performed, a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. And a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative board 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the front view of the 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and a game panel synchronized with the light emission of the panel. The region corresponding to the light emitting state of the decoration patterns 1150 of 1100 is light-emitting decorated, and the light-emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 moves alternately to the upper left and the lower left. That is, the upper left of the game panel 1100 is emitted by a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. The decorative pattern 1150 of the portion is luminescent and decorated, and is mounted on the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the front view of the 1120, and emits light from a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. The decorative pattern 1150 at the upper left of the game panel 1100 is light-emittingly decorated.

At the timing t5', the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120, and a plurality of panel decorations that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110. Alternate emission control is performed between the LED 1130a for panel decoration and a plurality of panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the front view of the 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Then, all of these are turned off to eliminate the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, and the front upper left of the panel holder 1120 is at the timing t6'based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301 within the predetermined valid period. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 arranged in the corner and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110, and a back upper left movable decoration mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa that illuminate and decorate the front-stage decorative portion 3312 of the body 3310 and a predetermined emission color (for example, red. Note that the emission color may be different depending on the jackpot expectation degree. Often, the probability that the jackpot effect result will be derived and displayed when the light is emitted in the red emission color may be increased as compared with the case where the effect is emitted in the blue emission color. Also, before the operation of the effect operation unit 301. (It may be a light emitting color different from the light emitting color of), and after displaying the result of the variation effect at the timing t8'(after displaying all the decorative symbols as a stop display (not limited to the fixed stop but also a temporary stop)). Turn off the lights.

As a result, the decoration pattern 1150 at the upper left of the game panel 1100 is light-emittingly decorated. In this example, when the decoration pattern 1150 on the upper left portion of the game panel 1100 is light-emitting decorated with a predetermined light emitting color, it is mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 and is mounted on the panel plate 1110. Not only do the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a that irradiate the peripheral surface of the panel emit light with a predetermined emission color, but also the front-stage decorative portion of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa that illuminate and decorate the 3312 are mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 as a facilitating light emitting means, and toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. The upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view by emitting light in the same emission color as the emission color of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a in synchronization with the emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that irradiate the light. The decoration pattern 1150 applied to the upper left portion of the game panel 1100, which is mounted on the panel decoration substrate 1131 and is light-emittingly decorated by a plurality of panel-decorating LEDs 1130a that illuminate the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110, promotes light-emitting decoration. However, the decoration pattern 1150 at the upper left of the game panel 1100 can be light-emitting and decorated with a higher amount of light. In this way, a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and the back upper left front stage decoration. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the substrate 3311a and light-emittingly decorating the front-stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the same light-emitting mode (lighting / blinking period and interval, light-emitting color). Etc.) to illuminate the decorative pattern 1150 in the upper left part of the game panel 1100 in a coordinated manner, and the amount of light of the decorative pattern 1150 luminescent is increased, so that the decorative pattern 1150 luminescent is partially emphasized. It is possible to realize a clear light emitting decoration in the portion.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301 within a predetermined valid period are light-emittingly decorated with the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. The second pattern is luminescent and decorated by emitting light in the same emission color as the decorative LEDs 1130a and LEDs 3411aa and 3421aa. As a result, a guide (message) to the player consisting of the characters "CHANGE!" Is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600, so that the light emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 around the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In combination, the light emitting display can be executed on the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600, and the player can be made to think that something will happen.

Further, the plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern and emitting light and decorating the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are before displaying the result of the variation effect (all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed (to confirm stop). It is not limited to temporary stop, but it is turned off before). In this way, when displaying the result of the variation effect that the player pays the most attention to, the plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the decorative substrate 2622 for the second pattern and illuminating and decorating the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are turned off. It is possible to prevent the display content of the effect display device 1600 from becoming difficult to see due to the light emitting decoration of the second pattern 2630 on the light plate 2601. On the other hand, the LEDs 1130a and 3311aa that emit and decorate the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 are turned off after displaying the result of the variation effect (after all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (not limited to the fixed stop but may be a temporary stop)). Therefore, even if the light emitting decoration of the second pattern 2630 on the light guide plate 2601 is stopped, the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 formed over a wider area than the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 can be continued. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the production and a decrease in the interest in the game.

A plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 arranged in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and the back upper left front decorative substrate. The timing of turning off the plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the 3311a and illuminating the front-stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is not limited to the above, and at least the first Any LED 2611 for one pattern 2610 may be turned off at a timing after the lights are turned off and before the next variation effect is executed. Further, in the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate 2601 may be turned off before the reach is reached and the reach effect is started. In this case, the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is used for the reach effect. On the other hand, since the light emitting decoration of the game panel 1100 is continued even after the reach, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, in this example, since the game panel 1100 that emits light and decorates the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 that emits light and decorates the front of the effect display device 1600 are formed of different members, the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 are combined. It is possible to prevent the other from being luminescently decorated by the light incident on one, and not only can both the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 be luminescently decorated at the same time, but each can also be luminescently decorated independently. Therefore, it is possible to execute various light emitting effects such that the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 are simultaneously light-emitting and decorated, or only one of them is light-emitting and decorated.

Further, when the decoration pattern 1150 in the predetermined area of the game panel 1100 is light-emitting-decorated in a specific mode, it is promoted by the same light-emitting color as the light-emitting means in synchronization with the dedicated light-emitting means for light-emitting decoration of the predetermined area of the game panel 1100. The light emitting means may be made to emit light. Further, the specific correspondence may be a predetermined emission color (for example, red) or a predetermined lighting pattern. Further, in this example, as a facilitating light emitting means for promoting the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 on the upper left portion of the game panel 1100, it is mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a and emits light on the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310. Using a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa to decorate, it is mounted on the back left lower front stage decorative board 3321a as a light emitting means to promote the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 at the lower left of the game panel 1100. It is configured to use a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that illuminate and decorate the front-stage decorative portion 3322 of the body 3320, but the range of the area and the luminescent decoration that promote the luminescent decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 in the game panel 1100. The number of facilitating light emitting means is appropriately determined according to the amount of light and the like. For example, in the case of promoting the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern on the left side of the game panel 1100, a plurality of full colors mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a and light emitting and decorating the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310. Multiple light emission with LED (side view type) 3311aa and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa which are mounted on the back left lower front stage decorative substrate 3321a and emit light and decorate the front stage decoration portion 3322 of the back left lower left movable decorative body 3320. The means may be set as the facilitating light emitting means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a used in other light emitting effects (light emitting effect when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are movable, etc.). A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa that emit light and decorate the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the front stage of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 mounted on the back left lower front stage decorative substrate 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa for emitting and decorating the decoration unit 3322 are used as a facilitating light emitting means for promoting the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 in the predetermined area of the game panel 1100 in the predetermined area of the game panel 1100. The decoration pattern 1150 is made to emit light in the same emission color as the emission color of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a in synchronization with the emission of the plurality of dedicated panel decoration LEDs 1130a. Therefore, when the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are made to emit light to illuminate the decoration pattern 1150 in the predetermined area of the game panel 1100, the emission colors of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are synchronized with the light emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a with the same light emitting color to illuminate the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower front decorative board 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that are mounted on the lower left of the back and decorate the front decoration part 3322 of the movable decorative body 3320 by light emission are placed in a standby position behind the portion that promotes the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. In order to promote light emission decoration of a predetermined area in the game panel 1100, the number of installations of a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, which are dedicated light emitting means for light emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, is reduced. It is possible to realize a light emitting decoration that emphasizes the decoration pattern 1150 in a predetermined area of the game panel 1100 while suppressing the manufacturing cost of the game panel 1100.

The dedicated light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 may use an LED having a higher brightness than the promoting light emitting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emission of the facilitating light emitting means from becoming more conspicuous than the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 because the brightness of the facilitating light emitting means is too high.

Further, in addition to the light emission of the dedicated light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, the auxiliary light emitting means and the promoting light emitting means may be linked to emit light. For example, when the entire area of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is light-emitting and decorated, a dedicated light-emitting means for light-emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is made to emit light with a predetermined light-emitting color, and an auxiliary light-emitting means is used for the game panel 1100. When the decoration pattern 1150 of the above is made to emit light with the same emission color as the emission color of the dedicated light emitting means, and only the decoration pattern 1150 on the left side of the game panel 1100 is made to emit light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is used. The dedicated light emitting means for light emission decoration is made to emit light with a predetermined light emitting color, and the facilitating light emitting means is made to emit light with the same light emitting color as the light emitting color of the dedicated light emitting means for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. May be good. As a result, in addition to being able to illuminate and decorate the entire area of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 substantially uniformly, it is possible to realize luminescence decoration that emphasizes only the decoration pattern in a predetermined area of the game panel 1100.

Further, the above-mentioned light emission effect is an example, and the light emission mode such as the light emission color, the light emission timing, the light emission period, and the light emission pattern (blinking interval) is not limited to the above. That is, it is mounted on a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the back left upper left front decorative substrate 3311a to illuminate the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and on the back left lower front decorative substrate 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that emit light and decorate the front stage decoration part 3322 of the back left lower left movable decoration body 3320, and the front stage of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 mounted on the back upper right front stage decorative substrate 3411a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that illuminate and decorate the decoration portion 3412, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that are mounted on the back right lower front stage decorative substrate 3421a to emit and decorate the front stage decoration portion 3422 of the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420. A variety of light emission modes can be obtained by appropriately combining the full-color LED (side view type) 3421aa and a plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 arranged on the right side of the light guide plate 2601. Since the light emitting effect can be shown to the player, the player is less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, as a light emitting effect using the front effect unit 2600 different from that of FIGS. 172 and 174, for example, as shown in FIG. 176, it is mounted on the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 arranged on the right side surface side of the light guide plate 2601. The plurality of LEDs 2621 are made to emit light, and the second pattern 2630 is made to emit light and be decorated. As a result, the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the upper left diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 are each extended by a thick width to form the second pattern 2630 of the geometric pattern. However, since the decoration is luminescent, the decoration with a sense of unity between the outside and the inside of the center accessory 2500 can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

The light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the light emitting decoration of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the front effect unit 2600 may be performed at the same time. As a result, the luminescent decoration having a sense of unity between the outside and the inside of the center accessory 2500 can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

Subsequently, the effect of combining the movable effect and the light emitting effect on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. In FIG. 177, the first pattern is luminescently decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit, and the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, and the back upper right movable decoration, It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the movable decorative body on the lower right of the back is moved to the second united position. In FIG. 178, the first pattern is luminescently decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit, and the back lower movable decoration, the back upper movable decoration, the back upper left movable decoration, the back left lower movable decoration, and the back upper right movable decoration, It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the movable decorative body on the lower right of the back is moved to the first united position. In FIG. 179, the second pattern is luminescently decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from that of FIG. 178, and the back lower movable decoration body, the back upper movable decoration body, the back upper left movable decoration body, and the back left lower movable decoration body are displayed. It is a front view of the game board which shows the body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back right lower right movable decorative body moved to the first united position.

The game board 5 has the above-mentioned movable effect and light emission effect according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The production is performed by appropriately combining and. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 177, the light guide plate 2601 of the front effect unit 2600 is decorated with the first pattern 2610 by light emission, and the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, and the back upper left movable The decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are moved to the second united position.

As a result, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 Since the parts of the six large triangles in one pattern 2610 are located, the movable decorations 3110 under the back, the movable decorations 3210 on the back, and the movable decorations 3310 on the upper left of the back depend on the parts of the large triangles in the first pattern 2610. , Back left lower movable decoration body 3320, back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and back right lower movable decoration body 3420 can be decorated, back lower left movable decoration body 3110, back upper movable decoration body 3210, back upper left movable decoration body 3310. , The back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 can be changed in appearance. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player an impression different from the state shown in FIG. 170, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of effects, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored and the state shown in FIG. 170. Compared with, it is possible to make people think that better things will happen, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game.

Further, as an effect of appropriately combining the above-mentioned movable effect and the light emitting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 178, the light guide plate 2601 of the front effect unit 2600 is light-emitting-decorated with the first pattern 2610, and the back lower movable decorative body. The 3110, the back upper left movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration 3420 are moved to the first united position. As a result, the large triangular pattern of the first pattern 2610, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and Since the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is overlapped in the front and back, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3320. The decorative body 3410 and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 on the back can be decorated to change their appearance. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player an impression clearly different from the state shown in FIG. 171, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn. Can be convinced that is a "big hit" and enhance the interest in the game.

Further, as an effect of appropriately combining the above-mentioned movable effect and the light emitting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 179, the light guide plate 2601 of the front effect unit 2600 of the embodiment different from the above is light-emitting-decorated with the second pattern 2630. At the same time, the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 are first combined. Move to position. As a result, in front view, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. In front of the adjacent pattern 2630, the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the upper left diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 are extended, and the second pattern 2630 of the geometric pattern of the thick line is extended. Since it is luminescent and decorated, it is possible to make it difficult to see between them by the second pattern 2630, and the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320. It is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the decorative mode formed by the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right side of the back and the movable decorative body 3420 on the lower right side of the back, and it is possible to assist the movable effect and further enhance the effect.

In addition, in the state where the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 (second pattern 2630) of the light guide plate 2601 are light-emitting and decorated, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper upper movable decorative body 3210 are moved to the rear thereof. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 may be appropriately luminescent. As a result, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 Since the light from the light guide plate 2601 reaches the player's eyes through the light guide plate 2601, it is possible to show the player a bright light emitting decoration that cannot be achieved by the light guide plate 2601 alone, and it is possible to entertain the player. it can.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned movable effect and light emission effect can be appropriately combined, and can also be combined with an effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. it can. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player by appropriately combining a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Moreover, although the present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Is. For example, as in the invention in which at least a part of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is visibly arranged so as to prevent forgetting to install the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132, the first pattern At least a part of the decorative board 2612 for the first pattern and the decorative board 2622 for the second pattern may be visibly arranged so as to prevent forgetting to install the decorative board 2612 for the first pattern and the decorative board 2622 for the second pattern. ..

[6. Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 13 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The overall configuration of the above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184. 180 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 181 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 182 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 183 is an X-ray line of FIG. 182. 184 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A of FIG. 182. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a transparent cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and a main control that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on a command from the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510. A liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise invading the liquid crystal output board 1530. , A conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined position of the metal shield plate 1540, and a transparent base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to a predetermined position together with a metal shield plate 1540 to form a shield plate 1540. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is formed by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 can be stored in the various boards mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There are a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a region of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface, and is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a square shape in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in the remaining one-third of the area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and the upper right corner of the cover body 1501 On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Is connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and are the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 113 and electricity. Is connected.

The cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, is transparently molded, and covers the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) when viewed from the front. The side walls 1501b to 1501e are formed in a box shape having an opening by projecting each toward the rear (front side of the pachinko machine 1).

The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air cooling fan FAN at a position slightly on the upper right side of the center thereof when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the bottom surface. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a cylindrical shape to be inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 is specified at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air-cooled fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501ab1 to 1501ab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to project toward the opening side and the opposite side of the cover body 1501. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally taking out various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and mounted, the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which the pan head and the flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air-cooled fan FAN pops out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a higher position than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The wiring drawer recess 1501ab is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooled fan FAN is attached to and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab.

When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof. The connector recess 1501ac is the FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed, almost horizontally long rectangular regions (to be exact, a convex region with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connector CN2 to the connector CN7 at the bottom). It is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). There is. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d, respectively. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac occupies a region on the lower right side when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction are formed so as to project forward at predetermined intervals at positions that do not interfere with the holes 1501ac8.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 have connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. And the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 is exposed. At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is a protruding wall called the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the plug is hidden even if the plug corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted. It is designed so that it cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The volume control switch 1510d is lower than the height of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallic property, or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it adheres to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d. Can be prevented.

The cover flat plate 1501a is a horizontally long rectangular region with one closed position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. The opening of the cover body 1501 at a position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed so as to project toward the side, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, respectively. .. At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is a protruding wall called the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the plug is hidden even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted. It is designed so that it cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallic property, or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN8 and CN9. It has become like.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring outlet opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side side thereof when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring drawer opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af is located at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and has a predetermined height of a cylindrical shape (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503) The protruding portion 1501afa having the dimensions) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting holes 1501afb1 are located at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed, respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear, respectively. , The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae is closed, and a plurality of wirings (to transmit drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the wiring from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a non-conductive resin and is transparently molded.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and projecting outward at a predetermined distance in the center. At the same time, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projecting outward and a hinge hooking portion 1501cd arranged below the guide portion 1501cc and projecting outward are formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda protruding forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, in the center of the cover body 1501 of the cover side wall 1501e on the right side, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control. Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are peripheral control substrates, respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1510.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501ag1, the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange as follows. Then, among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540, and the through holes 1540c1a and the shield plate 1540 are L-shaped. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , The cover flat plate 1501a is arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 correspond to each other. In addition to being in contact with each other, the land 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. Further, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal shield plate is electrically connected. The 1540 will be circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output are output. The circuit will be grounded to the ground (GND) of the board 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity as described above. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. ..

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan head screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inward from the end face on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 are diagonally formed so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been done. The periphery of the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1520 rb1 to 1520 rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and these lands 1520 rf1 to 1520 rf4 and 1520 rb1 to 1520 rb4 are respectively formed. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the lands 1520rf4 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 are in contact with each other. It will be in contact. Further, the lands 1520 rb1 to 1520 rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the peripheral data. The circuit will be grounded to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output are output. The circuit will be grounded to the ground (GND) of the board 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity as described above. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby being circuit grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. Become.

When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is placed on the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 to be fixed is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1,1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1,1501an2 are formed diagonally so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a liquid crystal output Copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are liquid crystal output substrates, respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the 1530.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange so as to match the boss hole 1501 am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the liquid crystal is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1, 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss hole 1501am2 are in contact with each other. In addition to this, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. The circuit will be grounded to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM are used. The circuit will be grounded to the ground (GND) of the board 1520. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity as described above. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. ..

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is fixed to the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. A gap having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa in a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates. (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed.

In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to control the peripherals. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 become A gap is formed, and a gap is formed between the volume adjusting switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. , Air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven formed in the cover body 1501) are taken in. The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the gaps formed in the volume control holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is taken in through the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the gaps formed in the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501).

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The gap formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501), and the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The volume control holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the gaps formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. And the area in the gap formed in) is smaller than the sum of. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. , A plurality of air is formed from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small when the air is taken in through the ventilation holes 1540az.

[6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, is molded transparently, and is formed on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular base flat plate 1502a when viewed from the front. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by projecting each toward the front (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the openings formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the openings formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Is fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front of the base flat plate 1502a, wiring is provided to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side. The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the force when the connector for connection is inserted, and the vertically elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected. The force for inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 and the force for operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d at positions that do not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is warped, and an elongated disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa4 is formed in the left-right direction to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected.

Further, the base flat plate 1502a is located on the right side when viewed from the front thereof, at a position corresponding to the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d formed by bending the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab long in the vertical direction is formed, which is one size larger than the back surface shape of the ground piece 1540d.

When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca protruding outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 of the base side wall 1502c on the left side. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502 cc and 1502 cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab, and the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad have U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf described above. The hinged portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, in a state where the hinge receiving portions 1502 cc and 1502 cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502 cae and 1502 caf are in contact with the hinge hook portions 1501 cc and 1501 cd L-shaped hook portions 1501 cca and 1501 cda formed on the cover body 1501. By wrapping around, the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf are hooked on the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501. It is designed to be able to engage.

Further, in the center of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea is formed so as to project outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, respectively.

[6-3. Shield plate]
The metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2 bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment) on the upper center of the left side and the lower center of the left side of the flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Are formed respectively.

Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment) on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent rearward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, respectively, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (25 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment) is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a is formed with notches around the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e so as not to interfere with each other, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is formed. In a state where the cover body 1501 is sandwiched and fixed by various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer peripheral circumference of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a and The wiring extraction recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a.

The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane. The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel surfaces. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is one of the mounting boss holes of the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed in the above. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is one of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Two of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed so as to be projected.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by various substrates, a predetermined height distance dimension between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (this implementation). In the form, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A second space 1505a (see FIG. 183) having (12 mm in the present embodiment) and a second space between the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a described later. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension (1.6 mm in this embodiment) of a predetermined height.

In the first space 1505a, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b described later, SDRAM 1510c described later, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e described later, power supply creation circuit (not shown), etc. Resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, LEDs ML1 to ML4 described later, special connectors SCN1, SCN2 described later, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a described later, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown), The second space 1505b is accommodated while the special connector SCN3, etc. described later) and various electronic components (resistors (not shown, capacitors not shown, special connector SCN4, etc.) described later are accommodated in the liquid crystal output board 1530. Does not contain various electronic components at all. This is because various electronic components that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. This is because the heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not accommodating the above. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat radiating plate in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise.

The shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 is formed with ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape at positions corresponding to the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, similarly to the ventilation holes 1501az. There is. When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotate, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. As a result, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[6-4. Conductive elastic member]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes the conductive coating portion 1545a and the conductive coating portion 1545a. It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive coating portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape having a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a rectangular shape having a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

[6-5. Various connectors]
Peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attainment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I /. Peripheral control IC1510a in which O-interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various programs and effects that can control the progress and demonstration of the game production (demo production performed while waiting for the player). SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic) that can transfer and store various control information (peripheral data) stored in the control ROM 1510b that stores various specified schedule data in advance and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520.
Random Access Memory) SDRAM 1510c consisting of 1510c1 and 1510c2, slide-type volume control switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and backup power supply that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is turned off. It includes a 1510e, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) for creating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The peripheral control ICs 1510a, ROM 1510b, and SDRAM 1510c provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have smaller IC pin spacings and various connectors CN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. ~ CN7, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 pin spacing becomes narrower, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 increases, so the spacing between connectors CN1 and CN7 becomes narrower, and the spacing between connector CN7 and special connector SCN2 also becomes narrower. ing.

The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbit, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os and various parallel I / Os. Examples of various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transfer) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In the present embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, and various boards provided on the door frame side. Some of them employ SPI communication or I2C communication as a communication method for transmitting control data to the connector (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

In the present embodiment, for example, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in various production units, and communicating via the connector CN6 or the connector CN7). An electric drive source (for example, an operation ring drive motor 342 provided in the effect operation unit 300, an operation button elevating drive motor 367, etc.) provided on the door frame 3 side, and communicate with each other via the connector CN3. ) Is transmitted to the drive control IC, and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in various production units, which communicate via the connector CN6). The signal from is received as detection data, and the signal from various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 and communicating via the connector CN3) is detected. Receive as data. In the present embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

As various parallel I / Os, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. No signals from various sensors that confirm the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), and control signals for the controlled object (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are input from the GPIO (connector CN6). It outputs (via) or outputs a signal from GPIO to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Further, in this embodiment, GPIO is used so as to function as serial communication. For example, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process generated every 16 milliseconds (ms)), a clock signal is generated from the GPIO, and data is output bit by bit from the GPIO based on this clock signal. It can produce serial data. By using such a GPIO so as to function as serial communication, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process generated every 16 milliseconds (ms)), for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side. (Communicating via the connector CN1), the light emission data can be output as a plurality of game board side serial systems, and a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN6) provided on the door frame 3 side can be output. The light emission data can be transmitted by a plurality of door frame side serial systems.

In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , Connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. Is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to the instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , It is possible to transfer to SRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize high-speed data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the boards, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the boards. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. The liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal systems include a plurality of types such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI (Mobile Indicator Interface) system, an eDP (Embedded DisplayPort) system, and a clockless system. In, four systems (a total of four systems) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that employs, for example, an eDP system instead of the MIPI system, has one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system. You can also create 1510.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2. As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 5V is supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 12V is supplied. The LEDML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 35V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 35V is supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 183) having the distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension (1.6 mm in this embodiment) of a predetermined height of 2.

As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they are provided with a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move in the vertical direction at all when they are fitted.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets, respectively.

The socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing it in. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed from the front of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) in the front-rear direction (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving in a predetermined distance range (in the direction of). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not come into contact with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 even if the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

The socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing it in. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is in the front-rear direction (direction between the back surface and the front surface of the pachinko machine 1) when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. ), The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Special so that the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not come into contact with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 even if the substrate 1510) is moved to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various control information (peripheral data) that is the control target of the peripheral control board 1510. As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, and a pattern image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the door frame 3, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND type flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is cheaper than the NOR type flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

In this way, by adopting the NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to reduction of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer speed. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of electrically connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripherals are not adopted. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise invading the board-to-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after pushing in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510, a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket are formed. It is possible to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by preventing damage to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during this operation, it is possible to prevent damage to the multiple connection terminals formed between the plug and the socket, and to provide a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be reliably formed.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the effect progresses to the effect display device 1600 (for example, for the player). An image telling that a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image telling that the jackpot gaming state will not occur, and a state in which the jackpot gaming state does not occur but the jackpot gaming state occurs compared to the normal state. It is an important board for drawing an image (such as an image that conveys that it is approaching) as an image. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other via a wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise invading the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after pushing in, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket are formed. It is possible to prevent damage and reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, it is possible to prevent damage to the multiple connection terminals formed between the plug and the socket, and to ensure the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared with the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be reduced. Therefore, for example, a large effect unit (movable effect body) is operated on the game board 5. It is possible to contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electric drive source and the drive mechanism, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position).

[6-6. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is provided on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged so as to be aligned with the hole 1501ah2, and the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. To do.

Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in.

Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged as they are or finely adjusted because they are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted and arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and penetrated. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to cover the shield plate 1540. It is in a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the body 1501 and various substrates.

In this way, of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting bosses formed on the back surface side are inserted into the protruding portions 1501an1 and 1501an2 to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has the mounting bosses for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are constrained, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is suppressed by the peripheral control board 1510. Absorbed by the dimensional tolerances of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a when fixed to the back surface side of the 1501a. You can do it.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 are provided. The guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted, and the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed in the cover body 1501 are inserted into the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502.

Subsequently, the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are in contact with the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cd of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. The base body 1502 wraps around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. In the state of covering the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Insert the metal one-way screw and screw it toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base side sealing portion 1502ea and the base side sealing portion 1502ea are sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact). Further, in the sealed state in this way, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d is projected from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protruding length) extending to the back surface of the above is 6.8 mm.

In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent against illegal acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN are connected from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector of the above is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) the adhesive tape 1545c of 1545.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to a mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 and on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box accommodating the effect display device 1600. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box that is inserted into the mounting groove that constitutes the mounting portion formed in the above, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole that constitutes the mounting portion formed on the back side of the.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that closes the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of this frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. By being connected to, it becomes the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit ground piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. As shown in FIG. 184, the 1540d hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 through the conductive elastic member 1545 through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and collapses in the height direction (in the present embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 collapses by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), resulting in a dimensional deviation due to dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and securely connected, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided. Since it can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to form the same ground (GND), an environment resistant to electromagnetic noise should be constructed for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. Can be done.

In the assembly method described above, in the procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed. Arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is provided on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss hole 1501ah2 is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 to be formed, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side. The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a cover body when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface). After fixing to (located on the lower right side of 1501), the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is pushed into the predetermined position described above (the peripheral control board 1510 has the cover body 1501). It can also be fixed to the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side.). Even in the mounting procedure of such various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated when pushing the board is absorbed, so that the plug and the socket can be connected. It is possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and to reliably form transmission lines between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, and to form the liquid crystal output board 1530 and its peripherals. It is possible to surely form a transmission line between the control board 1510 and the board.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. The peripheral data corresponding to the above is stored as a substrate that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a substrate that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and becomes a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided with the peripheral data ROM 1520a for storing the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these two types of methods are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system). Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 suitable for the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-mentioned inter-board connector.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and are transparently molded, and the peripheral control board is contained in the internal space of the cover body 1501. Various substrates such as 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and various substrates. Then, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. Is connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is guided to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) that serves as the circuit ground via the metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various boards (including the power supply board 630). Can be done.

Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. And the arrangement of. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 182, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are peripheral control boards. The part number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in 1510, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC and the part number). , Pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are confirmed from multiple directions. The regions are distributed and arranged so as to have an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b so that the control ROM 1510b can be formed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. .. Further, since the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in the lighting state while the DC + 5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state in which it is being printed, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and is further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively (for example). , Connector pin number, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board. The contents silk-printed on the 1520 and the data are distributed and arranged so as to be a large area where the contents can be substantially confirmed from multiple directions. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the contents silk-printed on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence with the above, the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is modified, and the inter-board connector modified by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, since the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 35V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 35V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the above functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pin is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. ..

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. The silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) are distributed and arranged on the 1530 so that they can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510, and the silk-printed contents on the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in a lit state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the special connector SCN4. Improved visibility of the silk-printed contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improved visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can be contributed to.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa include the part number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pins of the 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And, the state of the IC pin and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are dispersed so as to be a region larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the contents can be confirmed from multiple directions. Have been placed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be done. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but by further having a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510c brightly, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the IC pin, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the vane of the air-cooled fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vane of the air-cooled fan FAN). The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

In this embodiment, as the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mounted type having a wide angle of about 120 degrees and a type having weak directivity are adopted. It is also suitable for use as lighting. Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 183) having the distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension (1.6 mm in this embodiment) of a predetermined height of 2. As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

Further, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a gloss, and is a region of the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. And its surroundings, it also has a function as a reflecting unit capable of reflecting the light emitted by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and directing the light emitted to the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective portions may be configured to be further coated with a glossy colored paint.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and are discharged to the side of the game board 5. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units to be charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up behind the island facilities in the game hall. As described above, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as a non-conductive resin as described above, and are formed in the internal space of the cover body 1501. In addition, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various boards. By fixing the shield plate 1540 made of metal, the circuit ground is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, in the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the grounds of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. By electrically connecting to the (GND) line, the same ground (GND) was adopted.

As a result, the cover body 1501 and the base of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The electromagnetic noise that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, which serve as circuit grounds, via the metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 and the base of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided to and removed from the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) that serves as the circuit ground via the metal shield plate 1540.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is arranged. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data The inter-board connector with the special connector SCN3 provided on the ROM board 1520 and the inter-board connector with the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged near the center of the ball tank 552. By doing so, it can be arranged away from the tank rail 553. As described above, the tank rail 553 is capable of dropping the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a, and thus the above-described substrate. By arranging the inter-board connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the inter-board connector described above.

Further, the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 The inter-board connector is a state in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In the above, as shown in FIG. 182, since the arrangement can be long in the vertical direction, the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, or the like adheres can be minimized. In addition, when the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adheres is extremely increased. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 182, and have dust and some metallic properties. The area to which the powder or the like is attached is extremely increased. However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is a connector due to a protruding wall called a cover flat plate 1501a. Even if the plugs corresponding to CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden so that they cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a is provided. Even if dust adhering to the connector, powder having some metallic property, or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. In this way, the orientation in which the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged and the orientation in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

By the way, conventionally, a game machine equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as a design, various background images, characters, characters, a production control board on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images, etc. is mounted. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116667 (Fig. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal methods input to the display device. Therefore, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify and manufacture the effect control board according to the video signal input to the display device, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the effect control board. there were.

Further, conventionally, a production control board (effect control means) or the like on which a ROM for storing image data such as a design, various background images, characters, and characters, a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images, and the like are mounted. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116667 (FIG. 2)) has been proposed. By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the game machine are charged with static electricity due to the game balls rubbing against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the island.

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 187. FIG. 185 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine, FIG. 186 is a block diagram showing an outline of a connection relationship with a panel drive board, and FIG. 187 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 186. As shown in FIG. 115, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 can control the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that can control the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that can control the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182. There is.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 185, the main control board 1310 capable of controlling the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with built-in various processing programs such as the main control program that controls operation, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and detection signals from various sensors are input. The main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a predetermined voltage power failure or It is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of a momentary power failure and a RAM clear switch 1310f for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is operated by a high frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU4100a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to a content that does not make sense, the main control MPU 1310a is forced to be affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit to reset. The forced reset by such a built-in reset circuit cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described later, and again executes the main control side power on power processing described later. Will be reset. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (as described later). Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control) does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633 from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Only the MPU1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will be maintained in the activated state.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, "hardware with built-in main control") that updates the big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. It is described as "random number circuit".) Is built-in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 65535 is preset as a minimum value), and an initial value is generated. The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as a value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a single value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and a clock signal (main) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. When all the values in the above are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, so that various signals based on the information are transmitted from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function that has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, a main control output circuit without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal, and a main control output circuit that does not have a reset function. It is composed of. The main control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, in the main control output circuit with a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by the main control system reset, and the signal based on the information is reset. Is configured as a circuit in which no output is made from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the main control output circuit without a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is generated. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the various output terminals.

First start port sensor 3002 (described above, first start port sensor main side 3002a and first start port sensor slave side 3002b), second start port 2004, which detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. The second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the above, the general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003. Each detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, the large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005, and the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The detection signals from the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, and the main control input circuit 1310b is input. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via. On the other hand, the respective detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001, the gate sensor 2506, the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are mainly controlled via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. It is input to the board 1310 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, so that the main control solenoid from the main control output circuit with a reset function By outputting the control signal to the drive circuit 1310d, each drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. Or, by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, the status indicator, normal symbol display, normal of the function display unit 1400 from the main control output circuit with a reset function. Each drive signal is sent to the hold indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special hold number indicator, the second special symbol indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator via other boards. Output without, that is, directly.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, so that the payout control board 633 is output from the main control output circuit with a reset function. Main control with reset function by outputting various information (game information) related to the game or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the output circuit to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002 (first start port sensor main side 3002a and first start port sensor slave side 3002b), second start port sensor 2402, gate sensor 2506, and large winning opening A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 2403, whereas a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 B detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the large winning opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout to the main control output circuit without a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port as serial data, so that the payout control board 633 has no reset function. Various commands are sent as serial data to. When the payout control board 633 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with a reset function.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without the reset function. No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit to the peripheral control board 1510.

Various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. Described.) BC0 (see FIG. 189 and the like) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and with this as an opportunity, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases (clears) the main control built-in RAM. There is. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without the reset function, and is also output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without the reset function.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC + 12V and DC + 35V from the power supply board 630, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these DC + 12V and DC + 35V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of DC + 12V and DC + 35V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning, and the power failure warning signal is a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to the input terminal, input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control board 1310 (output via the main control output circuit 1310c), and the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110. Is entered in. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. The power failure warning signal may be configured to be input to the board or the like on which the door frame 3 is mounted.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power supply lines, a power supply line to which DC + 12V is supplied (+ 12V power supply line) and a power supply line to which DC + 35V is supplied (+ 35V power supply line). By monitoring each voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure as compared with the case of monitoring the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 35V power supply line. Can be done.

[7-2. Payout control board]
In addition to the payout control of the game ball B, the payout control board 633 that controls the launch of the game ball B, the ball feed control, etc., performs the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to the payout, and the launch control by the launch solenoid 542. , The launch control unit 633b that controls the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145, the error LED display 633c that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, and the error LED display 633c for canceling the error. It includes an error release switch 633d.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 185, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. A payout control MPU633aa, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands including a payout control program for controlling the payout operation of the game medium, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and various types related to payout. The payout control input circuit 633ab to which the detection signal from the sensor is input, the payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 to output the drive signal. It is provided with a payout motor drive circuit 633ad.

The payout control MPU633aa includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and its operation (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in payout control") that monitors the system) and a function to prevent fraud.

The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 633ab does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset, so that various signals based on the information are transmitted from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The payout control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, a payout control output circuit without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal, and a payout control output circuit without a reset function. It is composed of. The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, in the payout control output circuit with a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by the payout control system reset, and the signal based on the information is reset. Is configured as a circuit in which no output is made from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the payout control output circuit without a reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is generated. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the various output terminals.

Detection signal from full tank detection sensor 154 of foul cover unit 150, detection signal from ball cut detection sensor 574 of ball guidance unit 570, detection signal from blade rotation detection sensor 590 of payout device 580, payout detection of payout device 580 The detection signal from the sensor 591 and the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuits. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab.

Further, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received by the serial data method at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Further, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

When the payout control MPU633aa normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU633aa transmits various commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without the reset function from the output terminal of the serial output port, thereby payout control output without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

Further, the payout control MPU633aa is driven from the payout control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout control output circuit with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED display 633c from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting the drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with the reset function to the error LED display 633c.

The error LED display 633c is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 633c are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball gummy" (specifically). Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the game ball B are engaged with each other to indicate that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is a "count switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has a problem based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and the number "5" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, it means that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full". Notifies that it is "tan" (specifically, that the lower plate 202 is full in the game ball B stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1). , When the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out is a predetermined number of balls). Has been reached) is notified.

Further, the payout control MPU633aa outputs the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out as a prize ball to the payout control output circuit with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby payout control with a reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls is output from the output circuit to the external terminal plate 558 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photoIC) (not shown), and the playground (hall) is provided through the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of balls of the game ball B and various information (game information, error content related to the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in). The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hall. It is designed so that the computer does not malfunction or break down, and it is possible to control the main control board 1310, payout, etc., which allows the game to proceed from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 that can be made and the peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect so as not to malfunction or break down. The hall computer grasps the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out by the pachinko machine 1 as prize balls, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, so that the payout information of the game ball B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 (so-called). , Ball launch information) and the player's game are monitored.

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. .. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is of a payout control MPU633aa via a CR unit input / output circuit (not shown). It is designed to be input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is a ball. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the rental operation unit 220.

Various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633. As described above, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor BC0 (FIG. 189 and the like) as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. See). By the capacitor BC0, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU633aa can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) of various information stored in the built-in payout control RAM is the payout control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab, and triggered by this, the payout control MPU 633aa completely erases (clears) the RAM of the payout control built-in RAM.

[7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b is based on a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various sensors related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and an oscillation circuit based on the clock signal. A launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a launch reference. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 and the player's will. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects this is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and is a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I / Os. Peripheral control IC 1510a in which interfaces and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, control ROM 1510b that stores various schedule data that defines the progress of various programs and effects in advance, and peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Various control information (peripheral data) can be transferred and stored in the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2, the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and the real-time clock IC (not shown). It includes a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power even when the power is turned off, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Examples of the various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports and various parallel I / O ports.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has various control information (peripheral) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 as one of the initial setting processes when the power is turned on (including the case where the power is restored from a power failure). Data) is controlled to be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the SRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer rate of 2 Gbps as described above, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the peripheral data ROM 1510c2. Transferred at high speed. As the control information (peripheral data), as described above, image data such as a background image, a character image, and a pattern image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and games. It is drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided on the board 5.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information or delete the information during processing. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has started up its own system, the CPU reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 from the main control board 1310 based on various commands, and proceeds with the production. ..

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has started up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands and reads them out. Various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is read out according to the schedule data, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600, and various LED light emission modes are set according to various effects. Various effects are advanced by controlling the system so that sounds such as music and sound effects that match the various effects flow.

Based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the LCDs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and generates drawing data for drawing the image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, the output to the liquid crystal output board 1530 is controlled. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output board 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state where it can accept screen data that defines the screen configuration, it outputs a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to convey that fact.

The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like by reading sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, generating and outputting the sound data based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. When the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, the volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side can be adjusted. Outputs acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (acoustic effect) than before.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes booting its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and reads the scheduled data. From SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color color LED, or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is obtained. It is read out and transmitted as a command from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or driven to various drive motors provided in various production units provided on the game board 5. The game board side drive data for outputting a signal is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to the panel drive board 1720, or the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 is provided. , And the door side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the operation button elevating drive motor 367, etc., and the lighting signal and blinking signal to the full-color LED, single-color LED, etc. provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Alternatively, the door-side light emission data for outputting the gradation lighting signal and the door-side drive light emission data composed of the data are read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to the door frame 3 side. .. When the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a), the panel drive board 1720 is provided on the game board 5 based on the received game board side drive data (that is, a command). A drive motor control circuit (not shown) capable of outputting a drive signal to various drive motors provided in the various effect units is provided.

The detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various production units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are the panel drive board 1720 and the periphery. It is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via a control input circuit. Further, a detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, a detection signal from the elevating detection sensor 382, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and a second rotation detection sensor 348. The detection signal from is received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Further, signals from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. ..

Various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply creation circuit (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC + 12V) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. Types are created and supplied.

The peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

[7-3-1. Panel drive board]
Here, the panel drive board 1720 which is a subordinate board of the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. Here, the relationship with each decorative substrate of the game board 5 will be described, and then the relationship with various drive motors of various production units and the relationship with various detection sensors will be described.

[7-3-1a. Relationship with each decorative board of the game board]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the full-color LED, the monochromatic color LED, or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The light emitting data on the game board side is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as a command from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. Each decorative substrate of the game board 5 includes one or a plurality of LED constant current drive circuits capable of passing a predetermined constant current through the LEDs.

As each decorative substrate of the game board 5, a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610, which is decorated by emitting light by incident light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 in the front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000, are mounted. A second pattern on which a plurality of LEDs 2621 for the second pattern 2620, which are decorated by emitting light by incident light from the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601 in the front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 and the decorative substrate 2612 for the pattern, are mounted. There is a decorative substrate 2622 for decoration.

Further, as each decorative substrate of the game board 5, the upper left panel decoration is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120, and a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a for irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are mounted. There is a substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 on which a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a arranged in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are mounted.

Further, as each decorative board of the game board 5, a plurality of full-color LEDs for illuminating and decorating the back lower movable decorative body 3110 in the back lower effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are mounted on the back lower rear decorative board 3121 and the back lower front. There are a decorative substrate 3122 and an under-back moving decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of full-color LEDs that emit and decorate the under-back moving arm 3130 in the under-back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are mounted.

Further, as each decorative board of the game board 5, a plurality of full-color LEDs for light-emitting decoration of the back-up movable decorative body 3210 in the back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are mounted on the back-up rear decoration board and the back-up There is a front decorative substrate and a back-up moving decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of full-color LEDs that emit and decorate the back-up moving arm 3230 in the back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are mounted.

Further, as each decorative substrate of the game board 5, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa for light-emitting decoration of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 of the back-upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back-left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 are mounted on the back-upper left front-stage decoration. There is a substrate 3311a and a back left lower front decorative substrate 3321a on which a plurality of full-color LEDs 3321a are mounted to lightly decorate the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000.

Further, as each decorative substrate of the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 187, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa that illuminate and decorate the front-stage decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are mounted. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3421a are mounted on the back upper right front decorative substrate 3411a and the front right decorative portion 3422 of the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. There is a step decorative substrate 3421a.

[7-3-1b. Relationship with various drive motors of various production units]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads the game board side drive data for outputting the drive signals to the various drive motors provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. As a command, it is transmitted from various serial I / O ports to the panel drive board 1720. As described above, when the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) by the drive motor control circuit (not shown), the drive motor control circuit (not shown) receives the game. Based on the board-side drive data (that is, commands), drive signals are output to various drive motors provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5.

Returning to FIG. 186, as various drive motors provided in the various effect units, a backside rotary drive motor that rotates the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 of the under-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-lower effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The 3112 and the under-back elevating drive motor 3151 that raises and lowers the under-back movable decorative body 3110 by rotating the under-back elevating arm in the under-back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to raise and lower the under-back moving arm 3130. is there.

Further, as various drive motors provided in the various effect units, a back-up rotation drive motor 3212 that rotates the rear-stage decorative portion 3216 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3218 of the back-up movable decorative body 3210 in the back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, The back-up lift drive motor 3251 that raises and lowers the back-up movable decorative body 3210 by rotating the back-up lift arm in the back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 and raising and lowering the back-up move arm 3130 and the back-up move arm 3230. And there is.

Further, as various drive motors provided in the various production units, the back upper left rotation drive motor 3313 that rotates the front upper left decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back left production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, and the back of the back unit 3000. The back left lower rotation drive motor 3323 that rotates the front stage decoration part 3322 of the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 in the left effect unit 3300, and the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 The back left movement drive motor 3332 for moving the 3320 and the back left traverse drive motor 3351 that rotates the back left traverse arm in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 and traverses the back left movement arm 3330. is there.

Further, as various drive motors provided in the various effect units, as shown in FIG. 187, the back upper right rotary drive motor 3413 that rotates the front upper right decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. And the back right lower right production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back right lower rotation drive motor 3423 that rotates the front stage decoration part 3422 of the decorative body 3420, and the back right lower right production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back upper right movable The back right movement drive motor 3432 for moving the decorative body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420, and the back right traversing arm in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are rotated to traverse the back right moving arm 3430. There is a back right traverse drive motor 3451.

[7-3-1c. Relationship with various detection sensors]
As described above, the detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various production units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are panel-driven. It is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the substrate 1720 and the peripheral control board 1510.

As shown in FIG. 186, as various detection sensors for detecting the positions provided in the various production units (standby position (original position), each united position), the back bottom movable decorative body in the back bottom production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The optical under-back rotation detection sensor 3120 that detects the standby position (original position) between the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 of 3110, and the under-back elevating arm of the back unit 3000 in the under-back effect unit 3100 are rotated. An optical backside standby position detection sensor (not shown) that detects the standby position (original position) at which the backside movable decorative body 3110 is moved most downward by moving the backside movement arm 3130 up and down, and the back unit 3000. Optical lower back upper movement to detect the position where the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is moved most upward by rotating the lower back elevating arm in the lower back effect unit 3100 to move the lower back movement arm 3130 up and down. There is a position detection sensor.

The standby position (original position), the first united position, and the second united position of the above-mentioned lower back movable decorative body 3110 are detected signals from the lower back standby position detection sensor and the lower back upper movement position detection sensor. Based on this, it is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

As various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various production units, the rear-stage decorative portion 3216 of the back-up movable decoration unit 3210 in the back-up production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 The optical back-up rotation detection sensor 3220 that detects the standby position (original position) with the middle-stage decorative portion 3218 and the back-up lift arm 3130 in the back-up effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are rotated to move the back-down movement arm 3130. An optical back-up standby position detection sensor (not shown) that detects the standby position (original position) where the back-up movable ornament 3210 is moved most upward by moving the back-up movement arm 3230 up and down, and the back of the back unit 3000. An optical illustration that detects the position where the back-up movable ornament 3210 is moved to the lowermost position by rotating the back-up elevating arm in the upper effect unit 3200 to move the back-up moving arm 3130 up and down the back-up moving arm 3230. There is a back-up / down movement position detection sensor.

The standby position (original position), the first united position, and the second united position of the back-up movable decorative body 3210 described above are based on the detection signals from the back-up standby position detection sensor and the back-up / down movement position detection sensor. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

As various detection sensors for detecting the positions provided in the various production units (standby position (original position), each united position), the front-stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back left production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. The magnetic back left upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative board 3311a that detects the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the back unit 3000, and the back left lower left movable in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. The magnetic back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab mounted on the back left lower front decorative substrate 3321a, which detects the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front decorative portion 3322 of the decorative body 3320, and the back unit 3000. An optical back left initial state detection sensor (not shown) that detects the initial state in which the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left effect unit 3300 is located at the left moving end, and the back left in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. An optical back-left movement state detection sensor that detects the state in which the moving arm 3330 is located at the right moving end, and the base side of the back-upper left movable decoration body 3310 in the back-left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. A state in which the (left side) extends vertically and the tip faces to the right, and a state in which the base side (left side) of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 extends vertically and the tip faces to the right (VR creation drawing V135 (VR creation drawing V135) The lower left side of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 and the back upper left lower initial state detection sensor (not shown) for detecting) is the moving arm base 3331. An optical back upper left lower approach state detection sensor (not shown) that detects the state of approaching the center in the vertical direction and the state in which the upper side of the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 approaches the vertical center of the moving arm base 3331, There is.

The standby position (original position) of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is based on the detection signal from the magnetic back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a. In addition to being set by the peripheral control IC 1510a, the standby position (original position) of the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 is a magnetic back left lower magnetic pole change detection mounted on the back left lower front decorative substrate 3321a. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal from the circuit 3321ab.

Further, the initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back left moving arm 3330 described above are set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signals from the back left initial state detection sensor and the back left moving state detection sensor. In addition, the initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 described above are obtained from the back upper left lower initial state detection sensor and the back upper left lower approach state detection sensor. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal of. As a result, the standby position (original position), the first combined position, and the second combined position of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are detected in the back left initial state. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signals from the sensor, the back left moving state detection sensor, the back upper left lower initial state detection sensor, and the back upper left lower approach state detection sensor.

As shown in FIG. 187, as various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various production units, the back upper right movable decorative body in the back right production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. The magnetic back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab mounted on the back upper right front decorative substrate 3411a, which detects the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front decorative portion 3412 of the 3410, and the back right of the back unit 3000. The magnetic back right lower magnetic pole mounted on the back right lower front decorative substrate 3421a that detects the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front decorative portion 3422 of the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the effect unit 3400. A change detection circuit 3421ab, an optical back right initial state detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the initial state in which the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is located at the right moving end, and the back unit. An optical back-right movement state detection sensor (not shown) that detects the state in which the back-right moving arm 3430 in the back-right effect unit 3400 of 3000 is located at the left moving end, and the back-right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. In the state where the base side (right side) of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 extends vertically and the tip faces left, and the base side (right side) of the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 extends vertically and the tip ends to the left. The lower right side of the back right movable decoration body 3410 in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 and the back right up and down initial state detection sensor (not shown) that detects the state of facing is the top and bottom of the moving arm base 3431. An optical back right vertical approach state detection sensor (not shown) that detects the state of approaching the center of the direction and the state of the upper side of the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 approaching the vertical center of the moving arm base 3431, There is.

The standby position (original position) of the front-stage decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is based on the detection signal from the magnetic back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab mounted on the back upper right front stage decorative substrate 3411a. In addition to being set by the peripheral control IC 1510a, the standby position (original position) of the front-stage decorative portion 3422 of the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 is the magnetic back right lower right mounted on the back right lower front stage decorative substrate 3421a. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal from the magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab.

Further, the initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back right moving arm 3430 described above are set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signals from the back right initial state detection sensor and the back right moving state detection sensor. In addition, the initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are the back right upper and lower initial state detection sensor and the back right upper and lower approach state detection sensor. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal from. As a result, the standby position (original position), the first combined position, and the second combined position of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 described above are set to the back right initial state. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signals from the detection sensor, the back right moving state detection sensor, the back right up / down initial state detection sensor, and the back right up / down approach state detection sensor.

[8. Ground wire system]
The frame grounding board 559 shown in FIG. 102 can temporarily aggregate electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground (ground ground) to the island equipment of the game hall. Here, the system of the ground wire by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the configuration of the frame grounding board 559, FIG. 188 (a) is a side view of the frame grounding board 559, and FIG. 188 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame grounding board 559, FIG. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground board 559, and FIG. 188 (d) is a table showing a description of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground board 559. As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the frame ground board 559 is in a state where its mounting surface is facing downward (that is, in a state where the connector insertion ports of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are facing downward). It is housed and mounted inside the substrate accommodating portion 551a formed on the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 shown in FIG. 102 (b).

As shown in FIG. 188 (b), the frame ground board 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, and ECN2 arranged in a row from the right side to the left side along the upper side thereof, and the center of the left side thereof. The lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. Briefly explaining the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, as shown in FIG. 188 (d), the ground terminal ECN1 is provided as an interface ground on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 114. It is electrically connected to the connection terminal via the interface ground wire, and the ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected as the island equipment ground via the ground connection terminal in the island equipment of the game hall and the island equipment ground wire. The ground terminal ECN3 is shown on the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 102 (b) (specifically, on the outside of the side wall of the ball tank 552 near the substrate accommodating portion 551aa) as the ball tank ground. One end of the ball tank ground wire is attached by a metal screw that does not, and the other end of the ball tank ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal ECN4 is shown in FIG. 97 as the main body frame metal ground. One end of the main body frame metal ground wire is attached to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 (specifically, the upper side of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530) of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 by a metal screw (not shown). The other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN5 is provided as a power supply ground on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 113. It is electrically connected to the terminal via the power supply ground wire.

In the circuit of the frame ground board 559, as shown in FIG. 188 (c), the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 is used as the power supply ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. At the same time, the other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are used as resistors ER1 and ER2.

The electromagnetic noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground is guided to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed as the ball tank ground. The electromagnetic noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN3 is removed by being guided to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground. The electromagnetic noise flowing to the ground is removed by being guided to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and the electromagnetic noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is , The ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the island equipment ground wire are guided to the ground ground of the island equipment in the game hall and removed.

As shown in FIG. 98, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island facility of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game ball B is polished in the island equipment of the game hall or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which can retain the game ball B, and the surrounding area.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame grounding substrate 559 is arranged in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, and as a result, the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 552, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise as a result of the static electricity tend to accumulate. In contrast to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 which is in the vicinity of the unit 560, in the frame grounding board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the main body frame metal The ground terminal ECN4 as the ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the ground are gradually passed through the resistors ER1 and ER2, respectively, and attenuated to suppress the instantaneous discharge of high voltage. It is possible to lead to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground wire. In other words, the electromagnetic noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, where static electricity tends to accumulate, is sent from the frame ground board 559 via the ball tank 552 and the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 as a frame ground called the frame ground. By guiding to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall, the electromagnetic noise invading from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed.

In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are in a region strongly affected by electromagnetic noise as described above. Since it corresponds to (around it), a large ground terminal is adopted, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground uses the electromagnetic noise that has flowed into the frame ground board 559 as described above in the game hall. A large ground terminal is used because it is guided to the ground ground of the island facility and removed. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 that employ this large ground terminal are squares with a cross-sectional shape of 1.14 mm on each side, rated current: 7A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 18), rated voltage: It has the general specifications of 250V (AC / DC) and applicable wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and as shown in FIG. 188 (a), its height is 13.4 mm (earth terminal ECN2 to 2). When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

On the other hand, the electromagnetic noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is smaller than the above-mentioned ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4, and the current is small. , Earth terminals For ECN1 and ECN5, small earth terminals are adopted. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 that employ this small ground terminal are squares with a cross-sectional shape of 0.64 mm on each side, rated current: 3A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 22), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250V (AC / DC) and applicable wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and its height is 7 mm as shown in FIG. 188 (a) (ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5). When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height will be 9.8 mm).

In the present embodiment, each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank ground wire, main body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to electromagnetic noise is larger than each ground wire (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire), each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 The thickness of the ground wire (ground wire, main body frame ground wire) is thicker than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), 1.6 mm is adopted as the plate thickness of the frame ground substrate 559.

In this way, the electromagnetic noise generated in various places is once collected on the frame ground board 559 and guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall to be removed. The ground substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination action.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that electromagnetic noise generated in various places can be once collected on the frame ground board 559 and guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground ground of the island equipment in the game hall to be removed. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 arranged on the upper side of the is routed to the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electromagnetic noise is temporarily collected on the power supply board 630 to collect the electromagnetic noise once and the island equipment of the game hall Compared to the configuration in which the ground wire is guided to the ground and removed, the ground wire (wiring) is extremely easy to route.

Further, since the external terminal board 558 and the frame ground board 559 are configured to be arranged in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in a close state, a plurality of electric wires connected to the external terminal board 558 are connected. Terminal 558a (A plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, the payout base unit 550 is provided with 10 external terminals called external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side when viewed from the back). ) And the hall computer provided in the game hall, respectively, with wiring, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground on the frame ground board 559, and the ground connection terminal provided in the island equipment in the game hall. , Can be performed as a series of work, such as electrically connecting the island equipment with a ground wire (wiring), which can contribute to the improvement of workability.

Further, since the frame ground board 559 is configured so that it can be arranged in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground of the frame ground board 559 and the island equipment of the game hall Various control boards (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game) provided with the island equipment ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the provided ground connection terminal to the game board 5. Because it can be arranged so as to be separated from the peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the peripheral control board, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, etc.), various control boards It is possible to eliminate adverse effects on the electronic components (including connectors) provided in the above.

Further, by arranging the frame grounding substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552, which is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise, and the main body frame 4 in the vicinity of the payout unit 560. The metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500, and the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground in the frame grounding board 559, respectively. The length of the electrically connected ground wire (ball tank ground wire, main body frame metal ground wire) is extremely shortened, and electromagnetic noise is removed by guiding it from the frame ground board 559 to the ground ground of the island equipment in the game hall. be able to.

Further, by arranging the frame grounding board 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity easily accumulates and the payout unit 560, the ball tank 552 where static electricity easily accumulates and the frame grounding board 559 which exerts a static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is the length of the main body frame metal ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the metal main body frame reinforcement frame 530 and the frame ground board 559 that exerts the static elimination effect, and the power supply. The length of the power supply ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the board 630 and the frame ground board 559 that exerts the static elimination effect, and the interface that electrically connects the interface board 635 and the frame ground board 559 that exerts the static elimination action. It can be configured to be the shortest compared to the length of the ground wire (wiring).

Further, by arranging the frame grounding substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552, which is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise, and the main body frame 4 in the vicinity of the payout unit 560 In contrast to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground in the frame grounding board 559 Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground board 559, so that the operation of the power supply board 630 is not affected, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground of the frame ground board 559 is used for island equipment. It can be removed by guiding it to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground wire.

By the way, conventionally, each ground is once integrated on the power supply board arranged on the CR unit side at the bottom of the main body frame so that the power supply AC24V of the CR unit can be easily supplied, and connected to the ground ground of the island facility via the power supply board. A game machine that grounds the ground has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120595 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 84, FIG. 85)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often arranged downward in the game machine. Therefore, in order to consolidate the ground on the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank on the upper part of the game machine, the prize ball device, or the like toward the lower power supply board. By routing the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing in the middle, which may have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is integrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs on the power supply board, the ground may be affected, or conversely, the current may flow through the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, when the ground grounding point of the island facility is above the game machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to route the ground wire integrated on the power supply board from the bottom to the top again.
[8-1. Conductor floating on the ground]
Next, a member provided in the game board as a treatment of a conductor floating with respect to the ground will be described with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a schematic view of the handling of a conductor floating with respect to the ground provided in various production units provided in the game board.

As described above, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 and the payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5. The game balls rub against each other in the rail path to be charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up behind the island facilities in the game hall. As described above, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise.

In the game board 5, various production units are provided on the back unit 3000. These various production units are provided with conductive plating applied to structures used to improve rigidity, mechanical parts of drive mechanisms, electrical parts (including housings of electrical parts), and decorative structures. , And a plurality of conductors such as a structure molded from a conductive resin (including a decorative structure) are used. Further, various boards are provided on the game board 5, and these various boards and various effect units are arranged close to each other. Further, these conductors have different effects on the electric circuit when electrostatically discharged depending on the size of the surface area. When the surface area of the conductor is small, the amount of electric charge that can be stored is small and the influence of electrostatic discharge on the electric circuit can be ignored, and it is not necessary to remove electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge. On the other hand, if the surface area of the conductor is large, the amount of electric charge that can be stored is large and the influence of electrostatic discharge on the electric circuit cannot be ignored, and it is necessary to safely remove electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge. ..

When these conductors are floating on the ground, the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to the above-mentioned electromagnetic noise, so that the conductor is electrostatically induced under the influence of the electromagnetic noise. Then, if electrostatic discharge is performed from the conductor floating on the ground, various substrates provided in the game board 5 may be damaged.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the plurality of conductors of the various production units provided on the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least when electrostatically discharged, the various substrates provided in the game board 5 are affected and malfunctions occur. We adopted a configuration that does not float on the ground for items that may be damaged or damaged.

[8-1-1. Handling of the underside effect unit and the backside effect unit for conductors]
Explaining the under-back effect unit 3100 (up-back effect unit 3200), the under-back moving arm 3130 (up-back moving arm 3230) is illustrated so as to cover the back surface side in order to increase its rigidity, as described above. A metal reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm is provided, and one of both ends of the reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm in the left-right direction, which is arranged in the vicinity of the lower back elevating drive motor 3151, is predetermined in the vertical direction. It is attached to the metal slide rail 3151ns for the back lower movement arm (slide rail 3251ns for the back upper movement arm) that can slide and move by the distance dimension, and the other that is not placed near the back lower lift drive motor 3151 is not shown. Sliding part for lower back movement arm (due to conductive resin) that slides along the metal columnar rod (moves while sliding the surface of the metal columnar rod along the longitudinal direction of the columnar rod) It may be molded or it may be molded with a non-conductive resin).

In the present embodiment, of the plurality of conductors provided in the backside effect unit 3100 (backside effect unit 3200), at least when electrostatically discharged, it affects various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunctions. For those that may or may be damaged and the surface area of the conductor itself is larger than the predetermined surface area, it is selected as an object that does not float on the ground, and each is structurally selected. It is in a state of being brought into contact and fixed to conduct electricity. For example, a metal reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm, a metal slide rail 3151ns for the lower back moving arm, and a metal reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm and a slide rail 3251ns for the upper back moving arm are attached. It is in a state of being electrically connected by structural contact.

As shown in FIG. 264 (a), the lower back moving arm 3130 (upper back moving arm 3230) has a predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction arranged in the vicinity of the lower back elevating drive motor 3151 (back upper elevating drive motor 3251). The metal housing of the metal slide rail 3151ns for the back-up movement arm (slide rail 3251ns for the back-up movement arm) and the metal of the back-down lift drive motor 3151 (back-up lift drive motor 3251) that can only slide and move. Of the pair of mounting holes 3151n, 3151f (3251n, 3251f) provided in the housing, the mounting hole 3151n (3252n) closer to the slide rail 3151ns for the lower back moving arm (slide rail 3251ns for the upper back moving arm). And are electrically connected via the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151 nc for the back-up effect unit (first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3251 nc for the back-up effect unit), and the slide rail 3151 ns for the back-up movement arm ( The mounting hole 3151f (3251f) farther from the slide rail 3251ns for the back-up moving arm) and the panel drive board 1720 are connected to the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc (second conductor potential fluctuation for the back-up effect unit). It is electrically connected via the prevention wiring 3251fc).

The first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151 nc for the back-up effect unit (first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3251 nc for the back-up effect unit) has wiring terminals crimped to both ends, and the wiring terminal at one end moves under the back. The slide rail 3151ns for the arm (slide rail 3251ns for the back-up moving arm) is screwed and fixed to the metal housing, and the wiring terminals at the other ends are the back-down lift drive motor 3151 (back-up lift drive motor). It is fixed by being screwed into the mounting holes 3151n (3251n) provided in the metal housing of 3251). At this time, the metal housing of the back-up / down drive motor 3151 (back-up elevating drive motor 3251) forming the mounting holes 3151n (3251n) is fixed to the back-up effect unit 3100 (back-up effect unit 3200).

The second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc for the backside effect unit (second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3251fc for the backside production unit) has a wiring terminal crimped at one end and a connector provided at the other end. The wiring terminal is fixed by being screwed into the mounting hole 3151f (3251f) provided in the metal housing of the back-up / down lift drive motor 3151 (back-up lift drive motor 3251), and the connector at the other end is a panel. It is inserted and fixed in the corresponding connector on the drive board 1720. At this time, the metal housing of the lower elevating drive motor 3151 (back upper elevating drive motor 3251) forming the mounting holes 3151f (3251f) is fixed to the back lower effect unit 3100 (back upper effect unit 3200). When the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc for the back-up effect unit (second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3251fc for the back-up effect unit) is electrically connected to the panel drive substrate 1720, the resistance Rs0 is passed through (resistance). (Via Rs1), grounded to ground (GND). The ground (GND) line of the panel drive board 1720 is the ground of various boards such as power supply board 630, main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, various relay boards, and various decorative boards. It is electrically connected to the (GND) line.

The plurality of electric wirings (harnesses) for driving the lower elevating drive motor 3151 (back upper elevating drive motor 3251) are provided with connectors, and the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc for the lower back effect unit (the first for the back upper effect unit). The connector of the two-conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3251fc) is inserted into the corresponding connector on the panel drive board 1720 different from the connector into which the connector is inserted.

As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the underside effect unit 3100 (backside effect unit 3200), at least when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting various substrates provided in the game board 5 and causing a malfunction. For example, a conductor that has a certain surface or is likely to be damaged and whose surface surface is larger than a predetermined surface surface is structurally contacted with each other to be fixed and conductive. Structural contact with the reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm and the metal slide rail 3151ns for the lower back moving arm (with the metal reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm and the slide rail 3251ns for the upper back moving arm) These conductors are electrically connected and electrically connected, and these conductors are the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151 nc for the underside effect unit, the metal housing of the underside elevating drive motor 3151, and the underside effect unit. The second conductor for potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc, and the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring for the back-up effect unit 3251nc, are grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720. It is grounded to the ground (GND) via the metal housing of the back-up elevating drive motor 3251, the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3251fc for the back-up effect unit, and the resistor Rs1 of the panel drive substrate 1720).

As a result, of the plurality of conductors provided in the back-up effect unit 3100 (back-up effect unit 3200), at least when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting various substrates provided in the game board 5 and causing a malfunction. Since the surface area of a single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area as something that may be damaged or may be damaged, these conductors are configured so that they do not float from the ground. Even if electromagnetic noise invades these conductors, the invading electromagnetic noise is safely guided to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) that becomes the circuit ground via the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720. Can be removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction and damage of various substrates provided in the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

Further, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise invades these conductors, the invaded electromagnetic wave noise is prevented from being affected by malfunctions, failures, etc. of the electric circuit parts of various boards provided in the game board 5. Since it can be safely removed, the pachinko machine 1 can continue to operate normally, and at the same time, the impact due to electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, and the occurrence state of the probability variation fluctuation It is possible to prevent the player's discomfort such as disappearance.

[8-1-2. Handling of back left production unit and back right production unit conductor]
Explaining the back left effect unit 3300 (back right effect unit 3400), the moving arm base 3331 of the back left effect unit 3300 (moving arm base 3431 of the back right effect unit 3400) has the back left of both ends in the vertical direction. A metal back left that is placed near the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) provided in the traverse mechanism 3350 (back right traverse mechanism 3450) and one of which can slide in the left-right direction by a predetermined distance dimension. It is attached to the slide rail 3351ns for the moving arm (slide rail 3451ns for the back right moving arm), and is not placed near the back left transverse drive motor 3351 (back right transverse drive motor 3451). The other is made of metal (not shown). Sliding part for back left movement arm (molded with conductive resin) that slides along the columnar rod (moves while sliding the surface of the metal columnar rod along the longitudinal direction of the columnar rod) It may be molded with a non-conductive resin.) Is attached.

In the present embodiment, of the plurality of conductors provided in the back left effect unit 3300 (back right effect unit 3400), at least when electrostatically discharged, it affects various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunctions. A conductor whose surface area is larger than a predetermined surface area as a material that may be damaged or may be damaged is selected as a target that does not float on the ground. For example, a metal slide rail for the back left moving arm 3351ns (slide rail for the back right moving arm 3451ns).

As shown in FIG. 264 (b), the moving arm base 3331 of the back left effect unit 3300 (moving arm base 3431 of the back right effect unit 3400) is in the vicinity of the back left transverse drive motor 3351 (back right transverse drive motor 3451). The metal housing of the metal slide rail 3351ns for the back left moving arm (slide rail 3451ns for the back right moving arm) that can slide and move in the left-right direction by a predetermined distance, and the back left traverse drive motor 3351 Of the pair of mounting holes 3351n, 3351f (3451n, 3451f) provided in the metal housing of the (back right transverse drive motor 3451), the back left moving arm slide rail 3351ns (back right moving arm slide rail 3451ns). The mounting hole 3351n (3452n) closer to is electrically connected via the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351 nc for the back left effect unit (first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3451 cc for the back right effect unit). , The mounting holes 3351f (3451f) farther from the slide rail 3351ns for the back left moving arm (slide rail 3451ns for the back right moving arm) and the relay board 3351a (provided in the back right effect unit 3400) provided in the back left effect unit 3300. The relay board 3451a) is electrically connected via the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351fc for the back left effect unit (second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3451fc for the back right effect unit).

The first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351 nc for the back left effect unit (the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3451 nc for the back right effect unit) has wiring terminals crimped to both ends, and the wiring terminal at one end moves to the back left. The slide rail 3351ns for the arm (slide rail 3451ns for the back right moving arm) is screwed and fixed to the metal housing, and the wiring terminals at the other ends are the back left transverse drive motor 3351 (back right transverse drive motor). It is fixed by being screwed into the mounting holes 3351n (3451n) provided in the metal housing of 3451). At this time, the metal housing of the back left transverse drive motor 3351 (back right transverse drive motor 3451) forming the mounting holes 3351n (3451n) is fixed to the back left effect unit 3300 (back right effect unit 3400).

The second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351fc for the back left effect unit (second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3451fc for the back right effect unit) has a wiring terminal crimped at one end and a connector provided at the other end. The wiring terminal is fixed by being screwed into the mounting hole 3351f (3451f) provided in the metal housing of the back left transverse drive motor 3351 (back right transverse drive motor 3451), and the connector at the other end is on the back. It is inserted into and fixed to the corresponding connector in the relay board 3351a provided in the left effect unit 3300 (relay board 3451a provided in the back right effect unit 3400). At this time, the metal housing of the back left transverse drive motor 3351 (back right transverse drive motor 3451) forming the mounting holes 3351f (3451f) is fixed to the back left effect unit 3300 (back right effect unit 3400). The second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351fc for the back left effect unit (second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3451fc for the back right effect unit) is provided on the relay board 3351a (back right effect unit 3400) provided on the back left effect unit 3300. When electrically connected to the relay board 3451a), it is grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs2 (via the resistor Rs3). The ground (GND) lines of the relay board 3351a provided on the back left effect unit 3300 (relay board 3451a provided on the back right effect unit 3400) are the panel drive board 1720, the power supply board 630, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510. , Peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, various relay boards, various decorative boards, and other ground (GND) lines of various boards are electrically connected.

The plurality of electrical wirings (harnesses) that drive the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) are provided with connectors, and the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351fc for the back left effect unit (for the back right effect unit). The connector of the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3451fc) is inserted into the corresponding connector in the relay board 3351a (relay board 3451a provided in the back right effect unit 3400) provided in the back left effect unit 3300, which is different from the connector into which the connector is inserted. .. The relay board 3351a provided in the back left effect unit 3300 (relay board 3451a provided in the back right effect unit 3400) is electrically connected to the panel drive board 1720 via an electric wiring (harness). The electrical wiring (harness) is provided with connectors at both ends thereof, and is inserted and fixed to the corresponding connectors on the panel drive board 1720.

As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left effect unit 3300 (back right effect unit 3400), at least when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting various substrates provided in the game board 5 and causing a malfunction. For example, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3351ns for the back left moving arm has a back left effect, whereas the surface area of the conductor alone is larger than the predetermined surface surface because it is present or may be damaged. The first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351 nc for the unit, the metal housing of the back left transverse drive motor 3351, the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351fc for the back left effect unit, and the relay board 3351a provided on the back left effect unit 3300. It is grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs2 of. (The conductors of the metal slide rail 3451ns for the back right moving arm are the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3451 nc for the back right effect unit, the metal housing of the back right transverse drive motor 3451, and the second for the back right effect unit. It is grounded to the ground (GND) via the conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3451fc and the resistor Rs3 of the relay board 3451a provided on the back right effect unit 3400).

As a result, of the plurality of conductors provided in the back left effect unit 3300 (back right effect unit 3400), at least when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting various substrates provided in the game board 5 and causing a malfunction. Since the surface area of a single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area as something that may be damaged or may be damaged, these conductors are configured so that they do not float from the ground. Even if electromagnetic noise invades these conductors, the invading electromagnetic noise is transmitted through the resistor Rs2 of the relay board 3351a provided on the back left effect unit 3300 (the resistance of the relay board 3451a provided on the back right effect unit 3400). It can be safely removed by guiding it to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) which is a circuit ground (via Rs3). Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction and damage of various substrates provided in the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

Further, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise invades these conductors, the invaded electromagnetic wave noise is prevented from being affected by malfunctions, failures, etc. of the electric circuit parts of various boards provided in the game board 5. Since it can be safely removed, the pachinko machine 1 can continue to operate normally, and at the same time, the impact due to electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, and the occurrence state of the probability variation fluctuation It is possible to prevent the player's discomfort such as disappearance.

As described above, electromagnetic noise generated in various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 5 is once collected on the frame ground board 559 and guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall to be removed. The frame grounding board 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination action because it is configured so as to be able to perform. That is, a path is formed in which electromagnetic noise generated in various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 5 is guided to the ground ground of the island equipment of the game hall and safely removed. On the other hand, of the plurality of conductors of the various effect units provided on the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least when electrostatically discharged, the various boards provided in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunction may occur. It is possible to safely remove something that is or may be damaged by guiding it to the circuit ground (ground of various boards (GND)) that is the circuit ground so that it does not float on the ground. it can. That is, among the plurality of conductors of the various effect units in the game board 5, at least when electrostatically discharged, the various substrates provided in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunction or may be damaged. A path is formed in which electromagnetic noise can be safely removed by guiding it to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) that serves as a circuit ground. In this way, independent paths for safely removing electromagnetic noise are formed in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the game board 5, and are not affected by each other. Therefore, in this respect as well, malfunction and damage due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented.

As described above, the influence of a conductor on an electric circuit when electrostatically discharged depends on the size of its surface area. Further, the ease of electrostatic discharge of the conductor changes depending on the distance dimension from the electric circuit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the size of the surface area of the conductor and the distance dimension between the conductor and the electric circuit are taken into consideration, and among the plurality of conductors, the electromagnetic noise is guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall for safety. The conductors that need to be removed are individually selected (whether or not they are conductors that drop to the ground ground are individually distinguished), and the circuit ground that serves as the circuit ground for electromagnetic noise (ground of various substrates (GND)). )) Are individually selected for conductors that need to be safely removed (whether or not they are conductors that are dropped to the circuit ground are individually distinguished).

[9. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 194. FIG. 189 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 190 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 191 is a view taken along the line B of FIG. 190, and FIG. 192 is a power supply board. Silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the above (No. 1), FIG. 193 is silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (No. 2), and FIG. 194 is discontinued electronic components. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of. Here, first, the circuit configuration of the power supply board will be described, and then a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape, confirmation of blown fuse, capacitor capacity, and countermeasures for discontinued electronic components will be described.

As described above, the island facility of the game hall has a transformer (not shown), which steps down the commercial power supply voltage of AC100V to the power supply voltage of AC24V for the game machine. When a plug of a power cord (not shown) is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is a power supply voltage for a game machine of an island facility in a game hall, AC24V is supplied to a power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V) from AC24V supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and supplies the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. doing.

[9-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 189, the circuit of the power supply board 630 includes a power supply switch 630a, a noise suppression circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor improvement circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). When AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm). (The support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and the power is input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via the class B fuse specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). Specifically, the AC24V line 1 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V1" (hereinafter, may be described as "L side")) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a, and the power switch. A 24V AC line 2 (hereinafter, referred to as "AC24V2" (may be referred to as "N side")) is input to the input side terminal 1 of the 630a. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise suppression circuit 630b.

When a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 become electrically conductive, and the AC24V1 goes to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically conductive, and the AC24V 2 is started to be supplied to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically non-conducting, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. When the supply is cut off, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically non-conducting, and the AC24V 2 is cut off from the supply to various circuits of the power supply board 630. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

With the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall turned on, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall can turn on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, or the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be turned off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall.

[9-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b is composed of a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasures, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasures, and a choke coil L1, and is an output of a power switch 630a. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

The common mode noise suppression circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacitance and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers), and the varistor voltages are the same. The varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is electrically connected to the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the ground connection terminal DCN5 as a frame ground FG2. The ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. 188 via a power supply ground wire (not shown).

The normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes the normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a.

The AC24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is input to the power supply line connector DCN2 as AC24VA. The AC24V2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is input to the power supply line connector DCN2 as AC24V. .. The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise interference. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via a power line for an interface board (not shown), an interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and a power line for a CR unit (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit that does not, and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to a CR unit (not shown).

AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[9-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q1 and Q2, and peripheral circuits 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of FET Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and a Zener diode.

The AC24V1 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminals of the power supply creation circuit 630f, respectively.

AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified to direct current by switching by FET Q1 and Q2 and peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2. It is output from 2 and respectively. The package types of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1 and Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type and are fixed to the heat radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 190). ing. The heat radiation fin HS1 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

As described above, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c and also to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. Is output from the AC-DET terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

The rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 is input to the power factor improving circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[9-1-3. Power factor improvement circuit]
The power factor improving circuit 630d is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q3 and Q4 and peripheral circuits 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of FETs Q3 and Q4, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and an inductor.

The direct current whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and the anode terminals 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are directly input without passing through the peripheral circuit 630da. Is entered in each. At the gate terminals of FET Q3 and Q4, the gate signal for the power factor improving circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power supply making circuit is input via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminal and drain terminal of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

The DC whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 suppresses the generation of harmonics by switching by FET Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to improve the power factor, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. Is output from each. The types of packages of FET Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the types of packages of FET Q1, Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above), and heat is dissipated. It is fixed to fin HS2 (see FIG. 190). The heat radiation fin HS2 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[9-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminal of each of these plurality of electrolytic capacitors is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and the positive terminal is input with a direct current whose power factor is improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smooths) the pulsating flow from the direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f, and also fuses FUSE3 (this implementation). In terms of form, it has the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, via a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and a class B fuse specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). Then, it is supplied as DC + 35V from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. The power supply line supplied via the fuse FUSE 3 is the + 35V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-5. Power supply creation circuit]
When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply creation circuit 630f creates direct current + 12V and direct current + 5V from the input direct current, respectively. The power supply creation circuit 630f outputs the created DC + 12V from the + 12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the created DC + 5V from the + 5V terminal to the pachinko machine from the power supply board 630. 1 Supply to each internal board. The power supply line supplied from the + 12V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes the + 12V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes the + 5V of each board inside the pachinko machine 1. It becomes a power line.

The power supply creation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da in the power factor improvement circuit 630d by controlling the output of the power factor improvement gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. To suppress the generation of harmonics.

In the power supply creation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via diodes D5 and D6. The power supply creation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, and determines whether or not to output the power supply destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

A power cord plug (not shown) is not plugged into the AC24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall, and is mistakenly plugged into the AC100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V power supply voltage for the game machine. When plugged in, a power supply voltage higher than DC + 35V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

In the power supply creation circuit 630f, the magnitude of the power supply voltage is a predetermined value (threshold value: this embodiment) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. Then, when it reaches about 50 V), the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit can be output to the power supply destruction circuit 630 g.

When the power supply creation circuit 630f outputs a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destroys to enter the short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g is in the short mode, when the power supply switch 630a is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g to supply power. When the current flows into the CGND terminal of the created circuit 630f at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

The GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 to which the GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is grounded becomes the ground (GND) line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-6. Power supply destruction circuit]
The power supply destruction circuit 630g is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as “FET”) Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply making circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end on the opposite side of the resistor R25, which is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5, so that the power supply creation circuit 630f In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the above.

In the power supply destruction circuit 630g, when the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates and the drain terminal of the FET Q5 to the source terminal. A large current flows toward (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent), and the FET Q5 is destroyed, so that the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive is maintained. Will be done. Although the FET Q5 is of the same type as the package of the FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 (TO-220F described above), the FET Q1 , Q2, Q3, Q4, and unlike the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, they are arranged at positions where they do not come into contact with the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is arranged while the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2 are arranged, and is not fixed to the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 190 and 191). The purpose of this is to absorb and cool the heat through the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2 so that the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, the FET Q5 is short due to heat generation when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal of the FET Q5 to the source terminal (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent). This is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

That is, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and is mistakenly plugged into the power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage of AC24V for the game machine. When plugged in, the power supply creation circuit 630f is based on a power supply voltage in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal, and the magnitude of this power supply voltage is a predetermined value (threshold value). : In the present embodiment, it is set to about 50V.) When the power supply destruction circuit gate signal is output to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the FET Q5 is controlled to self-destruct. As a result, the state of the short mode in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive is maintained, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f, so that the power switch 630a is operated. In the ON-operated state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETQ5 in the power supply destruction circuit 630g in the short mode state, so that the power supply creation circuit 630f By flowing toward the CGND terminal at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and the plug of the power supply cord is commercialized. Even if it is accidentally plugged into a power outlet of AC100V, which is a power supply voltage, it is possible to reliably prevent each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power supply board 630 from being destroyed.

In addition, the plug of the power cord was not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly plugged into the power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. When the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is inserted and destroyed, replace the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 with unfused ones, and replace the power cord plug with AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall. Even if it is plugged into the power outlet, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained. Therefore, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the rectifier circuit 630c Then, a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f via the FET Q5 in the short mode state in the power supply destruction circuit 630g, so that a large current flows through the replaced fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and the fuse. One or both of FUSE1 and FUSE2 will be blown again. That is, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630 g is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630 g is not destroyed, the plug of the power cord is used in the island facility of the game hall. Even if it is plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine, the game cannot be started.

[9-1-7. Backup power supply circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h is composed of a Schottky barrier diode D20 and a capacitor BC0. The Schottky barrier diode D20 has a low forward voltage drop and a high switching speed. The anode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f, and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is the capacitor BC0. It is electrically connected to the positive (+) terminal. The negative (−) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to ground (GND). A main backup power line from between the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the positive (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0 to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 185. It is a circuit in which a wiring pattern for taking out the VBB and the payout VBB which is a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 185 is formed. There is.

That is, the negative (−) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to ground (GND). From between the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the positive (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0, the main VBB that serves as the backup power supply line to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 and the payout control. The circuit is divided into two systems: a payout VBB that serves as a backup power line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the board 633.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is the Schottky barrier diode D20. It is supplied to the capacitor BC0 to charge the capacitor BC0, and is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 as the main VBB to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Then, as a payout VBB, it is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, and various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held.

On the other hand, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is cut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), and a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. If this happens, the DC + 5V from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f will not be supplied to the capacitor BC0. In response to this, the capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, while the Schottky barrier diode D20 prevents the supply to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. It is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, holds various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, and is supplied as a payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633a provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. And holds various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

That is, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), and a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Then, even if the DC + 5V from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0, the discharge of the capacitor BC0 causes the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided is held, and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633a provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as a payout VBB. Various information to be used is retained.

[9-2. How to identify electronic components that have the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630, as described above, the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky of the power factor improvement circuit 630d are used. The types of packages in the barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630 g are the same type (TO-220F), and the shapes of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are also the same (diameter: 5 mm, length). S: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal).

Although FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different types of electronic components, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic components that are not destroyed, and FETQ5 is the only electronic component that is destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, which are the only electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630, the only electrons to be destroyed In order to easily identify the components, the silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has characteristics different from those of the others.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192 (a), the white outer shape of the FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are electronic components that are not destroyed, is obtained. The line and the thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged are used as silk printing for the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 for silk printing TSLK1 to 4, FET Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4. TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The thick white wire is on the side fixed to the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 190, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 need to be arranged adjacent to each other in order to be fixed to the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2. It is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so that the silk printing of the white outline on which the HS2 is arranged and the thick white line portion of the silk printing TSLK1 to 8 are connected.

On the other hand, for FETQ5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), a white outline and a plurality of white diagonal lines arranged at equal intervals within the outline. The ad1 and the thick white line indicating the orientation of the electronic components are printed as silk printing, and the silk printing TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. That is, the white diagonal line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

In this way, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are electronic components having the same shape, silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. By visually observing the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern among TSLKs 1 to 9, which of the different types of electronic components having the same shape is closely watched as compared with other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether it is an electronic component that should be used. This makes it extremely easy to identify which of the different types of electronic components having the same shape is the only electronic component to be destroyed.

Further, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall to instruct FETQ5 by telephone, the silk-printed TSLK9 having a white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for, the staff of the game hall, etc. can accurately grasp the position of FETQ5, so that it is easy for the staff of the service center and the staff of the game hall, etc. to communicate with each other. Become.

As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff of the game hall, etc. to FETQ5 by telephone, the staff of the game hall, etc., follow the instructions of the person in charge of the service center. In addition, among a plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, a noteworthy FET Q5 can be specified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the notable FET Q5 can be identified from the other electronic components, FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

As described above, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different electronic components, whereas the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a kind of electronic component, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall, and AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. If it is accidentally plugged into the power outlet of, as described above, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630 g is self-destructed and the short mode is maintained, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Fuse. That is, as a trace that the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage, it becomes an electronic component in which one or both of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE2 are destroyed after the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so as to easily identify the electronic component to be destroyed as the electronic component having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630. The silk printing that is done is adopted that has different characteristics from others.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not destroyed even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, is white. The outline of the above is silk printing, and silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630.

On the other hand, for fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components in which the plug of the power cord is destroyed as a trace of being accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, FIG. 193 (b) is shown. As described above, the white outline and the region ad2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly painted in white are printed as silk printing, and the silk printing FSLK2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. That is, the white solid area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. At both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, support brackets (not shown) are soldered to the power supply board 630, but the inner region of the white outline and the periphery of the support bracket are solidly painted white. The area ad2 can be visually recognized, and the area ad2 that is the inner area of the white outline and is solidly painted in white corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is transparent. It can be reliably seen through a simple glass tube.

As described above, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, the white color represented as a characteristic pattern among the silk-printed FSLK1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. By visually observing the solid-painted area ad2, it is possible to identify which of the same types of electronic components having the same shape is an electronic component to be watched as compared with other electronic components. It has become. This makes it extremely easy to determine which of the same types of electronic components have the same shape and that show traces of the power cord plug being accidentally plugged into a commercial power outlet of AC100V. It can be specified to.

In addition, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to instruct the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 by telephone, the area painted in solid white, which is represented as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for silk-printed FSLK2, 3 having ad2, the staff of the game hall, etc. can accurately grasp the positions of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, so that the person in charge of the service center and the game hall It becomes easier to communicate with staff such as clerk.

As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff of the game hall, etc., to instruct Hughes FUSE1 and FUSE2 by telephone, the staff of the game hall, etc. is the person in charge of the service center. Of the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be specified as instructed in the above. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be identified from the other electronic components, the fuse FUSE3.

[9-3. Check the blown fuse]
Next, confirmation of blowing of the same type of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and when the fuses are blown, the fuse wire contained in the transparent glass tube is broken and the transparent glass tube is used. Soot adheres to the inside of the glass. Of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show traces of the power cord plug being accidentally inserted into the AC100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, as described above. If the power cord plug is accidentally plugged into a commercial power outlet of AC100V, it will blow. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned silk printing FSLK2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk printing on the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 so that the state of the blown fuse wire can be easily confirmed. As described above, the silk-screened FSLK2 and 3 correspond to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 because the white solid area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. By visually observing the white solid-painted region ad2 through the transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is broken.

As a result, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) plugs the power cord that supplies the power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1 to AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. When the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630 is turned on by mistakenly plugging it into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are traced. Of these, the fuse wire housed in one or both of the transparent glass tubes is broken and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube, so the staff and workers of the game hall, etc. Even if you plug it into a power outlet, you can't turn on the power, so it's an initial failure. ”Even if you insist, you can't cheat your own work mistake (wiring mistake) (no excuse).

On the other hand, as silk printing on the fuse FUSE3, as described above, silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. In this embodiment, green is adopted as the resist of the power supply board 630. Further, in the present embodiment, a green resist is solidly coated on the area of the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the silk-screened FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of Fuse FUSE 3 (ie, the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of Fuse FUSE 3). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the region of, no wiring pattern is formed in this region). This is a fuse wire housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 by visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 through the transparent glass tube. By improving the visibility of the state of, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a blown fuse wire.

Further, in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, the transparency of the fuse FUSE3 is the same as the case where the wiring pattern is not laid out at all even when all the wiring patterns are laid out. By visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the solid glass tube through the transparent glass tube, the visibility of the state of the fuse wire housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is improved. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire is broken.

As described above, the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the power supply line for the interface board (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and the power supply line for the CR unit (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1, and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 has a function as a means for relaying various signals and also as a means for supplying power to a CR unit (not shown). The interface board 635 has a fuse FUSE (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and a class B blown specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). The silk printing shown in FIG. 193 (a) on the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 described above is printed on the mounting surface thereof. The area of the mounting surface of the interface board 635 corresponding to silk printing on the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solidly coated with a green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) (ie, the clear glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown) and the corresponding solid color. Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area of the green resist, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) through the transparent glass tube. The visibility of the state of the fuse wire is improved, and it is possible to confirm whether or not the fuse wire is broken. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 can be configured to be provided on one of AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power line connector DCN2 on the power supply board 630, or is configured to be provided on both of them. You can also do it.

Further, in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), it is not shown as in the case where the wiring pattern is not laid out at all even when all the wiring patterns are laid out. By visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE through the transparent glass tube, the state of the fuse wire housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE. The visibility can be improved and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the fuse wire is broken.

[9-4. Capacitor capacity]
Next, the capacitance of the capacitor BC0 will be described. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is a power supply line (that is, a + 5V power supply) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored. DC + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 via the Schottky barrier diode D20 to charge the capacitor, while the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (breaker in the game hall). By turning off the power, the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once.) In the event of a power failure or momentary power failure, the power supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power creation circuit 630f. Discharge is started in response to the DC + 5V from the line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) being no longer supplied to the capacitor BC0.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off by the discharge of the capacitor BC0 (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), or a power failure occurs. In a state where a momentary power failure occurs, the backup power supply is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 as the main VBB so that various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is retained. In addition, the backup power supply is supplied as the payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, so that various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is retained. It has become like.

When the business of the game hall is closed, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall turns off the breaker of the game hall to shut off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall all at once. Then, when the next business is started (usually, the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is left in the ON-operated state), a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall breaks the game hall. By turning on, the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned on all at once. At this time, if the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is small, the main control board 1310 is provided with the main control board 1310 by completing the discharge of the capacitor BC0 during the period from the end of the game hall business to the start of the next business. Various information of the main control built-in RAM of the control MPU 1310a and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 cannot be held. As a result, when the business starts, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall turns on the breaker in the game hall to turn on the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall all at once, the RAM clear switch is activated. Regardless of whether or not it has been operated, the main control MPU provided on the main control board determines the check sum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM in the power-on processing and completely erases the contents of the main control built-in RAM ( Since all pachinko machines will simultaneously execute the RAM clear notification that tells that the game has been cleared, the RAM clear notification sound that flows from the speakers of all pachinko machines will reverberate in the game hall. In this case, in all pachinko machines, the payout control MPU provided on the payout control board determines the checksum (sum value) error of the payout control built-in RAM in the power-on processing, and completely completes the contents of the payout control built-in RAM. Erase (clear).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is selected so that the RAM clear notification is not executed even when the business of the game hall is closed and the next business is started. Specifically, as the capacity of the capacitor BC0, to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 as the main VBB for about 3 days (about 72 hours) after the business of the game hall is closed. Various information that can be supplied and stored in the main control built-in RAM can be held, and as a payout VBB, it is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 and has a built-in payout control. A capacitor having a capacity that can hold various information stored in the RAM is selected. In this capacity selection, the power consumption of the main VBB supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633a provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. It is also taken into consideration that the power consumption of the paid VBB supplied to the circuit board may be about 10 times larger than that of the power consumption of the VBB. The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633a provided on the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Compared to the power consumption of

[9-5. Countermeasures for discontinued electronic components]
Next, countermeasures for discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for a board treated as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, and a payout control board, a lead type electronic component is mounted on the mounting surface on the front side thereof, and the back surface is mounted. It is necessary to solder on the soldering surface on the side. However, although lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of gaming machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and fusion game machines, other general electrical equipment manufacturers offer surface mount type (smaller possible). So-called SMD type) is used. For this reason, production may be discontinued due to a decrease in the number of lead-type electronic components produced. Even if a lead-type electronic component obtained from one electronic component manufacturer is discontinued and a replacement is sought, it is highly probable that other electronic component manufacturers will also be discontinued. The lead-type electronic components will be used for a limited time, and it will be difficult to mount the lead-type electronic components on the substrate to be treated as the main substrate.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a lead-type electronic component capable of configuring an SMD-type electronic component as a lead-type electronic component can be mounted on a mounting surface of a board treated as a main board. .. Here, the Schottky barrier diode D20 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the Schottky barrier diode D20 is located on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a at positions corresponding to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cc which are the terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. The land patterns D20da and D20db for SMD are formed on the surface, and the land patterns D20fa and D20fb for leads are formed at positions where one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb corresponding to the land patterns D20da and D20db for SMD are arranged. , D20db and the wiring patterns D20ga and D20gb for electrically connecting the lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb are formed.

Soldered on the land patterns D20da and D20db for SMD formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a so as to correspond to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cc which are the terminals of the SMD type shotkey barrier diode D20b. , The anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cc and the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are soldered, and one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb are soldered to the lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb, respectively. Then, the front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface of the substrate D20a are molded by wrapping them with an epoxy resin to form an electronic component body D20h that covers one end of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b and the leads D20ea and D20eb. The Schottky barrier diode D20 can be configured as a lead-type electronic component in which two leads D20ea and D20eb project from the electronic component main body D20h. As shown in FIG. 194 (b), the symbol D20ha indicating the forward direction of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component main body D20h. Further, although not shown, the manufacturer name and product number (number published in the catalog) of the Schottky barrier diode D20 are also printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component main body D20h.

In this way, since the SMD type electronic component can be configured as a lead type electronic component, even if the production of the lead type electronic component is reduced and the production is discontinued and it becomes difficult to obtain the component, it is general. This can be done by using SMD type electronic components used by electrical equipment manufacturers.

Although the Schottky barrier diode D20 has been described in the above-described embodiment, it can also be applied to an SMD type capacitor, an SMD type resistor, an SMD type coil, and the like. Further, it is also possible to arrange a plurality of the same SMD type electronic components in a row in an array to form a lead type electronic component.

Next, measures for commercial power supply voltage are taken when the plug of the power cord for supplying AC power from the island equipment of the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is accidentally plugged into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 is a configuration of a commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 195, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 189 (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration of measures for commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment”) are designated by the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the power supply destruction circuit 630g is composed of the FET Q5, the resistors R25, R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and the power supply is destroyed from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. When the circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of FETQ5 via the resistor R25, FETQ5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal of FETQ5 to the source terminal (the drain terminal and source terminal of FETQ5 are overloaded). By destroying the FET Q5 due to the electric current), the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive is maintained.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, and a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure. It is composed of a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC and a choke coil L1, and the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. There is.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, and the diodes D5 and D5. It is input to the anode terminal of D6, is output from the cathode terminal of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown) as described above, the fuse FUSE1 , It is input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via FUSE2. For the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK2 and 3 are mounted on the power supply board 630. It is printed on the surface. That is, the white solid area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 have support metal fittings (not shown) soldered to the power supply board 630, but the areas inside the white outline and the area around the support metal fittings are white. The solid-painted area ad2 can be visually recognized, and the white solid-painted area corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is the inner area of the white outline. The ad2 can be reliably seen through the transparent glass tube.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 195, AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). Then, the L side (AC24V1) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a via the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (AC24V2) is input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a as it is. Will be done. For the fuse FUSE1, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the inside of the outline is solidly painted white are printed as silk printing, and the silk printing FSLK2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. ing. That is, the white solid area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, both ends of the fuse FUSE1 have support metal fittings (not shown) soldered to the power supply board 630, but the area inside the white outline and the area around the support metal fittings are painted solid white. The area ad2 that has been soldered can be visually recognized, and the area ad2 that is the inner area of the white outline and is solidly painted white corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuse FUSE1 is transparent. It can be reliably seen through the glass tube.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall omits the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Briefly explaining this, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall has the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 on both power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side (L side (AC24V1), N side ( This is because it was input to AC24V2)), but according to the test conducted by the applicant, no problem occurred even if one (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted. As a result, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 195, one of the AC24V (N side (AC24V2)) from the island facility of the game hall is the input side terminal 1 of the power supply switch 630a. Cost reduction is realized by inputting as it is in.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the same power switch 630a as in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment is adopted. To briefly explain this, it is necessary to reliably disconnect / connect both the L side and the N side of the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall with respect to the power switch 630a. As a result, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment has the AC24V from the island facility of the game hall, similarly to the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Both the L side and the N side can be disconnected / contacted at the same time.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 195, the N side (AC24V2) of AC24V from the island facility of the game hall and the input side terminal 1 of the power supply switch 630a. It is electrically connected to one of the microgap type arresters AL1 between them. The other end of this microgap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The micro-gap type arrester AL1 surges the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5 when a high voltage (referred to as "surge voltage") invades AC24V from the island equipment of the game hall due to a lightning strike. The surge voltage is limited by flowing it as a current so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a, or the high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning on / off the power switch 630a is applied to the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing it as a surge current through the frame ground FG2 so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a. Further, in the microgap type arrester AL1, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, an operator mistakenly makes a mistake, and the ground terminal ECN2 (island equipment ground) of the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. 102 (b). If you forget to electrically connect the ground connection terminal in the island equipment of the game hall via the ground wire of the island equipment, electromagnetic noise is used as a guarantee on the N side of AC24V (AC24V2) from the island equipment in the game hall. ), The noise resistance can be improved.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure, and a choke coil In addition to L1, it is composed of a surge absorber SA1 that constitutes a power supply destruction circuit 630g', and the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power supply switch 630a are a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and a power supply destruction circuit. It is input to 630 g'and the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630 g'has a faster reaction speed than the varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1). A silicon surge absorber can be mentioned), one end of which is electrically connected to the L side (AC24V1) of AC24V via the power switch 630a, and the other end is the N side of AC24V (AC24V1) via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and is destroyed, causing a short circuit and short mode.

A varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, but here, a silicon surge absorber (also referred to as a semiconductor varistor, VRD, etc.) is used. The silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage having a steep rise as compared with a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a silicon pn junction. This silicon surge absorber has features that it has a very fast response to a surge, has a very good control voltage characteristic, and has a very small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type may be used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47 V, which is about twice the input voltage, may be selected.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are electrically connected to the No. 2 (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. , Is electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1 and also electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor improving circuit 630d. The four terminals of the relay RL1 are grounded to ground (GND), and the first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to the relay drive circuit 630i described later. As a result, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals of the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). The thermistor TH1 is a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. As its characteristics, if the vertical axis is the allowable capacitor capacity and the horizontal axis is the AC voltage, the AC voltage value increases. Therefore, a capacitor that has a curve that the value of the allowable capacitor capacity becomes smaller and is not destroyed even when AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, is applied is selected.

The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, input to the power supply creating circuit 630f, and input to the relay drive circuit 630i. When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input, the relay drive circuit 630i creates an operating voltage (+ 24V) capable of operating the coil of the relay RL1 and supplies it to the first terminal of the relay RL1.

The rectified DC output from the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifying circuit 630c, respectively, is due to insufficient power from the relay drive circuit 630i when the power switch 630a is turned on (relay drive circuit). Since the coil of the relay RL1 is not operating due to insufficient power supply by + 24V from the 630i, the relay RL1 cannot be turned on (that is, the relay RL1 remains OFF). , The 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 are input to the power factor improvement circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1 in a non-conducting state. To. As a result, the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the shotkey barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c flows only toward the thermistor TH1, and when this DC begins to flow to the thermistor TH1, the resistance value. Although a weak current is passed through the load following the thermistor TH1, when the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually rises due to the current flowing through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly, so that the thermistor TH1 succeeds. Pass a strong current through the load.

On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned ON and the power from the relay drive circuit 630i (by the power supply by + 24V from the relay drive circuit 630i) switches from the non-operating state to the operating state of the relay RL1 coil, the relay RL1 By turning on, the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 are made conductive, and the rectified DC output from the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifying circuit 630c, respectively, is generated. In addition to the thermistor TH1, the relay RL1 is diverted between the terminals of the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal (that is, between the contacts), passes through each of them, and is input to the power factor improvement circuit 630d via the choke coil L2. Will be done. As a result, the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is between the terminals of the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). ), The current to the thermistor TH1 decreases, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 decreases, and the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, so that the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 The current passing between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) will increase.

As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is the thermistor. When flowing through TH1, the current to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1 becomes stronger as the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises and the resistance value decreases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. When this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall, and the power supply of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. If it is accidentally plugged into an outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 will greatly exceed the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) by the time the temperature of the thermista TH1 rises, and a large current will flow through the surge absorber SA1 to cause a surge. The absorber SA1 can be destroyed to enter the short mode.

In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned on, a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 via the surge absorber SA1 which is in the short mode state in the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is blown. It will be blown. Further, when the fuse FUSE1 is blown while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow through the surge absorber SA1, so that the elements of the surge absorber SA1 are scattered and the surge absorber SA1 becomes It can be prevented from being destroyed in open mode. As a result, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and even if the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply board 630 is destroyed. It is possible to surely prevent this.

In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Since it is not necessary to provide the FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit and the CGND terminal for passing a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the circuit configuration is not complicated.

In addition, the plug of the power cord was not plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly plugged into the power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage of AC24V for the game machine. When the surge absorber SA1 that is plugged in and constitutes the power supply destruction circuit 630g'is destroyed, replace the fuse FUSE1 with one that has not been blown, and replace the plug of the power cord with the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall. Even if the fuse is plugged into the AC24V power outlet, the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g'has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained. Therefore, the fuse replaced via the surge absorber SA1. A large current flows through FUSE1 and the fuse FUSE1 is blown again. That is, unless the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g'is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' is not destroyed. Even if the plug of the power cord is plugged into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, the game cannot be started.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine provided with a power supply means capable of creating various power sources required for the game device based on an external power source supplied from outside the game machine has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-008221). Gazette (Fig. 2). By the way, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the game machine instructs the staff such as the clerk of the game hall by telephone to specify a specific part of the power supply means, follow the instruction of the person in charge of the service center. In addition, there is a problem that it is difficult to identify a notable component among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply means.

Further, conventionally, a game machine including a power source means for creating various power sources based on the power source from the game island facility and supplying the power source to the substrate has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083337 (paragraph [0038]). )). The game island facility converts a commercial AC power supply (AC100V) into a stepped-down AC power supply for game machines (AC24V). However, when the power cord for supplying power from the island equipment to the game machine is plugged into the power outlet of the commercial AC power supply instead of the power outlet of the AC power supply for the game machine, the commercial AC power supply is connected to the AC power supply for the game machine. Since it has a high voltage, there is a risk that an abnormal power source will be output from the power supply means and various boards inside the game machine will be destroyed.

[10. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 185 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 196 to 197. FIG. 196 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board, FIG. 197 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board, and FIG. 198 is a perspective for explaining an outline of wiring to a board treated as a main board. It is a figure. First, the power supply and the input signal in the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and the power supply and the input signal in the circuit of the payout control board 633 and the wiring to the board treated as the main board will be described.

[10-1. Power supply and input signal in the circuit of the main control board]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with DC + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630, and is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The backup power supply to be supplied is supplied as the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

As shown in FIG. 196, the DC + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly comprises a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, DC + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630 is applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal is grounded. DC + 5V with the noise component removed from the terminal is output. The direct current + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is first electrically removed from the ripple (AC component folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). It has been smoothed.

The direct current + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). By connecting the capacitors, ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed DC + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. When a momentary power failure occurs in the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is charged after the momentary power failure occurs. It is applied as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and also supplies power via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the board 630. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, via the resistor MR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403, and a detection from the general winning opening sensor 2401. The signal, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, etc. are input to the main control input circuit 1310b via the panel relay board 1710, and the first start is performed. The detection signal from the mouth sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control input circuit 1310b without going through the panel relay board 1710.

Detection signal from gate sensor 2506, detection signal from general winning opening sensor 3001, detection signal from first starting opening sensor 3002, detection signal from second starting opening sensor 2402, detection signal from large winning opening sensor 2403, The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, respectively, via the main control input circuit 1310b. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. The input terminal PA7, which is an empty terminal, is grounded to ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

In the present embodiment, as described above, there are four general winning openings 2001, and the general winning opening sensor 3001 detects each of the three general winning openings 2001 received in the side unit 2200. The detection signals from the above are input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the game ball B received in one general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is detected. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal PB5 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first start port sensor 3002 is composed of two sensors (double sensors), the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. There is. The detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly electrically connected), whereas the first start port sensor is electrically connected. The detection signal from the slave side 3002b is electrically connected (that is, indirectly electrically connected) to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710. The detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. Is input to the input terminal PB2 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Like the input port PA, the input port PB is composed of 8 bits. Further, although the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is not shown, it is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB, and the detection signals from other sensors are input to the input port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b, respectively. The input terminals that are input to the predetermined input terminals and become empty terminals are grounded to the ground (GND) as the empty terminal processing as in the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

[10-2. Power supply and input signal in the circuit of the payout control board]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with DC + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630, and is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa. The backup power supply to be supplied is supplied as a pay VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

As shown in FIG. 197, the DC + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly comprises a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, DC + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630 is applied to the 1st terminal, and the 2nd terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal is grounded. DC + 5V with the noise component removed from the terminal is output. The direct current + 5V applied to the first terminal is first electrically removed from the ripple (AC component folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). It has been smoothed.

The direct current + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). By connecting the capacitors, ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed DC + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa. When a momentary power failure occurs in the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is charged after the momentary power failure occurs. It is applied as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633a provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Since the power consumption is large compared to the power consumption of the main control board 1310, the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) is the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633. In the form, a larger one is selected as compared with the capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF). As a result, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 become the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off. Each charged charge is applied as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power failure occurs.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU633aa, is grounded to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control of the payout control MPU633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is also supplied via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the board 630. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa, via the resistor PR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the payout detection sensor 591. The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab, respectively.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are Each is input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. The input terminals PA6 and PA7, which are empty terminals, are grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

The power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB (not shown) via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and detection signals from other sensors are also transmitted. As with the input terminals PA6 and PA7 of the input port PA, the input terminals that are input to the predetermined input terminals of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab and become empty terminals are grounded as empty terminal processing. It is grounded to GND).

[10-3. Wiring to the board treated as the main board]
Examples of the board treated as the main board include a power supply board 630, a main control board 1310, and a payout control board 633. When the wiring to the board treated as the main board is illegally modified, the operation of the board treated as the main board becomes uneasy and a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the illegal game balls are illegally used. Since there is a risk of being acquired by an actor, it is necessary to detect the modified wiring at an early stage when the wiring to each of these boards is tampered with.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), regarding the wiring to the power supply board 630, the connector SHG (not shown, but the connector SHG includes the manufacturer name and the product number (numbers listed in the catalog). The name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as invalid identifiers on the covering portion of each wiring connected to)). Specifically, for example, the connector SHG is a connector having a total of 22 pins from the 1st pin to the 22nd pin, and the manufacturing company name: XXX, as an invalid identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1 on the 1st pin. And product number: ABC123 (number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the manufacturer name: XXX and product number: ABC123 (number published in the catalog) are printed on the second pin as an invalid identifier SLAB on the covering part of the wiring SCBL2. Is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the power supply board 630 is at least the covering part of the wiring so that the manufacturing company name: XXX and the part number: ABC123 (numbers listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the invalid identifier SLAB on the covering part of the wiring. The fraudulent identifier SLAB has a length printed twice repeatedly.

The covering part of the wiring SCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and the color is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering part (for example, black) as an invalid identifier SLAB. Manufacturer name: XXX, and product number: ABC123 (number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering part of the wiring SCBL2 to SCBL22 connected to other pins may be in another color different from white (for example, red or gray), or a plurality of colors. (For example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors may be used. ), The manufacturing company name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier SLAB.

As shown in FIG. 198 (b), the wiring to the main control board 1310 is connected to the connector MHG (not shown, the connector MHG is connected to the manufacturer name and product number (number listed in the catalog)). The wiring manufacturer name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the covering portion of each wiring as an invalid identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector MHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the 1st pin to the 30th pin, and the manufacturing company name: YYYY, as an invalid identifier MLAB on the covering portion of the wiring MCBL1 on the 1st pin. And product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the manufacturing company name: YYYYY and product number: DEFXYZ-1 (listed in the catalog) are printed on the second pin as an invalid identifier MLAB on the covering part of the wiring MCBL2. The number to be printed) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the main control board 1310 is at least the wiring so that the manufacturing company name: YYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an invalid identifier MLAB on the wiring covering part. It has a length in which the fraudulent identifier MLAB is repeatedly printed twice on the covering portion of the above.

The covering part of the wiring MCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and the color is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering part (for example, black) as an invalid identifier MLAB. Manufacturer name: YYYY, and product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering part of the wiring MCBL2 to MCBL30 connected to other pins may be in another color (for example, red or gray) different from white. Alternatively, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) may be used. The manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier MLAB.

As shown in FIG. 198 (b), the wiring to the payout control board 633 is connected to the connector HHG (not shown, the connector HHG is connected to the manufacturer name and product number (number listed in the catalog)). The wiring manufacturer name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the covering portion of each wiring as an invalid identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector HHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the 1st pin to the 30th pin, and the manufacturing company name: YYYY, as an invalid identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 on the 1st pin. And product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the manufacturing company name: YYYYY and product number: DEFXYZ-1 (listed in the catalog) are printed on the second pin as an invalid identifier HLAB on the covering part of the wiring HCBL2. The number to be printed) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the payout control board 633 is at least the wiring so that the manufacturing company name: YYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the invalid identifier HLAB on the wiring covering part. It has a length in which the fraudulent identifier HLAB is repeatedly printed twice on the covering portion of the above.

The covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and has a color (for example, black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion as an invalid identifier HLAB. Manufacturer name: YYYY, and product number: The covering portion of the wiring HCBL2 to HCBL30 on which DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed and connected to other pins may be in another color different from white (for example, red or gray). Alternatively, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) may be used. The manufacturing company name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier HLAB.

In this way, even if the wiring to the board treated as the main board is tampered with, the manufacturer name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the connector and the wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, it can contribute to the early detection of modified wiring. As the wiring to the substrate treated as the main substrate, wiring that is difficult to obtain even if it is listed in the catalog is preferable.

In this embodiment, two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided on the game board 5. The wiring and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 provided on the game board 5 are connected to the main control board via a connector (not shown). It is directly electrically connected to 1310. On the other hand, the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the game board 5 that constitute the first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received by the first start port 2002 provided on the game board 5 are provided. A gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B that is received in the large winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5, and a general winning that is provided in the game board 5. Two sensors from various sensors such as the general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the mouth 2001, and the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects the magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5. The wiring is electrically connected and aggregated in the panel relay board 1710 via each connector, and is also electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via one connector.

Therefore, the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 constituting the first start port sensor 3002 are mistakenly connected to the main control board 1310. May be electrically connected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the colors of the covering portions of the two wirings from the first starting port sensor 3002 are yellow on one side and pink on the other side, and the covering portions of the wiring are wired as an invalid identifier. The manufacturer name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are printed repeatedly. As the color of the covering part of the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402, one is white and the other is black, and the covering part of each wiring has the wiring manufacturer name and part number (catalog) as an invalid identifier. The numbers listed in) are printed repeatedly. This allows the line operator to identify the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402, respectively, at the manufacturer. At the same time, in the game hall, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall distinguishes the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402, respectively. You can do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the connector having a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. Is selected, and a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. As a result, the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 constituting the first start port sensor 3002 correspond to themselves. Since the physical structure can be electrically connected, in the manufacturer, the line operator can perform the first start port sensor main side constituting the first start port sensor 3002 in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes) of incorrect wiring between the two wirings from 3002a and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402, and in the game hall. , The staff of the game hall, etc., when checking for fraud, when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original, the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error of insertion error) of incorrect wiring between the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402 and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402.

In the present embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in each of the three general winning openings 2001 included in the side unit 2200 and one general winning opening 2001 included in the attacker unit 2400 are accepted. A connector having the same shape is selected for electrically connecting the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B to the panel relay board 1710. This is because, in the present embodiment, there are four general winning openings 2001, but no matter which general winning opening 2001 a game ball enters, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls with the entry. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change of the production. Further, even in the case of adopting a configuration in which the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001 are directly electrically connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the panel relay board 1710, the general winning is won. The connectors having the same shape are selected as the connectors for electrically connecting the two wires from the mouth sensors 2401 and 3001 to the main control board 1310. As described above, although there are four general winning openings 2001, no matter which general winning opening 2001 a game ball enters, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change of the production.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed in which various entry ports are provided in an advantageous area of the game board, and each entry port is provided with each sensor (detection means) for detecting the passage of the game ball (detection means). For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154676 (paragraphs [0014] to [0016], FIGS. 2 to 4). However, if the wiring from the detection means passing through the entry port for similar purposes is mistakenly electrically connected, there is no problem in terms of electrical specifications, so damage is avoided, but the detection signal of the entry port is erroneously received. It will affect the progress of the game. However, there is a problem that the incorrect connection may not be noticed immediately in some cases because the uses are similar.

[11. Each decorative board provided for the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 199 to 203. FIG. 199 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame, FIG. 200 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 201 is a block diagram showing an LED. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuits, and FIG. 203 is from the LED non-mounting surface in part D of FIG. 202. It is an enlarged view as seen. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decorative board provided with the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current The method of arranging the drive circuit will be described.

First, as described above, the door frame 3 has a plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, and a side so as to surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. The side window decoration portion 410b of the window decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 are arranged, and the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate. Below the central upper decorative body 312a, the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b are arranged, respectively.

The dish upper left decorative board 271 has a dish upper left decorative board 273 formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the dish upper left decorative body 271 and mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). Behind the dish upper right decorative board 276, a dish upper right decorative board 278 formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276 is arranged, and a plurality of dish upper right decorative boards 278 are mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). The dish center upper decorative substrate 312a is provided with a dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is arranged. It is luminescently decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 314.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 404 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative substrate 404 behind the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 composed of the above is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on each of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (in this embodiment, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a). 5 pieces on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b) and 10 pieces on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). A plurality of side window interior decorative members 410b are provided in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decorative members 412, and behind the side window interior decorative members 410b, side surfaces formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the side window interior decorative members 412. A window decoration board 413 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (12 in this embodiment) mounted on the side window decoration board 413 emit light and decorate. The door frame right side decorative substrate 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative substrate 419 behind the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A door frame right side decorative substrate 418 composed of the above is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on each of the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b (in this embodiment, the right side upper decorative substrate 418a). 4 pieces on the right side and 10 pieces on the lower right side decorative substrate 418b).

In the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 is arranged behind the door frame. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. A door frame top right decorative board 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip is arranged, and a plurality of door frame top right decorative boards 455 are mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, 7 on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457) are luminescently decorated.

In the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, a decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the plate, which is formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, is arranged behind the decorative substrate 281, and is mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate. It is luminescent and decorated with full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). In the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, a lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is arranged behind the decorative substrate 286 of the lower right of the plate. It is light-emitting and decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment) mounted on the. In the dish center lower decorative body 312b, a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape is arranged behind the dish center lower decorative body 312b along the dish center lower decorative body 312b. It is light-emitting and decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 316.

As described above, the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided in the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear parts. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 includes a front decorative substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape on the rear side. , Consists of. The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the front decorative substrate 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear decorative substrate 352b (9 in this embodiment). In this embodiment, 9 pieces) are luminescently decorated.

As described above, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed in an elongated strip shape. As a result, by increasing the distance dimension in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, and the like can also be provided.

[11-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board]
The decorative substrate 273 on the upper left of the plate, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, the decorative substrate 402b on the left side, and the side Decorative board 413 in the window, decorative board 418a on the right side, decorative board 418b on the lower right side, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, dish lower left decorative board The door frame side decorative substrate such as 283, the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate, the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, the front decorative substrate 352a, and the rear decorative substrate 352b, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 199.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is provided with the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 180 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 96. The light emitting data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1 which are the first serial system on the door frame side and the light emitting data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2 which are the second serial system on the door frame side are independently input from the door frame side. There is. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 189 via the interface board 635, DC + 12V is input, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and is grounded to the ground (GND).

[11-1-1. Door frame side 1st serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are relayed to the dish unit 200 of the dish unit 200 shown in FIG. It is input to the substrate 214 and is input to the handle decorative substrate 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG. 54.

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish unit relay board 214 are the dish lower left decorative board 283, the dish lower right decorative board 288, and the dish unit relay board 214. And, they are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 70, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower left decorative board 283 of the plate, are input to the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, respectively. That is, the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish serves as a bridging board for transmitting the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. The decorative substrate 283 and the decorative substrate 273 on the upper left of the plate are electrically connected to each other. The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the decorative board 283 on the lower left of the plate, which is the bridging board. No input connector is provided, and the first serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are not shown for outputting to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish is shown on the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish, which is electrically connected to the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish (that is, after the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish and is the final stage). There is only an input connector (not shown) to which the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from each output connector, are input. ..

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower right decorative board 288 of the dish, are input to the upper right decorative board 278 of the dish, respectively. That is, the decorative substrate 288 on the lower right of the plate serves as a bridging substrate for transmitting the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the upper right decorative substrate 278 of the plate are electrically connected in a beaded state. The first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the decorative board 288 on the lower right of the plate, which is the bridging board. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side are shown to be output to the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate. No output connector is provided. On the other hand, the lower right decorative board 278 of the dish, which is electrically connected to the lower right decorative board 288 of the dish (that is, the latter and final stage of the lower right decorative board 288), has the lower right decorative board. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side output from the output connectors (not shown) of 288 are input is provided. ing.

The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300, are the decorative board 314 on the center of the plate and the plate. It is input to the front decorative substrate 352a of the lower center decorative substrate 316 and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decorative substrate 352a are input to the rear decorative substrate 352b, respectively. That is, the front decorative substrate 352a serves as a bridging substrate that transmits the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the rear decorative substrate 352b. And the rear decorative substrate 352b are electrically connected in a beaded state. The front decorative substrate 352a, which serves as the bridging substrate, contains the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the operation unit relay substrate 392 of the effect operation unit 300, respectively. An input connector (not shown) to be input is provided, and the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side are output to the rear decoration board 352b, respectively. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, the rear decorative substrate 352b, which is electrically connected to the front decorative substrate 352a (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the front decorative substrate 352a), has an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative substrate 352a. Only an input connector (not shown) for inputting the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from each of the above, is provided.

Here, for example, the lower left decorative board 283 on which the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input will be briefly described. Then, the decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the plate includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat distribution circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a includes a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of passing a constant current through the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x controls the constant current to flow through the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay board 214. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x by the heat distribution circuit 283c, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

Further, for example, the first serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish, DC + 12V, and the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish to which the ground (LED) is input will be briefly described. The plate upper left decorative substrate 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the dish, and is a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 273x capable of passing a constant current through the suLED1 to suLED6. , The maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6 is mainly composed of. The constant current drive circuit 273x controls to pass a constant current through suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x by the heat distribution circuit 273c, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed.

[11-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the lower left side decoration of the door frame left side decorative board 402. In addition to being input to the substrate 402b, the decorative substrate 413 in the side window, the decorative substrate 418b on the lower right side of the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Is entered in each.

The direct current + 12V and the ground (GND) input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decorative board. It is input to 457.

The door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative board 457 serves as a bridging board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top center decorative board 455. Therefore, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 and the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are electrically connected in a beaded state. The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is a bridging board, includes a second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) on the door frame side from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC + 12V, and ground. An input connector (not shown) for inputting (GND) is provided, and the second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are connected to the center of the door frame top. An output connector (not shown) for outputting to the decorative substrate 455 is provided. Further, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is shown on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, which is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, after the door frame top right decorative substrate 457). There is also an input connector (not shown) for inputting the second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from the output connectors, respectively. , The second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are provided with output connectors (not shown) for outputting to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. ..

The second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the door frame top central decorative board 455, are input to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 serves as a bridging substrate that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456. Therefore, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are electrically connected in a beaded state. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, which is electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455), has a door. Door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from output connectors (not shown) on the center decorative board 455 of the frame top. Only the connector for the door is provided.

Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (LED) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 are input. Briefly explaining the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the lower left decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full-color LEDs. ..

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the dish upper left decorative board 273, and a constant current is passed through hdLED1 to hdLED8. It is mainly composed of a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bag that can be used, and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax applies a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Take control.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of passing a constant current through the hdLED10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the left. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 402by that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the decorative substrate 402a on the side. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is a board (decorative board 402b on the lower left side) on which it is mounted based on the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Control is performed to pass a constant current through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5 of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type, and therefore generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type, and therefore generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax by the heat distribution circuit 402bc, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed. Further, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be distributed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side. ing.

In this way, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be distributed only by the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate (decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes the subsequent board in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board (decorative board 402b on the lower left side) on which it is mounted. The heat distribution circuit 402ac of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side can disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current through the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a subsequent substrate, straddling the substrate on which it is mounted (left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Has been done. Therefore, the work of electrically connecting the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the upper left side decorative substrate 402a is always involved. The operator who performs this work has his / her finger on the connector of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the connector of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, or the heat of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a. In order to touch the distributed circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side and the decorative substrate 402a on the upper left side from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a have a function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, and static electricity. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic parts due to.

As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is set to huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs, in addition to inputting direct current + 12V and ground (GND) from the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Each line through which current flows is input. As described above, the decorative substrate 402a on the left side includes a heat distribution circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and also having a function of being able to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[11-1--3. Luminous data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for designating a light emission mode, and are ID information and a floor. It is composed of key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is specified from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

[11-2. Outline of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 200. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit. Therefore, here, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish will be described. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets the sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of passing a constant current through the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and the maximum current of the current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 283y that can be used.

[11-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, the output channel LR is relative to the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. , LG and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs in one constant current drive circuit. Can be done.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is described from the linear power supply 283xa, the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[11-2-1a. Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of creating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V in this embodiment) to be used in the constant current drive circuit 283x by inputting DC + 12V from the + 12V power supply line. The internal power supply Vreg created by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit. It is supplied to 283xi respectively, and the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi Is ready to work.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 189, and + DC 5V is independently created as an internal power supply Vreg and used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. There is. This is because when the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 is used, the + 5V power supply line is used by routing the electrical wiring, so that the length of the + 5V power supply line that supplies DC + 5V becomes long and noise is generated. It becomes easy to invade. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and the DC + 5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the LED may flicker due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by eliminating the need for the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 in the constant current drive circuit 283x, the noise resistance of the + 12V power supply line to the constant current drive circuit 283x is extremely higher than that of the + 5V power supply line. The linear power supply 283xa has adopted a configuration in which DC + 5V is independently created as an internal power supply Vreg.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using it only in the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to the other substrate. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. As a result, the internal power supply Vreg is stabilized, which can contribute to the prevention of flicker of the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs due to external noise. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise. Further, the electric wiring for input and the electric wiring for external transmission to the + 5V power supply line are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[11-2-1b. Reset part]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa and outputs it into the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi are started to operate.

For example, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not input the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 180, but independently creates a reset signal as an internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. There is. For example, when a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, referred to as "reset signal transmission line") is used, this reset signal transmission line is used by routing electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line that transmits the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset and the LED may be turned off due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by eliminating the need for the reset signal transmission line in the constant current drive circuit 283x, the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently creates a reset signal as an internal reset signal RST. did.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external board, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to the other board, and only in the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using this, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, It can contribute to the prevention of unexpected extinguishing and flicker of the LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise. Further, the input electrical wiring and the external transmission electrical wiring for the reset signal transmission line are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[11-2-1c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line for transmitting serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, light emitting data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) (hereinafter, referred to as "data line"). This is a circuit capable of shaping the waveform of a signal from which serial data is input and transmitting the serial data and outputting it to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line that transmits a clock signal from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) (hereinafter, referred to as “clock line”). This is a circuit in which a clock signal is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the clock signal is shaped and output to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively.

As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. Therefore, both the lengths of the data line and the clock line become long, and noise easily enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x. Is not transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent board, and the waveform is shaped by the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise even when both the lengths of the data line and the clock line are long. As a result, noise-resistant signal transmission can be realized. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise.

[11-2-1d. Address setting section]
Based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, the address setting unit 283xe sets 64 different addresses as IDs (IDs capable of identifying an individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistors (not shown). You can do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID capable of identifying the individual of the constant current drive circuit 283x is preset by the address setting unit 283x by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not the one that receives the data by the software and sets it appropriately.

[11-2-1e. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg is in the serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the light emitting data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emitting data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address which is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. Occasionally, the gradation information in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to capture the gradation information from this serial data and use the captured gradation information. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emitting data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents.

[11-2-1f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel in a total of 128 steps from extinguishing to turning on (maximum brightness) from 0 (zero) to 127 gradations. Therefore, the gradation of one output channel is controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown). That is, the PWM unit 283xh individually includes the PWM gradation control units 1 to PWM gradation control units 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8 (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradation degree is set, the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 control the constant current drive unit 283xi so as to flow a current having the set gradation degree.

[11-2-1 g. Constant current drive unit]
The constant current drive unit 283xi has one constant (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation degree is set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 provided in the PWM unit 283xh described above. A constant current is passed through the LED elements constituting the full-color LED by a current driver. That is, the constant current drive unit 283xi individually includes the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24.

The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 include one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current to be passed to the LED element that emits red (R) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LR1 to LR8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 have one end of a resistor Rg that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits green light (G) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LG1 to LG8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 have one end of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits blue light (B) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LB1 to LB8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to ground (GND).

The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element that constitute the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and DC + 12V is input.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding thermal dispersion resistors. It is electrically connected to 1 to the constant current driver 8) so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 side, respectively. It has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding thermal dispersion resistors. 9 to the constant current driver 16) are electrically connected, and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding thermal dispersion resistors. 17 to constant current driver 24) is electrically connected, and the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED element that constitutes the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24, respectively. ing.

The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED by sucking the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the individually set full-color LEDs. Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 are the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LED by sucking the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the individually set full-color LEDs. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 are the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LED by sucking the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements constituting the individually set full-color LEDs. Can emit light.

In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can be dimmed and lit by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with a constant current set individually. As a result, it is possible to turn off the light, turn on the light with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[11-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the above-mentioned resistors Rr that set the maximum current to be passed to the LED element that emits red light (R) that constitutes the full-color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. Consists of full-color LEDs in eight output channels up to LG8 A resistor Rg that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits green light (G) and full-color LEDs in eight output channels LB1 to LB8 are configured. It is composed of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits blue light (B).

As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). There is.

[11-3. Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the decorative substrate including the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201. Here, a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative substrate including two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. The LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. Therefore, in FIGS. 200 and 201, for convenience of explanation, the above-mentioned output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 are shown by the same reference numerals.

[11-3-1. Decorative board equipped with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, and heat. It includes a distributed circuit 283c.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are the first serial system on the door frame side are input. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635, and DC + 12V is input, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and is grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the dish unit 200 has the first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the door frame sub-relay board 105. It is input via the dish unit relay board 214. DC + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and constitutes the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant current) via the thermal dispersion resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to the constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), and when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emitting data SDAT1, the light emitting data SDAT1 is used. The gradation information is taken in, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled so as to be the taken-in gradation information, and the dimming lighting is performed.

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the thermal dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the thermal dispersion circuit 283c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 283x).

The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) on the door frame side from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is decorated on the upper left of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above). Along with being input to the substrate 273, DC + 12V and ground (GND) are input to the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 via the plate lower left decorative substrate 283. As a result, the noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) is not transmitted to the subsequent substrate, the upper left decorative substrate 273 of the dish. In the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above), the waveform can be shaped.

DC + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and constitutes the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the thermal dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to the constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), and when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emitting data SDAT1, the light emitting data SDAT1 is used. The gradation information is captured, and the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled so as to be the captured gradation information, and the dimming lighting is performed.

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the thermal dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the thermal dispersion circuit 273c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

As a decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, in addition to the decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the plate and the decorative substrate 273 on the upper left of the plate, the decorative substrate 288 on the lower right of the plate, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the decorative substrate 456 on the top left of the door frame. , And the door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[11-3-2. Decorative board equipped with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, 402bb, and hdLED1 which is 10 full-color LEDs. It is provided with ~ hdLED10 and a heat distribution circuit 402bc.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4. The light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635, and DC + 12V is input, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( It is electrically connected to the GND) line and is grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 are input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. There is. DC + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element and the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element constituting the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs. , And the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs in one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. Therefore, among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the light emitting mode of the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the remaining two For the hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, the light emitting mode is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate straddling the substrate on which it is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). The light emitting mode of the huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 are respectively opposed to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8. The hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full-color LEDs, are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are the output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to and constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channels LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. ~ LB8 (constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24 described above) are electrically connected.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 are respectively opposed to the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10. The hdLED9 and hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 (constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are the output channels LG1 and LG2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current driver 9 and the constant current driver 10 described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to and constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are connected to the output channels LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. , LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above) are electrically connected.

Further, with respect to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is the subsequent substrate of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the red color (huLED1 to huLED5) constituting the full-color LEDs (huLED1 to huLED5). The cathode terminals of the LED elements of R) are connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the thermal dispersion resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the thermal dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current drivers 3 to constant current drivers 7 described above) and constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively. Output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (constant current driver described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors huRg1b to huRg5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the thermal dispersion resistors huRg1a to huRg5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the 11-constant current driver 15) and constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are the thermal dispersion resistance huRb1b to the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, respectively. Electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the huRb5b and the thermal dispersion resistors huRb1a to huRb5a on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Has been done. The output channels LR8, LG8, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), and when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emitting data SDAT2, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is referred to from the light emitting data SDAT2. Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, 8 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled and dimmed so as to capture the gradation information and obtain the captured gradation information. ..

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emitting data) input via a data line buffer 402baxc and a clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. Based on SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emitting data LED2 includes its own ID, gradation information is taken from the light emitting data LED2 so that the taken-in gradation information is used. Of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled to be dimmed and lit, and the left side which is a subsequent board of the lower left side decorative board 402b. The huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the upper decorative substrate 402a, are individually controlled to be dimmed and lit.

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through 8 hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the thermal dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8, which constitute the thermal dispersion circuit 402bc. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bax).

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type, so that the constant current flowing through two hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is sucked and left. Heat is generated by sucking a constant current flowing through huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a subsequent substrate of the side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is generated for two hdLED9s and hdLED10s out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Five thermal dispersion resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10 constituting the thermal dispersion circuit 402bc, and five mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. For huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, the thermal dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which form the thermal dispersion circuit 402bc in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is dispersed by taking charge of the heat dispersion resistors huRr1b to huRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b constituting the heat distribution circuit 402ac. You can do it.

Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a are LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be exact, constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the electric current, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

As a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, in addition to the decorative substrate 402b below the left side, the decorative substrate 314 above the center of the plate, the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, the decorative substrate 413 in the side window, and the right side There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

Further, as a decorative substrate that does not have an LED constant current drive circuit at all, in addition to the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, there is a decorative substrate 418a on the right side.

[11-4. How to arrange the LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, the constant current drive circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit will be described as an electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip. As a type of IC package for a constant current drive circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) ), Which is the so-called VQFN. Of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuit, one end side is the input side, and the remaining three end sides are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. In FIG. 203, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for the sake of readability of the drawing.

As described above, each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. And there is. Since the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically and having two LED constant current drive circuits. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arc shape will be described.

[11-4-1. Lower left side decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 202A, the lower left side decorative substrate 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, and hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs, are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are , It is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting the left side upper decorative board 402a and the electrical wiring is mounted on the upper end side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the LED of the left side lower decorative board 402b is not mounted. A connector LEDCN for connecting the door frame sub-relay board 105 and the electrical wiring is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

A white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. In the present embodiment, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 by the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Can be increased.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the substrate control number of the lower left decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b from being lowered on the LED mounting surface 402bx due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs.

Further, although the door frame left side decorative body 404 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a milky white color having translucency as described above, a game seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the person moves the head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and the player can see the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b provided in the door frame left side decorative body 404. Even if this is possible, the component numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Since the area indicating the position and the area indicating the position are not printed as silk printing at all, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are visible to the player. It is prevented from being done. Therefore, a number specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED) and an auxiliary line indicating a mounting position of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs (that is, a full-color LED). A region indicating a position where a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 is arranged) can be made difficult for the player to see.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from seeing the area indicating the connector LDLCN, the corresponding part number, and the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, which has nothing to do with the game for the player.

Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color, which is white (natural)). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (solid coating). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface, are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the substrate control number of the lower left decorative substrate 402b is a foil-free character (that is, a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). It is formed as a punched letter formed by making letters with a pattern and pulling out the copper foil around it), and the foil punched letters are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It is covered. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-free characters is electrically insulated from the electronic components. The board control number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is a foil removal character (that is, a wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b instead of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. In the layer (copper plane) on which is formed, characters may be formed with a wiring pattern that is copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form characters), or the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side may be formed. On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a letter is made with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the surrounding area It may be formed as a blank character formed by pulling out the copper foil). Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as solid earth as described later. For this reason, the board control number of the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side is a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the foil removal character (that is, the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed), and the copper foil around it is removed. It is formed as a blank character with characters removed on either one or both of the solid earth of the LED mounting surface 402bx and the solid earth of the LED non-mounting surface 402by, without forming as a blank character). You may be.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, and various dispersions Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black) respectively. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKa (see FIG. 203 (a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 203 (a)), which is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa, is silk-printed. The yellow solid line (or the black solid line) is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Then, the region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 203 (a)). It is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, R3 (see FIG. 203 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, respectively. There is.

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the area corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, is a yellow chain line as silk printing. (Or, black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 203 (a), only the chain lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 are shown), and these areas are also printed. The part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of LSLK1 to LSLK10 and above or below (FIG. 203 (a), show LED4, LED5, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED4, hdLED5, which are full-color LEDs. Only shown) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a yellow chain line (not shown as silk printing) indicating a position where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is arranged is a yellow chain line. (Or black chain line) is printed, and the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing, in the vicinity of this area.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LEDLCN is made of resin having a black, brown, or blue color. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs. It is implemented in.

Further, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is individually inspected for lighting the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (for example,). It is performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED). Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

In the embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and the connector that does not have white color are LEDs that emit light from the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface generated by the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance in the above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) not shown as silk printing, and an electron is formed in the vicinity of this area. The part number corresponding to the part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are formed as so-called solid grounds in which areas other than land patterns and wiring patterns such as electronic components and connectors are grounded to ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

As described above, the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, so that the lower left decorative substrate 402b is viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. The width dimension from the left end side 402beg1 to the right end side 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Therefore, if the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b becomes extremely short, let's draw out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. Even so, since there are restrictions on the minimum distance dimension for the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent spacing of the wiring patterns, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged at the end. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Adopted the configuration.

In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the right lower end side of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is input when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. By arranging the terminal on the left side closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the decorative substrate 402b on the left side so as to be the terminal on the side, the terminal on the input side is the second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by are input, and the lower left side, upper left end side, and upper right end side are mainly the terminal to output side of output side 1, respectively. The terminals 1 to 3 on the output side are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2) shown in FIG. , Clock signal SCLK2) and the like are output. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal on which the resistor Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal on which the ground (GND) is input. There is.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four ends of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It can be arranged as a state, and the remaining two end sides can be arranged as being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is restricted by the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent spacing of the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the four ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Even, all wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region in which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the group 1 composed of the hdLED1 to hdLED4 which are four full-color LEDs and the four full-color LEDs among the hdLED1 to hdLED8 which are eight full-color LEDs are formed. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed. The LED can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern to be routed between the group 1 and the group 2 from becoming longer or shorter in the group 1 or the group 2 in a biased manner. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in the work.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with the hdLED6 which is a full-color LED in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged closer to the lower side than the portion to be arranged), and the central portion in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 202A). It can be arranged above the hdLED 8 which is a full-color LED configured in Group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax, which is closer to the upper side than the portion where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is arranged. .. As a result, it is possible to secure an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx. The area for routing the wiring pattern to the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 provided in the hdLED9, hdLED10, which are two full-color LEDs, and the five left-side upper decorative boards 402a shown in FIG. It can be secured at 402b.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and capacitors (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) with a rectangular planar shape, and are in the so-called EIA format 0805 (nominal name 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length). S: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one end in the longitudinal direction on the left end side of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. A capacitor (not shown) is arranged so as to be parallel to 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is perpendicular to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is arranged like this. In other words, the edges of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, which are arranged so that the ends of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistor. Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side of a capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b so as to be non-parallel to each other.

Further, as described above, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is such that the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is 45 with respect to the left end edge and the right end edge of the decorative substrate. Although they are arranged in an inclined state and are almost the same, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are doors. Unlike the other decorative boards of the frame 3, the decorative board has the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453. Since the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side is large, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is set to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side of. That is, in the present embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is non-parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. And the ones that become are mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 includes, in addition to the 11 full-color LEDs provided therein, another central decorative substrate on which five full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted, which is not shown. Two LED constant current drive circuits (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit,) (Second maximum current setting circuit))), illustrated by one LED constant current drive circuit (here, a second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)). Two thermal dispersion circuits provided for itself (the first constant current drive circuit is the first thermal dispersion circuit (thermal dispersion resistance), the second constant current drive circuit is the second thermal dispersion circuit (thermal dispersion resistance)) The door frame top left decorative board 456 controls light emission directly via the above, and in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided therein, the other left decorative board on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted is not shown. One LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided for the door frame top right decorative substrate by directly controlling light emission via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided for itself, which is not shown. The 457 is a single LED constant-current drive circuit (constant-current drive circuit) that includes, in addition to the six full-color LEDs that it has, another right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. , Maximum current setting circuit) directly controls light emission via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided for itself (not shown). The other central decorative substrate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative substrate is the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decorative substrate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the right side of the door frame top decorative body 453. It is necessary to provide a heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistor) on each of the other central decorative substrate, the other left decorative substrate, and the other right decorative substrate. As described above, the heat distribution circuit (here, the second heat distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance)) provided in the central decorative board 455 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other central decoration board are the door frame top. In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided in the central decorative substrate 455 itself, it prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has a function that can be used. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other left decorative board are LED constant current drive circuits provided in the door frame top left decoration board 456 itself (accurately). In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit), it also has the function of being able to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity. Further, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other right decorative board are the LED constant current drive circuit provided in the door frame top right decoration board 457 itself (accurately). In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit), it also has the function of being able to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

Further, the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is arranged as being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and 10 full-color LEDs. The hdLED1 to hdLED10 are closer to the right end side 402b2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and are along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. The constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged at predetermined intervals, whereas the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. A configuration was adopted in which the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side was arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are sink (suction) type, and generate heat by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. For this reason, even in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx and the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs, are separated from each other. The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less likely to be affected by the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs.

Further, the constant current drive circuit is arranged by arranging the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The edge of the land pattern of 402bax and 402bbx is arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative substrate (that is, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decoration of the door frame top decorative body 453). Compared with the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate in which the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative substrate. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of is shorter. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the left-right direction.

[11-4-2. Decorative board on the center of the plate]
As shown in FIG. 202 (b), the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, hLED1 to hLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs. The 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, which is the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300, whereas the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, which is the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300. When the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate shown in FIG. 202 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate). On the right side of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish along the upper end side 314eg1, a connector HCN for connecting the operation unit relay substrate 392 and the electrical wiring is mounted.

A white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. In the present embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is solid-painted with a white resist, and the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 emit light to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the reflectance of the LED.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the substrate control number of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. It is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 on the LED mounting surface 314x.

Further, as described above, the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a milky white color having translucency, but is in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player seated in the unit moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate provided in the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate of the unit front cover 312. Even if the mounting surface 314x can be visually recognized by the player, in the first place, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and a full-color LED. Since the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is not printed as silk printing at all, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED which has nothing to do with the game for the player, and the position where the full-color LED is arranged. The area indicating the above is prevented from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, a number specifying the hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full-color LED) and an auxiliary line indicating a mounting position of the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs (that is, a full-color LED). (Area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged) can be made difficult for the player to see.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from seeing the area indicating the connector HCN, the corresponding part number, and the position where the connector HCN is arranged, which has nothing to do with the game for the player.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The packages of hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector HCN is white (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the substrate control number of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a foil-free character (that is, a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). It is formed as a punched letter formed by making letters with a pattern and pulling out the copper foil around it), and the foil punched letters are formed by a white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It is covered. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-free characters is electrically insulated from the electronic components. The board control number of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a foil-free character (that is, a wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate instead of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. In the layer (copper plane) on which is formed, characters may be formed with a wiring pattern that is copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form characters), or the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may be formed. Letters are removed from the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are created with a wiring pattern that is copper foil, and the surroundings thereof. It may be formed as a blank character formed by pulling out the copper foil). Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are formed as solid earth as described later. For this reason, the board control number of the decorative board 314 on the center of the plate is a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the foil removal character (that is, the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed), and the copper foil around it is removed. It is formed as a blank character in which characters are punched out on one or both of the solid earth of the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid earth of the LED non-mounting surface 314y, without forming as a blank character. You may be.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersions Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk near these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as a print.

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314, the area corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is not shown as silk printing. The chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 are printed, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 in yellow (or not shown) as silk printing. , Black) are printed respectively.

On the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is arranged is a yellow chain line (not shown as silk printing). In addition to being printed in (or a black chain line), the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing, in the vicinity of this area.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspections for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, are individually performed (for example, It is performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED). Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. It should be noted that some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are formed as so-called solid earth in which the area excluding the land pattern and the wiring pattern of electronic parts and connectors is grounded to the ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

In this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color are based on the light emission of the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface generated by the light emission of the full-color LED is LED mounted. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) not shown as silk printing, and an electron is formed in the vicinity of this area. The part number corresponding to the part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

As described above, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arc shape. Therefore, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate shown in FIG. 202 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left. When viewed (that is, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate), the upper end side 314eg1 to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate on the LED mounting surface 314x. The width dimension up to is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, if the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged. Since the distance dimension between the end edge of the pattern and the upper end side 314eg1 or the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish becomes extremely short, let's draw out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end edge. Even so, since there are restrictions on the minimum distance dimension for the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent spacing of the wiring patterns, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged at the end. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. Adopted the configuration.

In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the lower left side of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is input when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. By arranging the terminal on the upper end side 314eg1 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate so as to be the terminal on the side, the terminal on the input side is the first serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. 199. ), DC + 12V, ground (GND), and resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end side, upper right end side, and right lower end side are mainly output side 1 terminal to output side, respectively. The terminals 1 on the output side to the terminals 3 on the output side are the above-mentioned output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal). SCLK1) etc. are output. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistors Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which the ground (GND) is input. There is.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It can be arranged as a state, and the remaining two end sides can be arranged as being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is restricted by the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent spacing of the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the four ends of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Even, all wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region in which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, the group 1 composed of four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 and the four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of the hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed. The LED can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern to be routed between the group 1 and the group 2 from becoming longer or shorter in the group 1 or the group 2 in a biased manner. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in the work.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, when the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish shown in FIG. 202 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is on the center of the dish). A state in which the constant current drive circuit 314ax is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a) is a semi-arc-shaped central portion (full-color LED in FIG. 202 (b)) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The constant current drive circuit 314bx can be arranged on the right side as compared with the portion where the hLED6 is arranged, and the semi-arc-shaped central portion (FIG. 202 (b)) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. ), Which is closer to the left side than the part where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is arranged, and is arranged to the left of the hLED8 which is a full-color LED configured in group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to secure an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, and from the constant current drive circuit 314bx. A region for routing the wiring pattern to the two full-color LEDs hLED9 and hLED10 can be secured on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and capacitors (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) with a rectangular planar shape, and are in the so-called EIA format 0805 (nominal name 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length). S: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, and one end of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb in the longitudinal direction is the upper end side of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The capacitor is arranged so as to be parallel to the lower end side 314egg1 and the lower end side 314egg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is perpendicular to the upper end side 314egg1 and the lower end side 314egg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It is arranged like this. In other words, the end sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged so that the end sides of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, and the resistor. Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side of a capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish so as to be non-parallel.

Further, the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, and 10 full-color LEDs. The hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged in a semi-arc shape on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, which is closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged along the plate with a predetermined interval, whereas the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are closer to the upper end side 314eg1 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. A configuration was adopted in which the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate was arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are sink (suction) type as described above, like the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side, and by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. It generates heat. Therefore, even in the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arc shape, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx and the 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are separated from each other. The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be made less likely to be affected by the 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

Further, the constant current drive circuit is arranged by arranging the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The end edges of the land patterns of 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative substrate (that is, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decoration of the door frame top decorative body 453). Compared with the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the decorative board in which the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of is shorter. As a result, it is possible to contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the effect operation unit 300, so that a large effect operation unit 300 can be provided in the door frame 3 and the effect operation unit 300 can be provided. A light emitting effect of 300 can be performed.

[11-4-3. A pad on the bottom of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit]
As described above, the types of IC packages of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the decorative substrate 314 above the center of the dish are flat surfaces. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG. 203.

A metal pad FP is exposed in the central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter, referred to as “EPad”) is formed. By soldering this IC package to a substrate, it is possible to improve heat dissipation and bondability.

In the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, in addition to each lead pad, a square-shaped land pattern EP for EPad is provided. The land pattern EP for EPad is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Nine thermal via TVs are arranged in a forming grid in the region of the land pattern EP for EPad. By these thermal via TVs, the land pattern EP for EPad and the solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each lead pad cannot be drawn out in the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink (suction) type, and generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b via the land pattern EP for EPad. By diffusing, heat can be dissipated in the entire lower left side decorative substrate 402b.

To briefly explain the relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal via TVs, the junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP is a constant current. The number and diameter of the thermal via TVs are selected so as to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. As a result, the joint region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the land pattern EP for EPad are soldered is not too large to prevent the generation of voids, and this joint region is not too small and stable. It is possible to obtain the desired bonding strength. The land pattern EP for EPad can be formed by dividing it into a grid pattern, but even in this case, in order to prevent the generation of voids and obtain stable bonding strength, as described above, the constant current drive circuit The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP needs to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

Further, in contrast to the case where the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx When the end edge of the land pattern is arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is high. Become. When the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the land pattern EP for EPad is also left in the same manner. When arranging the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx so that they are arranged in parallel with the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the side lower decorative substrate 402b and are inclined by 45 degrees. The land pattern EP for EPad is also arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees. When the EPad land pattern EP end edge is arranged parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP end edge and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b The fact that the distance dimension between the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 is shorter and the distance dimension to the substrate end edge is shorter means that there is less room for heat dissipation on the substrate. .. On the other hand, when the EPad land pattern EP end side is arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance dimension between the right end side 402beg2 and the EPad land pattern EP is the part where the distance between the apex and the substrate end side is short, but the two sides in contact with the apex are not parallel to the substrate end side. Since there is a large room for heat dissipation on the substrate, it can be said that the heat dissipation effect is higher than when the EP end edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge edge of the substrate are parallel to each other.

As described above, each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In the present embodiment, as an example, as described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is provided with two LED constant current drive circuits and is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, and a semicircle. Each of the arc-shaped elongated strip-shaped decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is described, and the LED by the light emission of the full-color LED is described by the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from decreasing, and the player can see the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed. We explained in detail that measures such as a decrease in reflectance have been taken to prevent the LED from being damaged. Here, the other configuration of the present invention in which measures such as a decrease in reflectance are taken (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second to fourth embodiments”) is described in FIGS. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 204 is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, FIG. 205 is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to a third embodiment, and FIG. 206 is a D'part or part D'of FIG. 204. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D ″ part of FIG. 205, FIG. 207 is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a D ″ ″ of FIG. 207. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in a part. In addition, in FIGS. 204 to 208, for those having the same function as the embodiment shown in FIGS. 202 and 203 (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration of measures for reducing reflectance and the like according to the first embodiment”). The same reference numerals are given. Further, in FIG. 206, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printings are omitted for the sake of readability of the drawings. Further, in FIG. 208, various electronic components are omitted for the sake of readability of the drawings.

[Comparison between the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED and a full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk near these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black) as a print. Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the region corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened. As printing, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) are printed respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. Has been done.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are placed are printed by solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are located near these areas. Is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing. Further, as described above, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the region corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is silk-screened. The yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, which are not shown as prints, are printed, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are silk-printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. It is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown).

On the other hand, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED. The part numbers corresponding to the hdLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are printed as silk screen printing, respectively. Specifically, the areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are printed as silk screen printing on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b by the yellow solid lines LSLK1 to LSLK10, and these. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, are yellow as silk printing on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Each is printed.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed by a solid yellow line (not shown) as silk printing, and corresponds to the connector LDLCN in the vicinity of this area. The part number to be printed is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color, which is white (natural)). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (solid coating). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface, are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, lighting inspections for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, are individually performed (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is printed with. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 206, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors are placed are printed as silk screen printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed near these areas. Is printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKa (see FIG. 206 (a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 206A), which is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and has a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa, is silk-printed. The yellow solid line (or the black solid line) is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Then, the region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 206 (a)). It is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 206 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk screen printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. There is.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LEDLCN is made of resin having a black, brown, or blue color. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs. It is implemented in.

Even in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively. Specifically, the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk screen printing on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate by the yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. Areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, are printed in yellow as silk printing on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Has been done.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed by a solid yellow line (not shown) as silk printing, and corresponds to the connector HCN in the vicinity of this area. The part number to be printed is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The packages of hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector HCN is white (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is individually inspected for lighting the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is printed with. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. It should be noted that some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, etc. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components are placed are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are shown as silk printing near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

In the second embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax integrated on one semiconductor chip ( 314bx) has a black resin package. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

Even in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate reflects the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

As described above, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a full-color LED. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a component corresponding to the full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10. The numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, whereas in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the left On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a part number (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a position for arranging the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. (Solid yellow line) and are printed as silk printing, respectively, and the part numbers (yellow letters and yellow) corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The difference is that the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is printed as silk printing, respectively.

The white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It has become like. Further, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light, and the reflectance to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the silk printing printed in black causes the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91. As described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in a milky white color with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so that the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the door. Then, there arises a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is set as silk printing. , An auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface by printing in yellow, which is a bright color unlike black. ), Or the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) can be difficult to find.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, which is a bright yellow color unlike black. By printing with, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

In the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, it is difficult for the player to see the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

In addition, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, which is bright color unlike black. When printing in yellow), a polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting orientation of the full-color LED.

Further, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color emit light from the full-color LED. It was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by a solid yellow line (not shown) as silk printing, and a part number corresponding to the electronic component or the connector is printed in the vicinity of this area. Is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

[Comparison between the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED and a full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk near these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black) as a print. Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the region corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened. As printing, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) are printed respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. Has been done.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are placed are printed by solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are located near these areas. Is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing. Further, as described above, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the region corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is silk-screened. The yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, which are not shown as prints, are printed, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are silk-printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. It is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown).

On the other hand, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED. ~ The part number corresponding to hdLED10 is a foil removal character (that is, a removal character formed by creating a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it (that is, In FIG. 205 (c), only the foil-free character LED7 is shown as the part number corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED7.)), And the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is formed. A foil removal region excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, a region formed by removing copper foil except for each terminal and a wiring pattern (FIG. In 205 (c), only the foil removal area LSLK7 is represented as an area corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED.))), And the white color is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The foil removal area and the foil removal character are covered by the resist of. Specifically, regions indicating positions for arranging hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and these foil removals are performed. LEDs 1 to LED 10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b as blank characters in the vicinity of the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is covered with a solid white resist to cover the foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-free characters is formed by being electrically insulated from the electronic components.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a foil removal region (that is, a wiring pattern) (that is, a wiring pattern) is formed except for each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) showing the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged. (Copper plane), which is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern), and a foil whose part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it).

Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color, which is white (natural)). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (solid coating). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface, are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, lighting inspections for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, are individually performed (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the character is formed by the wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and the character is formed by removing the copper foil around the character). The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 206, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors are placed are printed as silk screen printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed near these areas. Is printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKa (see FIG. 206 (a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 206A), which is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and has a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa, is silk-printed. The yellow solid line (or the black solid line) is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Then, the region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 206 (a)). It is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 206 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk screen printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. There is.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LEDLCN is made of resin having a black, brown, or blue color. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs. It is implemented in.

Even in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil removal character (that is, a removal character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it). In addition, the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not shown for each terminal and the foil removal region excluding the wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, each terminal in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). And the area formed by removing the copper foil except for the wiring pattern), and the foil removal area and its foil are formed by a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Each of the omitted characters is covered. Specifically, regions indicating positions for arranging hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as foil removing regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, and these foils are removed. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate as blank characters in the vicinity of the regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters are covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-free characters is formed by being electrically insulated from the electronic components.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a foil removal region (that is, a wiring pattern) (that is, a wiring pattern) is formed except for each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) showing the position where the connector HCN is arranged. In the layer (copper plane), the area is formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern), and the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it).

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The packages of hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector HCN is white (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is individually inspected for lighting the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the character is formed by the wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and the character is formed by removing the copper foil around the character). The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. It should be noted that some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, etc. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components are placed are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are shown as silk printing near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

In the third embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax integrated on one semiconductor chip ( 314bx) has a black resin package. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

Even in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate reflects the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

As described above, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a component corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, whereas in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the left On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are foil-free characters (that is, the wiring pattern is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). Each terminal and wiring pattern (not shown) are excluded from the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, while being formed as a letter formed by making a letter with and pulling out the copper foil around it. It is formed as a foil removal region (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the region formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and the wiring pattern), and is formed as the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters are covered with a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with hLED1 which is a full-color LED. ~ The part number corresponding to LED10 is a foil removal character (that is, a removal character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it) In addition, in the foil removal area (that is, the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed) excluding the terminals (not shown) and the wiring pattern (not shown) in which the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are formed as , Each terminal and wiring pattern are excluded, and the area is formed by removing the copper foil.) The foil removal area is formed by a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. And the LED letters It differs in that it is covered.

The white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It has become like. Further, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light, and the reflectance to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the silk printing printed in black causes the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91. As described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in a milky white color with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so that the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the door. Then, there arises a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player is formed as a foil-free character, and the player has no relation to the game. A full-color LED is formed by forming an area indicating a position where an unrelated full-color LED is arranged as a foil-removing area and covering the foil-removing character and the foil-removing area with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface. The LED wiring pattern, the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed), the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED), and Is formed of copper foil to have the same color, and is covered with a white resist formed on the LED mounting surface to indicate a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged). It can be difficult to find (the area indicating) or the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED).

Further, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player is formed as a foil-free character, and the player has nothing to do with the game. A full-color LED is formed by forming an area indicating a position where an unrelated full-color LED is arranged as a foil-removing area, and covering the foil-removing character and the foil-removing area with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the LED.

In the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, it is difficult for the player to see the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil removal area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, since the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted, the substrate is reduced by reducing the plate cost of silk printing and the number of manufacturing steps of the substrate. The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil removing region indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil removing region). , The polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting orientation of the full-color LED.

Further, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color emit light from the full-color LED. It was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is not shown, and the foil removal area (that is, the layer on which the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane)) excluding the terminal and the wiring pattern (not shown) is not shown. ), The area is formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern), and the part number corresponding to the electronic component or connector is not shown in the vicinity of this area. That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with the wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and the characters are formed by removing the copper foil around the characters).

[Comparison between the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED and a full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk near these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black) as a print. Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the region corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened. As printing, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) are printed respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. Has been done.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are placed are printed by solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are located near these areas. Is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing. Further, as described above, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the region corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is silk-screened. The yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, which are not shown as prints, are printed, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are silk-printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. It is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown).

On the other hand, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 207 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED. ~ The white resist-free character using a white resist coated twice with the part number corresponding to hdLED10 (FIG. 207 (c) shows only the white resist-free character as the part number corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. ), And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is a white resist removing region using a white resist coated twice (in FIG. 207 (c), hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. As a region corresponding to the above, only the white resist-free region LSLK7 is shown). Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-coated white resists, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of a white resist. It is covered (that is, as the first of the two-coat white resists, the white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a region indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged as the second time among the white resists coated twice (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers). A region (notch portion) to be indicated is included. As a region corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED shown in FIG. 207 (c), the white resist removing region LSLK7 is provided with the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the indicated notch mark.) Is masked as white resist punching regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and is in the vicinity of these white resist punching regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 to the left. Alternatively, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist while the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part numbers LEDs1 to LED10 are masked as white resist-free characters. It is covered. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the entire surface is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white of the second layer. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is designated as the white resist removing area LSLK1 to LSLK10. In addition to being formed, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part numbers LEDs1 to LED10 are formed as white resist-free characters.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are the same. Since it is adopted, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and the white resist of the second layer is passed through the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Looking at the base (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the white resist of the first layer looks pale. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-free characters in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. ing.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removing region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector LDLCN is formed in the vicinity of this region. The numbers are formed as white resist-free characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the permeability of the white resist in the first layer and the permeability of the white resist in the second layer are the same, and thus the first The white resist in the first layer and the white resist in the second layer are shaded, and when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist in the second layer, the first layer The white resist on the eyes will appear pale. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removing region in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It has become.

Further, since the white resist is coated twice on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer and the second The refractive index of light with the white resist of the layer will change. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region of the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color, which is white (natural)). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (solid coating). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface, are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, lighting inspections for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, are individually performed (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 208, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, A region indicating a position where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged is formed as a white resist removing region using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. In addition, the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are formed in the vicinity of these areas as white resist-less characters using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. .. Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-coated white resists, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. It is covered with a resist (that is, as the first of the two-coat white resists, the white resist is solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Then, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a region (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers) indicating a position where, for example, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged as the second time among the white resists coated twice. The white resist removing region LSLK as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in FIG. 208 includes the region (notch portion) indicating the above. The constant current drive circuit 402bax has pins 1 and 36. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark indicating the arrangement.) Is masked as a white resist punching region LSLKa, and a constant current is applied upward in the vicinity of these white resist punching regions LSLKa. With the IC1 (see FIG. 208 (a)), which is the part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax, masked as white resist-free characters, the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is white. Covered with resist. As a result, a two-layer white resist is formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, but the first layer. The entire surface is covered with the white resist, and the entire area is covered except for the area masked by the white resist of the second layer, so that the masked area is recessed as a recess and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. As a region to be removed, a white resist removing region LSLKa is formed, and IC1 which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removing character.

The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a white resist (not shown) in which a region indicating a position where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged is not shown. White resist punched letters R1, R2, which are formed as a punching region and whose component numbers corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as R3, and the part number corresponding to various electronic parts such as resistors such as dispersion resistors and capacitors (not shown) is formed as a white resist-less character (not shown). Further, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is formed as a white resist removing region (not shown) showing a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is formed in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a white resist-free character (not shown).

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are the same. Because the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, the LED non-mounting surface of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is passed through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the 402-by substrate (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the white resist of the first layer looks pale. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-free characters formed on the white resist of the first layer can be identified. In addition to being able to identify the white resist-free region.

Further, since the white resist is coated twice on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer and the second The refractive index of the light of the second layer of white resist will change. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LEDLCN is made of resin having a black, brown, or blue color. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs. It is implemented in.

Even in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 207 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist removing character using a white resist coated twice, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged uses the white resist coated twice. It is formed as a white resist removing region. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is the first of the white resists coated twice, and the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is made of a white resist. It is covered (that is, as the first of the two-coat white resist, the white resist is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish). Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a region (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers) indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged as the second time among the white resists coated twice. A region (notch portion) to be instructed is included. For example, as an region corresponding to the hLED7 which is a full-color LED, the white resist removal region HSLK7 has a notch mark instructing the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hLED7 which is a full-color LED. A notch is formed at a corresponding position) is masked as white resist removing regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1 which is a full-color LED in the vicinity of these white resist removing regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 to the right. The entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is covered with the white resist in a state where the LED1 to LED10, which are the part numbers corresponding to the hLED10, are masked as the white resist-free characters. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the entire surface is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white of the second layer. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is designated as the white resist-free area HSLK1 to HSLK10. In addition to being formed, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and LEDs1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the hLED10, are formed as white resist-free characters.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are the same. Since it is used, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and the white resist of the second layer is passed through the white resist of the center of the dish to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314. Looking at the base, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the characters without the white resist in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. ing.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removing region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN is formed in the vicinity of this region. The numbers are formed as white resist-free characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the permeability of the white resist in the first layer and the permeability of the white resist in the second layer are the same, so that the first layer is used. Light and shade are generated between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer The white resist on the eyes will appear pale. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removing region in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It has become.

Further, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer and the second. The refractive index of light with the white resist of the layer will change. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region of the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The packages of hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector HCN is white (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is individually inspected for lighting the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. It should be noted that some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersion resistors (not shown) The area indicating the position where the electronic components such as the above are arranged is formed as a white resist removing area using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, and these areas. The part number corresponding to the electronic component is formed in the vicinity as a white resist-less character using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are the same. Because the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is passed through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the base of 314y, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-free characters formed on the white resist of the first layer can be identified. In addition to being able to identify the white resist-free region.

Further, since the white resist is coated twice on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer and the white resist-removed region and the second layer. The refractive index of light with the white resist of the second layer will change. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region of the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED is lowered.

Even in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate reflects the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

As described above, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a full-color LED. The areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a component corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. While the numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the left On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed as white resist-free characters using a white resist coated twice, and are full-color LEDs. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is formed as a white resist removing area using the white resist coated twice, and further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is a full-color LED. The part number corresponding to a certain hLED1 to hLED10 is formed as a white resist-free character using a white resist coated twice, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is white painted twice. The difference is that it is formed as a white resist removal region using the LED of.

The white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It has become like. Further, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light, and the reflectance to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the silk printing printed in black causes the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91. As described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in a milky white color with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so that the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the door. Then, there arises a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-less character using a white resist coated twice with a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has nothing to do with the game for the player. The mounting position of the full-color LED is formed by forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, as the white resist removing area using the white resist coated twice. It is difficult to find the white resist-free area (that is, the area where the full-color LED is placed) or the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED). Can be done.

In addition, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-less character using a white resist coated twice with a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player. By forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, is arranged as the white resist-free area using the white resist coated twice, the full-color LED emits light. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing.

In the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, a white resist removal area using a double-coated white resist indicating a number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and a mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area (area showing), and it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the steps of silk printing on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface can be omitted, respectively, so that the silk printing plate allowance and the substrate can be manufactured. By reducing the number of steps, it is possible to contribute to reducing the substrate manufacturing cost.

In the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color emit light from full-color LED. It was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, a region indicating a position where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and a connector mounted on the LED mounting surface are arranged is formed as each terminal (not shown) and a white resist removing region (not shown), and in the vicinity of this region. In addition, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface and component numbers corresponding to the connectors are formed as white resist-free characters (not shown).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the entire surface is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the first layer is covered. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the second layer of white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED or connector is placed is formed as the white resist removal area. Although the part number corresponding to the full-color LED or the connector is formed as a white resist-removed character, another method may be used to form the white resist-removed region and the white resist-removed character. .. For example, an area indicating a position where a full-color LED or a connector is placed after a white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of a decorative substrate only once or multiple times, and before the white resist dries. A method of forming as a white resist removing area by pressing the plate of the above, and forming as a white resist removing character by pressing the plate indicating the part number corresponding to the full color LED or the connector, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate and After the white resist is solidly applied to the non-LED mounting surface only once or multiple times, and after the white resist is dried, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED or the connector is arranged is defined as the white resist removal area by laser irradiation. In addition to forming, a method of forming a part number corresponding to a full-color LED or a connector as a character without a white resist can be mentioned.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including various substrates supplied from a power source from a power supply substrate and capable of controlling illumination has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in the game machine, a line for transmitting power to various boards and a line for transmitting control signals are routed, and the length of the line becomes long, so that various boards may be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

Further, conventionally, a game machine including a front frame configured to cover a window that opens the game board back and forth with a fluoroscopic protective plate has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (paragraph [0014]). , And Fig. 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame becomes thin, and the decorative substrate accommodated in the left and right sides also becomes a strip-shaped one. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board becomes large, so that the decorative substrate provided on the game board also becomes a strip-shaped one. However, when the light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure an area for drawing out the wiring from the light emitting control means to the light emitting means.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a movable accessory device that is arranged on standby below the front of the display screen of the effect display device and that operates during the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058064). Gazette (paragraph [0040], FIGS. 4, 8, and 9). Inside the movable accessory device, a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means facing the back surface of the light emitting portion (lens) on the design surface is mounted is mounted. However, there is a risk that the player may see a number for specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, or the like through the light emitting unit.

Further, conventionally, a game machine to which a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means is mounted is attached (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The player is provided with a variety of effects using the light emission effect by such a light emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the reflectance is lowered by a number specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, or the like, and the decoration is made. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

[12. Each decorative board prepared for the game board]
Next, among the decorative substrates provided in the game board 5, the decorative substrate on which the magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate provided with a magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit and the like.

First, among the decorative substrates provided in the game board 5, as the decorative substrate provided on which the magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted, as described above, the back upper left movable decorative body in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. The back left upper left decorative board 3311a on which the magnetic back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab that detects the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front stage decorative portion 3312 of 3310 is mounted, and the back left effect of the back unit 3000. With the back left lower front decorative substrate 3321a on which the magnetic back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in the unit 3300 is mounted. , The magnetic back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab that detects the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front stage decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is mounted. The magnetic back right that detects the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front right decorative substrate 3411a on the back right and the front decoration part 3422 of the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. There is a back right lower front stage decorative substrate 3421a on which the lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab is mounted.

In the present embodiment, the back upper left front decorative board 3311a, the back left lower front decorative board 3321a, the back upper right front decorative board 3411a, and the back right lower front decorative board 3421a have the same circuit configuration, and the LED mounting surface. And the configuration where the LED non-mounting surface is arranged is the same (the type and package of the electronic components are also the same), and the measures such as the decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface are also the same. The upper left first stage decorative substrate 3311a will be described.

The light emitting data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1 which are the door frame side serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are input to the back upper left front decorative board 3311a via the panel drive board 1720, respectively. ing. Further, the upper left front decorative substrate 3311a on the back is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 via the panel drive board 1720, DC + 12V is input, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. ) It is electrically connected to the line and is grounded to the ground (GND). The back upper left front decorative board 3311a may be configured to be directly electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 189 so that DC + 12V is input to the power supply board 630. It may be configured to be electrically connected directly to the ground (GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

The back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a includes a back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, an LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac, a heat distribution circuit 3311ad, and eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8).

The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is capable of detecting a change in magnetic poles, and is mainly composed of a linear power supply 3311aba, a Hall element 3311abb, an amplifier circuit 3311abc, a Schmidt circuit 3311abd, an output current limiting circuit 3311abbe, and an FET 3311abf. It is configured as an open drain output.

The linear power supply 3311ab is a circuit in which DC + 12V from the + 12V power supply line is input to create and supply an internal power supply to be used in the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab. This internal power supply is supplied to the Hall element 3311abb, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, and the Schmidt circuit 3311abd, respectively, and can operate. The source terminals of the linear power supply 3311aba, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, the Schmidt circuit 3311abd, and the FET 3311abf are grounded to the ground (GND) line.

The Hall element 3311abb can detect the strength of the magnetic flux density, and outputs an analog signal whose voltage changes according to the strength of the magnetic flux density to the amplifier circuit 3311abc. The amplifier circuit 3311abc amplifies the analog signal from the Hall element 3311abb and outputs it to the Schmidt circuit 3311abd. The Schmidt circuit 3311abd arranges the waveform of the signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 3311abc and outputs it to the gate terminal of the FET 3311abf which is the final stage. The FET 3311abf outputs the logic of the detection signal ULORG from the drain terminal in response to the signal from the Schmidt circuit 3311abd input to the gate terminal. Since the FET 3311abf is used as an open drain output, the drain current to the drain terminal of the FET 3311abf is limited by the output current limiting circuit 3311abe.

The back left upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab switches the logic of the detection signal ULORG from HI to LOW when the magnet approaches the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the Hall element 3311ab becomes larger than the operating point (Bop). When this magnet moves away from the surface of the Hall element 3311ab and the magnetic flux density becomes smaller than the return point (Brp), the logic of the detection signal ULORG is switched from LOW to HI.

The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is arranged so that the Hall element 3311ab is located just below the trajectory of the magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape near the rotation axis of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 shown in FIG. 154. Has been done.

In the present embodiment, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip, and the type of IC package thereof is a rectangular plane shape (horizontal length: 2). It is a surface mount type (SMD, height: 1.1 mm) having a length of 9.9 mm and a vertical length of 1.6 mm, and is a so-called SOT. Since the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component, the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a (that is, the back upper left) of the front decorative portion 3312 attached to the right side of the base decorative portion 3311 shown in FIG. The distance dimension (this distance dimension (clearance)) between the magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the surface of the IC package) and the left surface side of the front stage decorative portion 3312 which is the bottom surface of the triangular pyramid-shaped front stage decorative portion 3312 shown in FIG. ), In the present embodiment, it has about 1.5 mm.) Can be reduced.

Further, since the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 (the same applies to the back upper left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420) is a small movable decorative body, for example, FIG. An optical under-back rotation detection sensor 3120 or the like that detects the standby position (original position) between the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 of the under-back movable decorative body 3110 in the under-back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 shown. As described above, the sensor is arranged as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 (the same applies to the front-stage decorative portions 3322, 3412, 3422), which is a movable body, using a large optical sensor. Is structurally difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a small electronic component (the same applies to the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the same applies to the back left lower front decorative substrate 3321a, the back upper right front decorative substrate 3411a, and the back right lower front decorative substrate 3421a)). By using a magnetic sensor), it is adopted as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the front-stage decorative portion 3312 (the same applies to the front-stage decorative portions 3322, 3412, 3422) which is a movable body. Although this magnetic sensor has a large variation in detection as compared with the above-mentioned optical sensor, in the present embodiment, the first-stage decorative portion 3312 (the first-stage decorative portion 3322, 3412, 3422), which is a movable body, is also the same. Even if there is a variation in the standby position (original position) of.), This deviation is small and the probability of giving a sense of discomfort to the player is low.

The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 (the same applies to the back upper left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420) can be moved in the left-right direction, moved in the vertical direction, or ahead. Since the step decoration portion 3312 (first stage decoration portion 3322, 3412, 3422) rotates, such a back upper left movable decoration body 3310 (back left lower movable decoration body 3320, back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and back right lower right). While the movable decorative body 3420 is in operation, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the same applies to the back left lower front decorative board 3321a, the back upper right front decorative board 3411a, and the back right lower front decorative board 3421a). Light from various light emitting sources (plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 may be incident on the LED mounting surface from multiple directions.

Therefore, the above-mentioned optical is applied to the LED mounting surface of the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the same applies to the back upper left lower front decorative substrate 3321a, the back upper right front decorative substrate 3411a, and the back right lower front decorative substrate 3421a). If the above-type sensor is mounted, light from various light emitting sources (plural light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 may become ambient light (light damage) and be erroneously detected.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned magnetic sensor is adopted for this reason as well. Therefore, erroneous detection of the standby position (original position) of the pre-stage decorative portion 3312 (pre-stage decorative portion 3322, 3412, 3422) due to the light emitted from various light emitting sources (plural light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 Can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, in the optical sensor provided in the various production units described above, the light from various light emitting sources (plurality of light emitting sources) provided in the game board 5 is blocked by other members (or ambient light). Since it is configured to be weakened to the extent that it does not cause (light pollution), there is no risk of erroneous detection due to the light.

The LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the dish shown in FIG. 200, and a constant current is passed through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). Mainly from a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 3311acx that can be used, and a maximum current setting circuit 3311ac that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). It is configured. The constant current drive circuit 3311acx is the same circuit as the constant current drive circuit 283x in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the plate shown in FIG. Based on the data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1), control is performed to pass a constant current through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 3311ac is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 3311ac is handled by the heat distribution circuit 3311ad, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 3311ac can be dispersed. The heat distribution circuit 3311ad is the same circuit as the heat distribution circuit 283c in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative substrate 283 shown in FIG. 200.

The light emitting data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emitting data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 described above. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating a light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is specified from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative substrate 283 shown in FIG. 200, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The back left upper left front decorative substrate 3311a has eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8) mounted on the LED mounting surface, and the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab and the like are mounted on the LED mounting surface. , The LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac and the like are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface. The back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a has the above-described configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to a second embodiment, and a reflectance according to a third embodiment. Any of the configuration of measures such as reduction and the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment can be adopted.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine in which the effect operation of a display device or a decoration device provided on a game board is controlled by an effect control device (control means) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [paragraph [paragraph] 0071], FIG. 3 and FIG. 22)). By the way, the game board has an environment that is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise, and due to the structure of the game board, the environment that is affected by electromagnetic noise among various wirings connected to the effect control device (control means) If electromagnetic wave noise invades another wiring through the routed wiring, there is a risk that the effect control device (control means) may malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise from the other wiring.

Further, conventionally, a game machine having a movable body on a game board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [0067], FIG. 18, and FIG. 19)). This movable body has a detection piece that is projected, and the position of the movable body is specified by detecting the detection piece by an optical detection switch provided separately from the movable body. By the way, when an optical detection switch is provided on a movable body to detect a specific position of the movable body, this light is emitted by light emitted by a plurality of light emitting bodies provided on the game board while the movable body is operating. There was a risk that the detection switch would erroneously detect it as it became ambient light and was incident on the optical detection switch.

[13. Brightness setting for indirect light and direct light]
The light guide plates such as the panel plate 1110 in FIG. 143 and the light guide plate 2601 in the front effect unit 2600 in FIG. 155 are directed toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 in FIG. 143 from a plurality of LEDs arranged in a row from their end faces. Light from a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a that irradiate light, a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 that are decorated by emitting light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 of FIG. A plurality of LEDs 2621 for the second pattern 2620, which are decorated by emitting light from the inside surface of the light guide plate, are received by the light of a plurality of LEDs 2621; hereinafter referred to as "LEDs used as indirect light"). Is irradiated.

Various LEDs provided on various door frame side units such as the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 of FIG. 23, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450, and the game of FIG. 135. Other LEDs that are not used for the light guide plate such as various LEDs provided in various units on the game board side such as the backside effect unit 3100, the backside effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400 provided on the board 5. (Hereinafter, it may be described as "LED used as direct light") is irradiated as direct light. Therefore, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are the same, the indirect light produced by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. The player wants to adjust the current brightness of the various LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 to be dark when the current brightness is too bright, and to adjust the brightness to be bright when the current brightness is not too dark.

By the way, various LEDs are mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and one or a plurality of LED constant current drive circuits are mounted. As described above, this LED constant current drive circuit controls the brightness (gradation) of the LED from extinguishing to lighting (maximum brightness) in a total of 128 steps from 0 (zero) to 127 gradations. Is something that can be done.

Further, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are data for designating the light emission mode as described above, and are composed of ID information and gradation information. There is. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is specified from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

Further, as described above, the light emitting data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emitting data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating a light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is specified from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

The gradation degree specified in the gradation information described above is obtained in the lamp palette setting processing in the effect operation unit monitoring processing and the reception command analysis processing in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a. Set. In this lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. , Are set respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Then, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and during the demonstration (demo production performed while waiting for the player) or the production ( For example, within a predetermined period in a specific effect), the lamp pallet setting process can be executed to update the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Here, the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness designation value, one brightness designation value can be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value which is the minimum brightness (light off) to the 31st brightness designation value which is the maximum brightness. It is a possible value, and the normal palette value and the special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. The player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the 31st brightness, which is the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. It is possible to set one specified brightness value up to the specified value.

For example, a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) specifies a 0th (zero) brightness in which the current brightness is tentatively the minimum brightness (turns off) when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When it is set to the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the value, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) is set from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum brightness. Along the tone curve or spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to increase, while the rotation operation unit 302 is countered. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of rotating clockwise, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness specified value. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to be lowered along the tone curve (or a spline curve-like tone curve). When a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In this embodiment, a case where the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) can set the brightness is prepared in advance during the demonstration (demo production performed while waiting for the player) or the production. At this time, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the demonstration or effect, the first brightness specified value to the first By displaying a rod-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the 31 brightness specified value, it is visually shown as an image how much the desired brightness of the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

The normal palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information by the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. is there. As the normal pallet value, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve) in which one brightness designation and the corresponding palette value are predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the specified value of the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. , Or a spline curve tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation in the range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the above-mentioned brightness designation value. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value ~ which is the above-mentioned brightness specified value. It is a value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In the present embodiment, as the normal pallet value, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance with respect to various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. Of the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the gradation information described above and are irradiated as direct light, a palette is used for a specific decorative board (LED that the player feels dazzling), which is not shown. A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one step, and is one of the 32 steps in the range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the brightness designation value described above. The luminance designation and the corresponding palette value are set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set by using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set with respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light with the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specified value, which is the minimum luminance (off). As the lowest possible brightness, the normal palette value is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the maximum palette value (100%) is set, and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Of these, one luminance designated value and a corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. When the brightness of the LED is set, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is controlled by the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. While it is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) adjusts the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the specified brightness value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used. The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (light off)), and is linked to this. Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (extinguishing)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness at which the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After seeing, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness can exert the effect more), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) with respect to the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. Even if one brightness designation value up to the brightness designation value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one brightness designation value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since one brightness specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the light emitting modes (bright or dark) set to each other is set. The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without breaking the relationship.

Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, the special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent of the normal palette value) for the LED used as the indirect light. The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is controlled by the normal palette value. Therefore, the LED used as indirect light. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a light emitting means is provided in an effect member provided on a game board and the light of the light emitting means can be used as direct light to perform light emitting decoration (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154676). Gazette (paragraph [0021], FIG. 2, and FIG. 5)). However, when the light of the light emitting means provided on the effect member is used as indirect light, it is darker than the case where the light of the light emitting means provided on the effect member is used as direct light, so that the light emitted is used for indirect light. There is a problem that it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the means and the light emitting means used as direct light.

[14. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously driven per minute. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp outlet 2502.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is released from the center in the left-right direction to the front. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first start port 2002 with a high probability because the portion is located directly above the first start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the first start port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side slope 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, it may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike). , Enters the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505 of the center accessory 2500, and passes through the gate portion 2003 arranged in this space with a certain probability. The game ball B circulating in the space where the gate portion 2003 is arranged is discharged from the right guide passage 2510 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400.

Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510, the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged, and when the game ball B is received by the general winning opening 2001 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

By the way, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit". , The closed second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. .. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are transferred from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2520 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "per probability fluctuation (probability change)" and "per time reduction (time reduction)" is performed, and the lottery special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360). It is suggested to the player over seconds (also referred to as special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is "missing". , "4R jackpot", "16R jackpot", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", etc.

The special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are the special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special fluctuation time has elapsed, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by allowing the large winning opening 2005 to accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

When the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, or a predetermined time to the big winning opening 2005. When any of the conditions of accepting the number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game balls B unacceptable is closed. Repeat a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 4 rounds for a "4R jackpot" and 16 rounds for a "16R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

When the special lottery result is "big hit", it is possible to generate ST (special time) as an advantageous game state after the big winning opening 2005 makes the game ball B acceptable in a predetermined pattern. This ST is to maintain a probabilistic change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2520 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the effect image to suggest the special lottery result. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three pattern rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the combinations correspond to the special lottery results. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

In addition, the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2520 are set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the front effect unit 2600, the back unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back surface It is possible to perform light emission production, movable production, etc. by appropriately using the production unit 3200, the back left production unit 3300, the back right production unit 3400, etc., and the player can be entertained by various productions. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 is displayed to that effect.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the table effect unit of the table unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using 2600, back unit 3100 of back unit 3000, back top effect unit 3200, back left effect unit 3300, back right effect unit 3400, and the like. It is possible, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[15. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 185 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 to 212. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 210, and FIG. 212 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[15-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Random number for reach judgment to be used for determination, and variable display pattern to be used for determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. A random number, a random number for a big hit symbol to be used for determining a big hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 when generating a big hit game state, and this big hit. A random number for determining the initial value for a big hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of a random number for a symbol, and a random number for determining a small hit game state, which is derived by the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. A random number for the small hit symbol to be used for determining the displayed small hit symbol, a random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol, and the like are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open / close the movable piece that can accept the game ball of the second starting port 2004, and a random number for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece, and this ordinary symbol hit determination Random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit judgment to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for normal number, and normal for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers for pattern variation display patterns are available.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the jackpot determination random number is updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value and preliminarily at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another and all the values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a random number for jackpot determination. It is designed to be set as.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In this embodiment, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 14 when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the process when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of various information stored in is regarded as a numerical value and is the checksum value stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match the (sum value), the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU1310a. An initial value derivation process is executed in which the ID code is extracted and the same fixed value is always derived from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the extracted ID code, and the derived fixed value is obtained. It is a mechanism to be set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is constantly overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The ID code is stored by storing the ID code in the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece can be opened and closed to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004. It is not possible to generate a gaming state.

[15-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, the main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “) to set the initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally”. The timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is started, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is reached before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is activated and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done.

Following step S14, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated.

In the determination in step S16, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, in the determination in step S16, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is stored in the main control built-in RAM. It is a flag indicating whether to delete various information including information indicating the value of the information output judgment counter), and is set to a value 1 when various information is deleted and a value 0 when various information is not deleted. .. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU 1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU1310a determines that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S24 again and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on processing again. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

In the determination in step S24, the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when various information is erased and a value 0 when various information is not erased. In step S26, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not erased (step S28). This checksum regards various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the total.

Following step S28, in the main control MPU1310a, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU1310a determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as backup flag BK-FLG value, etc. in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing described later. This flag indicates whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

In the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the power is restored from the main control built-in RAM. The work area is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset, and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various subsequent processes. Therefore, the backup flag BK- is normally terminated when the main control side power is turned off, which will be described later. If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S26, the main control MPU1310a mainly determines when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, or in the determination in step S30. When the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or when the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0). That is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a is performed by writing a value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, in the main control MPU 1310a, the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f indicates RAM clear, and when various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or on the main control side. When the power off processing is not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter is performed, and this fixed value is used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number. Set to a random number for determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU1310a performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in the testing institution of the game machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, the random number for determining the jackpot used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot game state is stored in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a in order to be updated by the hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the start of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication, and are predetermined. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. The other values in the are extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on. Creates a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed among various information, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU1310a sets interrupt enable setting (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is not input, the main control MPU1310a performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. In addition, the above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol hit, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU1310a determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU1310a sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the like (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

As described above, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power cutoff process. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. .. In other words, because the main control side power off processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the previous time The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the main control side power off processing when the power is cut off, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the system is restarted after being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38. The Rukoto.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Here, it will be described that the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 196 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The charged charge is applied as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. That is, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island of the game hall The main control side power cutoff process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the equipment is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in the present embodiment). (2.5 seconds is set.) Is started, and if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs just before the standby time is reached, hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the charge charged in is applied as DC + 5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side described later is performed. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310f is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no manifestation of intention by a staff member such as a game hall clerk to clear the RAM. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, the game can be advanced. It is possible to prevent various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) from being updated, and the check sum calculation result. Is designed so that there is no fluctuation. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power to 1 is cut off, the power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) due to the progress of this game The main control board performs the processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and the main control side power offage process composed of an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the 1310 can be completed, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are performed. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum of step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. Never initializes. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to contents the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power off processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, so far. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period during a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the processing when the main control side power is turned on at the time of power recovery, and the main control The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22. It is determined in step S24 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the determination returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24. By repeating the above, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the time measured by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time is measured again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT because it cannot be started.

The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT by such software, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process (control flow) in which interrupt permission is set and the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, which will be described later. We have adopted a mechanism that can prevent various information) including information indicating the value of the information output judgment counter) from being updated. When the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power failure in this way, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) Various information including information indicating the value of the counter for) is covered by software so that it will not be changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and game information) by surely completing the power outage processing on the main control side. By dividing it into two parts, one is covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output judgment counter) is not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are surely prevented from being changed. Can be done.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are created and the main control is built in as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, the problem when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414, that is, , The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the jackpot game state screen (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is mainly controlled in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven and the grand prize opening 2005 is opened and closed by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The state of being closed by the member is changed to the state of being open.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, the jackpot game state. It is not possible to display at all which round of the throat. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005, is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and a large winning opening 1 count display command for transmitting the number of game balls entered in the large winning opening 2005 is sent to the main control board. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) of the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a command to indicate that the attacker unit 2400 is in the closed state (that is, the start of closing of the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400) is issued. When the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member. A command for displaying the fifth round of opening the special winning opening 2005 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the transition to the above state (that is, the opening of the fifth round of the large winning opening 2005 is started). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, for example, a screen for notifying the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, the player indicates that the movable piece is open) to the second start port 2004. When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece to open the second start port. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the 2004 is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the starting port solenoid 2412 is started to be driven and the movable piece is closed by restoring the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. (Ii) The start port 2004 will be closed.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to be transmitted in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is possible, and in such a case, the gaming state is returned to the gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen instructing the game to put the game ball into the second starting port 2004). There was also the problem of not knowing what kind of game a person would play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the main control return destination command at power-on are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the grand prize opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member. Since it is possible to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is to be changed, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen indicating how many rounds it is). Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but a screen telling that the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven in the big hit game state and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, "It's a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening.") It is possible to instruct a player who is displayed in the display area and sits in front of the pachinko machine to insert a game ball into the large winning opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, the first (Ii) In a state where the game ball can be accepted into the starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen telling that the start port solenoid 2412 is started to be driven to open the movable piece and the second start port 2004 is open (for example, "the movable piece is open." A screen that conveys a message to the player, "Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port.") Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, and the front of the pachinko machine. It is possible to instruct the player seated in the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power cutoff process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then the number of main prize balls at power-on. The information output judgment counter notification command is sent. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is operated when the RAM clear switch 1310f is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the RAM is cleared, and when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure) Information indicating which of the low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored, and the model code of the pachinko machine. It is composed of the information shown. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, main control board 1310). In addition to the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of)).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). I don't know if the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D). Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line will be on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of the plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310s are sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while being mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the above to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, the workers on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turn on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can perform the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuates, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to, and which work has the same copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker of the above can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[15-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 210 and 211.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 212 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands has been input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a is, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, and detection from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002. Signal, detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first starting port sensor 3002, detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403, general winning opening sensor 2401 The payout control board 633 has normally received the detection signal from, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start port sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal of, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started in the state where all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those that have been subjected to the empty terminal process). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to the empty terminal processing) is set for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, one for comparing twice and the other for comparing twice to four times. The detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002, the first Detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the starting port sensor 3002, detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401 , The detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), and the payout control for notifying that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prizeball command transmitted in the prizeball control process described later. The reliability of the payer ACK signal from the substrate 633 can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs an input terminal defect monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a, the state of which the empty terminal process is performed is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of various input ports, whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW is the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Do based on. The main control MPU 1310a is classified into a notification display indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuits of the main control MPU 1310a when it is determined that the logical state of the input terminal to which the free terminal processing has been performed is not LOW. The malfunction command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

Following step S105, the main control MPU1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 211, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter, which is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the big hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 211. The winning random number is updated in the winning random number update processing and the winning random number update processing in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer occurs, and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs the prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on the input information is created, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10. Therefore, in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this prize ball When the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command is not input within the specified time, a self-check command for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. In order to convey that fact, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other categories, is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5. , Second start opening 2004, and various winning openings such as the large winning opening 2005 (hereinafter, referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5") are paid as prize balls based on the game balls entered. It counts the number of game balls to be released, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process in step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number exceeds (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, and as transmission information. It is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the excess number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, etc.). And frame state 2 command)), it is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is compared with the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. If the logic is different, an illegal ball (game ball or a metal ball with almost the same diameter as it or almost the same as it) with a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) attached. It is determined that fraudulent activity (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation goto") by radio wave irradiation using a synthetic resin ball with a diameter is being performed, and the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1. To do. The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into a notification display that informs that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Here, to briefly explain the radio wave irradiation goto, an illegal ball (game ball or a metal having almost the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. A ball or a synthetic resin ball having a diameter substantially the same as that of the ball) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 to enter the first starting port 2002 and the first starting. Radio waves are irradiated to the area where the game ball passing through the mouth sensor is detected (the ball passage detection area of the first starting port sensor) with the game ball stopped. As a result, when the radio wave irradiation is performed (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned on) while the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor, the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor is changed. While it is the logic that the game ball is not detected, when the radio wave irradiation is not performed (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned off), the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor is the logic that the game ball is detected. .. That is, in a state where the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor, the ball passage detection of the first start port sensor is performed by repeating turning on the radio wave irradiation and turning off the radio wave irradiation. It is possible to create a pseudo signal that a plurality of game balls have passed through the region and output the signal from the first start port sensor to the main control board 4100.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b are larger than the false detection prevention distance dimension so that such a radio wave irradiation goto can be found. They were arranged apart by a distance (43 mm in this embodiment). As a result, an illegal ball to which a flexible string-shaped operation line is attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 and invades the first starting port 2002. The game ball passing through the area for detecting the game ball passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a (ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor main side 3002a) or the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. Even if it is possible to form a stopped state in the area for detecting (the ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor slave side 3002b), the player who commits the fraudulent act may turn on the radio wave irradiation or irradiate the radio wave. By repeatedly turning it off and off, the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a must be different. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value, a radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created, and the above-mentioned transmission information storage as transmission information is created. It can be stored in the area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the radio wave irradiation goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the ability of the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to find the radio wave irradiation goto at an early stage. It has become like.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (big winning opening). When a game ball enters the ball in 2005), a winning abnormality display command classified into a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is mainly used. It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, it is determined whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. (Determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol and determine the probability variation hit that is stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the value (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated).

Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, a value 32668 to a value 32767 is set as a range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas a value 31768 to a value with a high probability is set. 32767 is set and is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in ROM are stored in advance. When determining whether or not the stored jackpot determination value matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range. It depends on whether or not it is done.

When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2402. In the case of the above, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variation display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variation display pattern. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so as to light the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 closed display command A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open / close the opening / closing member. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the grand prize opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400 Set the output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp so that the round indicator lamp is lit, and store it in the output information storage area as output information. When the round is 15 times, the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so that the 15-round display lamp is lit, store it in the output information storage area as output information, and display the function to light the presence or absence of probability fluctuation in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the unit 1400 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information for the gate of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the information storage area.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. Store in parcel.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the hold ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the gate information, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the opened operation state, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above is stored as transmission information. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect are created and transmitted. While storing as information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area, while the extracted normal When the value of the symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. , Create various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect, store them in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to be stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a main pay ACK signal when, for example, successfully receives various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece when it is in the big hit game state. In addition to doing, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening prize Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as information output signals, are output to the payout control board 633.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 tuning effect-related, and jackpot-related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands to be issued (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric service production, various commands classified as normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, various types classified as status display Various commands classified into commands and tests, and various other commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 pays as a prize ball based on the game ball entered into the various winning openings provided in the game board 5. Every time the number of game balls to be released reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as the main prize ball number information. The prize ball number information output command, etc.) is stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a at least transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main peripheral serial data. Can be done. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure after the power is turned on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211. In the reservation setting of the command to be executed, in order to notify that the power has been restored, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter Since a notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command are stored as main circumference serial data in that order. Sends to the peripheral control board 1510, then sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, and the various information is supported. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed among various information, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is used as the backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup processing is executed as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are the electric drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine, is output to the peripheral control board 1510. You can do it. That is, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211, the main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 210. Power-on state command, which is classified as power-on, to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the work area setting of. The main control return destination command at power-on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 in this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the power-on state command, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value that configures the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on. The data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. Can be displayed in the production. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game and then the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is quickly restored after the power is restored. At the same time, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 210 shows. In step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 211, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made, the power-on state command classified as power-on , When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands, a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection device is used as the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command as main peripheral serial data. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information is output when the power is turned on. The judgment counter notification command is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for identifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[16. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 185 will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 216. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on processing, FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing of FIG. 213, and FIG. 215 shows the payout control unit following FIG. 214. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 216 is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[16-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 under the control of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633 by the payout control MPU633aa. .. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU633aa sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU633aa. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU633aa performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU633aa are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU633aa performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. To. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU633aa determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is being operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and does not indicate that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI. Judgment is made that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, while it is determined that when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is instructed to perform RAM clear. It is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated.

In the determination in step S512, when the payout control MPU633aa determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU633aa is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU4120a can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU633aa determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, a prize ball information storage area). The logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area is set. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU633aa.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU633aa is set to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU633aa sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU633aa determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU633aa calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not deleted (step S524). In this checksum, the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value and the total is calculated.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU633aa determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power off processing (when the power is turned off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when it is determined that the payout control MPU633aa matches, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power off processing is normally completed, and is set to 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has been normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is used as the time of power recovery. The work area of (step S530) is set. In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU633aa (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and the power is restored. The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU633aa determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, that the payout information is to be erased, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU633aa determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power off processing has not been normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU633aa sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU633aa performs an interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU633aa sets interrupt enable (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU633aa sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU633aa determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is sent from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Entered. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S540, the payout control MPU633aa determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU633aa returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU633aa receives a power failure warning signal. Judge whether or not it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU633aa sets the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU633aa sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU633aa performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU633aa based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 633c is stored, and payout is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU633aa, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually outputs 10 game balls). A prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 each time it is paid out.

Specifically, a counter for determining the number of prize balls information for determining whether or not to output the number of prize balls information is provided, and the payout motor 584 actually determines the counter for determining the number of prize balls. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. The prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is stored and updated by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is shown. The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED display 633c.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU633aa performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU633aa are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and the BRQ signal from the CR unit. , BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc., as input information. Store in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU633aa performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball squeeze determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball squeeze state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is determined. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing the time such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 Judgment when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to inconsistency with the number of balls detected in Inconsistency counter set as a condition Time management of reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the ball gummy judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the ball gummy judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball shaving judgment time is accurately measured. It should be noted that these various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU633aa performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input is determined. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (for example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the signal is set.

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as the payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the payout device 580 and the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU633aa momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process. Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery By restoring the value to the value stored as the payout backup information, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC, immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU633aa) and the CR unit immediately before the power stop or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU633aa) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power stop or stop even if the power is restored. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU633aa) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU633aa) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of MPU633aa. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball Gami movement determination setting process, As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, the PRDY signal output is the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU633aa. Outputs to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU633aa, and the payout device 580 can be output to the CR unit. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. While the logical state of the signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU633aa to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU633aa with the logical state of the PRDY signal as LOW is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of. The logical state of the EXE signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 633. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU633aa performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. The number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls, the full tank detection sensor 154 is used in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the time counting of the full tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in this full tank and ball out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is not full in the stored game ball is stored in the state information storage area.

The timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is also used to determine whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned on, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition from OFF to ON is performed, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the ball-out determination time described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball is broken. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number. The out-of-ball information that conveys that fact is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU633aa performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU633aa performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU633aa performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, ball lending, ball removal and ball shavings are set, retry motions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. ..

Following step S562, the payout control MPU633aa performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 633c of the payout control board 633 is created, and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information, it corresponds. Display data (in the present embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU633aa performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into status displays are created based on the various information. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball out information is read out from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball out information. A command is created and sent to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU633aa sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, returning to step S539 again, the payout control MPU633aa sets a value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input in step S540, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and this power failure warning If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 Set the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S546, set the value B in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546, perform port output processing in step S548, perform port input processing in step S550, and step S552. Performs timer update processing in step S554, CR communication processing in step S554, full tank and ball out check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, and step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. Do. The processes of steps S539 to S568 are referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for processing the payout control MPU633aa fluctuates. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU633aa preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU633aa secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, the payout control MPU633aa sets the interrupt prohibition setting when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input (step S570). With this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU633aa stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU633aa sets the watchdog timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU633aa calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU633aa sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). As a result, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU633aa sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU633aa enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU633aa is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU633aa) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[16-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 213 to 215.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU633aa sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 216 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU633aa sets a value of 1 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU633aa switches (returns) registers (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU633aa sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[17. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 185 will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 221. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 219 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[17-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 217. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 217 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC 1510a takes an extremely short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, a command related to control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. Set the current calendar information and the current time information in the RAM.

In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing this current time information acquisition process so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a indicating that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is executed. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again to see if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. Whether or not it is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to initialize the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevating detection sensor 382 (hereinafter, referred to as "various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300"). Various information acquired from the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction and pressing of the rotation operation unit 302 are monitored. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is reflected in the game effect. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted by the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the production proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-mentioned specified brightness value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And, respectively. During the demonstration (demo production performed while waiting for the player) or the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) performs the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation). When one brightness specified value ranging from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, is set by operating the unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303), the set brightness is set. The above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated so that the specified value is obtained.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the LCDs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates the image data on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, delay in processing time can be prevented, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, and main body frame by sound data output processing described later. From various speakers such as speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to the production by music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and from the set output channel to various speakers. Output. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Update the pointer to.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate which light emission data is to be output from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

In the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a from the command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process is forcibly updated.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a reception command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the effect. Update random numbers (for example, random numbers used for hold look-ahead related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyze the various commands issued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the control ROM 1510b based on the various analyzed commands ( (Extract) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-mentioned specified brightness value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And, respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Then, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value described above. When one brightness specified value up to the 31 brightness specified value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a so as to be the set brightness specified value. It has become like.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, or a normal symbol. Normal symbol memory command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, big prize opening It analyzes whether or not it is a large winning opening 1 count display command output every time a game ball is accepted in 2005, and recognizes which game state it is currently in.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the reception command analysis processing. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and general. Various commands classified as related to synchronization production, various commands classified as related to normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as related to test, and so on. There are various other commands that are classified. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. As a result, the effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, is updated, and the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is transferred from the control ROM 1510b. It is read out (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in the time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is displayed. It is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and outputs the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. In addition to incorporating, set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit performs steady processing), the volume adjustment switch 1510d is operated based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch 1510d. The slide position is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the volume corresponds to the slide position of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and is set in the sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018. Sound data is output from the output channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a surrounds the volume from the mute to the maximum volume by a program. The sound source of the control IC 1510a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall slides the volume control switch 1510d to set the volume low, the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a problem occurs in the machine or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current volume set by the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or sound effect, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen (image) unfolded by the effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or that the game state will be favorable to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and backed up, and the contents stored in the DRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 are copied to the DRAM 1510c1 and It is copied and backed up in the backup area for routine processing provided in 1510c2.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. A value 0 is set in the flag VB-FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1008 to step S1006. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1008, and a value 1 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process is performed. Then, each process of step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing in step S1038, the process is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be received from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to the peripheral control IC 1510a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[17-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 218 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 217 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this is performed as it is. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -The value 1 is set in FLG (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit stationary processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit stationary processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 217. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, for the purpose of preventing this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 217. By setting the value 1 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in, the peripheral control unit stationary processing is being executed, which is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control in FIG. 217. Peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the V blank signal interrupt process, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit stationary process Is designed to determine whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. 217. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed this time exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[17-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by activating the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 217 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 219 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 217. It is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a states that when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU adds a value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 217. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series while driving an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid according to the drive data to be performed, and the pointer is updated each time the motor or solenoid drive process is executed. To do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various production units provided in the game board 5). ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various production units provided on the game board 5 are input. (Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The movable position is grasped by setting or acquiring the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the effect operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the rotation operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input. (Rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. From the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation presence / absence of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 by operating the effect operation unit 301. It has become possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs (LEDs 1130a, 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, 3421aa, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. There is.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a backup process (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are copied and backed up. It is copied and backed up in the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In the present embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are set in different areas, and the SDRAM 1510c1 , The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in 1510c2 and the steady processing backup area provided in the SRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 217, various processes related to the production of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, the progress state of the production can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[17-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sends the main peripheral serial data to 1 byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a. ) Is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte and the total. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 220 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs 1 byte (8 bits) of information in the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the data is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a mode in which the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, the status is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, and is still the second byte of the main frequency serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, the status of the first byte of the main peripheral serial data is followed by the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer in a certain mode, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is affected by noise and changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a matches the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a (step S1216). ), End this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has a sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. When it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated as it is.

[17-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process that is executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 221 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. In the determination of step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a returns to step S1302, determines whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has not been input. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is, and when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started, the power saving process is performed. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation to the motor and solenoid provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing the power, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a command backup process (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a for backup.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination of step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Is determined. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in the determination in step S1312. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in the determination of step S1312 that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs WDT clear processing in step S1314 to perform the WDT clear process of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 217 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 to reset the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a immediately before the power failure state. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop by the determination in S1312 and is canceled, the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[18. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2610, the second pattern 2630, etc. of the light guide plate 2601 in the front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 are not displayed by light emission, and the game panel 1100 does not display light. In a state where the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is not light-emitting and decorated by the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 (normal state), the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is formed so as to be always visible from the front. Because the visibility is assisted by the back left back decorative plate 3360 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right back decorative plate 3460 of the back right effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the panel plate 1110. It is possible to make the player recognize that the decorative pattern 1150 is formed on the outer portion of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, and the light guide plate 2601 becomes transparent. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the effect display device 1600 or the like capable of displaying the effect image arranged behind the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a good state. At this time, since the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 is transparent so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be visually recognized from the front, the decorative pattern 1150 is formed through the center accessory 2500. The portion located behind the center accessory 2500 can also be visually recognized, and the entire decorative pattern 1150 can be visually recognized.

Since the decorative pattern 1150 is irradiated from the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 and can be emitted and decorated by the light incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110, the light from other than the side surface can also be appropriately directed. Since it can be reflected, the light from the LED of the decorative body or movable decorative body provided in the pachinko machine 1 and the light of the illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed are nearby. The decoration is made by making the appropriate part of the decoration pattern 1150 appear to shine depending on the light from other pachinko machines installed, the position of the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. The appearance of the pattern 1150 will change in various ways, and the player will be shown the inside of the game area 5a, which has a distinctly different impression (atmosphere) from the conventional pachinko machine in which a decorative sheet is attached to the game panel (panel board). This makes it possible to strongly attract the attention of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player. At the same time, the decoration of the panel board 1110 is entertained by the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in pachinko.

In this normal state, light is incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 by the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 provided in the corners (upper left corner and lower left corner) of the panel holder 1120 having a square outer shape. When the decorative pattern 1150 is light-emittingly decorated, the entire decorative pattern 1150 appears to shine, so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be made to stand out, and the appearance of the outer portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a can be improved. At the same time, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and enhance the appeal to the player. Further, by luminescent decoration of the decorative pattern 1150, the appearance of the decorative pattern 1150 can be different from that when the decorative pattern 1150 is not luminescent, so that the decoration of the panel board 1110, which cannot be seen with a conventional pachinko machine, can be obtained. By luminescent decoration of the decoration pattern 1150, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good for the game, such as the arrival of a chance. It is possible to raise expectations and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the decorative pattern 1150 is light-emittingly decorated and the first picture 2610 or the second picture 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the front effect unit 2600 is light-emittingly displayed, in the game area 5a, outside the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 The part is luminescently decorated by the decorative pattern 1150, and the part within the frame of the center accessory 2500 is luminescently displayed (light-emitting decoration) by the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601. Since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are continuous designs, the entire game area 5a is one pattern (here, a geometry consisting of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles). Since the decoration of the academic pattern) is used for luminescent decoration, the overall appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the player can enjoy the decoration in the game area 5a. At this time, since the portion of the center accessory 2500 that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 is transparently formed, in the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110, the center accessory 2500 Since the portion located behind the portion in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized from the front through the center accessory 2500, the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second of the light guide plate 2601 can be visually recognized. The interruption between the pattern 2630 and the pattern 2630 can be made as small as possible, and the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are continuous and integrated decorations for the player. It can be easily recognized. Therefore, the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 can show a huge luminescent decoration to the player, which gives a strong impact to the player. It is possible to convince the player that something good will happen, further raise the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the panel decorative substrate 1130 is arranged in the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 having a square outer shape, and an LED as a rear light emitting means is mounted at a position behind the panel plate 1110 and far from the panel decorative substrate 1130. Since the back upper right base decorative substrate and the back right lower base decorative substrate of the back right effect unit 3400 are arranged, in the decorative pattern 1150, from the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 to the side surface of the panel plate 1110. Since it is possible to illuminate and decorate the portion where the incident light is difficult to reach by the back light emitting means, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the entire decoration pattern 1150 with uniform brightness, and the pachinko machine which exerts the above-mentioned action and effect. 1 can be surely embodied.

Further, with respect to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are emitted from the center accessory 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Since the transparent light guide plate 2601 that can be displayed is provided, the positions of the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the front-rear direction can be made as close as possible. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity when the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are light-emitting and decorated, and the above-mentioned effects can be more easily exerted. ..

Further, since the transparent light guide plate 2601 capable of emitting and displaying the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 is provided in the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. When the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 is light-emittingly displayed, it is displayed on a member (for example, the effect display device 1600) arranged in the frame of the center accessory 2500 (behind the opening 1112). The effect image, the back upper movable decorative body 3110 of the back lower effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper effect unit 3200, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower of the back left effect unit 3300. The movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420) of the back right effect unit 3400 are obscured by the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, and are difficult for the player to see. The light emitting display of the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 can be noticed, and the player's interest is attracted to the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, and the first pattern is concerned. You can entertain the decoration of 2610 or the second pattern 2630.

Further, as described above, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a can be luminescently decorated by the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, and the center accessory in the game area 5a can be decorated by light emission. Since the outside of the frame of 2500 can be luminescently decorated by the decoration pattern 1150, the timing of luminescent decoration of the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 and the timing of luminescent decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 are appropriately combined. As a result, it is possible to show the player a variety of light-emitting effects, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and also makes it possible to entertain the player and suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the portion of the center accessory 2500 that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 is transparently formed, this is compared with the case where the notch is provided so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be visually recognized from the front. Since the surface (front surface) of the portion can be made smooth, it is possible to make it difficult to affect the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game ball B does not move unintentionally. It can be suppressed, and the movement (flow) of the game ball B in the game area 5a can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the panel holder 1120 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the front component 1000 having a quadrangular outer shape and a substantially circular inner shape, the width between the inner circumference and the outer circumference of the panel holder 1120 is formed at the four corners. Will be the widest in. Since the panel decorative substrate 1130 is attached to the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the four corners of the panel holder 1120, a space for attaching the panel decorative substrate 1130 can be easily secured, and it is probable that the space for attaching the panel decorative substrate 1130 can be secured. Since the panel decorative substrate 1130 is located outside the panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is held by the panel holder 1120 in the front view, the panel decorative substrate 1130 is not visible in the game area 5a in the front view, and the game area is not visible. The appearance in 5a can be improved.

Further, since the panel holder 1120 is provided on the rear side of the front component 1000 and the front of the panel decorative substrate 1130 provided on the panel holder 1120 can be covered with the front component 1000, the front (player). The panel decorative substrate 1130 can be made difficult to see from the side), and the appearance of the outside of the game area 5a can be improved. Further, since the panel decorative substrate 1130 can be made difficult to see from the player side by the front component 1000, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the panel decorative substrate 1130. It is difficult to think that the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is light-emittingly decorated, and when the decorative pattern 1150 is light-emitting decorated, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the light-emitting of the decorative pattern 1150. It is possible to entertain the decoration and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a result, under normal conditions, the back-up movable decoration body 3110 of the back-down effect unit 3100 and the back-up movable decoration body 3210 of the back-up effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000. The back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 of the back left production unit 3300, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 of the back right production unit 3400 are located near the outer circumference of the game area 5a, respectively. Are in a standby position where they are separated from each other and dispersed, and the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration body The body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 can decorate the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 of the front effect unit 2600 in the front unit 2000 The light emitting display is not displayed, the light guide plate 2601 is in a transparent state, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a can be visually recognized in a good state. it can.

Further, in the state of this standby position, the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body Since the bodies 3420 are separated from each other, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3410. A player that the decorative body 3420 gathers at a first united position or a second united position as a specific position to form a predetermined decorative mode (hexagonal first decorative mode or annular second decorative mode). It is possible to make it difficult to recall, and it is possible to increase the impact when gathered. In this normal state, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are When moving from the standby position to the first union position or the second union position, the first decoration mode and the second decoration mode are formed in the vicinity of the center of the game area 5a, so that the first decoration mode and the second decoration mode are formed. The appearance can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's attention.

Then, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are first combined. When the first pattern 2610 as a specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601 is made to emit light while being moved to the second united position, the first pattern 2610 causes the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, and the back upper left. The decorations of the movable decoration body 3310, the lower left movable decoration body 3320, the upper right back movable decoration body 3410, and the lower right back movable decoration body 3420 can be changed, and the light emitting part in the first pattern 2610 (first). By changing the pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d), the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, Since the decorations of the first decorative mode and the second decorative mode formed by the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be variously changed, the lower back Movable decoration 3110, back upper movable decoration 3210, back upper left movable decoration 3310, back left lower movable decoration 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3410, back right lower movable decoration 3420 It can be done, it can make the player less bored, and it can have a strong impact on the player, making the player think that there is something good for the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, in the light guide plate 2601, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d of the first pattern 2610 are made to emit light in order to emit a moving pattern. Since it can be displayed, the movement of the first pattern 2610 can make the player feel mysterious, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the movement of the first pattern 2610 can make the player feel strange. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

On the other hand, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are first combined. When the second pattern 2630 is made to emit light as a specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601 while being moved to the position or the second united position, the second pattern 2630 causes the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the upper left back. The outer circumferences of the movable decoration body 3310, the lower left movable decoration body 3320, the upper right back movable decoration body 3410, and the lower right back movable decoration body 3420 can be emphasized, and the movable decoration body is enlarged by the second pattern 2630. In addition to being able to show, the second pattern 2630 allows the back lower movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back right lower right. Since the movable decorative bodies 3420 can be connected to each other, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right The lower movable decorative body 3420 and the second pattern 2630 can form one big decoration and give a strong impact to the player, making the player think that there is something good for the game. It is possible to raise the expectation for.

In addition, the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 are in the standby position. At this time, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are made to emit light as the specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601, and the first united position and the second united position are set near the center of the game area 5a. Decorate the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 in the second united position. Since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are displayed by emitting light near the center of the game area 5a, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are good from the player side (front). It is possible to visually recognize the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 to the player. Then, with the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 emitting light, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration When the body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 are moved from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the upper left movable decorative body 3310 are moved. , Because the player can see the effect that the lower left movable decorative body 3320, the upper right back movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 are integrated with the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630. , It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are first united positions. Or, in the state of being moved to the second united position, the back lower rear decorative board 3121, the back lower front decorative board 3122, the back upper rear decorative board, the back upper front decorative board, the back upper left base decorative board, the back upper left front decoration Mounted on the board, back left lower base decorative board, back left lower front decorative board, back upper right base decorative board, back upper right front decorative board, back right lower base decorative board, back right lower front decorative board When the first picture 2610 and the second picture 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are made to emit light while the LED is emitted, the first picture 2610 and the second picture 2630 are indirect light, whereas the LED is a light close to direct light. Because of this, the brightness of the LED part in the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 is high, so the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 and the LED produce a light emission effect that could not be seen with a conventional pachinko machine. Can be shown to the player, can give a strong impact to the player, and can make the player think that there is something good, and raise the expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the back lower rear decorative board 3121, the back lower front decorative board 3122, the back upper rear decorative board, the back upper front decorative board, the back upper left base decorative board, the back upper left front decorative board, the back left lower base decorative board, the back By emitting the LEDs mounted on the lower left front decorative board, the upper right base decorative board on the back, the upper right front decorative board on the back, the lower right base decorative board on the back, and the lower right front decorative board on the back, the lower back Since the movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 can be luminescently decorated. Back bottom movable decoration body 3110, back top movable decoration body 3210, back upper left movable decoration body 3310, back left lower movable decoration body 3320, back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and back right lower movable decoration body 3420 shine brightly on the back. The lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 can be made to stand out. Similar to the pachinko machine, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. The luminous decoration can be entertained by the player.

Further, since a plurality of movable decorative bodies that move from the standby position to the first united position or the second united position are provided, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are provided. And a plurality of movable decorative bodies including the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are moved separately from the standby position to the first united position and the second united position. Therefore, depending on whether or not the next movable decorative body moves to the first united position or the second united position after moving one movable decorative body to the first united position or the second united position. It is possible to excite the player and entertain the player, and by appropriately combining the timings at which each movable decorative body moves to the first united position or the second united position, a plurality of movable parts can be moved. It is possible to make the movable effect by the decorative body various, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. Movement, light emission of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 on the light guide plate 2601, and the back lower rear decorative board 3121, the back lower front decorative board 3122, the back upper rear decorative board, the back upper front decorative board, the back upper left base. Step decorative board, back upper left front decorative board, back left lower base decorative board, back left lower front decorative board, back upper right base decorative board, back upper right front decorative board, back right lower base decorative board, back right lower By appropriately combining the light emission of the mounted LED on the decorative substrate in the first stage, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest. it can.

Further, by the light emitting display of the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, And since the space between the back right lower movable decorations 3420 is complemented with each other, the back lower movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, and the back Even if the upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 do not come into contact with each other and there is a gap, the gap can be hidden by the second pattern 2630, so that the lower back movable decoration body 3110, Improve the movement accuracy of each of the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 so as to come into contact with each other. There is no need to move the back lower movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration 3420. 3110, upper back movable decorative body 3210, upper left movable decorative body 3310, lower left movable decorative body 3320, upper right back movable decorative body 3410, and lower right back movable decorative body It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the moving mechanism of the body 3420.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pair of the back-up movable decoration body 3110 of the back-down effect unit 3100 and the back-up movable decoration body 3210 of the back-up effect unit 3200 as a pair of first movable decorations. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 of the back left effect unit 3300 as the second movable decorative body, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 of the back right effect unit 3400 are Each of them is in a standby position, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 face each other in the vertical direction around the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view. In addition, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 face each other in the left-right direction around the effect display device 1600. Therefore, since they are separated from each other and dispersed, the back lower movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration The body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 can decorate the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be displayed from the player side. It is possible to entertain the player with the effect image by visually recognizing it in a good state.

Further, in the standby position, the pair of back left moving arms 3330 and back right moving arm 3430, and the pair of back lower moving arms 3130 and back upper moving arm 3230 are separated from each other and the back lower movable decoration body 3110. , Back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back right lower movable decorative body 3420, and a game area 5a in front view (effect display device). Since it is located near the outer circumference of 1600), the back left moving arm 3330, the back right moving arm 3430, the back lower moving arm 3130, and the back upper moving arm 3230 display the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be easily seen from the player side (front) without being interrupted, and the effect image can be enjoyed in a good state.

Then, the pair of lower back moving arms 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 are brought close to each other to move the pair of lower back movable decorations 3110 and the upper back movable decorations 3210 to the first united position as a predetermined position, and the pair. The back left moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm 3430 are brought close to each other to form a pair of back upper left movable decorations 3310 and back left lower movable decorations 3320, back upper right movable decorations 3410, and back right lower movable decorations 3420. When the movable decorative body 3110 and the movable decorative body 3210 on the back are moved to the first united position as a connecting position, they are densely gathered together in the center of the game area 5a and in front of the effect display device 1600 in the front view. It forms one large first decorative aspect. As a result, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable so as to block the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. Since the decorative body 3410 and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 move to form the first large hexagonal decorative mode, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3110 are used for the player. 3210, back upper left movable decoration 3310, back left lower movable decoration 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3410, and back right lower movable decoration 3420 can be noticed, and back lower movable decoration 3110, back upper movable The movements of the decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 (plural movable decorative bodies) can be enjoyed. The appearance of a large first decorative aspect in the center of the game area 5a in front of the effect display device 1600 can surprise the player and make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to raise expectations for the game.

Further, the pair of the back lower movable arm 3130 and the back upper movable arm 3230 put the pair of the back lower movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 between the standby position as a predetermined position and the first united position. Along with moving to the combined position, a pair of back left movable arm 3330 and back right moving arm 3430 make a pair of back upper left movable decoration 3310 and back left lower movable decoration 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3410 and back right lower movable decoration. When the 3420 is moved to the second united position between the standby position and the first united position as the position for connecting the pair of lower back movable decorative bodies 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back lower movable decoration Body 3110, back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are ring-shaped along the periphery of the hexagon. Since the assembled second decorative mode is formed, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right It is possible to show the player a decoration that is clearly different from the first decoration mode of the large hexagon in which the lower movable decorations 3420 are densely assembled, and the back lower movable decoration 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, and the back upper left movable. Different decoration modes by the decorative body 3310, the lower left movable decorative body 3320, the upper right back movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower back movable decorative body 3420 enable various productions, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the deterioration of the interest. Can be made to. Further, from the state of the standby position, the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body In the effect of moving the 3420 to the first united position via the second united position, it depends on whether or not the 3420 is moved from the standby position to the second united position and whether or not it is moved from the second united position to the first united position. The player can be thrilled and thrilled in each scene, and the multi-stage production can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

By the way, the six back lower movable decorations 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration 3420 are in standby positions. When moving from the first united position or the second united position, in the standby position, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, Since the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 are separated from each other, the back lower right movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 It is possible to make it difficult for the player to remind the player that the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right of the back and the movable decorative body 3420 on the lower right of the back are assembled to form the first decorative mode and the second decorative mode. In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are located at positions of standby. When moving to the first united position or the second united position, the back upper left movable decoration body 3110 and the back upper movable decoration body 3210 move without changing their orientations, and the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body The 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 are designed to change their orientations and move, and the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration body In the 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420, the orientations are different between the standby position and the first united position. Therefore, in the standby position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the back The player is informed that the upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 move to the first united position to form the first decoration mode. On the other hand, it can be difficult to recall.

More specifically, under normal conditions, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 has one apex facing upward, and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 has one apex facing downward, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and In the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, one apex (tip) is directed to the right, and in the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420, one apex (tip) is directed to the left. Then, in the back lower movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210, in the same posture, they move upward and downward and are positioned at the first combined position and the second combined position, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310. In the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the tips facing to the right move to the first united position and the second united position while changing their postures so as to face the lower right and upper right, respectively, and the back upper right movable decorative body. In the 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420, the tips facing to the left move to the first union position and the second union position while changing their postures so as to face the lower left and the upper left. Movable ornaments arranged vertically and horizontally in different directions move to the first united position so that their vertices gather at one point, or to the second united position so that they line up in a ring, and one large decoration. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to remind the player that it forms a body.

For this reason, the six back lower movable decorations 3110, the back upper movable decoration 3210, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decoration 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration When the 3420 is moved from the standby position to the first united position or the second united position, they move unexpectedly by the player, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact to the player. At the same time, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, each of the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, respectively. Is a movement different from the movement between the standby position and the first coalescing position (second movement, more specifically, in the lower back movable decoration 3110 and the upper back movable decoration 3210, the movement rotating around an axis extending back and forth , Back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back right lower movable decorative body 3420 can rotate around an axis extending to the left and right). Lower movable decorative body 3110, back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are in the standby position and the first combined position. By making the second movement at an appropriate position between and, it is possible to show a different effect from the effect of showing the player the first decorative mode of the first united position and the second decorative mode of the second united position. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored by various productions, and it is possible to make the player more entertaining and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are respectively triangular pyramids. It is formed in a shape and has a specific acute-angled apex (the apex facing upward of the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the apex facing downward of the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable Since it has an acute angle (tip) facing to the right of the decorative body 3320, and an acute angle (tip) facing the left of the movable decorative body 3410 on the upper right of the back and the movable decorative body 3420 on the lower right of the back. The back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 are combined with the standby position. When moving to or from the position, or when making a second move, the player is asked to move the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the lower left back movable decorative body. 3320, back upper right movable decoration 3410, and back right lower movable decoration 3420 can be easily recognized as moving, back lower movable decoration 3110, back upper movable decoration 3210, back upper left movable decoration It is possible to entertain the movements of the 3310, the lower left movable decorative body 3320, the upper right movable decorative body 3410 on the back, and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 on the back, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 are paired back left. Since the moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm 3430 and the pair of back lower moving arms 3130 and the back upper moving arm 3230 are provided, respectively, the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, and the back upper left movable decoration Because the body 3310 and the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 can be moved separately when they are assembled at the first united position or the second united position. , Back lower movable decorative body 3110, back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back right lower movable decorative body 3420 in order to move (move) By appropriately selecting the above, the variation of the movable effect can be made more diverse, and the various movable effect makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the deterioration of the interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as the lottery result by the lottery means, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 132 Based on the above, the game can be advanced, and various light emitting sources (plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 of FIG. 135 as a plurality of light emitting bodies, and a front-stage decorative portion of FIG. 163 as a movable body. 3312, 3322, 3412, 3422, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, the back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab are provided as magnetic detectors. ing.

Various light emitting sources (plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 can emit light. The first-stage decorative portions 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422 are magnet bodies such as the magnet 3312a of the first-stage decorative portion 3312 in FIG. 163, the magnet 3322a of the first-stage decorative portion 3322, the magnet 3412a of the first-stage decorative portion 3412, and the first-stage decorative portion 3412. It is provided with a magnet 3422a of the decorative portion 3422. The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, the back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab are the magnets 3312a of the front stage decoration unit 3312 and the front stage decoration unit 3322. The magnet 3322a, the magnet 3412a of the first decorative portion 3412, and the magnet 3422a of the first decorative portion 3422 are arranged separately from the first decorative portion 3312, 3322, 3412, 3422 facing the magnetic pole-bearing surface of the first decorative portion 3422. Detecting the magnetic poles of the magnet 3312a of the step decoration part 3312, the magnet 3322a of the front decoration part 3322, the magnet 3412a of the front decoration part 3412, and the magnet 3422a of the front decoration part 3422, the front decoration parts 3312, 3322, 3412 , 3422 can detect the standby position (original position) as a specific position.

While the first-stage decorative portions 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422 are operating, the light emitted by various light emitting sources (plural light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 is the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the back left lower magnetic pole change detection. It can be incident on the circuit 3321ab, the back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab.

In this way, while the first-stage decorative portions 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422 are operating, the light emitted by various light emitting sources (plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 is the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the back. Although it is possible to be incident on the lower left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, the back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab, this light is not affected at all as ambient light. Magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab, magnet 3312a of the front decoration part 3312, magnet 3322a of the front decoration part 3322 Detecting the magnetic poles of the magnet 3412a of the first-stage decorative portion 3412 and the magnet 3422a of the first-stage decorative portion 3422 to detect the standby position (original position) which is a specific position of the first-stage decorative portion 3312, 3322, 3412, 3422. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the standby position (original position), which is a specific position of the pre-stage decorative portions 3312, 3322, 3412, 3422, due to the light emitted from various light emitting sources (plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5. can do.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as a main control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, an effect is produced based on a command from the main control board 1310 included in the main control unit 1300 of FIG. As an effect control board capable of controlling the progress, the peripheral control board 1510 included in the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 13 is provided. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a peripheral data ROM board 1520 of FIG. 180 as a ROM board and a liquid crystal output board 1530 of FIG. 180 as a video signal output board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the peripheral data ROM 1520a of FIG. 180 as a ROM in which control information (peripheral data) related to the effect based on the game specifications is stored in advance. The liquid crystal output board 1530 can output a signal compatible with the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 130 as a display device to the effect display device 1600.

The first connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 180 and a special connector provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 of FIG. 180. It is electrically connected to the socket of SCN3 by a board-to-board connector that can be connected between boards. Between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, as a second connector different from the first connector, a plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 180 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 of FIG. It is electrically connected to the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the above by the inter-board connector which can be connected between the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the effect by the control information (peripheral data) read from the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and can output the video signal to the liquid crystal output board 1530 by a plurality of types of methods. .. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal systems include an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of video signal systems, there are four systems (a total of four systems): one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. ) Is adopted.

The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 of FIG. 180 as the same board box.

In this way, the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which control information (peripheral data) related to the effect based on the game specifications is stored in advance is provided on a dedicated board called the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which is a separate board from the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device. A substrate that outputs a signal compatible with the method of the video signal input to the 1600 is provided on a dedicated substrate called a liquid crystal output substrate 1530, which is a separate substrate from the peripheral control substrate 1510. That is, the peripheral control board 1510 is adapted to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 unless it is modified according to the control information (peripheral data) related to the effect based on the game specifications and newly manufactured. Since it is not modified and newly manufactured, it can be configured as a common board that does not depend on the game specifications or the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. As a result, it is not necessary to manufacture a plurality of types of peripheral control boards 1510 according to the game specifications and the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and the cost is reduced by manufacturing only the same peripheral control board 1510. Can contribute to. Therefore, the cost of the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout device 580 of FIG. 93 in which one payout passage 580a for supplying the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 of FIG. 93 is formed is provided. ing. The payout device 580 includes at least the payout motor 584 of FIG. 105 and the payout blade 589 of FIG. 105 as a ball feed rotating portion. The payout motor 584 can rotate the rotation shaft by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to the step drive. The payout blade 589 rotates via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, in which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 constitutes the rotation transmission member. As a result, a plurality of ball accommodating portions 589b are formed at equal intervals (three are formed at equal intervals every 120 degrees) as ball receiving recesses capable of receiving and sending out the game balls B one by one. ..

The reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is predetermined so that the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Specifically, the reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by calculation by mechanics. The rotation angle of the payout blade 589 can be detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 as a light-shielding piece provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589. Specifically, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 can detect the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

As described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Since the reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is predetermined, the game ball is set to 1. The positioning position is different each time the ball is paid out. As a result, the contact positions between the game ball and the payout blade 589 are different each time, so that the positions where tar and dust are attached can be dispersed. Further, of course, if the reduction ratio n of the rotation transmission member described above is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. As a result, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is guaranteed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feed rotating portion that accepts and sends out the game ball is changed each time the game ball is discharged to disperse the position where the tar and dust adhere to the sling and dust. On the other hand, it is possible to have a strong payout device 580.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the progress of the production is based on the normal lottery result, the first special lottery result, or the second special lottery result as the lottery result by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. The peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 180 is provided as an effect control means capable of controlling the above. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, further, the metal shield plate 1540 of FIG. 180 is used as the first shield, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 184 is used as the second shield, and the conductive coating portion is shown. It includes 184 conductive elastic members 1545. The metal shield plate 1540 is formed of metal as a conductive member. The metal back cover in the effect display device 1600 is made of metal as a conductive member. In the conductive elastic member 1545, the surface of the foam 1545b of FIG. 184 is coated as a conductive member by the conductive coating portion 1545a of FIG. 184 as a core material formed by the elastic member.

The peripheral control board 1510 is arranged between the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are conductive. It is electrically connected via an elastic member 1545.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged between the metal shield plate 1540 formed of the conductive member and the metal back cover in the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 1545, so that the influence of electromagnetic noise on the peripheral control board 1510 is reduced to metal. It can be reduced by the shield plate 1540 made of the above and the metal back cover in the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 of FIG. 126, the ball tank 552 of FIG. 126, and the tank rail 553 of FIG. 126 are provided. The game board 5 is provided with a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 of FIG. 126 on the rear side as a box body to which the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 126 is attached as a board box. The ball tank 552 can store game balls. The tank rail 553 can flow the game ball stored in the ball tank 552 to the downstream side.

The peripheral control unit 1500 as a board box is housed in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. The tank rail 553 is formed with a notch 553aa in FIG. 126 as a hole through which foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) generated by the flowing game ball B can fall. In the game board 5, the upper wall 3010a is arranged below the tank rail 553 as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5 in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1. In this pachinko machine 1, foreign matter falling from the cutout portion 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received by the upper wall 3010a as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. ..

As described above, the foreign matter falling from the notch portion 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5, so that the foreign matter can be received. Even if it falls from the notch portion 553aa formed in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the falling foreign matter from entering the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling on the peripheral control unit 1500 as a substrate box housed in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as the lottery result by the lottery means, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. The power supply board 630 of FIG. 189 is provided as a power supply means capable of creating various voltages based on the power supply voltage from the game hall as outside the game machine so that the game can proceed based on the above. There is.

The power supply board 630 has the same package type (TO-220F) as a plurality of parts having the same shape, and the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 of FIG. 189 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9. , D10 at least. On the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, among a plurality of parts having the same shape, the silk-printed TSLK9 shown in FIG. 192 (b) as silk-printing on a specific part becomes another part excluding this specific part. It is silk-printed so that it can be distinguished from the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 in FIG. 189.

Specifically, as the silk printing of FETQ5, which is a specific component, the silk printing TSLK9 shown in FIG. 192 (b) is silk-printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, whereas the specific component is excluded. In the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the shot key barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 of FIG. 189, the silk-printed TSLK1 to TSLK8 of FIG. It is silk-printed. The silk-printed TSLK9 is represented by a white diagonal line ad1 which is not present in the silk-printed TSLK1 to TSLK8 as a characteristic pattern.

As described above, as a plurality of parts having the same shape, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 of FIG. 189 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, which have the same package type (TO-220F). Even if D10 is provided on the power supply board 630, among a plurality of parts having the same shape, the silk-printed TSLK9 for FETQ5, which is a specific part, is a part other than this specific part, FETQ1, Q2. Since it is silk-printed so that it can be distinguished from Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, FET Q5, which is a noteworthy component, is replaced with other components, FET Q1, Q2, Q3. It can be identified from Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10. Therefore, among a plurality of parts, a notable part can be identified from other parts.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as the lottery result by the lottery means, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. The game can be advanced based on the above, and as a light emitting means, light emission control can be performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs provided on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 201. As the light emission control means capable of the light emission control means, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba provided in the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 201 and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are provided. As a strip-shaped decorative substrate formed in a predetermined shape, a left-side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in an elongated strip-shaped shape extending vertically along the left-side decorative body 404 of the door frame of FIG. 201 is provided.

The constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx have a substantially rectangular planar shape, and each side thereof is along both ends in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped lower left side decorative substrate 402b. They are arranged so as to be non-parallel. Specifically, the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx shown in FIG. 203 is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Is arranged as.

As described above, the strip-shaped lower left side decorative substrate 402b has a constant current drive circuit 402bax and a constant current drive circuit 402bbx having a substantially rectangular planar shape, and has a constant current drive circuit 402bax and a constant current drive circuit 402bx. Each side of the current drive circuit 402bbx is arranged so as to be non-parallel along both ends in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped lower left side decorative substrate 402b. As a result, as compared with the case where each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is arranged parallel to both ends in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped lower left side decorative substrate 402b. , Since it is possible to form a large region sandwiched between both ends in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped lower left side decorative substrate 402b and each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx. Wiring can be pulled out from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and electrically connected to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are 10 full-color LEDs. Therefore, in the strip-shaped lower left side decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to secure a region where wiring is drawn from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as the lottery result by the lottery means, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. The game can be advanced based on the above, and LED mounting on which hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs provided on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 202A, are mounted as light emitting means. The lower left side decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 202A is provided with a surface 402bx and an LED non-mounting surface 402by on which the light emitting means is not mounted.

The decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side has a white resist as a white coating film, and chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 in FIG. 203 (a) as mounting auxiliary symbols (in FIG. 203 (a), chain lines corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full-color LEDs. Only LSLK4 and LSLK5 are shown) and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in FIG. 203 (a) (in FIG. 203A, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 are used. Only certain LEDs 4 and 5 are represented). The white resist is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the entire surface of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The mounting auxiliary symbols specify the chain wires LSLK1 to LSLK10 and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 as auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are yellow as a paint of a predetermined color different from the white resist on the white resist of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Or it is formed in black).

As described above, the auxiliary lines (that is, the chain wires LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b in FIG. The numbers for specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs of 203 (a) (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs) are not the LEDs of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 203 (a). On the white resist of the mounting surface 402by, it is formed in yellow (or black) as a paint having a predetermined color different from the white resist. That is, a white resist is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202 (a), and the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are the full-color LEDs in FIG. 203 (a), are located. Auxiliary lines (that is, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) and numbers for specifying hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs in FIG. 203 (a) (that is, hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs). The corresponding yellow (or black) part number) and is not formed at all. Therefore, the numbers that specify the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs of FIG. 203 (a) (that is, the yellow (or black) part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs) and the full color of FIG. 203 (a). Auxiliary lines (that is, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 LEDs can be made difficult for the player to see.

Further, the white resist formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202 (a) is the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs in FIG. ), Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can be increased, the numbers for specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs in FIG. 203 (a) (that is, the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs). The yellow (or black) part number corresponding to) and the auxiliary line (that is, the yellow chain line (or black chain line) LSLK1 to indicate the mounting position of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs of FIG. LSLK10) can prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 202 (a) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs of FIG. 202 (a). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 202 (a) from being lowered on the LED mounting surface 402bx due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs of FIG. 202 (a).

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, various boards inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 13). The power supply board 630 of FIG. 195 is provided as a power supply means for supplying electric power to (1510, etc.). The power supply board 630 includes a fuse FUSE1 of FIG. 195 as a fuse, a surge absorber SA1 of FIG. 195 as a surge voltage absorbing element, a rectifier circuit 630c of FIG. 195 as a rectifier circuit, and a power supply creation circuit 630f'of FIG. 195 as a power supply means. There is. The fuse FUSE1 is capable of inputting AC power from the island equipment of the game hall as the outside of the game machine. The surge absorber SA1 can absorb the surge voltage of the AC power supply input through the fuse FUSE1. The rectifier circuit 630c can rectify the AC power input input via the surge absorber SA1 to a DC power supply. The power supply creation circuit 630f'can supply electric power to various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 based on the DC power supply input via the rectifier circuit 630c.

In the surge absorber SA1, when a commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) having a voltage higher than the game machine power supply voltage (AC24V) is input through the fuse FUSE1 as an AC power supply from the island facility of the game hall, the surge voltage becomes an allowable voltage. It is possible to form a circuit that blows the fuse FUSE1 by passing a large current through the fuse FUSE1 in a short-circuited state due to the destruction exceeding the above.

In this way, when a commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) having a voltage higher than the game machine power supply voltage (AC24V) as an AC power supply from the island facility of the game hall is input to the surge absorber SA1 via the fuse FUSE1, the surge voltage Is broken beyond the permissible voltage, resulting in a short circuit, and a circuit is formed in which a large current is passed through the fuse FUSE1 to blow the fuse FUSE1. As a result, even if the plug of the power cord for supplying AC power from the island equipment of the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is accidentally plugged into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V), the power supply board 630 is destroyed. However, it is possible to reliably prevent the various boards inside the pachinko machine 1 other than the power supply board 630 from being destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 from being destroyed when a commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) having a voltage higher than the game machine power supply voltage (AC24V) is supplied.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as the lottery result by the lottery means, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. The game can be advanced based on the above, and as light emitting means, hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs provided on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202A, are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx. The lower left side decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 202 (a) to be mounted is provided.

The lower left side decorative substrate 402b has a white resist coated solidly as a white coating film, and the connector LDUCN shown in FIG. 202A as a connector. The white coating film is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs having a package having the same color as the white coating or a color that can be distinguished from the same color, and the same color or the same color as the white coating. A connector LED with a distinguishable color housing and is mounted. Specifically, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist, and the packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are recognized to be white (same color as white). In addition to being made of resin (color), the connector LDUCN is made of resin whose housing is white (also referred to as a natural color, which is recognized to be the same color as white (natural color)). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface, are mounted and are white. Electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b.

As described above, a white coating film (that is, a white resist) is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202 (a), and a white coating film (that is, white color) is formed. It has hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs having a package of the same color or a color that can be distinguished from the resist), and a housing having the same color or a color that can be distinguished from the white coating film (that is, the white resist). Since the connector LDUCN and the connector LDUCN are mounted respectively, the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the LED of the left side lower decorative board 402b even if the connector LDUCN is mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. The entire surface of the mounting surface 402bx is the same color as the white coating film (that is, the white resist) or a color that can be distinguished from the same color. This can contribute to making the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b a bright light emitting surface. Therefore, the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can be a bright light emitting surface.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the gate portion 2003 of FIG. 130 in the game area 5a of the game board 5 of FIG. 130, the four general winning openings 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the second starting A gate sensor 2506, a general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, etc. are used in a plurality of entrances such as the opening 2004 and the large winning opening 2005. Each of the detection means can be provided, and the game can be advanced based on the detection signal from the detection means.

Among a plurality of entry ports, for example, the first start port 2002 as an entry port having similar uses, the first start port sensor 3002 which is a detection means corresponding to the second start port 2004, and the second start port sensor 2402. Are provided differently. Specifically, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. In addition, a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch has been selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. Further, as described above, the gate sensor 2506, which is a detection means corresponding to the gate portion 2003 as a ball entry port similar in use to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, is provided on the game board 5. Large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005, general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, game board 5 Along with various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided in the panel relay board 1710, they are electrically connected and aggregated, and are integrated through a main control board via one connector. It is electrically connected to 1310.

As described above, among the plurality of entry ports, for example, the first start port 2002 as the entry port having similar uses, the first start port sensor 3002 which is the detection means corresponding to the second start port 2004, and the second Since the shape of the connector of the start port sensor 2402 is different, for example, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, which are the detection means corresponding to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, are provided as the entry ports having similar uses. It is possible to prevent erroneous connection of the connectors of the sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402. Further, the gate sensor 2506, which is a detection means corresponding to the gate portion 2003 as a ball entry port similar in use to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, includes a large winning opening sensor 2403 and a general winning opening sensor 2401,. Together with various sensors such as the 3001 and the magnetic sensor 3003, they are electrically connected and aggregated on the panel relay board 1710, and are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via one connector. That is, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate, which are the detection means corresponding to the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the gate portion 2003, which are the entry ports having similar uses. It is possible to prevent erroneous connection of the connector of the sensor 2506. Therefore, erroneous connection can be prevented.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 132 is used as the game control means, the ball tank 552 of FIG. 13 is used as the ball tank, and the ball guide path is shown in FIG. The ball guidance unit 570 and the payout device 580 of FIG. 13 are provided as the payout device.

The main control board 1310 is equipped with the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 154 as a game control microprocessor, and the main control MPU 1310a is based on the first special lottery result, the second special lottery result, or the like as the lottery result by the lottery means. , The game can be advanced, and the function display unit 1400 can be displayed and controlled as a display unit provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board 5 of FIG. 130 to derive and display the lottery result. is there. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, and the main control MPU 1310a is the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 212. In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114 in the above, when the lottery result is based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created as the first special lottery result. If the lottery result is based on the second start port sensor 2402, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect are created as the second special lottery result, and are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and a special symbol is displayed. The variation display pattern of the above is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variation display pattern, and the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

The ball tank 552 is arranged above the game board 5 and can store game balls. The ball guidance unit 570 is arranged in the vicinity of the game board 5 and can guide the game balls stored in the ball tank 552 to the downstream side via the tank rail 553 of FIG. The payout device 580 is arranged in the vicinity of the game board 5, and is based on a payout instruction (instruction to pay out the game balls guided from the ball guidance unit 570 one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 633). Can be paid out.

The wiring FCBL of FIG. 154 is a ball tank 552 as a wiring for electrically connecting the connector MFCN for the function display unit shown in FIG. , The ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 are designed to pass in the vicinity of at least one of them. The game ball is polished in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580, which can retain the game ball, are attached. That is, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 and the connector (not shown) provided on the function display unit 1400 is in an environment susceptible to electromagnetic noise. ..

The main control MPU 1310a mounted on the main control board 1310 and the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 are arranged apart by a predetermined distance dimension. Specifically, while the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line of the main control MPU 1310a passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, the connector MFCN for the function display unit is arranged below the center line. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

As described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 and the connector (not shown) provided on the function display unit 1400 is in an environment susceptible to electromagnetic noise. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a mounted on the main control board 1310 and the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 apart by a predetermined distance dimension (that is, described above). While the function display unit connector MFCN is placed below the center line, the main control MPU1310a is placed above the center line), and electromagnetic noise that enters through this wiring FCBL. Can be attenuated so as not to affect the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as the lottery result by the lottery means, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 132 As an operation means that the player can operate based on the above, the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit 300 of FIG. 23. As the effect members, various units on the door frame side such as the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. 23, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450, and FIG. 135. As a first-class light emitting means used for light emission of various units on the game board side such as the back bottom effect unit 3100, the back top effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400 provided in the game board 5, FIG. Various LEDs provided on various door frame side units such as the production operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 of 23, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450, and the game board of FIG. 135. Various LEDs provided in various units on the game board side such as the back-bottom effect unit 3100, the back-up effect unit 3200, the back-left effect unit 3300, and the back-right effect unit 3400 provided in 5, and other effect members different from this effect member. As a second type light emitting means used for emitting light of the panel plate 1110 of FIG. 143 and the light guide plate 2601 in the front effect unit 2600 of FIG. 155, light is emitted toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 of FIG. 143. By incident light from the right side surface of the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a, the plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 which are decorated by emitting light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 of FIG. 155, and the light guide plate 2601. A plurality of LEDs 2621 for the second pattern 2620 to be light-emitting and decorated, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a which is a second-class light-emitting means, a plurality of LEDs 2611, and a door frame side which is a first-class light-emitting means and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs 2621. Adjusting the brightness of various LEDs provided in various units and the brightness of various LEDs provided in various units on the game board side based on the operation by the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) which is an operation means. As a means for adjusting the brightness, the performance of step S1014 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 217. It includes a lamp pallet setting process that is performed as one of the output operation unit monitoring process and the received command analysis process in step S1022.

The lamp pallet setting process, which is the brightness adjusting means, is demonstrated by the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), which is the operation means, within a predetermined period (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player). Or, as a normal brightness setting value corresponding to one of the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value as a plurality of brightness specified values based on the operation in progress of the production. Various LEDs provided in various units on the door frame side, which are first-class light emitting means, and various LEDs provided in various units on the game board side by selecting a normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. A plurality of second-class light emitting means by selecting a special palette value set for the brightness of an LED used as indirect light as a special brightness setting value different from the normal brightness setting value. It is possible to set the brightness of the panel decorative LED 1130a, the plurality of LEDs 2611, and the plurality of LEDs 2621.

Specifically, in the lamp pallet setting process, for example, a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 clockwise, and the current brightness is tentatively the minimum brightness ( When it is set to the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) luminance specified value, which is turned off), the first luminance specified value is moved to the 31st luminance designated value, which is the maximum luminance. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light should be increased according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve). On the other hand, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the maximum brightness, the 31st brightness specified value, is changed to the first brightness specified value. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are lowered according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve). It changes like. When a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined.

In this way, the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), which is an operation means, is operated during the demonstration (demo effect performed while waiting for the player) or the effect within a predetermined period. Based on this, the brightness of the LED used as direct light, which is a normal brightness setting value, corresponding to one of the plurality of brightness specified values, the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. The normal pallet value set for is selected and set as the brightness of various LEDs provided in various units on the door frame side, which is a first-class light emitting means, and various LEDs provided in various units on the game board side. A special palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as indirect light, which is a special brightness setting value, is selected, and a plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a, a plurality of LEDs 2611, and a plurality of LEDs 2621, which are second-class light emitting means, are selected. It is designed to be set as brightness. As a result, the player can demonstrate the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), which is an operation means, within a predetermined period (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player) and progress of the effect. The brightness of the various LEDs provided in the various units on the door frame side, which is the first-class light emitting means, and the brightness of the various LEDs provided in the various units on the game board side, so that the desired brightness can be obtained by operating the inside, and the second It is possible to set the brightness of the plurality of panel decorative LEDs 1130a, the plurality of LEDs 2611, and the plurality of LEDs 2621 which are the seed light emitting means. Therefore, the brightness can be easily adjusted.

[19. Another example]
It goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower movable decoration body The shape of each front view of the 3420 is shown as an equilateral triangle, but the shape is not limited to this, for example, "quadrangle", "hexagon", "octagon", "fan", and "star". It may be "shape", etc.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lower back moving arm 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 each provided with one movable decorative body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lower back moving arm 3130 and the lower back moving arm 3130 and The back-up moving arm 3230 may be provided with a plurality of movable decorative bodies.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the back left moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm each provided with two movable ornaments are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the back left moving arm 3330 and the back The right moving arm 3430 may be provided with one or more movable ornaments.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable decorative bodies (lower back movable decorative body 3110 and back upper movable decorative body 3210) of the back lower effect unit 3100 and the back upper effect unit 3200 are united with the standby position in the same posture. Although the one that moves between the position and the position is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the backside effect unit 3100 and the backside effect unit 3200, the posture changes between the standby position and the first united position. It may be used as a decoration.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable decorative bodies of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400 (back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back right lower movable). The decorative body 3420) is shown to move between the standby position and the first united position by changing the posture, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400. , It may be a movable decorative body that moves between the standby position and the first united position without changing the posture.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, it may be arranged so that the direction in which information or signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or socket). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral data The ROM board 1520 is the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) as a plug, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a plug) that serves as a socket. Special connector) can be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal methods to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) as a plug, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector (or a plug) that serves as a socket. A special connector) can be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and are transparently molded, but the polycarbonate contains carbon and is conductive. It may be molded in opaque black as a resin, or if the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin, it may be molded in a translucent colored color. It may have been done. Even with this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the peripheral control board described above is placed on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). By fixing various substrates such as 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with metal pan screws, as described above, the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of these various substrates. Can be configured. As a result, the noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be passed to the ground (GND) of various substrates as a circuit ground, and the noise can be removed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having an arc shape extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. However, four may be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 222 is a modified example of the payout device, which is a cut-back sectional view of the payout device provided with the payout blade 589 provided with four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape and provided with a radio wave sensor. FIG. 222 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit corresponding to the above-mentioned FIG. 105 cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade, and has the same reference numerals as those in FIG. When the payout blade 589 includes four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, although not shown in FIG. 222, the above-mentioned payout gear member 588 is a flat plate-shaped detection piece having an arc shape extending outward. Four 588b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the 90 degree region in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 is set as the light shielding range in the 45 degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed. It is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 and 9 steps of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 with the region of 45 degrees where the detection piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range. As described above, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps with respect to the payout of one ball of the game ball B. In other words, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps, the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, and the second transmission so that the payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, can rotate 90 degrees. The reduction ratio n can be determined by selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 580 is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and includes a payout detection sensor 591 that detects the game ball B. However, a radio wave sensor that detects radio waves may be provided in the vicinity of the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch to detect the passage of the game ball B, but when affected by radio waves, the game ball B actually passes through. Nevertheless, it is possible to make it appear that the game ball B has not passed due to a malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633 to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed, and the payout motor By controlling the excessive rotation of the rotation axis of 584, a large amount of the game ball B is paid out. In order to detect such a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball B (referred to as "radio wave goto"), as shown in FIG. 222, a radio wave sensor 594 is provided in the vicinity of the upper side of the payout detection sensor 591. Can be provided and configured in. The detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633, and when the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is being emitted based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594, The rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is urgently stopped, and a radio wave goto notification command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives an 8-bit wide radio wave goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310 sets the radio wave goto notification command to an 8-bit width to a 16-bit width and sets the radio wave goto warning sound to the maximum volume. Along with flowing from various speakers, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red), and the radio wave is shaped so that the radio wave goto can be notified and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a radio wave goto notification command having a width of 16 bits, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message "An abnormality has occurred" and controls various LEDs to a warning notification light emitting mode. To do.

Instead of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact type ball passing sensor 594', which is a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch, may be used. The detection signal from the contact type ball passing sensor 594'is input to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 is divided into a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and a detection signal from the contact type ball passing sensor 594'. Based on this, when the number of balls paid out from the game ball B does not match, it can be configured so that it can be determined that some kind of fraud has been performed. When the payout control board 633 determines that some kind of fraud has been performed, it urgently stops the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 and transmits a goto notification command to that effect to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives an 8-bit wide goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310 sets the goto notification command to an 8-bit width to a 16-bit width, sets the goto warning sound to the maximum volume, and sets the goto warning sound from various speakers. Along with the flow, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red), and the LED is shaped so that the goto can be notified and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a goto notification command having a width of 16 bits, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message "An abnormality has occurred" and controls various LEDs in a warning notification light emitting mode. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but it may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is step-driven, the rotation shaft is configured to step-rotate at 18 degrees as a predetermined angle accordingly. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is passed through the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, which constitute the rotation transmission member. Although it was configured to decelerate and rotate the payout blade 589, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 was rotated at a low speed to rotate a rotation transmission member (a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586',, The speed may be increased and the payout blade 589 may be rotated via the second transmission gear 587'and the payout gear 588a')) of the payout gear member 588. In this way, the speed-up ratio of the rotation transmission member is determined in advance so that the number of step drives to the payout motor 584, which is commensurate with the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589, is not an integer. The positioning position is different each time one ball is paid out. As a result, the contact positions between the game ball and the payout blade 589 are different each time, so that the positions where tar and dust are attached can be dispersed. Further, of course, if the speed increase ratio of the rotation transmission member described above is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b (light-shielding pieces) of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. As a result, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is guaranteed. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increase ratio of such a rotation transmission member is determined in advance, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game ball is changed every time the game ball is paid out, and the tar and dust are changed. It is possible to have a payout device 580 that is strong against tar and dust by dispersing the positions where the deposits adhere.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and various substrates, a predetermined space is formed between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. One space is a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 (the present embodiment). Then, a distance dimension of a second predetermined height between the first space 1505a having (12 mm) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (in the present embodiment). It was composed of a second space 1505b having (1.6 mm). In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed to be larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large effect unit (an electric drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating a movable effect body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, and is in the depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same predetermined height distance dimension, or the second predetermined height distance dimension may be configured. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise in the first space 1505a, and heat is generated in the second space 1505b. By not accommodating the various electronic components and the like that emit the above, the heat generated from the various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540 is formed with a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is printed. The model (or control number), the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. The part number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, The part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the part number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a. And the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. However, it can also be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. .. Further, the shape of the inter-board connector (special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area (a shape composed of the special connector SCN3), or to provide a peripheral control board 1510 and a liquid crystal output board. From the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. It can also be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the large area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to be provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in any one or in combination of the 1501e except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. .. Even with this configuration, foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. It is possible to prevent intrusion. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls and invades the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the foreign matter falls on various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring increases.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to be provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505 by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is passed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls and invades the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, so that the peripheral control board box 1505 falls onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that electrical trouble will occur due to foreign matter.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. However, one notch, a hole, or a groove may be formed in the ball passage through which the game ball B rolls, as in the case of the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guidance unit 570 having one guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, as shown in FIG. 110, the metal of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a. A notch, a hole, or a groove capable of removing the powder from the guide passage 570a to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the ball guide unit 570 shown in FIG. 104. As shown in FIG. 110, a payout device 580, a board unit 620, and the like are arranged below the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 has a board and the like on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. , The board unit 620 has a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, an interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. 111, and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when a notch, a hole, or a groove is formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, the hole, or the groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates arranged below the ball induction unit 570. Therefore, an eaves-shaped member can be formed so as to project rearward along the upper side of the payout device rear lid 582 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 103, and is formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves to be formed and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the payout device 580 are mounted can be configured by shifting, and both are adopted. Can also be configured. Further, a box-shaped member is moved rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. 111. It can be formed so as to project, and the positions of notches, holes, or grooves formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636. It can be configured by shifting the position of, or it can be configured by adopting both. By not forming ventilation holes in the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 111, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, and the cover side wall provided on the upper side of the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635. Also, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering to various substrates. In the main control board 1310 arranged below the peripheral control board box 1505, the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310 is arranged at a position where the peripheral control board box 1505 serves as an eave, or the main control unit. It is also possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering by arranging the eaves-shaped member corresponding to the 1300 or by not forming a ventilation hole in the cover side wall provided on the upper side of the main control unit 1300.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the power switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creation circuit 630f, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g are mounted on one board called the power supply board 630. , Various electronic parts and the like are provided, but it can also be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 is composed of a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, so that the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly comprises the power supply line connectors DCN1, DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. 189. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B is shown in FIG. 189, which includes diodes D5 and D6, a rectifying circuit 630c, a force factor improving circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply making circuit 630f, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a choke coil L2. , Fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. The AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifying circuit 630c, it is input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power supply creation circuit 630f. It will be. Various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V created on the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A. To.

Further, the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 195 in the above-described embodiment can be divided into two boards, a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A is the power supply line connector DCN1, DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the microgap type arrester AL1, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B, which is mainly composed of the connector A, includes a rectifying circuit 630c, a power factor improving circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creating circuit 630f, a relay drive circuit 630i, and a relay RL1 as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a thermistor TH1, a choke coil L2, a fuse FUSE3, and a wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. The AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V created on the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A. To.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is substantially the same, and as shown in FIG. 203, the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402box is used. , The left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into group 1 and group 2. Although the configuration is adopted in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2, it can also be applied to an elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. Examples of the elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 include decorative boards provided on various production units of the game board 5.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 applies a constant current to eight full-color LEDs to control light emission, but the light emission is not limited to the full-color LEDs and is white. , Red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green or the like may be a single color LED. Monochromatic LEDs can also be used. In this case, one LED constant current drive circuit can control the light emission of up to 24 single-color LEDs.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the direct current + 12V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3, but the constant current drive circuit of the LED constant current drive circuit is used. The internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply provided (the linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 200) is used for LED lighting within the current allowable range of the linear power supply. It may be used as the voltage of. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, up to one single color LED (for example, one color LED (for example,) within the current allowable range of the linear power supply for one output channel). When an LED (LED other than the red LED) is electrically connected, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the monochromatic LED, and the monochromatic LED The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the thermal dispersion resistance of the thermal dispersion circuit described above. Further, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, up to two single-color LEDs (for example, for example, within the current allowable range of the linear power supply for one output channel). When the red LED) is electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply is configured to be input to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the thermal dispersion resistance of the thermal dispersion circuit described above. The decorative substrate configured in this way can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to the decorative substrate provided in the game board 5.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 of the constant current drive circuit are input. Of ~ LG8, LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminals of the LED elements constituting one full-color LED for one output channel were electrically connected via the thermal dispersion resistance of the thermal dispersion circuit described above. However, a plurality of full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is 2 to 3. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, the DC + 35V from the power supply board 630 is used as the voltage for lighting the LEDs instead of the DC + 12V from the power supply board 630. You may. The decorative substrate configured in this way can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to the decorative substrate provided in the game board 5.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the door. When the frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side of the decorative board is large, so that the constant current drive circuit The edge of the land pattern is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. The end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit for any one of the frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, or any two decorative substrates. The sides may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative substrate. Then, in addition to the full-color LED provided on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, for example, another right decorative substrate on which two full-color LEDs are mounted is directly controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit provided therein. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 may directly mount another left decorative substrate on which, for example, one full-color LED is mounted, in addition to the full-color LED provided therein, by the LED constant current drive circuit provided therein. The light emission may be controlled.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided on the door frame 3. The LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in each decorative body are solidly coated with a white resist, but instead, they may be printed by white silk printing. In this case, after printing the entire LED mounting surface and LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates by white silk printing, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is designated as silk printing. It will be printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided. On the LED non-mounting surface, the area corresponding to the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates was printed as silk printing with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), but the mounting position of the full-color LED (That is, when printing with a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) as silk printing in the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed), the polarity mark of the full-color LED is added to the full-color LED. It may be configured to specify the mounting orientation.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 to lower the substrate holder 1200. However, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are arranged so as to be separated by at least the false detection prevention distance dimension. It may be composed of two sensors (double sensor). In this way, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402 is composed of two sensors (double sensor), the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. By adopting the above, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 can be reliably detected. An illegal ball (game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball or a synthetic resin ball having the same diameter) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and notified in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side in FIG. 212, so that a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall can irradiate the radio wave. Can contribute to the early discovery of.

In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is first detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second starting port sensor slave side. After passing through 2402b and being detected by the second start port sensor slave side 2402b, the sensor is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, is directly electrically connected), whereas the second start is performed. The detection signal from the mouth sensor slave side 2402b is electrically connected (that is, indirectly electrically connected) to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710. The detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b, the panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above. (1) The first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the start port sensor 3002, the gate sensor 2506 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and the large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. The large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the accepted game ball B, the general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and the second that is provided in the game board 5. Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting near one starting port 2002 are electrically connected and aggregated via their respective connectors, and are aggregated via one connector. , Is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

Further, the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. ing. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b to the panel relay board 1710, and the second start port sensor slave side. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710. As a result, the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b can be electrically connected to the ones corresponding to themselves. Since the physical structure can be such that the wiring can be made, in the manufacturer, the operator of the line can use two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the second start port sensor slave side in the manufacturing process. In addition to being able to reliably prevent work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as misinsertion) between the two wires from 2402b and incorrect wiring, in the game hall, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall will check for fraud. When checking, when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original, two wirings from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in each of the three general winning openings 2001 included in the side unit 2200 and one general winning opening 2001 included in the attacker unit 2400 are accepted. The same shape was selected as the connector that electrically connects each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B to the panel relay board 1710, but there are four general ones. When contributing to the progress of the game or the change in the production as the ball enters the winning opening 2001, the general winning opening sensor 3001a detects each of the three general winning openings 2001 received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200. , 3001b, 3001c are provided, and the shapes of the connectors of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 3001a, 3001b, 3001c are different from each other. May be good. By doing so, it is possible to have a physical structure in which each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself. At the manufacturer, the line worker surely makes a work error (wiring error called insertion error) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c in the manufacturing process. In addition to being able to prevent this, in the game hall, the staff of the game hall, etc., when checking for fraud, when temporarily removing the wiring due to maintenance and returning it to the original, general winning opening sensor 2401, It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error of insertion error) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c. In the case of adopting a configuration in which the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c are directly electrically connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the panel relay board 1710. Is selected with different connector shapes. As described above, this has a physical structure in which each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself. Therefore, in the manufacturer, the line worker can make a work error (wiring error of insertion error) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c in the manufacturing process. ) Can be reliably prevented, and in the game hall, the staff of the game hall, etc. will win a general prize when checking for fraud or when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original position. It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error of insertion error) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from the mouth sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2506, but similarly to the first start port sensor 3002, the gate sensor main side 2506a and the gate sensor slave side 2506b It may be composed of two sensors (double sensors) in which the sensors are arranged so as to be separated by at least the false detection prevention distance dimension. In this way, by adopting the gate sensor 2506 composed of two sensors (double sensor), the gate sensor main side 2506a and the gate sensor slave side 2506b, as in the case of the first start port sensor 3002, the gate portion 2003 The game ball B that has passed through the above can be reliably detected. An illegal ball (game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball or a synthetic resin ball having the same diameter) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and notified in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side in FIG. 212, so that a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall can irradiate the radio wave. Can contribute to the early discovery of.

In this case, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is first detected by the gate sensor main side 2506a by passing through the gate sensor main side 2506a, and then detected by the gate sensor slave side 2506b by passing through the gate sensor slave side 2506b. Will be done. Further, the detection signals from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the gate sensor slave side 2506b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly electrically connected). Has been). The detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2506a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the gate sensor slave side 2506b is input to the main control input circuit 1310b. Is input to the input terminal PC0 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a (this input port is composed of 8 bits).

Further, the detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the detection signal from the gate sensor slave side 2506b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a to the panel relay board 1710, and two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2506b. A connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm has been selected as a connector for electrically connecting the wiring of the above to the panel relay board 1710. As a result, the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2506b can be electrically connected to their own counterparts. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, the line operator erroneously wires the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2506b in the manufacturing process. In addition to being able to reliably prevent such work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes), in the game hall, staff members such as game hall clerk temporarily remove the wiring for maintenance when checking for fraud. When returning to the original position, the work error of incorrect wiring (wiring error of insertion error) between the two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the two wirings from the gate sensor slave side 2506b is surely prevented. can do.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector has a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. The one with a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as the connector that electrically connects the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310, but the first start A total of four wires, including two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a and two wires from the second start port sensor 2402, which constitute the mouth sensor 3002, are configured as one connector. , One connector composed of these four wirings may be configured to be electrically connected to the main control board 1310. In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310 and two from the second start port sensor 2402. Since the connector that electrically connects the wiring of the book to the main control board 1310 can be made into one connector composed of four wirings without being separated, the manufacturer can use it. In the manufacturing process, the line operator has two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a and two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 that constitute the first start port sensor 3002. In addition to being able to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes), in the game hall, staff such as game hall clerk perform wiring by maintenance when checking for fraud. In the case of temporarily removing and returning to the original state, the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402, It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes).

Further, adopting this aspect, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 to lower the substrate holder 1200. However, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are arranged so as to be separated by at least the false detection prevention distance dimension. It may be composed of two sensors (double sensor). In this way, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402 is composed of two sensors (double sensor), the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. By adopting the above, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 can be reliably detected. An illegal ball (game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball or a synthetic resin ball having the same diameter) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and notified in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side in FIG. 212, so that a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall can irradiate the radio wave. Can contribute to the early discovery of.

In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is first detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second starting port sensor slave side. After passing through 2402b and being detected by the second start port sensor slave side 2402b, the sensor is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start port sensor main side 2402a constituting the second start port sensor 2402. A total of four wirings is configured as one connector, and one connector composed of these four wirings is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly electrically connected), whereas the second start port sensor is electrically connected. The detection signal from the slave side 2402b is electrically connected (that is, indirectly electrically connected) to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710. The detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b, the panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above. (1) The first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the start port sensor 3002, the gate sensor 2506 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and the large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. The large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the accepted game ball B, the general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and the second that is provided in the game board 5. Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting near one starting port 2002 are electrically connected and aggregated via their respective connectors, and are aggregated via one connector. , Is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

Further, this aspect is adopted, and the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. Since it is electrically connected to, two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b, a total of four wires are connected. It may be configured as one connector, and one connector composed of the four wirings may be configured to be electrically connected to the panel relay board 1710. In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the panel relay board 1710 and the second start port sensor 2402 are configured. The connector that electrically connects the two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710 and the connector that is composed of four wires without being separate are physically made into one connector. In the manufacturing process, the line operator can use two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and two wires from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b in the manufacturing process. In addition to being able to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring of book wiring (wiring mistakes such as misinsertion), in the game hall, staff members such as clerk of the game hall should check for fraud. In the case of temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original position, the two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are erroneously wired. It is possible to reliably prevent such work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as insertion mistakes).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in each of the three general winning openings 2001 included in the side unit 2200 and one general winning opening 2001 included in the attacker unit 2400 are accepted. The same shape was selected as the connector that electrically connects each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B to the panel relay board 1710, but there are four general ones. When contributing to the progress of the game or the change in the production as the ball enters the winning opening 2001, the general winning opening sensor 3001a detects each of the three general winning openings 2001 received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200. , 3001b, 3001c are provided, and eight wirings including two wirings from the general winning opening sensor 2401 and two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 3001a, 3001b, 3001c are provided as one. It may be configured as a connector (single connector) so that one connector composed of the eight wires is electrically connected to the panel relay board 1710. In this way, the physical structure is such that the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c are not made separate, but are made into one connector composed of eight wires. In the manufacturing process, the line operator can make a mistake in wiring each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c (wiring mistake called misinsertion). In addition to being able to reliably prevent the wiring, in the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, etc., when checking for fraud, when temporarily removing the wiring due to maintenance and returning it to the original, general winning opening It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error of insertion error) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from the sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c. In addition, one connector (single connector) is a total of eight wires, including two wires from the general prize opening sensor 2401 and two wires from each of the general prize opening sensors 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one connector composed of the eight wirings is directly electrically connected to the main control board 1310 without going through the panel relay board 1710. Even with this configuration, as described above, one connector consisting of eight wires without making each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c separate. In the manufacturing process, the line operator refers to the miswiring of each of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c in the manufacturing process because the physical structure can be set as follows. In addition to being able to reliably prevent work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as misinsertion), in the game hall, staff such as clerk at the game hall temporarily remove the wiring for maintenance when checking for fraud. In the case of returning to the original state, it is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error of insertion error) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is, as shown in FIG. 132, from the upper right corner of the game board 5. When it is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward toward the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of layers are formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wiring processing pieces 3011 were put together, but when they were routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, they were bent from the upper side to the left side. Then, the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 are put together. Along the left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. When it is routed downward, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320, and is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN. It may be electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

By doing so, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be set to a distance dimension larger than the above-mentioned first wiring separation distance dimension. It is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from invading various pins protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the main control MPU 1310a to the left side of the package. This is because, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. By arranging the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached. This is because it may invade the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, which are arranged below.

When the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710 by adopting such an aspect, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation results of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above, and the filter circuit is larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass signals with a waveform width.

Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, etc., as described above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can be mentioned, and when a coil or beads are used, a plurality of wirings can be mentioned. It is inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL, and when a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wiring FCBLs. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit composed of a combination of a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wiring FCBLs, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. The circuits configured by combining the above may be inserted respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is, as shown in FIG. 132, from the upper right corner of the game board 5. When it is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward toward the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of pieces are formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wiring FCBLs collected by the wiring processing pieces 3011 are bent toward the left side on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 is tentatively assembled. Before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is routed along the side and is gathered by the lower wiring processing piece provided on the left side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100. When it is bent downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear surface of the board holder 1200, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320. When the functional display unit connector MFCN is electrically connected to the functional display unit connector MFCN after being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is generated. It may affect the peripheral control unit 1500.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182, the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500. .. Various corresponding wirings are electrically connected to such connectors CN2 to CN9. Therefore, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL are arranged so as to intersect or come into contact with each other (arrangement straddling the wiring FCBL), so that electromagnetic noise invading the wiring FCBL is electrically transmitted to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When invading various wirings connected to the wiring FCBL, the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 is distorted due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise invading the wiring FCBL (for example, the pattern such as a black screen is distorted). Occurs).

Therefore, the wiring FCBL intersects or the wiring FCBL intersects with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 so as not to route the wiring FCBL along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500). It is preferable to configure it so that it does not come into contact with each other (a straddle arrangement). For example, as a method of routing the wiring FCBL in which the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL do not intersect or come into contact with each other (a straddling arrangement), the illustration provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400. The wiring FCBL, which is electrically connected via a non-connector, is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is bent from the upper side to the left side. On the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, the game is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is put together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Down along the left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 that is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the panel 1100 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. When it is routed toward, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320, and is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN, and then the function display. It may be electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN.

By doing so, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the above-mentioned first wiring separation distance dimension, so that the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is caused by this. It is possible to prevent invasion of various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the wiring FCBL to the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a. This is because, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. By arranging the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached. This is because it may invade the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, which are arranged below.

When the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710 by adopting such an aspect, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation results of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above, and the filter circuit is larger than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass signals with a waveform width.

Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, etc., as described above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can be mentioned, and when a coil or beads are used, a plurality of wirings can be mentioned. It is inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL, and when a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wiring FCBLs. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit composed of a combination of a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wiring FCBLs, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. The circuits configured by combining the above may be inserted respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, whereas it is above the center line. Although the main control MPU 1310a was arranged in, the positional relationship was reversed and the main control MPU 1310a was arranged below the center line, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN was arranged above the center line. The function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a may be arranged so as to be separated from each other on the main control board 1310. Even with this configuration, the main control MPU1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, so that electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL can be generated for the function display unit. It is possible to prevent the connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a from invading various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space that separates the main control board 1310 from each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 is, as shown in FIG. 132, from the upper right corner of the game board 5. When it is drawn to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward toward the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of them are formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. A main control unit 1300 that is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. It was routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320. In the region where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97. Was placed in. As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guiding passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by the above one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. In other words, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way is in front of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the lower full tank path unit 610 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. It was placed. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter, in addition to such wiring FCBL, the ball tank 552, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580 are used. It is formed so as not to be routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (or formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200) through at least one of the vicinitys. (Do not be accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodating groove), routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the bottom of the function display unit connector MFCN, and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. May be connected.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, but in this area, a plurality of full-color LEDs are used instead of the function display unit 1400. The decorative substrate to be mounted may be attached. A plurality of wirings (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “wirings”) that are electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the decorative substrate are described, for example, with reference to FIG. 132. To explain, when the game board 5 is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward from the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side are gathered together and bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500, and the connector of the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510). There is a method of wiring the wiring that is electrically connected to this connector after being routed to the lower part of the game board 5, or from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the back box 3010. When it is routed to the upper side of the rear surface, it is bent from the upper side toward the left side, and again bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is bent toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the left side are gathered together and bent toward the right side below the peripheral control unit 1500, and the connector of the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510). It can be mentioned that the wiring is routed to the lower part of the wire and then electrically connected to this connector.

In the area where the wiring is routed by such a wiring method, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the payout is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97. Since it is arranged in front of the unit 560 or in the vicinity (below) of the ball tank 552, electromagnetic noise may enter the wiring as described above.

Therefore, while the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, the connector is arranged below the center line. By arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a above, the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be arranged away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the peripheral control IC 1510a from invading various pins through the space separated in the 1510. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected. The electromagnetic noise that invades through the wiring can be attenuated on the control board 1510 or in the space where the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other in the peripheral control board 1510. In this respect as well, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Although the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 were directly electrically connected by wiring, the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 were electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to connect in a targeted manner. In this case, it is preferable that the panel relay board 1710 is provided with an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring described above (that is, a plurality of wirings that transmit control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the decorative board). On the other hand, it is preferable to provide elements capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise). As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise that enters through the wiring from affecting the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation results of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs), and as a filter circuit, a signal having a larger waveform width than such a waveform width is obtained. Designed to pass through.

In addition to resistors and filter circuits, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned as such elements, and when coils and beads are used, they are electrically connected to a plurality of wires. When a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wires. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit composed of a combination of a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wires, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. Circuits configured in combination may be inserted respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is arranged behind the function display unit 1400, and the wiring UPCBL is electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131. As shown in FIG. 132, when the game panel 1100 is bent upward on the rear surface, it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010, and is in close proximity to the wiring FCBL described above. When it is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the contacted state), it is bent downward toward the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of pieces are formed in the vertical direction along the right side side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wiring processing pieces 3011 were put together, but when they were routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, they were bent from the upper side to the left side. Then, the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces are formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. When it is routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, it is bent toward the right side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. , After being routed above the predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it may be electrically connected to the predetermined connector. In this case, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 shown in FIG. 182 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 so as to be separated from the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. .. As a result, the wiring FCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 is not arranged so as to intersect or come into contact with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. With this configuration, the wiring UPCBL that is routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and the peripheral control of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. As a positional relationship with the mounting position of the IC (peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. 154), the peripheral control IC 1510a may be arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510. it can. That is, by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other. can do. As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged away from the wiring UPCBL which is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 and mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 through a space that separates the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a. It is possible to prevent invasion of various pins. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL in which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (back left lower front decorative substrate) serves as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the front decorative portion 3312 (front decorative portion 3322, 3412, 3422). 3321a, back upper right front decorative board 3411a, back right lower front decorative board 3421a), which is a movable body by using small electronic parts (magnetic sensor), front decoration part 3312 (front decoration part 3322, It is adopted as a sensor to detect the standby position (original position) of 3412, 3422), and the magnet 3312a of the front decoration part 3312 (the magnet 3322a of the front decoration part 3322, the magnet 3412a of the front decoration part 3412, the front decoration part). By detecting the magnetism of the 3422 magnet 3422a), the rotation position of the pre-stage decoration part 3312 (pre-stage decoration part 3322, 3412, 3422) was specified and the standby position (original position) was set. It can also be used as a sensor to detect the approach of a magnet. This is because the small electronic component (magnetic sensor) called the back left upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (back left lower front decorative board 3321a, back upper right front decorative board 3411a, back right lower front decorative board 3421a) is first. In the situation where the step decoration part 3312 (first stage decoration part 3322, 3412, 3422) is continuously rotated, the magnet 3312a of the first stage decoration part 3312 (the magnet 3322a of the first stage decoration part 3322, the first stage decoration part) intermittently The magnetism of the magnet 3412a of the 3412 and the magnet 3422a of the pre-decorated part 3422) should be detected, but if the magnetism is continuously detected, the approach of an illegal magnet can be detected as a magnet goto. is there.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring UPCBL of FIG. 132 and the peripheral control board 1510 are used as wiring for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 as specific effect means among the plurality of effect means. Of the wiring (not shown) that electrically connects the board to the panel drive board 1720, the wiring UPCBL is in the vicinity of the ball supply means (near at least one of the ball tank 552, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580). I was supposed to go through. The wiring UPCBL among the wirings forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 is the various decorative substrates 184, 273 on the door frame side as other production means except for the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131. It was arranged so as not to intersect or contact the wiring forming the transmission path between the etc and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, such a configuration can be adopted for various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310. For example, among various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310, wirings that pass through an environment strongly affected by electromagnetic noise and other wirings other than this wiring are arranged so as not to intersect or contact each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a (main control board 1310), which can be operated by the high frequency circuit of the crystal oscillator, from being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic noise.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game balls supplied from the ball tank 552, the ball guidance unit 570, and the payout device 580, which are the ball supply means, are paid out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the large winning opening 2005, which are the entrances provided in the game area 5a formed in the game area 5, and the game board 5 is divided into sections. A ball collecting device having a collecting port for collecting the collected game balls together with the game balls collected in the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed is provided, and the game balls collected by the ball collecting device are collected by the ball launching device 540. The ball launching device 540, the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, and the ball collecting device, which are provided with a ball transporting device for transporting the game balls to, and without supplying the payout of the game balls to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. It is also possible to form a circulation path for the game balls by the ball transport device so that a predetermined number of game balls are circulated in a closed manner so that the game can be played.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the back upper left base decorative substrate is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3311 to which the back upper left base decorative substrate is attached. The 3311a was equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa that irradiate light toward the left side of the front-stage decorative portion 3312, but a side-view type of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base-stage decorative substrate was used. Along with the selection, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a may be selected as a side view type, or a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decorative board 3311a may be selected. A view type may be selected and a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a may be selected as a top view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decorative board 3311a may be selected. The top-view type of the full-color LED of the above may be selected, and the top-view type of a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a may be selected, or the back upper left base decorative board may be selected. The top-view type may be selected for the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a, and the side-view type may be selected for the plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the back left lower base decorative substrate is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3321 to which the back left lower base decorative substrate is attached. The 3321a was equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs 3321a that irradiate light toward the left side of the front-stage decorative portion 3322, but a side-view type of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back left lower base-stage decorative substrate was used. Along with the selection, a side-view type may be selected for a plurality of full-color LEDs 3321a mounted on the lower left front decorative board 3321a, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower left base decorative board on the back left may be selected. A view type LED may be selected and a plurality of full-color LEDs 3321a mounted on the lower left front decorative board 3321a on the back left may be selected as a top view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs 3321a mounted on the lower left base decorative board on the back left may be selected. The top-view type of the full-color LED of the above may be selected, and the top-view type of a plurality of full-color LEDs 3321a mounted on the lower left front decorative substrate 3321a may be selected. The top-view type may be selected for the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back left lower front stage decorative substrate 3321a, and the side-view type may be selected for the plurality of full-color LEDs 3321a mounted on the back left lower front stage decorative substrate 3321a.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the back upper right base decorative substrate is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3411 to which the back upper right base decorative substrate is attached. The 3411a was equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa that irradiate light toward the right side of the front-stage decorative portion 3412, but a side-view type of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base-stage decorative substrate was used. Along with the selection, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a may be selected as a side view type, or a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base decorative board 3411a may be selected. A view type may be selected and a plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a may be selected as a top view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base decorative board 3411a may be selected. The top-view type of the full-color LED of the above may be selected, and the top-view type of a plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a may be selected, or the back upper right base decorative board may be selected. A top-view type may be selected for the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper right corner, and a side-view type may be selected for the plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa mounted on the back upper right front decorative substrate 3411a.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the back right lower base decoration substrate is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration portion 3421 to which the back right lower base decoration substrate is attached. The decorative substrate 3421a was mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs 3421a that irradiate light toward the right side of the front decorative portion 3422, but a side view type of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower right base decorative substrate on the back. It is possible to select one and select a side view type of a plurality of full-color LEDs 3421a mounted on the lower right front decorative board 3421a on the back right, or a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right base decorative board on the back right. The side view type full-color LED may be selected, and the top-view type may be selected for a plurality of full-color LEDs 3421a mounted on the lower right front decorative substrate 3421a on the back right. A top-view type may be selected for the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, and a top-view type may be selected for the plurality of full-color LEDs 3421a mounted on the lower right front-stage decorative substrate 3421a. Then, select the top-view type multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the lower right base decorative board on the back, and select the side-view type multiple full-color LEDs 3421a mounted on the lower right front decorative board 3421a on the back right. You may choose.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a specific effect means among the plurality of effect means, wiring for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 (the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected. As the wiring (wiring forming the transmission path for electrical connection), the wiring UPCBL of FIG. 132 and the wiring (not shown) for electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel drive board 1720 are not shown. The wiring UPCBL', which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131, is routed so as to be directly electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510. May be good. In this case, the wiring UPCBL'is a wiring that forms another transmission path electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (except for the upper left panel decorative board 1131), and various decorative boards 184 on the door frame side as other production means. It is arranged so as not to intersect or contact (the wiring forming the transmission path between the 273, etc. and the peripheral control board 1510). As a result, the wiring forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, that is, the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 are directly electrically connected. Wiring that forms another transmission path that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by popping out electromagnetic noise that has entered the UPCBL'(transmission path between other production means and control means except for specific production means). It is possible to prevent the wiring from entering the peripheral control unit 1500 (various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9) of the peripheral control unit 1500). Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic noise.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the underside effect unit 3100, at least when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting various substrates provided in the game board 5 and causing a malfunction. When the surface area of a single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area as a material that may be damaged, the conductors are structurally contacted and fixed to conduct, for example, a metal backing. The reinforcing plate for the moving arm and the metal slide rail 3151ns for the lower back moving arm are attached and structurally contacted to form an electrically connected state, and these conductors are the first for the lower back effect unit. 1 Conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151nc, metal housing of backside elevating drive motor 3151, second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc for backside production unit, and ground (GND) via resistance Rs0 of panel drive substrate 1720. However, instead of the metal housing of the lower back elevating drive motor 3151, a metal screw may be provided and the conductor may be provided through the metal screw alone. However, a lug plate (a metal lug terminal fixed to the insulating substrate) may be provided and the lug plate may be used for the lug plate. That is, these conductors are the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151 nc for the underside effect unit, the metal screw (or lug plate), the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc for the underside effect unit, and the panel drive substrate 1720. It may be a path grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs0 of. A plurality of conductors provided in the back-up effect unit 3200 can be similarly configured.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided on the back left effect unit 3300, at least those that may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunction when electrostatically discharged. For example, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3351ns for the back left moving arm is the first conductor for the back left effect unit, while the surface area of the conductor alone is larger than the predetermined surface surface as something that may be damaged. 1 Conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351nc, metal housing of back left traverse drive motor 3351, second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351fc for back left effect unit, and resistance Rs2 of relay board 3351a provided in back left effect unit 3300. It was a route that was grounded to the ground (GND) via the ground (GND), but instead of the metal housing of the back left transverse drive motor 3351, a metal screw was provided and this metal screw alone was used. A lug plate (a metal lug terminal fixed to an insulating substrate) may be provided and the lug plate may be used for the lug plate. That is, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3351ns for the back left moving arm is the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351 nc for the back left effect unit, the metal screw (or lug plate), and the second conductor potential for the back left effect unit. It may be a path grounded to the ground (GND) via the fluctuation prevention wiring 3351fc and the resistor Rs2 of the relay board 3351a provided on the back left effect unit 3300. A plurality of conductors provided in the back right effect unit 3400 can be similarly configured.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided on the back left effect unit 3300, at least those that may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and malfunction when electrostatically discharged. For example, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3351ns for the back left moving arm is the first conductor for the back left effect unit, while the surface area of the conductor alone is larger than the predetermined surface surface as something that may be damaged. 1 Conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351nc, metal housing of back left traverse drive motor 3351, second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351fc for back left effect unit, and resistance Rs2 of relay board 3351a provided in back left effect unit 3300. However, if the ground (GND) line is not formed on the relay board 3351a and the resistor Rs2 is not provided, the panel that becomes the upper board of the relay board 3351a is used. A resistor Rs2'is provided on the drive board 1720, one end of the resistor Rs2'is grounded to the ground (GND) of the panel drive board 1720, and the other end of the resistor Rs2'is the third conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring for the back left effect unit ( It may be provided as a part of an electric wiring (harness) that electrically connects the relay board 3351a and the panel drive board 1720). In this case, the conductors of the metal slide rail 3351ns for the back left moving arm are the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351 nc for the back left effect unit, the metal housing of the back left transverse drive motor 3351, and the back left effect unit. The second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351fc, the relay board 3351a provided on the back left effect unit 3300, the third conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring for the back left effect unit, and the panel drive board 1720 via the resistor Rs2'of the panel drive board 1720. It is a route that is grounded to the ground (GND) of.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3351ns for the back left moving arm is the metal of the back left transverse drive motor 3351 via a crossover wiring called the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351 nc for the back left effect unit. Although it was electrically connected to the housing made of metal, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3351ns for the back left moving arm and other conductive members (for example, the structure used to improve the rigidity, the drive mechanism) Mechanical parts, electrical parts (including housings for electrical parts), conductive plating applied to decorative structures, and structures molded from conductive resin (including decorative structures) One conductor out of a plurality of conductors such as, etc.) may be electrically connected by another crossover wiring. That is, it may be configured to be electrically connected by two or more stages of crossover wiring. In this case, a plurality of conductors may be electrically connected to each other by a crossover wiring, or a plurality of conductors may be connected in series or in parallel by a crossover wiring, or a metal screw is provided. The crossover wiring that electrically connects one conductor and the other conductor may be relayed via this single metal screw, or a lug plate (a metal lug terminal is an insulating substrate). It may be done through this lug plate by providing what is fixed to. It is preferable to configure the plurality of crossover wires so that the length of each is shortened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the various drive motors provided in various production units such as the front production unit 2600, the back bottom production unit 3100, the back top production unit 3200, the back left production unit 3300, and the back right production unit 3400 are stepped. Although it is a motor, a motor (servo motor) provided with a rotation detector such as an encoder may be used. In this case, the rotation angle of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the servomotor is detected by the rotation detector, and the drive pulse is controlled by feedback control. As a result, the output shaft (rotational shaft) of the servomotor can be set to a predetermined rotation speed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the drive is driven to various drive motors provided in various production units such as the front effect unit 2600, the back bottom effect unit 3100, the back top effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400. The power supply line (for example, the + 35V power supply line from the power supply board 630 or the + 12V power supply line from the power supply board 630) is a board to which the wiring from various drive motors is directly connected (for example, the backside up / down of the backside effect unit 3100). In the drive motor 3151, the panel drive board 1720 and the back left transverse drive motor 3351 of the back left effect unit 3300 have a fuse (may be a chip fuse) or a poly in the relay board 3351a provided in the back left effect unit 3300. A switch may be provided, or for what is supplied as a drive power supply line in the power supply board 630 (for example, a + 35V power supply line from the power supply board 630 or a + 12V power supply line from the power supply board 630). A fuse (which may be a chip fuse) or a poly switch may be provided.

[20. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 224, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3002. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is the first of the RAM. (I) The first start port passing process such as storing in the special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second start port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S239) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "16R jackpot", 16R A process of opening / closing the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the big hit game state. In addition, when the mode suggesting "4R big hit", a process of opening / closing the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the 4R big hit gaming state.

Further, in the jackpot control process (step S241), after the opening control of the jackpot 2005 is performed, each set process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. The high-probability flag is a flag indicating that it is in a high-probability state, and a jackpot game state based on a jackpot (16R jackpot, 4R jackpot) that controls a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state is set. Set when finished. Then, when the high probability flag is set, the first special symbol stop processing or the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 235, which will be described later, is performed when the next big hit or when the counter value of the time reduction counter becomes "0". The high probability flag is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

Further, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is reached, and the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (16R big hit, 4R big hit) that controls the time saving state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit gaming state is ended. It is set when you do. Then, when the time saving flag becomes a big hit next time, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 235 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown is shown. It is reset by the process.

Further, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and is a time reduction state (high probability) after the end of the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (16R jackpot, 4R jackpot) controlled to the time saving state) is ended, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Then, the time reduction counter is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes "0". Occasionally, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 235, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

If the jackpot executing flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0". (Step S236), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S237), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S236), the second special symbol including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process process is executed (step S238). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

If it is determined in the process of step S231 that the first start port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, it is shown in FIG. 225. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is "4", which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first held. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of stored memory, peripheral control is performed by setting a command (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the number of first reserved memory in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). It is designed to transmit to the board 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is adapted to display the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241 above, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Depending on the mode type of the game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (the first reserved memory number) (1) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command according to the above are set (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the command is stored in response to the first start port 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether or not to make the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the advance determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is executed as the game effect to be executed, and the variation display according to the start winning prize is started. The IC1510a can be grasped.

When the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is provided with a first hold storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control IC 1510a stores the first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1-3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1-3) storage area is received. Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. The judgment information is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display occurs can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, when the hold display is newly output or when the hold display is shifted according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

If it is determined in the process of step S233 that the second start port sensor 2402 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, it is shown in FIG. 227. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. ) Is "4" or not (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S253 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is secondly held. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of stored memory, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the number of second reserved memory to perform peripheral control. It is designed to transmit to the board 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is adapted to display the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S237). The first special symbol process process executed in step S237 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules and are random numbers used for determination. Only the first special symbol process process executed in step S237 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S280)
2. 2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which the lottery process for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed.

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 210).

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 229, first steps S301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S302. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. .. Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control FIFO 1310a is stored in each storage area. The random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S305, a jackpot determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. After that, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process ends.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 181 (A) if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state) (step S311). (Step S312) If the current gaming state is a low-probability state (step S311), the low-probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 231 (A) is selected (step S313), and the selected jackpot determination table and the first (I) Compare with the first special random number read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing (step S314).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 231 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the gaming state has a low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state)). It is provided with a table and a jackpot determination table at a high probability, which is used when the game state is a high probability (high probability time saving state). Then, in the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot, and 299 types of first special random numbers. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that the special random numbers are out of order (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300). In addition, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S138 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first Similar to the low-probability jackpot judgment table referenced for comparison with special random numbers, it matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the jackpot, and 299 types of second special random numbers. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that is the deviation (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300).

In addition, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, there are 10 types including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the low-probability jackpot determination table. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the first special random number matches the jackpot judgment value and the 290 types of first special random numbers match the loss judgment value (big hit probability at high probability: 30 minutes). 1). As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability time saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is 10 times higher than in the low probability state (normal state (low probability non-time saving state)). Can be enhanced. In addition, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S138 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first Similar to the high-probability jackpot judgment table referred to for comparison with special random numbers, 10 types of second including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low-probability jackpot judgment table. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the special random number has won the jackpot and the missed judgment value indicating that the 290 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. (Big hit probability at high probability: 1/30).

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S315). ), The jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot is set, the process is terminated (step S316), the selected jackpot determination table and the first special symbol read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. If it is determined that the result is out of alignment as a result of comparison with the random numbers, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random numbers read in step S302 (step S317). Then, as a result of comparing the reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302, if it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S318), a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is reach is set and processing is performed. It ends (step S319).

FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 232, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S321).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 231 (B). (Step S322), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S323). On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S321, the first special symbol is determined to be an out-of-order symbol as the mode when the fluctuation is stopped (step S324).

As shown in FIG. 231 (B), the symbol determination table stores symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers) for each determination result (16R jackpot, 4R jackpot). .. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the type of jackpot is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
The opening and closing of the jackpot 2005 is controlled according to the 1.16R jackpot game state, and the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 50 times after the end of the jackpot game state. 16R jackpot that controls to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot is hit before, or until the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 50 times without becoming the next jackpot. The opening and closing of the jackpot 2005 is controlled according to the 2.4R jackpot game state, and the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 50 times after the end of the jackpot game state. 4R jackpot that controls to a high probability time saving state until the next jackpot is hit before, or until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 50 times without becoming the next jackpot. Determine one of the two types of jackpots.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the judgment values is set to be different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, 100 determinations are made for the 4R jackpot, which is less profitable to the player, out of the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot. Value distribution is set. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, 55 judgment values are set for the 16R jackpot, which is more profitable for the player, out of the 16R jackpot and the 4R jackpot. Forty-five determination values are set for the 4R jackpot, which is less profitable for the player. In this way, in the normal state (non-time saving state), the lottery on the first special symbol side is performed by inserting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, but at the time of a big hit on the first special symbol side (first time). At the time of big hit), the 4R big hit, which has little profit for the player, is always decided. On the other hand, in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the game ball B can enter the second start port 2004, and the game ball B can enter the second start port 2004. A lottery will be held on the second special symbol side, but at the time of the jackpot on the second special symbol side (at the time of consecutive villas), it will be decided whether the player has a different profit, 16R jackpot or 4R jackpot. It is possible to pay attention to whether the type of big hit is decided. Therefore, the game is not monotonous because the game characteristics change between the first big hit and the consecutive villas.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 4R jackpot is determined, the 4R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 16R jackpot is determined, the 16R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 4R jackpot is determined, the 4R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S325, any of these lottery results (type of jackpot, missed reach, or missed) is instructed (the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is indicated). A determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set so that (may be instructed)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S326, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). The peripheral control IC 1510a starts the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol. The display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed.

Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a receives 16R jackpots among the jackpots related to the special symbol from the received determination result notification command as an mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. If specified, the 16R jackpot symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all "7" symbols out of "1" to "9") is determined, and if the 4R jackpot is specified, 4R The jackpot symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol among "1" to "9" except for "7") is determined, and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses ( At the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600. In this way, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is fluctuated and stopped by either the 16R jackpot symbol or the 4R jackpot symbol, it can be determined from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that it is a jackpot. Further, since different symbols are used as the 16R jackpot symbol and the 4R jackpot symbol, either the 16R jackpot or the 4R jackpot can be discriminated.

Further, the peripheral control IC 1510a is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the reach deviation is specified from the received determination result notification command, the peripheral control IC 1510a is accompanied by a reach. (Combination of decorative symbols that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative symbols are the same), and if the deviation is specified, the detached symbol without reach (combination of decorative symbols that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative symbols are the same). Is non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 233. If this is done (step S341), the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step). S342), if the reach flag is set (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S344), and both the jackpot flag and the reach flag are both. If it is not set, that is, if it is a normal deviation (a deviation that does not execute the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the deviation is selected (step S345).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S346), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S347). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S348). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

In addition, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

Further, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S283) as the process of step S349. This process ends when the update is performed.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of disconnection, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second at the time of shortening is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), but is not. The variation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a form that the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds at the time reduction is associated with the above-mentioned special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). That is, the special symbol is selected so that the time required for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is extremely short as compared with the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected at the time of non-time reduction. The fluctuation time information of the symbol is set.

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 234, first steps S371. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 235, first steps S381. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is used. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter value in which the time reduction flag is set and the number of times the time reduction state is set is set is "0". (Step S383). Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S384), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S385). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S386). When it is determined that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0" in the process of step S383, or when it is determined that the time reduction counter is not "0" in the process of step S385. At that point, the process proceeds to step S387.

When the jackpot flag is set (step S387), a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game state is set (step S388), and the jackpot game state is started (big hit round start command is set). The waiting time (the period for displaying the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S389). Then, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset, and the counter value of the time saving count counter is further increased. If it is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0"), and then the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set (step S390), and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S391), this process ends.

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot (16R jackpot, 4R jackpot). In step S388, a jackpot start command (16R jackpot start command, 4R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. As a result, the effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S239).

In step S389, the waiting time until the start of the jackpot game state is set in the interval timer. However, in the process of step S401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed, FIG. 236 shows. As shown, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005, and also sets the big winning opening opening / closing process (step) to set the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state to a high probability time saving state. S402) is executed.

FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the large winning opening opening / closing process (step S402).

Now, assuming that the large winning opening 2005 is determined to be in the open state in the process of step S411, as shown in FIG. 237, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the large winning opening 2005. When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds when the game is opened for a long time and 0.5 seconds when the game is opened for a short time) has elapsed from the open state (step S412), or when the game is played in the above-mentioned large winning opening 2005 in the open state. When the ball B wins the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) (step S413), the open winning opening 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S414). Then, when it is determined that the current round is ended by controlling the above-mentioned big winning opening 2005 in the closed state (step S415), the type of big hit and the current number of rounds are sent as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. The jackpot round end command corresponding to is set (step S416), and the process proceeds to step S428.

Further, assuming that the large winning opening 2005 is determined to be in the closed state in the process of step S411, as shown in FIG. 237, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the large winning opening 2005. When it is time to set the open state (step S417), if it is determined that a new round is started by controlling the large winning opening 2005 to the open state (step S418), the peripheral control board 1510 As a command to be transmitted to, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the number of new rounds is set (step S419). Then, the closed state of the large winning opening 2005 is controlled to the open state (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. If it is determined that a new round will not be started by controlling the large winning opening 2005 in the open state (such as the second opening in the same round) (step S418), the closed state is set. The large winning opening 2005 is controlled to be open (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. As a result, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like can be used to perform an effect according to the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S428 that the game ball B has been accepted by the grand prize opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 237, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a peripheral control board. A large winning opening ball entry command is set as a command to be transmitted to 1510 (step S429), and this process ends. As a result, when the big prize opening command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball B into the large winning opening 2005 is produced by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. Can be executed by.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S417 that it is not the timing to open the large winning opening 2005, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the large size as shown in FIG. 237. When the entire number of rounds is completed by repeating the open state and the closed state of the winning opening 2005 (step S423), the jackpot executing flag is reset (step S424). Then, when the high probability flag is set (step S426), the time saving flag is set, and the initial value (for example, 50 times) is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state in the counter value of the time saving number counter (step S427). This process ends. In this way, at the end of the big hit game state, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are set, and the game state after the big hit game state is controlled to the high probability time saving state.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2506 is on and the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 238, the above As the process of step S802, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate passage process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. Execute.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. The normal symbol normal process (step S803) in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. 2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S805) that waits until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Normal symbol stop processing (step S806) to stop the variable display of the symbol
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the upper second start door 2411 retracts and the game ball to the second start 2004. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807) for executing a process for controlling the acceptance of B.

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 210).

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S802).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003 in the process of step S801, as shown in FIG. 239. As the process of step S811, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the ordinary random number and the normal figure variation random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and based on this counter value, the hold number of the normal symbol is the maximum value "4". It is determined whether or not the above is true (step S812). In the process of step S812, when it is determined that the number of held normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S813 to S814 are performed in order to put the variable display control of the normal symbols into a new hold state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S813, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S814, each random number acquired in step S811 is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a. ..

However, in the process of step S812, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S813 to S814, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 240, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing of step S821. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers and ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the variation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control FIFO 1310a is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal figure) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 are extracted from the first (earliest) area. Memorize in order. Then, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area. Is stored, and when the start condition of the variation display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) is stored. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, if the current gaming state is the time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S826), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown) during the time saving (not shown). In step S826), if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state) (step S825), a non-time saving hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S827) and selected. The normal symbol hit determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S828).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU1310a, and is used when the game state is a time saving time (high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a non-time saving normal map hit determination table used in the case of time (low probability non-time saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, all 251 kinds of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random number was won, and the normal figure hit. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the deviation determination value in the normal figure indicating the deviation. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the player always wins the game, and the upper second start door 2411 retracts to the second start 2004. The acceptance of the game ball B is controlled so as to be possible.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with ordinary random numbers, it is possible that all 251 types of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers have been won. The above ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal figure, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. In this way, in the non-time saving time, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is not won in the normal drawing, so the upper second starting door 2411 retracts and the second It is not possible to control the acceptance of the game ball B into the starting port 2004.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S830), the normal symbol hit as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, when the result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing is determined to be out of order, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. The out-of-normal symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the control is stopped is determined (step S832). After that, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a hit, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is extreme. It is shortened to a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is won, the second start port 2004 is controlled by an opening / closing pattern that closes in an open state for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). .. That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit is extremely high, the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is constant and short, and the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. It is much easier to win the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 due to the long time, etc., and it is more efficient to aim the second starting port 2004 than the first starting port 2002. B can be won. In the control of the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always a hit, and the second starting port 2004 is aimed at. Also, the game ball B cannot be won in the second starting port 2004.

As described above, during the control of the non-time saving state, even if the second starting port 2004 is aimed at, the game ball B cannot be won by the second starting port 2004, so that the first starting port 2002 The game ball B must be launched (so-called "left-handed") aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B wins the prize. Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B is the obstacle nails. By abutting on N, various movements are given to the game ball B so that it flows down. Therefore, even if the game ball B is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2002, the first starting port 2002 is not always won, and the first starting port 2002 is won. The game ball B that has not been played is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, it is possible to win the game ball B more efficiently by aiming at the second starting port 2004 than at the first starting port 2002. Therefore, the game is played at the second starting port 2004. The game ball B must be launched (so-called "right-handed") aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the ball B wins a prize. Further, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, when the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003 is opened. The passing game ball B has a very high probability of winning the second starting port 2004. Therefore, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008), and the control of the non-time saving state is performed. Compared to the first starting port 2002 in the game ball B, the game ball B wins the second starting port 2004 extremely efficiently.

Further, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, there is an extremely high probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be won when passing through the gate portion 2003, and the variation display of the normal symbol will be displayed. The time required for control is constant and short, and the open state of the second starting port 2004 is long, so that the game ball B can easily win a prize in the second starting port 2004, and further to the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B wins a prize, the time required for controlling the fluctuation display of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely shorter than the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control in the non-time saving state, so that the time is short. The variable display control of the special symbol (holding of the variable display control of the special symbol) can be digested. That is, when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, so that the big hit is made again in a short time. It can be expected that many game balls B will be acquired by controlling the jackpot game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the number of game balls B paid out by winning the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is one, the game to the second start port 2004 Even if the ball B wins frequently, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced while enhancing the interest of the player.

[21. Hold notice production and hold change production]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, but the hold display is displayed until the hold display is exhausted. By changing the above, it is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests a jackpot expectation for a variable display of a decorative symbol (variable display of a special symbol) based on the hold display. In addition, during the display period of the hold display, it is possible to execute a hold change effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display may change.

Specifically, a hold number designation command and a pre-determination command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. .. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the hold number designation command and the pre-determination command in the command analysis process of step S601, the hold notice determination table corresponding to those commands, that is, the hold number specified from the hold number designation command. Select the hold notice determination table corresponding to the (number of pending memories) and the advance judgment information (either jackpot, reach loss, or loss) specified from the advance judgment command, and acquire the judgment value set in the hold notice decision table. The type of the hold notice pattern set in the hold notice determination table is determined by comparing with the random number for determining the hold notice. In the hold notice determination table, the determination value for each hold notice pattern is distributed differently for each advance judgment information (big hit, reach loss, or loss) specified from the advance judgment command, and each hold notice pattern The appearance rate is different.

In addition, when a game ball wins a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the number of holds (number of hold memories) specified by the hold number designation command increases, so that the effect display is displayed. One hold display is added to and displayed on the device 1600. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of stored items) specified by the hold number specification command decreases. , The hold display on the effect display device 1600 is erased. Then, during the display period from when the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display is erased, the display mode of the hold display is displayed based on the hold notice pattern, and the hold display and the hold display are displayed. Allows the display mode of the hold display to be changed each time the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on another hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied). In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the reserved display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the reserved display is deleted, but the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol is deleted. Even after the start of the variable display (variable display of the special symbol), the hold display may be continuously displayed and the display mode of the hold display may be changed.

Next, a hold notice determination table in which a plurality of types of hold notice patterns are set for each hold number (hold storage number) specified from the hold number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. 241 and 242. The hold notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 241 (A) is a hold notice determination table used when hold 1 is lit (hold number = 1), and FIG. 241 (B) is a hold notice decision to be used when hold 2 is lit (hold number = 2). It is a table, FIG. 241 (C) is a hold notice determination table used when hold 3 is lit (hold number = 3), and FIG. 242 (D) is used when hold 4 is lit (hold number = 4). It is a hold notice decision table to be done.

As described above, a plurality of types of hold notice patterns are set in the hold notice determination table corresponding to the number of holds (hold memory number), and these hold notice patterns include the number of holds (hold) at the time of winning. How the display mode of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 changes each time the hold memory is consumed is set by the amount of the number of memories). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 241 (A), the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 may change in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 1 is lit (number of holds = 1). There is no (ie, only digests the hold display) associated with a hold notice pattern in which only one hold display display mode is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (B), the display mode of the hold display can be changed once in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 2 is lit (number of holds = 2) before the hold display is exhausted. Therefore, a hold notice pattern in which the display mode of the hold display for two times is set is associated. Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (C), in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 3 is lit (number of holds = 3), the display mode of the hold display can be changed twice before the hold display is exhausted. Therefore, a hold notice pattern in which the display mode of the hold display for three times is set is associated. Further, as shown in FIG. 242 (D), in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 4 is lit (number of holds = 4), the display mode of the hold display can be changed three times before the hold display is exhausted. Therefore, a hold notice pattern in which the display mode of the hold display for four times is set is associated.

Further, as the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 set in the hold notice pattern, four displays are displayed so that the hold display is displayed in any of white (basic color), blue, red, and rainbow color. Aspects are provided. Then, when determining the hold notice pattern from the hold notice determination table, as a result of the display mode of the hold display changing to the end, the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of white (basic color) → blue → red → rainbow color. It is set to be. That is, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the preliminary judgment information, a hold notice pattern having a high expectation of big hit (for example, rainbow color) is determined with a high probability as the final display mode of the hold display, and the advance When the lottery result is specified as a loss (loss, reach loss) as the judgment information, a hold notice pattern having a low expectation of big hit (for example, white) is determined with a high probability as the final display mode of the hold display. Therefore, when the display mode of the final hold display is displayed in the display mode with high expectation of big hit, the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased.

In the hold notice pattern, the display mode of the hold display does not change in the reverse order of white → blue → red → rainbow color, and the display mode of the hold display is maintained when the hold display is exhausted. Alternatively, the following display mode is set so that the display mode has a high expectation of a big hit. For this reason, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode with a low jackpot expectation, there is a possibility that the display mode may change to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation when the hold display is exhausted. The aspect can be noticed with expectation until the end.

Further, in the hold notice pattern, it is not always necessary to change the display mode of the hold display in the order of blue → red → rainbow color after the display mode of the hold display is displayed in white (basic color), and the display in the middle of not being white (basic color). Start from the mode (for example, suddenly start in rainbow color due to the hold notice pattern number 4 when hold 1 is lit), or skip one or more display modes and change to the next display mode (for example, when hold 2 is lit). It is also set to change from white (basic color) to rainbow color according to the hold notice pattern number 7. Therefore, even if the chance of changing the display mode of the hold display (the number of holds) is small, it is possible to display the display mode of the hold display in the display mode with a high expectation of big hit. Further, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the display mode with a low expectation of big hit, it is not possible to predict which display mode the next display mode will change to, and the display mode of the hold display is changed to the end. You can draw attention with expectations.

Further, in the hold notice determination table, only when a big hit is specified as the advance judgment information from the advance judgment command, the hold notice pattern (hold notice pattern number when hold 1 is lit) is displayed in rainbow color as the final display mode of the hold display. 4. Hold notice pattern numbers 4, 7, 9, 10 when hold 2 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 4, 7, when hold 3 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 4, 7, etc. when hold 4 is lit) are determined. Is set to be possible. For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in rainbow color, it is confirmed that the lottery result will be a big hit when the hold display is exhausted, and the player's expectation for the big hit game is increasing. ..

Further, in the hold notice determination table, when a loss is specified as the advance judgment information from the advance judgment command, the hold notice pattern (when hold 1 is lit) becomes white (basic color) or blue as the final display mode of the hold display. Hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2, hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when hold 2 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when hold 3 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 when hold 4 is lit, etc.) On the other hand, when a big hit is specified as the pre-judgment information from the pre-judgment command and the reach is specified, the hold notice pattern that turns red as the final display mode of the hold display (hold 1 notice pattern number 3 when the hold 1 is lit). It is now possible to determine the hold notice pattern numbers 3, 6 and 8 when hold 2 is lit, the hold notice pattern numbers 3 and 6 when hold 3 is lit, and the hold notice pattern numbers 3 and 6 when hold 4 is lit. It is set. For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in red, it is confirmed that the reach effect is at least reached when the hold display is exhausted, and the player's expectation for the jackpot game is increased. It has become.

In the present embodiment, by determining the hold notice pattern at the start of displaying the hold display, a series of contents in which the display mode of the hold display changes until the hold display is digested are determined. However, as a determination method thereof, at the start of the display of the hold display, only the display mode of the hold display at the start and the final display mode of the hold display may be determined. Then, when the display mode of the hold display at the start and the display mode of the final hold display are different, the display mode of the final hold display is at least before the target hold display is digested. Is displayed, it may be determined how the display mode of the hold display changes each time the timing at which the display mode of the hold display can be changed comes. Even with such a determination method, the display mode of the hold display can be sequentially changed until the hold display on the effect display device 1600 is digested.

Next, a hold change effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change during the display period of the hold display will be described below. In the above-mentioned hold notice effect, the display mode of the hold display can be changed each time the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied) during the display period of the hold display. At the timing when the display mode of the hold display can be changed, the hold change effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the hold display may change can be executed.

Specifically, on the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), does the display mode of the hold display change based on the hold notice pattern? By determining whether or not, the pending change effect determination table corresponding to the determination result is selected, and the determination value set in the pending change effect determination table is compared with the read random number for determining the pending change effect. Hold change effect determination Determines the type of hold change effect pattern set in the table. That is, whether or not to execute the hold change effect, and when executing the hold change effect, determine the type of the hold change effect.

Here, a plurality of types of hold change effect patterns are set in the hold change effect determination table, and the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) that does not execute the hold change effect is used as the hold change effect. Hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 2) that executes the first hold change effect, hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 3) that executes the second hold change effect as hold change effect, hold change As the effect, a hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 4) for executing the third hold change effect is set. The pending change effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, in the hold change effect determination table, the determination values are distributed to each of the hold change effect patterns (hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the hold change effect, and the appearance rate of each hold change effect is the same. Is about the same, but the distribution of the judgment values may be different so that the appearance rate of each pending change effect is different.

Further, in the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display changes, the determination value is distributed only to the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) that executes the hold change effect. On the other hand, in the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change, many judgments are made for the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) that does not execute the hold change effect. The values are sorted. In this way, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the hold change effect is always executed, and when the hold change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display changes with a high probability. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed by executing the hold change effect.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of holdings (number of holdings stored) on the first special symbol side is four, but the number of holdings corresponding to the number of holdings can be displayed in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600. There is. Similarly, the upper limit of the number of holds (number of holds stored) on the second special symbol side is four, but the number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds can be displayed in the lower right area of the effect display device 1600. .. Then, in the lower left area or the lower right area of the effect display device 1600, hold 1 (hold number = 1), hold 2 (hold number = 2), hold 3 (hold number = 3), hold 4 (hold number = 4). When is lit, it is displayed so that one hold display is added in order from the left side to the right side. Further, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display of the hold 1 displayed on the left side of the lower left area or the lower right area is deleted. As a result, the other hold displays 2 to 4 are displayed so as to move to the left while being displayed in the display area. In the case of the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) in which the hold change effect is not executed, the display mode of the hold display is after the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved. Does not change, and the hold change effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold notice effect and the hold change effect are performed during the normal fluctuation, which is the stage of whether or not the reach state is formed at the time of displaying the change of the decorative symbol. Therefore, after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, it can be expected that the hold notice effect and the hold change effect will be performed on the hold display regardless of whether or not the reach state is formed. ..

[21-1. Countdown production after unconfirmed production (first pending change production)]
First, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 2) that executes the first hold change effect as the hold change effect, the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of the change of the decorative symbol is displayed. After the movement, a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears, and the character moves in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a trajectory in which the character comes into contact with the hold display whose display mode changes. Either the final effect to be performed or the non-confirmed effect of moving in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on a trajectory in which the character does not touch the hold display is executed. When this final effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display that the character touches changes when the character comes into contact with the hold display, whereas when the non-fixed effect is executed, it is reserved. The display mode of the hold display does not change because the character does not touch the display. That is, it suggests whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes depending on whether or not the character touches the hold display. Further, regardless of whether the finalized effect or the non-determined effect is executed, after the character moves in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the character is erased outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. In this example, as the finalized effect and the non-determined effect, the effect of whether or not the character touches the hold display is executed, but the final effect is an expression mode in which the display mode of the hold display can be changed. However, the non-deterministic effect may be executed in an expression mode in which the display mode of the hold display cannot be changed, and it is sufficient that each display mode can be distinguished by the player.

The item possessed by the character is displayed in any of blue, red, and rainbow colors, as in the display mode of the hold display that may change. Then, when the display mode of the hold display that the character touches changes due to the contact of the character with the hold display, the display mode of the hold display changes to the display color of the item that the character has. ing. Therefore, what kind of display mode the hold display may change, that is, what kind of jackpot expectation the hold display may suggest, is determined rather than whether or not the display mode changes. Can be grasped before.

In addition, when the non-determined effect is executed, a character having an item with a predetermined display color reappears in a predetermined period after the end of the non-determined effect, and the display mode is changed to the hold display. On the other hand, there is a case where a definite effect of moving in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is executed in a trajectory that the character touches. On the other hand, if the character does not reappear within a predetermined period after the end of the non-fixed effect, the final effect will not be executed. That is, it is suggested whether or not the mode of the hold display changes depending on whether or not the character reappears in a predetermined period after the end of the non-determined effect.

FIG. 243 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of the effect pattern set as the first hold change effect. First, in the final effect pattern, a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears, and the character comes into contact with the hold display whose display mode changes, so that the character is in contact with the hold display. This is an effect pattern in which the display mode changes.

Further, in the non-determined effect pattern, a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears, and the character does not come into contact with the hold display, so that the display mode of the hold display does not change. , After executing the final effect for the same amount of time as the final effect, the countdown effect is executed for a predetermined time, but the final effect is not executed during the execution of the countdown effect, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display changes. It is a production pattern without.

Further, in the final effect pattern after the non-confirmed effect, the display mode of the hold display does not change because a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears and the character does not touch the hold display. After executing the final effect for the same amount of time as the final effect, the countdown effect is executed for a predetermined time, and the character reappears during the execution of the countdown effect to execute the final effect, and as a result, the hold display is displayed. This is an effect pattern in which the mode changes. Further, the finalized effect patterns A to C after the non-determined effect are effect patterns in which the characters reappear during the execution of the countdown effect and the timing of executing the finalized effect is different. Specifically, the final effect pattern A after the non-confirmed effect is an effect pattern in which the character reappears at the remaining 2 seconds of the 3 seconds of the countdown effect and the final effect is executed. Pattern B is an effect pattern in which the character reappears at the remaining 1 second of the 3 seconds of the countdown effect to execute the final effect, and pattern C after the non-confirmed effect is the effect pattern C in the 3 seconds of the countdown effect. This is an effect pattern in which the character reappears at the time of 0 seconds remaining and the final effect is executed. In the finalized effect patterns A to C after the non-confirmed effect, the display color of the item possessed by the character when the non-determined effect is executed may be different from the display color of the item possessed by the character when the finalized effect is executed. , The display color of the item may be changed to a display color suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high when the display mode of the hold display is changed, when the final effect is executed rather than the non-confirmed effect. For example, when the character first appears when the non-determined effect is executed, the display color of the item is displayed in blue, and when the character appears for the second time when the final effect is executed, the display color of the item is displayed in red. So, even if the display color of the item at the first appearance of the character is displayed with the display color suggesting that the jackpot expectation is low, the display color of the item changes at the second appearance of the character. You can expect it to be noticed.

Further, in the non-fixed effect post-special effect pattern, the display mode of the hold display does not change because a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears and the character does not touch the hold display. After executing the final effect for the same amount of time as the final effect, the countdown effect is executed for a predetermined time, and during the execution of the countdown effect, a specific symbol (in this example, appears at normal times) as a variable display of the decorative symbol. This is an effect pattern in which a skull symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol that has never been seen, and then it is confirmed that a specific symbol is changed to a reach symbol. In addition, when a specific symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed during the execution of the countdown effect, the countdown effect is not executed at that point even if there is a remaining time, and the final effect is not executed, resulting in a hold display. This is an effect pattern in which the display mode does not change. In this way, when a specific symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed during the execution of the countdown effect, the countdown effect is not terminated and the final effect is not executed, but it is confirmed that a reach is formed in the fluctuation. However, expectations do not decline with the end of the countdown production.

Further, the special effect patterns A to C after the non-determined effect are effect patterns in which the timing of temporarily stopping and displaying a specific symbol during the execution of the countdown effect is different. Specifically, the non-confirmed post-definite special effect pattern A is an effect pattern that temporarily stops and displays a specific symbol at the time remaining 2 seconds out of the 3 seconds of the countdown effect, and the non-confirmed post-definite special effect pattern B is. , It is an effect pattern that temporarily stops and displays a specific symbol at the time of 1 second remaining in the 3 seconds of the countdown effect, and the special effect pattern C after the unconfirmed effect is at the time of 0 seconds remaining in the 3 seconds of the countdown effect. This is an effect pattern that temporarily stops and displays a specific symbol.

Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the first hold change effect will be described with reference to FIG. 244. FIG. 244 is a specific example of the effect of the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the first hold change effect.

First, in this example, in the lower left region of the effect display device 1600, four hold displays are displayed as hold displays corresponding to the number of hold storages on the first special symbol side. Then, at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, for example, when the execution of the first hold change effect is determined for the hold display of hold 2, in FIGS. 244 (A) and 244 (B). As shown, after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a character having an item in red appears from the left side of the display area toward the center part. Of these, as shown in FIG. 244 (A), when the non-deterministic effect is executed, the character comes into contact with the hold display in the process of returning the character from the central portion of the display area to the left side. There is no change in the display mode of the hold display. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 244 (B), when the final effect is executed, the character comes into contact with the hold display of hold 2 in the process of returning the character from the central portion of the display area to the left side. , The display mode of the hold display of the hold 2 that the character touches changes to red of the item that the character has. In this way, when a character appears, in the process of returning the character from the central part of the display area to the left side, the character comes into contact with any of the hold displays, and the hold display with which the character touches. The display mode may change to the red color of the item that the character has, but when the character appears, whether or not the character touches the hold display, and which hold display the character touches. It is not possible to grasp whether or not to do so, and it is possible to pay attention to the traveling direction of the character.

Further, as shown in FIG. 244 (C), when the non-deterministic effect is executed, the countdown effect is executed for 3 seconds after the execution of the non-deterministic effect. In this countdown effect, "3 → 2 → 1 → 0" is displayed in order in the display area with the passage of time to fuel the expectation of whether or not the final effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 244 (D), when the final effect is executed during the execution of the countdown effect, the character having the item in red appears again from the left side of the display area toward the center portion. In this way, when the character reappears, in the process of returning the character from the central portion of the display area to the left side, the character comes into contact with the hold display of hold 2, and the character touches the hold 2. The display mode of the hold display of is changed to red of the item possessed by the character. However, when the character reappears, in the process of returning the character from the central part of the display area to the left side, the character always touches one of the hold displays, and the hold display that the character touches. The display mode of is changed to the red color of the item possessed by the character, but when the character reappears, it is not possible to grasp which hold display the character contacts, and the progress of the character. You can pay attention to the direction.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 244 (E), a specific symbol (in this example, a skull symbol as a decorative symbol that does not appear in normal times) is temporarily stopped and displayed as a variable display of the decorative symbol during the execution of the countdown effect. In that case, even if there is a remaining time, the countdown effect is ended at that point, the final effect is not executed, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change. However, as shown in FIGS. 244 (F) and 244 (G), when a specific symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed during the execution of the countdown effect, the timing at which the reach symbol set in the variation pattern is formed thereafter. Then, it changes from a specific symbol to a reach symbol. In this example, a specific symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as a variation display of the decorative symbol during the execution of the countdown effect, but it is sufficient to notify in advance that a reach will be formed in the variation. Further, the reach symbol may be stopped and displayed at that time instead of the temporary stop display of the specific symbol during the execution of the countdown effect, and it may be confirmed that the reach is formed. Also in this case, the countdown effect is not terminated at the time of the formation of the reach, the final effect is not executed, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change.

Further, as shown in FIG. 244 (H), when the final effect is not executed during the execution of the countdown effect and the specific symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed as the variable display of the decorative symbol, the countdown effect is performed. With the end, it is confirmed that the display mode of the hold display does not change.

[21-2. Repeating parallel production (second pending change production)]
Next, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 3) that executes the second hold change effect as the hold change effect, the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of the change of the decorative symbol. After moving, a plurality of characters appear in the vicinity of the hold display, and the plurality of characters are in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the same time so that each character comes into contact with one of the hold displays. Is performing a parallel production that moves. In this parallel effect, as many contacts as the number of characters are in contact with the hold display, but in any of the multiple contacts of the character with respect to the hold display, the display mode of the hold display with which the character is in contact is Either a changing parallel effect at the time of hitting or a parallel effect at the time of loss in which the display mode of the hold display with which the character touches does not change is executed. That is, in the parallel effect, when a plurality of characters move in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the same time, the timing at which the characters come into contact with the hold display occurs at the same time, and the display mode of the hold display changes. Notifies that there are multiple chances of change or not. Further, in the parallel effect, when a plurality of characters move in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the same time, as many characters as the number of characters come into contact with the hold display, so that the display mode of the hold display is as many as the number of characters. You can get a chance to see if it changes. In this example, as a parallel effect at the time of hitting and a parallel effect at the time of loss, an effect of whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes when the character touches the hold display is executed. While the parallel effect at the time of hit is executed in the display mode in which the display mode of the hold display can be changed, the parallel effect at the time of loss may be executed in the display mode in which the display mode of the hold display cannot be changed. It suffices if each expression mode can be distinguished by the player.

In addition, when the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed, as the second parallel effect, a plurality of characters reappear in the vicinity of the hold display, and either the parallel effect at the time of hit or the parallel effect at the time of loss is performed. May be executed. In addition, when the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed as the second parallel effect, a plurality of characters reappear in the vicinity of the hold display as the third parallel effect, and the parallel effect at the time of hit and the parallel effect at the time of loss appear again. You may perform one of the productions. In addition, when the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed as the third parallel effect, a plurality of characters reappear in the vicinity of the hold display as the fourth parallel effect, and the parallel effect at the time of hit and the parallel effect at the time of loss appear again. Of the productions, there are cases where only the parallel productions at the time of hitting are executed. In this way, even when the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed, as long as a plurality of characters reappear in the vicinity of the hold display, the parallel effect at the time of hit may be executed, and the parallel effect at the time of loss may be executed. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not a plurality of characters will reappear after the effect is executed. In addition, in the fourth parallel production, the parallel production at the time of hit is always executed, so even if the parallel production at the time of loss is executed, it is expected that the parallel production will be continued after that. It can be noticed. As for the 1st to 3rd parallel effects, the greater the number of times the parallel effects are executed, the higher the probability that the parallel effects will be the hit parallel effects, and the higher the possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change. May be set as. As a result, even if the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed, there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change by continuing the parallel effect after that. Therefore, when the parallel effect is continued, the hold display is displayed. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display mode of is changed.

FIG. 245 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of the effect pattern set as the second hold change effect. First, in the hit-time parallel effect pattern A, the effect display device 1600 allows the plurality of characters to appear at the same time so that a plurality of characters appear in the vicinity of the hold display and each character comes into contact with one of the hold displays. In an effect pattern that moves within the display area of the character and executes a parallel effect at the time when the display mode of the hold display that the character touches changes in any of the multiple contacts of the character with respect to the hold display. is there.

Further, in the parallel effect pattern A at the time of loss, a plurality of characters appear in the vicinity of the hold display, and the plurality of characters come into contact with each other on the hold display at the same time. With an effect pattern that moves within the display area of the character and executes a parallel effect at the time of loss, in which the display mode of the hold display that the character touches does not change in any of the multiple contacts of the character to the hold display. is there.

Further, in the hit-time parallel effect pattern B, the parallel effect is executed twice, and after the execution of the parallel effect at the time of loss, a plurality of characters reappear in the vicinity of the hold display as the second parallel effect. This is an effect pattern in which a parallel effect at the time of hit is executed, and the display mode of the hold display that the character touches changes at any of a plurality of contacts of the character with respect to the hold display in the parallel effect at the time of hit. .. Further, the parallel effect pattern B at the time of loss executes the parallel effect twice, and after the execution of the parallel effect at the time of loss, a plurality of characters reappear in the vicinity of the hold display as the second parallel effect. This is an effect pattern in which the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change.

Further, the hit-time parallel effect pattern C executes the parallel effect three times, and after repeating the execution of the parallel effect at the time of loss twice, a plurality of characters in the vicinity of the hold display as the third parallel effect. Reappears to execute the parallel effect at the time of hit, and the display mode of the hold display that the character touches changes in any of the multiple contacts of the character with respect to the hold display in the parallel effect at the time of hit. It is a production pattern to be performed. Further, the parallel effect pattern C at the time of loss executes the parallel effect three times, and after repeating the execution of the parallel effect at the time of loss twice, a plurality of characters in the vicinity of the hold display as the third parallel effect. Is an effect pattern in which is reappeared to execute a parallel effect at the time of loss, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change.

Further, the hit-time parallel effect pattern D executes the parallel effect four times, and after repeating the execution of the parallel effect at the time of loss three times, a plurality of characters in the vicinity of the hold display as the fourth parallel effect. Reappears to execute the parallel effect at the time of hit, and the display mode of the hold display that the character touches changes in any of the multiple contacts of the character with respect to the hold display in the parallel effect at the time of hit. It is a production pattern to be performed.

Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the second hold change effect will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a specific production example of the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the second pending change effect.

First, in this example, in the lower left region of the effect display device 1600, four hold displays are displayed as hold displays corresponding to the number of hold storages on the first special symbol side. Then, at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, for example, when the execution of the second hold change effect is determined for the hold display of hold 2, as shown in FIG. 246 (A), After the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, a plurality of characters (8 characters in this example) appear in the vicinity of the upper side of the hold display while passing from the lower side to the upper side of the hold display while passing through the back side of the hold display. As described above, when a plurality of characters appear, each character passes through the back side of the hold display and appears, so that the visual recognition of the hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not hindered.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 246 (B) and 246 (C), after eight characters appear in the vicinity of the upper side of the hold display, each character contacts any of the hold displays 1 to 4. At the same time, eight characters flow down the hold display while passing through the front side of the hold display. In addition, each time each character touches any of the hold displays 1 to 4, the hold display that the character touches emits light as indicated by a star, and the character touches. It is informed that the display mode of the held display may change. In this way, at the time when each character touches any of the hold displays 1 to 4, each character passes through the front side of the hold display and flows down, and the hold display that the character touches is displayed. Since the light is emitted, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the character has touched the hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, as shown in FIG. 246 (B), when the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed, when each character touches any of the hold displays of hold 1 to 4, in which contact However, the display mode of the hold display that the character touches does not change. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (C), when the parallel effect at the time of hitting is executed, when each character comes into contact with any of the hold displays of hold 1 to 4, the hold 2 is used. When the character touches the hold display (when the character touches the hold display of hold 2 multiple times, any contact time may be used), the hold that the character touches. The display mode of the hold display of 2 changes to the display mode of the hold display (red in this example) determined by the hold notice effect pattern.

In the above-mentioned parallel effect, when a plurality of characters appear and each character touches any of the hold displays 1 to 4, the display mode of the hold display that the character touches changes each time. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a chance of whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes by the number of characters. In addition, at the start of the parallel effect, all eight characters that come into contact with the hold display appear, and the number of characters is clearly indicated, so whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes. The number of chances of can be grasped at the start of the parallel production. Further, in the parallel effect, a plurality of characters appear and the characters come into contact with any of the hold displays of hold 1 to 4, but when a plurality of characters appear, any hold display is displayed. On the other hand, it is not possible to grasp whether each character touches, and it is possible to pay attention to the traveling direction of each character with respect to the hold display. In addition, it is not possible to grasp which of the hold displays 1 to 4 that each character has touched changes in the display mode of the hold display, and each time each character touches the hold display. , It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the hold display that the character touches changes.

In this example, each character is in contact with any of the hold displays 1 to 4, but of the eight characters appearing near the upper side of the hold display, hold 1 to 4 are made to contact. Two characters are in contact with each of the hold displays of 4. However, among the hold displays 1 to 4, many of the eight characters may come into contact with the hold display on which the display mode of the hold display changes. In this case, in the parallel effect, there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold display that many characters have touched will change. Therefore, it is necessary to pay particular attention to which hold display the many characters touch. it can. Further, when the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed, even if the character touches the hold display, the display mode of the hold display that the character touches does not change, but the parallel effect at the time of loss is performed. At the start of, the number of appearing characters may be reduced. In this case, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change depending on whether or not the number of characters appearing at the start of the parallel effect is large.

Then, when the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed, as the second parallel effect, eight characters reappear in the vicinity of the upper side of the hold display, and the parallel effect at the time of hit and the parallel effect at the time of loss are combined. You may do either. In addition, when the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed as the second parallel effect, eight characters reappear near the upper side of the hold display as the third parallel effect, and the parallel effect at the time of hit and the loss occur. You may perform one of the parallel productions of time. Further, when the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed as the third parallel effect, as shown in FIG. 246 (D), as the fourth parallel effect, eight characters are displayed again in the vicinity of the upper side of the hold display. Of the parallel effect at the time of hit and the parallel effect at the time of loss, as shown in FIG. 246 (E), only the parallel effect at the time of hit may be executed. In this way, even when the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed, as long as eight characters reappear near the upper side of the hold display, the parallel effect at the time of hit may be executed, and the parallel effect at the time of loss may be executed. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not eight characters will reappear after performing the parallel effect of time. In addition, in the fourth parallel production, the parallel production at the time of hit is always executed, so even if the parallel production at the time of loss is executed, it is expected that the parallel production will be continued after that. It can be noticed.

In this example, at the start of the parallel effect, a plurality of characters (8 characters in this example) appear in the vicinity of the upper side of the hold display, but at the start of the parallel effect at the time of hit, It is possible to make a plurality of characters appear so as to include a special character whose display mode of the hold display is determined to change. In this case, if a plurality of characters include a special character at the start of the parallel effect, the display mode of the hold display in which the special character comes into contact with the hold display when the special character comes into contact with the hold display. Is always changed, so it is possible to pay attention to the type of character that appears at the start of the parallel effect. Also, from the moment of its appearance, the special character is displayed larger than the normal character other than the special character so that the special character stands out, and it is easy to determine whether or not the multiple characters include the special character. It is possible to grasp. In addition, a plurality of characters are displayed so that their characters partially overlap each other at the time of their appearance, but when a plurality of characters include a special character, the special character is in the foreground. It is displayed on the screen to make a special character stand out, and it is easy to grasp whether or not a plurality of characters include a special character. Further, the special character can appear at the time of executing the parallel effect at the time of hitting, but as the number of times the parallel effect is executed increases, that is, the parallel effect at the time of hitting among the 1st to 4th parallel effects The later the execution timing, the higher the probability that a special character will appear. As a result, even if the parallel effect at the time of loss is executed, there is a high possibility that a special character will appear by continuing the parallel effect after that. Therefore, when the parallel effect is continued, the special character will appear. You can expect to pay attention to whether or not it will appear.

[21-3. Beam production after target production (third pending change production)]
Next, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 4) that executes the third hold change effect as the hold change effect, the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of the change of the decorative symbol. After the movement of, as the character appears, an aim with a predetermined display color appears from the character toward the hold display, and the effect display is made so that the aim is aligned with the hold display whose display mode may change. Either the target effect when moving in the display area of the device 1600 or the target effect when moving in the display area of the display device 1600 so that the aim is not aligned with the hold display. Running. In this hit target effect, by aiming at the hold display, the display mode of the hold display with the aim may change in the beam effect described later, whereas the target at the time of loss In the effect, it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change without executing the beam effect described later because the aim is not set with respect to the hold display. That is, it suggests whether or not the display mode of the hold display may change depending on whether or not the aim is applied to the hold display.

It should be noted that the aim for the hold display is displayed in any of blue, red, and rainbow colors, as in the display mode of the hold display that may change. Then, when the display mode of the hold display that is aimed at changes in the beam effect described later by aiming at the hold display, the display mode of the hold display changes to the display color of the aim. I have to. Therefore, it is possible to grasp what kind of display mode the hold display may change before before whether or not the display mode changes.

In addition, when the target effect at the time of hit is executed, the beam is emitted toward the hold display that is aimed at the target effect at the time of hit, and the beam collides with the hold display that is aimed at at the time of hit. The beam effect of the above and the beam effect at the time of loss when the beam is bounced off without colliding with the hold display that is aimed at are executed. In this hit-time beam effect, when the beam collides with the hold display aimed at by the hit-time target effect, the display mode of the hold display on which the beam collides changes, whereas when the beam is lost. In the beam effect, the display mode of the hold display does not change because the beam does not collide with the hold display aimed at by the target effect at the time of hitting. That is, it suggests whether or not the mode of the hold display changes depending on whether or not the beam collides with the hold display. In this way, when the target effect is executed, although it is notified what kind of display mode the hold display may change depending on the display color of the aim, the target effect at the time of hitting among the target effects is notified. The display mode of the hold display does not change unless the beam effect at the time of hitting is further executed after executing.

As the characters appearing in the target effect and the beam effect, the probability of whether or not the target display is aimed at the hold display and the probability of whether or not the beam collides with the hold display in the beam effect are Any of the three different characters A to C have appeared. Of these, character A has a higher probability of aiming at the hold display in the target effect than other characters, but is set so that the probability of the beam colliding with the hold display in the beam effect is lower. ing. In addition, the character B is set so that the probability of aiming at the hold display in the target effect and the probability of the beam colliding with the hold display in the beam effect are medium compared to other characters. Has been done. Further, the character C has a lower probability of aiming at the hold display in the target effect than other characters, but is set so that the probability of the beam colliding with the hold display in the beam effect is higher. There is. In this way, by making the expectations of the target effect and the beam effect different depending on the type of character that appears at the start of the target effect, the degree of attention to those effects can be made different.

FIG. 247 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of the effect pattern set as the third pending change effect. First, as for the target effect pattern at the time of loss, the beam effect is executed when the character appears and the aiming at a predetermined display color appears from the character toward the hold display and the aim does not match the hold display. This is an effect pattern for executing the target effect at the time of loss, in which it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change.

In addition, in the beam effect pattern at the time of hit, as the character appears, the aiming at a predetermined display color appears from the character toward the hold display, and the aim is set to the hold display, so that the aim is held. After performing a hit-and-miss target effect that suggests that the display mode of the display may change, a beam is fired at the aiming hold display, and the beam collides with the aiming hold display. This is an effect pattern for executing a beam effect at the time when the display mode of the hold display on which the beam collides changes.

In addition, in the beam effect pattern at the time of loss, as the character appears, the character aims at the hold display in a predetermined display color, and the aim is set with respect to the hold display, so that the aim is held. After performing a hit target effect that suggests that the display mode of the display may change, the beam is fired toward the aiming hold display, and the beam does not collide with the aiming hold display. This is an effect pattern for executing the beam effect at the time of loss, which determines that the display mode of the hold display does not change.

Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the third hold change effect will be described with reference to FIG. 248. FIG. 248 is a specific production example of the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the third pending change effect.

First, in this example, in the lower left region of the effect display device 1600, four hold displays are displayed as hold displays corresponding to the number of hold storages on the first special symbol side. Then, at the time when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, for example, when the execution of the third hold change effect is determined for the hold display of hold 2, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), After the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, a character appears on the right side of the display area, and two red sights directed by the character toward the hold display appear in the vicinity of the hold display. These two sights are designed to fuel expectations by repeatedly aiming and disagreeing with any of the hold indications 1 to 4. In this way, when two sights in red appear, it can be grasped that the display mode of the hold display may change to red, which is the display color of the sights, but the two in red At the time when the aim appears, it is not possible to know whether or not the aim is aimed at the hold display and which hold display is aimed at, and it is possible to pay attention to the traveling directions of the two aims. it can.

Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (B), when the target effect at the time of hitting is executed, the hold display of hold 2 is set after a predetermined time has elapsed from the appearance of the two sights in red. The two sights are aligned. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 248 (C), when the target effect at the time of loss is executed, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the appearance of the two sights in red, the two are displayed with respect to the hold display. It is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change because it is erased without aiming. In this way, when two aims are aligned with the hold display of hold 2, it is understood that the display mode of the hold display of hold 2 may change to red, which is the display color of the aim. However, when the two sights are aligned with the hold display of hold 2, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the display mode of the hold display of hold 2 actually changes, and in the subsequent beam production, It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the hold display of hold 2 changes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 248 (C), the beam effect is executed after the execution of the target effect at the time of hitting, but in the beam effect, toward the hold display of the hold 2 aimed at by the target effect at the time of hitting. Fire a beam. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (D), when the beam effect at the time of hit is executed, the beam collides with the hold display of the hold 2 aimed at at the target effect at the time of hit, and the beam collides with the hold display. The display mode of the hold display of the collided hold 2 changes to red, which is the display color of the aim. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 248 (E), when the beam effect at the time of loss is executed, the beam is bounced off without colliding with the hold display of the hold 2 aimed at by the target effect at the time of hit. , The display mode of the hold display of hold 2 does not change.

In the above-mentioned target effect, after notifying what kind of display mode the hold display may change depending on the display color of the aim, the hold display is displayed depending on whether or not the aim is met for any of the hold displays. It notifies whether the possibility that the display mode changes will continue and which is the hold display that may change the display mode, and in the beam effect after the execution of the target effect at the time of hit, the aim is It is notified whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes depending on whether or not the beam collides with the matched hold display, and the notification is made step by step. In this way, by notifying in stages until the display mode of the hold display changes, it is possible to pay attention to the production contents until the end of the target production and the beam production while having different expectations at each stage. ..

In this example, when two sights appear in the target effect and the sights are aligned with one of the hold displays, two sights are aimed at the same hold display among the hold displays 1 to 4. Although all of the above are matched, the following patterns may be set. For example, even if the first aim is set for one of the two hold displays and the second aim is not set for either hold display, a pattern is set. Good. Also, of the two aiming, the first aiming is made to match one of the holding displays, and the second aiming is made to the holding display different from the holding display with the first aiming. You may set a pattern that matches. However, if each of the two aiming for two different hold displays is met, then each of the two different hold displays will be fired towards the aiming hold display in a subsequent beam effect. It is determined that the beam is emitted toward the image, and that the beam does not collide with at least one of the two different hold displays, and the display mode of the hold display that the beam does not collide with does not change. In addition, when both of the two aiming are aligned with the same hold display, the probability that the beam collides with the held display with the two aimed in the subsequent beam effect as compared with the other patterns. To increase the probability that the display mode of the hold display will change. In such a case, at the stage of whether or not the target effect is aimed at the hold display, two aims at the same hold display or two aims at different hold displays. You can also pay attention to it.

Further, in the above, of the two sights, a pattern in which the display color of the first sight and the display color of the second sight are different may be set. In addition, two characters appear in the target effect, a different pattern is set for the character with the first aim and the character with the second aim, and the aimed display is set in the beam effect. When firing the beam, each character may fire the beam towards the hold display.

[22. Stock production that spans multiple fluctuations]
In the present embodiment, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the operation effective time for enabling the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is set during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the variation display of the special symbol). However, it is possible to execute an operation effect capable of operating the pressing operation unit 303 over the operation effective time. Further, when a game ball wins a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the game specified from the pre-determination command. When a variation pattern to be executed is specified as pre-judgment information such as a mode type (type of variation pattern) of the effect, from the time of pre-determination of the execution of the operation effect to the execution of the operation effect. It is possible to execute a stock effect in which one of a plurality of types of addition times is sequentially added at a plurality of timings set between. In this example, one of a plurality of types of addition times is added at least for each pending digestion (for each change display of the special symbol) from the time of pre-determination of the execution of the operation effect to the execution of the operation effect. It is possible to add time sequentially.

In addition, at the time of pre-determining the execution of the operation effect, the operation effective time set in the operation effect is specified, and the total addition time added in the stock effect is sequentially determined in the stock effect so as to match the operation effective time. By setting the addition time to be added, it is possible to continue to operate (hold down) the pressing operation unit 303 for the operation effective time, which is the total of the addition time added in the stock effect, when the operation effect is executed. There is.

FIG. 249 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of the stock effect over a plurality of fluctuations when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance. As shown in FIG. 249 (A), when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 4 is lit (number of holds = 4), a predetermined addition time is required until the operation effect is executed at the time of hold digestion. Six stock times are set as the timing of adding. Specifically, as the timing for adding the predetermined addition time, the stock time 6 during the change when the hold 3 changes, the stock time 5 during the change when the hold 2 changes, and the stock time 4 during the change when the hold 1 changes. , The stock period 1 to 3 is set before the operation effect is executed during the fluctuation during the hold digestion, for a total of 6 stock periods. In this way, from the time of pre-determination of the execution of the operation effect to the execution of the operation effect, one stock time is set at each hold change before the hold digestion at which the operation effect is to be executed. At the same time, three stock times are set at the time of hold digestion in which the operation effect is to be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (B), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 3 is lit (number of holds = 3), a predetermined operation effect is executed before the operation effect is executed at the time of hold digestion. Five stock times are set as the timing for adding the addition time. Specifically, as the timing for adding the predetermined addition time, the stock time 5 during the change when the hold 2 changes, the stock time 4 during the change when the hold 1 changes, and the execution of the operation effect during the change during the hold digestion. A total of five stock times, consisting of stock times 1 to 3, are set in advance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (C), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 2 is lit (number of holds = 2), a predetermined operation effect is executed before the operation effect is executed at the time of hold digestion. Four stock times are set as the timing for adding the addition time. Specifically, as the timing for adding the predetermined addition time, a total of 6 consisting of a stock time 4 during the fluctuation during the hold 1 change and a stock time 1 to 3 before the execution of the operation effect during the change during the hold digestion. The stock time of the times is set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (D), when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 1 is lit (number of holds = 1), a predetermined operation effect is executed before the operation effect is executed at the time of hold digestion. Three timings are set as the timing for adding the addition time. Specifically, as the timing for adding the predetermined addition time, a total of three stock periods, which are stock periods 1 to 3 before the execution of the operation effect during the fluctuation during the hold digestion, are set.

As shown in FIG. 250 (A), any of 5 to 10 seconds is set as the operation effective time used for the operation effect, and each operation is effective as a variation pattern for executing the operation effect. Multiple types of fluctuation patterns with time are set. Further, at each timing of adding a predetermined addition time, any of 0 to 5 seconds is set as the addition time. If the addition time is 0 seconds, the addition time does not increase. Then, at the time of pre-determining the execution of the operation effect, the operation effective time set in the operation effect is specified, and the total of the addition times added in the stock effect is added at each timing so as to match the operation effective time. The addition time to be added is determined in advance, and the predetermined addition time is sequentially added until the operation effect is executed. In this example, any of 0 to 5 seconds is set as the addition time at each timing of adding the predetermined addition time, but at each timing, the predetermined time is set to be subtracted. Alternatively, for example, addition and subtraction may be repeated until the operation effect is executed. In this way, even when the time is subtracted in the stock effect, the total of the time added in the stock effect and the time subtracted in the stock effect is set to match the operation effective time. It is supposed to be.

Further, as the operation effective time used for the operation effect, in addition to any of 5 to 10 seconds, ∞ (infinity) is also set, and this ∞ is a variation pattern in which the operation effect is executed. Of these, only the fluctuation pattern at the time of hit is set. In addition, when ∞ is specified as the operation effective time set in the operation effect at the time of predetermining the execution of the operation effect, the addition is performed at any of a plurality of timings for adding the predetermined addition time. The addition time to be added is determined in advance to ∞, and the addition time of ∞ is added at that timing to match the operation effective time of ∞. In this way, when the addition time of ∞ is added in the stock effect, the hit is always derived as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) that executes the operation effect. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not to add ∞ as the addition time. However, when the addition time added in the stock effect is ∞, it is notified that the operation effective time used for the operation effect is ∞, but when the operation effect is executed, the operation effective time is 10 seconds. As in the case of being notified, the operation valid time is set to end when 10 seconds have elapsed.

Further, when determining the variation pattern for executing the operation effect, the variation pattern is determined so that the longer the effective operation time used for the operation effect, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Further, since the total of the addition times added in the stock effect matches the operation effective time, the longer the addition time added at each timing, the higher the probability that the operation effective time becomes longer. In this way, the longer the effective operation time used for the operation effect, the higher the probability of deriving a hit as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) at which the operation effect is executed. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the addition time added at each timing and the operation effective time, which is the total of the addition times, are long.

As shown in FIG. 250 (B), when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 4 is lit (number of holds = 4), a predetermined addition time is required until the operation effect is executed at the time of hold digestion. Since 6 stock times are set as the timing to add, use the hold 4 o'clock scenario determination table so that the total of the addition time added at the 6 timings matches the operation valid time. , The addition time to be added at each timing is determined in advance. Specifically, when 10 seconds is preliminarily determined as the operation effective time, one of the scenarios PTN_ho 4_A1 to A3 is determined. For example, when the scenario PTN_ho 4_A3 is determined, the additional time is set. Stock time 6 is 2 seconds, stock time 5 is 0 seconds (not added), stock time 4 is 1 second, stock time 3 is 1 second, stock time 2 is 1 second, and stock time 1 is 1 second. By sequentially adding the addition time determined in advance at the six timings, it is made to match the operation effective time of 10 seconds. Further, when ∞ (10) seconds is preliminarily determined as the operation effective time, one of the scenarios PTN_ho 4_B1 to B3 is determined, but in such a scenario PTN_ho 4_B1 to B3, it is not 0 seconds. The addition time of ∞ is added at the last timing of the stock time when the addition time is added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 250 (C), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 3 is lit (number of holds = 3), a predetermined operation effect is executed before the operation effect is executed at the time of hold digestion. Since five stock times are set as the timing to add the addition time, the hold 3 o'clock scenario determination table is set so that the total of the addition time added at the five timings matches the operation valid time. It is decided that the addition time to be added at each timing is determined in advance. Similarly, when the execution of the operation effect is pre-determined when the hold 2 is lit (number of holds = 2), or when the execution of the operation effect is pre-determined when the hold 1 is lit (number of holds = 1), The addition time to be added at each timing is determined in advance using the corresponding scenario determination table (not shown).

Further, in the operation effect, the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated over the operation effective time, and the predetermined meter can be raised by continuing to operate the pressing operation unit 303 within the operation effective time. The effect of whether or not the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit is executed. Further, among the fluctuation patterns for executing the operation effect, when the variation pattern at the time of hitting is determined, the pressing operation unit 303 is continuously operated in the operation effect to determine a predetermined value within the effective operation time. While the meter can reach the upper limit, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is continuously operated in the operation effect, it is determined within the operation effective time. The meter does not reach the upper limit. However, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of hit is determined, the predetermined meter is the upper limit when the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated in the operation effect or even though the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the operation effect. If it is determined that the predetermined meter has not reached the upper limit at the time when the operation effective time has elapsed, such as when the operation effective time has not been reached, the predetermined meter is set to reach the upper limit at the time when the operation effective time has elapsed. That is, it is notified whether or not to derive a hit as a result of the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol) depending on whether or not the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit within the operation valid period. Further, as described above, when determining the variation pattern for executing the operation effect, the variation pattern is determined so that the longer the operation effective time used for the operation effect, the higher the jackpot expectation. Therefore, the longer the effective operation time used for the operation effect, the higher the probability that the predetermined meter will reach the upper limit within the effective operation period, and the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated with expectation within the effective operation time. ..

Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the stock effect and the operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252. FIGS. 251 and 252 are specific examples of effects in the effect display device 1600 when the stock effect and the operation effect are executed.

First, in this example, when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 4 is lit (number of holds = 4), the operation effective time set in the operation effect is specified, and the addition is added in the stock effect. Hold 3 Stock time 6 during change during change, Hold 2 Stock time 5 during change during change, Hold 1 Stock time 4 during change during change, Hold so that the total time matches the operation valid time The addition time to be added at each of the stock periods 1 to 3 is determined in advance before the operation effect is executed during the fluctuation during digestion. Then, as shown in FIG. 251 (A), when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, for example, when 2 seconds is determined as the addition time to be added during the variation when the hold 3 changes. As shown in FIG. 251 (B), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, "2:00 STOCK" is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area, and the addition time added in the stock effect is 2 seconds. I'm notifying you.

Further, as shown in FIG. 251 (C), during the execution of the stock effect, the total addition time added by the stock effect is displayed on the upper side of the display area. For example, 2 seconds is added as the addition time. If so, "TOTAL 2:00" is displayed on the upper side of the display area to notify that the total addition time added in the stock effect is 2 seconds. Then, until the hold digestion time when the operation effect is to be executed, every time the hold order changes (every time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started), the addition of the addition time in the stock effect is repeated to stock. The total of the addition time added in the production can be increased step by step. Similarly, even during the variable display of the decorative symbol at the time of holding digestion at which the operation effect is to be executed, the addition of the addition time in the stock effect is repeated before the operation effect is executed, and the addition added in the stock effect. Allows the total time to increase in stages.

Further, as shown in FIG. 252 (D), at the start of the operation effect, first, "TOTAL 5:00" is displayed on the upper side of the display area, and the total addition time added in the stock effect, that is, the pressing operation unit 303. It is notified that the operation valid time for enabling the operation of is 5 seconds. In addition, in the substantially central part of the display area, a message "Align the symbols in time!" Is displayed, and behind the message, the number symbol of the jackpot symbol "777" is displayed in a semi-transparent manner. doing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 252 (E), after the start of the operation effect, the remaining time obtained by subtracting the time from the operation effective time with the passage of time on the upper side of the display area (in this example, "remaining 3:30"). ") Is displayed. Further, in the substantially central portion of the display area, an image imitating the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed, and a message instructing to continue (hold down) the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed. Then, when the pressing operation unit 303 is continuously operated within the effective operation time, the meter drawn inside the translucent numerical symbol is gradually raised, and the opaque area is increased, so that the jackpot symbol is increased. It is getting closer to completion.

As an image imitating the pressing operation unit 303, three display modes are provided so that the image is displayed in any of blue, red, and rainbow colors. Then, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher in the order of blue, red, and rainbow colors. Therefore, when a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit is displayed as an image imitating the pressing operation unit 303, there is a high probability that the meter will reach the upper limit within the effective operation time, and the motivation to participate in the operation effect can be increased. ..

Further, the shorter the operation effective time, which is the total of the addition times added in the stock effect, the faster the meter rises with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. Further, the shorter the remaining time of the effective operation time, the faster the rising speed of the meter with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated is set. Further, when the fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting is determined, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined while the rising speed of the meter is set to be faster with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. If so, the ascending speed of the meter is set to be slower with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. By controlling the ascending speed of the meter in this way, it is possible to effectively enjoy whether or not the meter reaches the upper limit within the effective operation time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 252 (F), when the meter reaches the upper limit within the effective operation time, the numerical symbol of "777", which is the jackpot symbol, is completed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is completed. ) Is a big hit. When the fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting is determined, the meter can reach the upper limit by continuing to operate the pressing operation unit 303 within the effective operation time, but the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. If it is determined that the meter has not reached the upper limit at the time when the operation effective time has elapsed, such as when the meter has not reached the upper limit even though the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the operation effective time is changed. At the lapse of time, the meter is set to reach the upper limit.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 252 (G), when the meter does not reach the upper limit within the effective operation time, the numerical symbol of "777", which is the jackpot symbol, is not completed, and at the time when the effective operation time elapses, A message "TIME UP" is displayed to notify that the result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is a loss. When the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined, the meter does not reach the upper limit even if the pressing operation unit 303 is continuously operated within the effective operation time.

[22-1. Stock effect at the time of pre-judgment of the mode immediately before the operation of the operation effect]
In the above-described embodiment, it is possible to continue to operate (hold down) the pressing operation unit 303 for a predetermined operation effective time when the operation effect is executed, and when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined, the addition time is added. A stock effect in which the addition time is sequentially added so that the total matches the operation effective time is executed. However, in this example, in the execution of the operation effect, a predetermined operation immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is executed. The pressing operation unit 303 can be operated by, and at the time of predetermining the execution of the operation effect, the stock effect that sequentially stocks the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect is executed.

Specifically, when a game ball wins a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the pre-determination command is specified. When a variation pattern for executing an operation effect having a predetermined operation immediately preceding mode is specified as pre-judgment information such as a mode type (variation pattern type) of the game effect to be performed, the operation effect is executed. It is possible to execute a stock effect that sequentially stocks the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect at a plurality of timings set between the time of the preliminary determination of the above and the execution of the operation effect. As the timing for stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect, a stock time is provided as in the timing for adding the predetermined addition time described above. That is, between the time of pre-determination of the execution of the operation effect and the execution of the operation effect, one stock time is set at each hold change before the hold digestion at which the operation effect is to be executed. At the same time, three stock times are set at the time of hold digestion in which the operation effect is to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 253 (A), the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect include whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, and whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates depending on the strength. A combination of whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red, green, or blue is set, and as a variation pattern for executing the operation effect, a plurality of variables having the contents of the mode immediately before each operation. A type of variation pattern is set. Further, at each timing of stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates depending on the strength, or the pressing operation unit 303 is red. Either green or blue lights are set. Then, at the time of predetermining the execution of the operation effect, the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect is specified, and the content of the mode immediately before the operation that is stocked in the stock effect is the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect. The contents of the mode immediately before the operation to be stocked at each timing are determined in advance so as to match, and the contents of the predetermined mode immediately before the operation are sequentially stocked until the execution of the operation effect. ..

In this example, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates depending on the strength, or the pressing operation unit 303 at each timing of stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect. The content of whether the 303 is lit in red, green, or blue is set, but at each timing, the content of the mode immediately before the operation may be set to be erased. For example, the stocking and erasing of the contents of the mode immediately before the operation may be repeated before the operation effect is executed. In this way, even when the content of the mode immediately before the operation is erased by the stock effect, the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked by the stock effect and the content of the mode immediately before the operation erased by the stock effect are added together. Is set to match the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect.

Further, when determining the fluctuation pattern for executing the operation effect, as the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect, whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes or whether the pressing operation unit 303 is strong or weak The fluctuation pattern is determined so that the jackpot expectation is different depending on the combination of whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red, green, or blue. As a general rule, the fluctuation pattern is determined so that the jackpot expectation is high in the order of lighting, vibration, and protrusion of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, in the mode immediately before the operation in which the pressing operation unit 303 is lit, the fluctuation pattern is determined in the order of blue → green → red so that the jackpot expectation is high, and in the mode immediately before the operation in which the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates. , The fluctuation pattern is determined so that the big hit expectation is high in the order of weak vibration → strong vibration.

As shown in FIG. 253 (B), when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 4 is lit (number of holds = 4), the operation effect is operated until the operation effect is executed at the time of hold digestion. Since six stock times are set as the timing for stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation to be performed, the contents of the mode immediately before the operation stocked at the six timings are the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect. The contents of the mode immediately before the operation to be stocked at each timing are determined in advance using the hold 4 o'clock scenario determination table so as to coincide with. Specifically, when the operation immediately before operation mode 1 (protrusion & vibration A & red) is preliminarily determined as the content of the operation immediately before operation mode that operates in the operation effect, one of the scenarios PTN_main 4_A1 to A5 is determined. For example, when the scenario PTN_main 4_A1 is determined, the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes at the stock time 6, the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly at the stock time 5, and the pressing operation unit 303 is red at the stock time 4. The notification that lights up with, and the notification that no stock is made at stock times 1 to 3 are determined in advance, and the contents of the predetermined operation immediately before operation are sequentially stocked at the six timings, so that the operation immediately before operation mode that operates in the operation effect is performed. It is made to match the contents of. In this example, when the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect is the mode 1 immediately before the operation (protrusion & vibration A & red), the jackpot expectation is the highest among the plurality of types of the modes immediately before the operation. , Notification that the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, notification that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly, notification that the pressing operation unit 303 lights up in red, and when all of the notifications are notified, a blessing effect for notifying a blessing message or the like is executed. doing. Further, in this example, when the contents of the mode immediately before the operation are not stocked even though it is the stock time, such as the stock time 1 to 3 of the scenario PTN_ho 4_A1, a disappointing effect is executed to notify that the stock is not stocked. doing.

Further, when the content of the mode immediately before the operation includes that the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red, it is notified that the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red, for example, in the scenario PTN_main 4_A3. It is possible to notify that the color will be lit in blue or green, which is a color with a lower expectation of a big hit than red, at the stock time earlier than that. As described above, in this example, it is possible to notify the color of the pre-determined pressing operation unit 303 in the order of green → blue → red, which is the order of the jackpot expectation. For this reason, even if a notification is given that the color has a low expectation of a big hit, it should be noted whether or not the notification changes to a notification that the color has a high expectation of a big hit will be turned on at the subsequent stock time. Can be done.

Further, when the content of the mode immediately before the operation includes the strong vibration of the pressing operation unit 303, it is better than notifying that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly, for example, in the scenario PTN_main 4_A4. At the previous stock period, it is possible to notify that a weak vibration is a vibration mode in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than that of a strong vibration. As described above, in this example, it is possible to notify the vibration mode of the pre-determined pressing operation unit 303 in the order of weak vibration → strong vibration, which is the order of the expected degree of jackpot. For this reason, even when a notification of weak vibration with a low jackpot expectation is given, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the notification changes to a notification of a strong vibration with a high jackpot expectation at the subsequent stock time. ..

Further, when the mode immediately before the operation 18 (no protrusion & no vibration & blue) is preliminarily determined as the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect, one of the scenarios PTN_main 4_B1 to B3 is determined. However, in such a scenario PTN_preservation 4_B1 to B3, it is notified that the pressing operation unit 303 lights up in blue at any of the stock timings 4 to 6.

Further, as shown in FIG. 253 (C), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 3 is lit (number of holds = 3), the operation effect is performed before the operation effect is executed at the time of hold digestion. Since five stock times are set as the timing for stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in, the content of the mode immediately before the operation that is stocked at the five timings is the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect. The content of the mode immediately before the operation to be stocked at each timing is determined in advance using the hold 3 o'clock scenario determination table so as to match the content of. Similarly, when the execution of the operation effect is pre-determined when the hold 2 is lit (number of holds = 2), or when the execution of the operation effect is pre-determined when the hold 1 is lit (number of holds = 1), The contents of the mode immediately before the operation to be stocked at each timing are determined in advance using the corresponding scenario determination table (not shown).

Next, a stock effect for stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation and a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a specific production example of the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the stock effect and the operation effect that stock the contents of the mode immediately before the operation.

First, in this example, when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 4 is lit (number of holds = 4), the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect is specified and stocked in the stock effect. So that the content of the mode immediately before the operation matches the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect, the stock time 6 during the change when the hold 3 changes, the stock time 5 during the change when the hold 2 changes, and the hold 1 change during the change. The contents of the mode immediately before the operation to be stocked at each timing of the stock time 4 during the time fluctuation and the stock time 1 to 3 before the execution of the operation effect during the fluctuation during the hold digestion are determined in advance. Then, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), at the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, for example, the pressing operation unit 303 is red as the content of the operation immediately before the operation that is stocked during the variation at the time of the hold 3 change. When the notification of lighting is decided, as shown in FIG. 254 (B), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, "button red STOCK" is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area and stocked. It is notified that the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the production is the lighting of the pressing operation unit 303 in red.

Further, at the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, for example, when the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly is determined as the content of the operation immediately before the operation that is stocked during the variation at the time of the hold 3 change. As shown in FIG. 254 (C), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, "button vibration AS TOCK" is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area, and the content of the mode immediately before the operation is stocked in the stock effect. Notifies that it is a strong vibration of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, at the time of starting the variation display of the decorative symbol, for example, when the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes is determined as the content of the operation immediately before the operation to be stocked during the variation at the time of the hold 3 change. As shown in FIG. 254 (D), after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, "button protrusion STOCK" is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area, and the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the stock effect is displayed. Notifying that the pressing operation unit 303 is protruding.

Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (E), during the execution of the stock effect, a list of the contents of the mode immediately before the operation stocked by the stock effect is displayed on the upper side of the display area. When the pressing operation unit 303 is stocked in red as the content, it is displayed as "button red STOCK completed" on the upper side of the display area, and the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the stock effect is pressed. Notifying that the operation unit 303 is lit in red. Then, until the hold digestion time when the operation effect is to be executed, each time the hold order changes (every time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started), the stock of the contents of the mode immediately before the operation in the stock effect is repeated. Therefore, the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the stock production can be gradually increased. Similarly, even during the variable display of the decorative symbol at the time of holding digestion at which the operation effect is to be executed, the stock of the contents of the mode immediately before the operation in the stock effect is repeated before the operation effect is executed, and the stock is stocked in the stock effect. The contents of the mode immediately before the operation performed can be gradually increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (F), at the start of the operation effect, that is, immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 is collectively referred to as the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the stock effect. It's working. For example, when the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect is the mode 1 immediately before the operation (protrusion & vibration A & red), the pressing operation unit 303 lights up in red, vibrates strongly, and operates so as to further protrude. doing. During the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 in the content of the mode immediately before the operation, "STOCK is being released" is displayed on the upper side of the display area. Then, in the operation effect, it is possible to operate the pressing operation unit 303 over the operation effective time as in the operation effect after the execution of the stock effect for adding the addition time described above, and the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. By continuing, it is possible to raise the predetermined meter, and the effect of whether or not the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit within the effective operation time is executed.

In this example, when the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the stock effect is the vibration of the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The pressing operation unit 303 may vibrate immediately after the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. Further, in this example, after the contents of the mode immediately before the operation are stocked in the stock effect, and immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 is collectively operated with the contents of the mode immediately before the operation. When the content of the mode immediately before the operation is stocked in the stock effect, the pressing operation unit 303 may be operated once with the content of the mode immediately before the operation. Further, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 in the content of the mode immediately before the operation may be maintained from the time when the content of the mode immediately before the operation is stocked in the stock effect to immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. In such a case, the content of the mode immediately before the operation can be grasped at the time when the content of the mode immediately before the operation is stocked by the stock effect without visually recognizing the display area.

[23. Restrictions on light guide production using light guide plates]
In the present embodiment, when the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is light-emitting and decorated during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the variation display of the special symbol), the variation is executed. Even if the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is performed from the time when the variation of the decorative symbol that executed the light guide effect stops (when the special symbol variation stops) to the elapse of a specific period. It limits the execution of the light guide effect during fluctuations. In addition, when a specific period elapses from the time when the decorative symbol that executed the variable light guide effect stops changing (when the special symbol stops changing), the light guide plate 2601 is light-emitting and decorated in a manner different from the variable light guide effect. At the time of cancellation notification, the light guide effect is executed, and the restriction on the execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is released.

In addition, if a change display of the decorative symbol is performed when a specific period has elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol that executed the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is stopped, the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification is displayed at the time of cancellation notification. When the light guide effect A is executed, but the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, the light guide plate 2601 is emitted in a manner different from that of the light guide effect A at the time of release notification as the light guide effect at the time of release notification. At the time of cancellation notification to decorate, the light guide effect B is executed. That is, the mode in which the light guide plate 2601 is light-emitting and decorated differs depending on whether or not the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner when a specific period has elapsed from the time when the decorative symbol that executed the light guide effect during fluctuation is stopped. ing.

FIG. 255 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification when a specific period occurs after the execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation. First, when starting the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the variation pattern command and determination are performed from the main control board 1310. A result notification command is transmitted, but when a fluctuation pattern for which the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is to be executed is specified from the fluctuation pattern command, the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is displayed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. The light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with the light of the LED 2611 or the LED 2621 to display the pattern. Further, the timing of displaying the pattern on the light guide plate 2601 can be either during the normal fluctuation of whether or not the reach is reached or during the reach production after the reach, and the pattern is displayed on the light guide plate 2601. By doing so, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit in the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, when the decorative symbol on which the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is stopped fluctuating, the time counting of whether or not a specific period has elapsed is started, and whether the specific period has elapsed until the specific period elapses. Keep counting the time of whether or not. Until this specific period elapses, the light guide effect during fluctuation is restricted, and the light guide plate 2601 is not light-emitting and decorated. In addition, the time count for whether or not a specific period has passed is counted not only during the period when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is not performed, but also during the decoration symbol variation display (special symbol variation display). I try to keep counting even in the middle). That is, until a specific period elapses, even if the decorative symbol is variablely displayed based on the fluctuation pattern in which the variable light guide effect is executed, the execution of the variable light guide effect is restricted. Therefore, the light guide plate 2601 is not decorated with light emission. In this way, since the variable light guide effect is not executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol after the variable light guide effect is executed until a specific period elapses, the variable light guide effect is not executed. It prevents the execution of the above from being continuous in a short period of time, preventing the light from LED2611 and LED2621 from burdening the eyes of the player, and further preventing the rarity of the effect itself of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 2601 from being lost. can do.

In this example, the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is set to about 5 seconds on average when the normal fluctuation that does not reach is performed, but the execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is restricted. The specific period is set to about 20 seconds. That is, as a specific period, it is set so that it is possible to perform normal fluctuations that do not reach reach four times. For this reason, even if the upper limit number of 4 holds is held at the time when the decorative symbol on which the light guide effect is executed is stopped fluctuating, it is until the 4 holds are exhausted, that is, 4 It is possible not to execute the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation until the variation display of the decorative symbol based on one hold is completed.

As shown in FIG. 255 (A), when a specific period elapses from the time when the change of the decorative symbol on which the light guide effect is executed at the time of change is stopped and the change display of the decorative symbol is performed, the release notification is given. As the light guide effect, the light guide effect A is executed at the time of cancellation notification, and the restriction on the execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is released. Then, in the light guide effect A at the time of cancellation notification, the light guide plate 2601 is light-emitting and decorated in a manner different from that of the light guide effect during fluctuation, for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 158 is prevented from appearing in the light guide effect during fluctuation. It is supposed to appear only in the light guide effect A at the time of cancellation notification. In the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, a light guide plate different from the light guide plate 2601 used in the light guide effect during fluctuation is provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600, and the light guide plate is irradiated with LED light. Then, the pattern shown in FIG. 158 may be displayed. In this way, in the light guide effect A at the time of cancellation notification, by light emitting and decorating the light guide plate 2601 in a manner different from the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation, it is not confused whether or not it is the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation. It is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the variable display of the decorative pattern suggests that the lottery result is likely to be a big hit.

Further, in the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, the time for light emitting and decorating the light guide plate 2601 is set to an extremely shorter time (for example, 1 second or less) than when the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is executed, and the light guide plate 2601 The time to display the pattern is set to end in an instant. As a result, even if the light guide effect A at the time of cancellation notification is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the light guide plate 2601 is changed. It is possible to pay attention to the variable production without hindering the visibility of the production.

In addition, the restriction on the execution of the fluctuating light guide effect is released when a specific period elapses from the time when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on which the fluctuating light guide effect is executed is stopped, but the time point is during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Even if it is the timing to execute the variable light guide effect (when the variable pattern that will execute the variable light guide effect is being executed), the variable light guide effect is executed at that time. At the time of cancellation notification, the light guide effect A is prioritized and executed. In such a case, a predetermined time (for example,, for example,) after the end of the light guide effect A at the time of release notification so that the light guide effect during fluctuation is not continuously executed after the end of the light guide effect A at the time of release notification. After 1 second) has elapsed, the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is to be executed. In this way, by temporarily stopping the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 between the end of the light guide effect A at the time of cancellation notification and the start of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation, the light emission decoration at the time of fluctuation is canceled at the time of execution. It is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the light guide effect A is continuing at the time of notification.

As shown in FIG. 255 (B), when a specific period has elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol on which the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is executed stops, and the change display of the decorative symbol is not performed, the release notification is given. As the light guide effect, the light guide effect B is executed at the time of cancellation notification, and the restriction on the execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is released. Further, in this example, when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more) has passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol is stopped and the change display of the decorative symbol is not performed, the effect display device 1600 or the like is used. , Since the demonstration effect (demonstration effect) such as the introduction of the pachinko machine 1 is executed, there is a high possibility that the demo effect is being executed at the time of executing the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification. Then, in the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification, for example, the pattern lacking the central portion among the patterns shown in FIG. 158 is guided when the light changes, so that the light guide plate 2601 is light-emitting and decorated in a manner different from the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation. It is supposed that it does not appear in the light effect and appears only in the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification. In the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, a light guide plate different from the light guide plate 2601 used in the light guide effect during fluctuation is provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600, and the light guide plate is irradiated with LED light. Then, among the patterns shown in FIG. 158, a pattern in which the central portion is missing may be displayed. As described above, in the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification, the light guide plate 2601 is light-emitting and decorated in a manner different from that of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation, so that it is not confused as to whether or not the light guide effect is at the time of fluctuation. Further, in the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification, when the light guide plate 2601 is light-emitting and decorated, a pattern in which the central portion is missing is displayed in the pattern shown in FIG. 158, so that the pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600 through the central portion. The image being produced during the demonstration can be clearly seen. As a result, in the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification, it is possible to grasp that the decorative symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, and it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that it is a light guide effect at the time of fluctuation.

Further, in the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, the time for emitting and decorating the light guide plate 2601 is set to be longer than the time when the light guide effect is executed when the fluctuation occurs (for example, 5 seconds or more), and the light guide plate 2601 is set. The time to display the pattern continues for a long time. As a result, when the decorative symbol is not variablely displayed, the effect display device 1600 is not paid attention to, but by executing the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification for a long time, the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is produced. It is possible to easily grasp that the restriction on the execution of is lifted. In addition, for the player who is dissatisfied with the restriction on the execution of the light guide effect during fluctuation, the game is made to wait from the time when the decorative symbol that executed the light guide effect during fluctuation stops changing, and the guidance at the time of cancellation notification is made. It is possible to restart the game after executing the light effect B.

Further, if the variation display of the decorative symbol is started during the execution of the light guide effect B at the time of release notification when the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, the light guide effect B at the time of the release notification is terminated. I am doing it. As a result, even when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started during the execution of the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification, the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the light guide plate 2601 and the like It is possible to pay attention to the fluctuation effect without hindering the visibility of the fluctuation effect. Further, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started during the execution of the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification, the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification is finished, but immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Does not perform the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation. That is, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the end of the light guide effect B at the time of release notification so that the light guide effect during fluctuation is not continuously executed after the end of the light guide effect B at the time of release notification. After that, it is decided to execute the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation. In this way, by temporarily stopping the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 between the end of the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification and the start of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation, the light emission decoration at the time of fluctuation is canceled at the time of execution. It is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the light guide effect B is continuing at the time of notification.

Further, if the player operates the pressing operation unit 303 during the execution of the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, it is possible to end the light guide effect B at the time of release notification. As described above, in the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification, the time for emitting and decorating the light guide plate 2601 is set to be longer than the time when the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is executed (for example, 5 seconds or more). If it is desired to end the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, the player may operate the pressing operation unit 303, and it is possible to determine the end timing of the light guide effect B at the time of release notification according to the player's will. It is said. Even during the execution of the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, the player may operate the pressing operation unit 303 to end the light guide effect A at the time of release notification.

Further, in the variable light guide effect, the effect sound is output from the speaker or the like in accordance with the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601, whereas the light guide effect at the time of release notification (light guide effect A at the time of release notification, light guide at the time of release notification). In the effect B), the light guide plate 2601 is light-emitting and decorated, but the effect sound is not output from the speaker or the like. As a result, there is a high possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit in the variable display of the decorative pattern without confusing whether or not it is the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation during the execution of the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that it is suggested.

In this example, various sounds are output from the speaker in each scene according to the progress of the game, but the peripheral control IC 1510a dynamically outputs each channel to each sound to be output from the speaker or the like. On the other hand, when the number of sound combinations to be output exceeds the maximum number of channels (for example, 16 channels) of each channel, the output is scheduled within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. Each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds. Further, the peripheral control IC 1510a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority. In this regard, when the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is executed, the effect sound associated with the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is assigned to the channel and output, while when the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification is executed, the effect associated with the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is produced. The production sound is not output without assigning the sound to the channel itself. That is, when the light guide effect is executed at the time of cancellation notification, the effect sound accompanying the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is not assigned to the channel itself, so that an empty channel is likely to occur. As a result, at the start of the light guide effect A at the time of cancellation notification, a variation effect such as a variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, but it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect sound related to the variation effect is not output. Can be done. Further, when the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification is started, the variation effect such as the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, but even if the variation effect is started during the execution of the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification. , It is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect sound related to the variable effect is not output.

Next, a specific example of the effect of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 when the light guide effect during fluctuation and the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification are executed will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a specific example of the effect of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 when the light guide effect during fluctuation and the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification are executed.

As shown in FIG. 256A, when starting the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the main control A variation pattern command and a judgment result notification command are transmitted from the board 1310, but when a variation pattern for executing the light guide effect at the time of variation is specified from the variation pattern command, the variation of the decorative symbol is being displayed. The light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with the light of the LED 2611 or the LED 2621 to display the pattern. By displaying the pattern on the light guide plate 2601 in this way, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit in the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 256 (B), when the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses and the stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a stop display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and based on the command. Therefore, the stop display of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the special symbol has been confirmed. At this time, counting of time as to whether or not a specific period has elapsed is started, and until the specific period elapses, execution of the light guide effect during fluctuation is restricted, and the light guide plate 2601 emits light. I try not to decorate it.

Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (C), when a specific period has elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol that executed the light guide effect at the time of change has stopped during the change display of the decorative symbol, FIG. 256 (D) As shown in the above, as the light guide effect A at the time of cancellation notification, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with the light of LED2611 or LED2621 to display a pattern different from the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation. doing. In this way, in the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, the restriction on the execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is released by light emitting and decorating the light guide plate 2601 in a manner different from the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (E), when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more) has elapsed from the time when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped and the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, the demonstration effect is executed. However, if a specific period elapses from the time when the decorative symbol that executed the light guide effect during fluctuation stops changing during the execution of the demo effect, a cancellation notification is given as shown in FIG. 256 (F). As the time light guide effect B, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with the light of LED2611 or LED2621, and a pattern lacking the central portion is used as a pattern different from the variable time light guide effect. it's shown. At this time, the image during the demonstration effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be clearly visually recognized from the central portion of the pattern. In this way, the light guide effect B at the time of release notification notifies that the restriction on the execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation has been released by light emitting and decorating the light guide plate 2601 in a manner different from the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation. ing.

[24. A disappointing production during the temporary stop period of the lost pattern in the super reach production]
In the present embodiment, when the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 is started, the variation is changed from the main control board 1310. A pattern command and a judgment result notification command are transmitted, and based on these commands, variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 is started, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle. It is stopped and displayed in the order of decorative patterns. Further, when the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses and the stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a stop display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is responded to based on the command. The stop display of the decorative symbol has been confirmed. In addition, before the stop display of the decorative symbol is confirmed, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is shaken and fluctuated until the stop display is confirmed. During the temporary stop period (about 1 to 2 seconds), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol sways and fluctuates (the decorative symbol sways up and down and left and right in small steps).

In addition, as the variation pattern in which the variation effect such as the reach effect is set, after the lost symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started again from the swaying and fluctuating state. After the lapse of the period, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation pattern of the re-variation that confirms the stop display of the decorative symbol at the stop symbol is also set. Therefore, in a state where the lost symbol sways and fluctuates as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, it is possible to pay attention with expectation as to whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol again.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the game specified from the pre-determination command. When a specific fluctuation pattern that will execute a reach production (super reach production, etc.) with a high expectation of a big hit is specified as pre-judgment information such as a mode type (variation pattern type) of the production. In the temporary stop period of the lost pattern, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with the light of the LED 2621 to display the pattern, and the expected degree of big hit is obtained in the subsequent variable effect. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect at the time of stop, which suggests in advance that a high reach effect will be performed. That is, in the stop look-ahead effect, by irradiating the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 with the light of the LED 2621 to display the pattern, the lottery result can be a big hit in the subsequent variable effect. I try to suggest in advance that it is highly sexual.

In the above-mentioned stop look-ahead effect, if a specific variation pattern that will execute a reach effect (super reach effect, etc.) with a high expectation of a big hit among the reach effects is determined in advance, the variation based on the specific variation pattern is determined. Regardless of whether or not a plurality of variable effects are executed during the period until the effect is executed, it can be executed during the temporary stop period of each decorative symbol in the variable effect. That is, the look-ahead effect at the time of stop can be executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol in the variation effect if a specific fluctuation pattern is preliminarily determined in the state where there is a hold, whereas the look-ahead effect at the time of stop is not held. It is not executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol in the variable effect.

However, in the case where the fluctuation effect in the period after the specific fluctuation pattern is pre-determined is the fluctuation effect at the time of the big hit that stops and displays the big hit symbol as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, or in the super reach production with high expectation of the big hit. In some cases, the look-ahead effect when stopped is not executed. That is, only in the case of the variable effect at the time of loss in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol and in the case of the variable effect other than the super reach effect, the look-ahead effect at the time of stop during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol Is feasible. In this way, when the look-ahead effect at the time of stop is executed during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again from the state in which the lost symbol sways and fluctuates as in the above-mentioned re-variable fluctuation pattern. Since the stop display with the lost symbol is confirmed, there is no expectation as to whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol again when the look-ahead effect at the time of stop is executed, but in the subsequent variable effect. Expectations that the lottery result will be a big hit are being raised.

In this example, it depends on whether or not a specific fluctuation pattern that will execute a reach effect (super reach effect, etc.) with a high expectation of a big hit among the reach effects is determined in advance while there is a hold. Although it is decided whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect at the time of stop during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the variation effect other than the reach effect, the fluctuation pattern in which the lottery result becomes a big hit is determined in advance with the hold. When the determination is made, it may be decided to execute the look-ahead effect at the time of stop with a higher probability than the case where the fluctuation pattern in which the lottery result is lost is determined in advance. Even in such a case, the look-ahead effect at the time of stop becomes an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, and it is suggested in advance that the lottery result is likely to be a big hit in the subsequent variable effect.

In addition, among the super reach effects with high expectation of big hits, the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 causes the variation pattern to execute the super reach effect at the time of loss to stop and display the lost symbol as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. If specified, a disappointing effect is executed to notify that a big hit was not obtained during the temporary suspension period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect. Such a disappointing effect is executed during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, regardless of whether there is a hold or no hold. In addition, if it is a variable effect other than the super reach effect, or if it is a super reach effect at the time of a big hit that stops and displays the big hit symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol among the super reach effects, execute the unfortunate effect. There is no. In this way, when the disappointing effect is executed during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol changes again from the state in which the lost symbol sways and fluctuates as in the above-mentioned re-variation fluctuation pattern. Since the display is not started and the stop display with the lost symbol is confirmed, the expectation for whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol again is not given when the disappointing effect is executed. There is.

As described above, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, the look-ahead effect at the time of stop is not executed, and the unfortunate effect is executed. For this reason, during the temporary suspension period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, not only is there no expectation as to whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol again, but also the lottery result is a big hit in the subsequent variable effect. The expectation that it will be is not given. Also, in the super reach production, the expectation of a big hit is high among the reach productions, so the expectation of becoming a big hit is raised, but at the end of the super reach production at the time of loss, there is nothing to the player like a disappointing production. By executing an effect that does not give expectations, it is possible to prevent an excessively tense feeling from being maintained after the end of the super reach effect.

FIG. 257 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of the look-ahead effect at the time of stop and the unfortunate effect during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol. First, when starting the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the variation pattern command and determination are performed from the main control board 1310. A result notification command is sent, but if a variation effect other than the super reach effect is specified among the variation effects at the time of loss based on the variation pattern command, the variation effect other than the super reach effect is displayed. During the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end, the look-ahead effect at the time of stop can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 257 (A), in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the variable effect other than the super reach effect, when there is no hold or when there is a hold, even in the reach effect. If the specific fluctuation pattern that will execute the reach effect with high expectation of big hit (super reach effect, etc.) is not determined in advance, the look-ahead effect at the time of stop is not executed. In such a case, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the lost symbol is swayed and fluctuated while maintaining the background image at the time when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Based on the stop display command, the stop display of the lost symbol is confirmed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the variable effect other than the super reach effect, the reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit among the reach effects (with a hold). When a specific fluctuation pattern to be executed (such as a super reach effect) is determined in advance, the look-ahead effect at the time of stop is executed. In such a case, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is made to emit light as a look-ahead effect at the time of stop, and the expectation of a big hit is high in the subsequent variable effect. I try to suggest in advance that a reach production will be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 257 (C), when the super reach effect is specified among the variation effects at the time of loss based on the variation pattern command, there is a hold or no hold. Regardless of whether or not there is, during the temporary suspension period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach production, a disappointing production is executed to notify that a big hit was not obtained. In such a case, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the lost symbol shakes and fluctuates while the production image dedicated to the unfortunate production is displayed, which is different from the background image at the time when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, the stop display of the lost symbol is confirmed based on the stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310.

Next, a specific example of the effect of the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the look-ahead effect at the time of stop and the unfortunate effect using the temporary stop period of the lost symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 258. FIG. 258 is a specific example of the effect of the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the stop look-ahead effect and the disappointing effect using the temporary stop period of the lost symbol.

As shown in FIG. 258 (A), when starting the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the main control A variation pattern command and a judgment result notification command are transmitted from the board 1310, and based on the variation pattern command, variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 is started. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (B), after the lapse of a predetermined time, the lost symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the background image at the time when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped is maintained. , The lost pattern is made to fluctuate. Further, as shown in FIG. 258 (C), the stop display of the lost symbol is determined based on the stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310. In addition, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the variable effect other than the super reach effect, if there is no hold, or if there is a hold, the reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit among the reach effects ( If the specific fluctuation pattern for which the super reach effect is to be executed is not determined in advance, the look-ahead effect at the time of stop is not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 258 (D), during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the variable effect other than the super reach effect, there is a hold, and the reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit among the reach effects ( When a specific fluctuation pattern to be executed (such as a super reach effect) is determined in advance, the look-ahead effect at the time of stop is executed. In such a look-ahead effect at the time of stop, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with the light of the LED 2621 to display the pattern, and the reach with high expectation of big hit in the subsequent variable effect. I try to suggest in advance that the production will be done. Further, when the light guide plate 2601 is light-emitting and decorated, the light-emitting mode (emission color, light-emitting time, number of times of light-emitting, etc.) of the light guide plate 2601 is changed according to the degree of expectation of a big hit at the time of executing a specific variation pattern determined in advance. It is possible to change the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2601.

Further, as shown in FIG. 258 (E), when the super reach effect is specified among the variation effects at the time of loss based on the variation pattern command, there is a hold or no hold. Regardless of whether or not there is, a disappointing production is performed during the temporary suspension period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach production. In such a disappointing effect, the background image at the time when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped is different from the background image, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started again as the effect image dedicated to the disappointing effect displayed on the effect display device 1600. The message "End" is displayed to clearly notify that the jackpot was not obtained. Also, in the disappointing production, the lost pattern in the temporarily stopped display state is displayed small in the upper right of the display area, whereas the production image dedicated to the disappointing production is displayed large in the entire display area. Unfortunately, it is easier to pay attention to the production image dedicated to the production. Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (F), the stop display of the lost symbol displayed in the upper right of the display area is determined based on the stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the above-mentioned disappointing production, the production image dedicated to the disappointing production is displayed as a still image without movement such as a character. In addition, while the super reach production is being executed, the sound is output louder than usual from the speaker, etc., whereas the speaker, etc. is being executed during the disappointing production at the end of the super reach production at the time of loss. There is no sound output from. From this as well, in the disappointing production, the player can grasp that the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started again and the player is clearly notified that the big hit was not obtained. ..

Further, in the disappointing production, the character that appeared in the super reach production is displayed as a production image dedicated to the disappointing production. That is, as a disappointing effect, a plurality of types of disappointing effects with different characters are provided, and among the plurality of types of super reach effects, the character that appeared in the executed super reach effect also appears in the disappointing effect. Unfortunately, the production changes according to the type of production. As a result, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, only the same disappointing effect is not executed, and the player can be less likely to get bored. However, after providing a plurality of types of disappointing effects, the disappointing effects may be randomly executed from among the plurality of types during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect.

[25. Button-related production]
Next, the button-related effect will be described. FIG. 259 is an explanatory diagram showing a dialogue notice as an example of the button-related effect executed by the effect display device 1600, FIG. 260 is a timing chart of the dialogue notice shown in FIG. 259, and FIG. 261 is an effect display device 1600. FIG. 262 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation trigger pseudo-error effect as an example of the button-related effect to be executed, and FIG. 262 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-operation pseudo-error effect as an example of the button-related effect executed by the effect display device 1600. 263 (A) is a timing chart of the operation trigger pseudo error effect shown in FIG. 261, and FIG. 263 (B) is a timing chart of the non-operation pseudo error effect shown in FIG. 262.

First, the dialogue notice as a button-related production will be described. In this example, when the main control board 1310 receives the fluctuation pattern command instructing the start of the fluctuation effect and the judgment result notification command according to the lottery result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the lottery related to the notice etc. in the reception command analysis process. Execute the process. That is, the advance notice lottery table corresponding to the advance notice lottery table according to the lottery result (big hit, reach loss, loss, etc.) specified from the fluctuation pattern command or the judgment result command is selected, and a random number (notice random number) for determining the advance notice is selected. By comparing the determined value set in the advance notice lottery table with the acquired advance notice random number, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the advance notice type when the advance notice effect is executed are determined.

Then, when it is decided to execute the dialogue notice as the button-related effect, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 at the timing t0 of FIG. 260 to start the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. (FIG. 259 (A)), a normal reach effect is executed in which the left and right decorative symbols stop at the same symbol to generate a reach and the decorative symbols inside are displayed in a variable manner at a low speed (FIG. 259 (B)). Further, at the timing t1 of FIG. 260 (A) after the reach occurs, the operation instruction display 1600a for instructing the button operation and the remaining time display 1600b are displayed (FIG. 259 (C)). In this example, "Press the button!" Is displayed as the operation instruction display 1600a.

Further, after the peripheral control board 1510 displays the operation instruction display 1600a, the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 (pressing operation unit 303) becomes effective at the timing t2 in FIG. 260 (A) (for example, 5 seconds). Is started, and the scale displayed as the remaining time display 1600b is reduced according to the lapse of the valid period (FIG. 259 (D)). Then, when the effect operation unit 300 is operated at the timing t3 of FIG. 260 (A) within this valid period and an operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the effect display device 1600 to display the main character 1600c. And the dialogue of the main character 1600c are expressed (so-called cut-in) dialogue notice is executed (FIG. 259 (E)). In this example, "Hot!" Is displayed as the dialogue of the main character 1600c, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur as a result of the variable display during execution. In addition, the content displayed as the main character 1600c in the dialogue notice is not only related to the lottery result such as the jackpot expectation, but also the dialogue unrelated to the lottery result (for example, "It's been a while") is displayed. In this case, the player is made to guess that it is unlikely that a big hit will occur as a result of the variable display during execution.

Further, if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated within the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid, the dialogue notice is not executed. If the effect operation unit 300 is not operated in this way, the dialogue notice is not executed, so that the player can be prompted to operate the effect operation unit 300. In addition, even if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated within the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid, the dialogue notice may be executed. In this case, the effect It is possible to rescue the player who has forgotten to operate the operation unit 300 and convey the content of the dialogue notice, that is, the degree of expectation of a big hit.

In this example, after the dialogue notice is executed and the dialogue of the main character 1600c is displayed for a predetermined period, the dialogue announcement is terminated at the timing t4 of FIG. 260 and the dialogue of the main character 1600c and the main character 1600c disappears. A super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is executed (FIG. 260 (F)). A detailed example of the effect during each reach effect is not shown, but in the normal reach effect, for example, the decorative pattern inside is displayed at a low speed near the center of the screen, and the background of the decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right is supported. A "background image for normal reach effect" that is different from the background image at normal time is displayed as the background image to be displayed, and the effect sound for normal reach effect is output, and the decorative pattern inside is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time. For example, the result can be derived and displayed. Further, in the super reach effect different from the normal reach, for example, the main character 1600c or the like is displayed in the central part of the effect display device 1600 (at this time, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced in the lower left part of the effect display device 1600, etc.). (Display), as a background image corresponding to the background of the main character 1600c, a "background image for super reach production" that is different from the background image during normal or normal reach production is displayed, and the production sound for super reach production is displayed. For example, it is possible to output and display a success / failure effect image or the like of whether or not the main character 1600c or the like can achieve a predetermined purpose. In the super reach effect, if the main character 1600c or the like can achieve the predetermined purpose after a predetermined time, it will be a big hit, and if the purpose cannot be achieved, it will be a loss.

In the example shown in FIG. 259, since the judgment result notification command indicating that the jackpot is achieved is received, after displaying the mode in which the predetermined purpose is achieved by the super reach effect (FIG. 259 (F)), the jackpot symbol (FIG. 259 (F)) A state in which all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are stopped at the same symbol, "777" in the example of FIG. 259 (G)) is displayed (FIG. 259 (G)), and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state (FIG. 259 (G)). H)). In addition, it is possible to execute even when the judgment result notification command that is out of line notice is received, and in this case, the interior decoration pattern is displayed without executing the super reach effect different from the normal reach effect after the line notice. It may be stopped at a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols, or after the dialogue is announced, a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is executed to display a mode in which the predetermined purpose could not be achieved, and then the middle decoration is displayed. It is also possible to display an out-of-order symbol in which the symbol is stopped and displayed at a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols.

In this way, in the dialogue notice as the button-related effect, a valid period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid is set during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the effect operation unit 300 is set within this valid period. When the operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 displays the main character 1600c and displays the dialogue of the main character 1600c. In the dialogue notice, the dialogues of the main character 1600c and the main character 1600c are displayed for a predetermined period regardless of the operation timing of the effect operation unit 300, and disappear before the super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is started. It has become like. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 300 is operated at an early stage of the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) and the operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, after the dialogue notice is finished, the decorative symbol is displayed until the timing t4 of FIG. When the normal reach is executed and the timing t4 in FIG. 260 is reached, a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is started, and the effect operation unit 300 is operated to operate the peripheral control board 1510 just before the end of the valid period (for example, 5 seconds). When the signal is input, immediately after the dialogue notice is finished, the timing t4 in FIG. 260 is set and a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is started.

Next, the operation trigger pseudo-error effect as the button-related effect will be described. When the fluctuation pattern command for instructing the start of the fluctuation effect for executing the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the judgment result notification command according to the lottery result are received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is subjected to the above reception command analysis process. After executing the lottery process related to the advance notice, controlling the display of the effect display device 1600 at the timing t0'in FIG. 263 (A), and starting the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, the left and right decorative symbols are the same. A normal reach effect is executed in which the reach that stops at the symbol is generated and the decorative symbol inside is variablely displayed at a low speed (FIG. 261 (A)). When the operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed, the lottery result to the effect that the button-related effect other than the operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed cannot be obtained in the lottery process related to the advance notice or the like. That is, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed, other button-related effects are not executed.

After starting the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the operation instruction display 1600a and the remaining time display 1600b instructing the button operation at the timing t1'in FIG. 263 (A). At the timing t2'in FIGS. 261 (B) and 263 (A), the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid is started, and the remaining time is displayed according to the elapse of the valid period. The scale displayed as 1600b is reduced (FIG. 261 (C)). Then, when the effect operation unit 300 is operated at the timing t3'in FIG. 263 (A) within this valid period and an operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, a variation effect of the decorative symbol and a sound effect (in this example, a sound effect). After interrupting the display and sound during the normal reach production and switching to a pseudo-error mode as if the pachinko machine 1 was in an error state (including a state in which a bug occurred) and displaying it (FIG. 261 (D)), a predetermined period of time. When the timing t4'in FIG. 263 (A) is reached after the lapse of time (for example, after 5 seconds), a pseudo recovery mode in which the pachinko machine 1 is recovered from the error state is displayed (FIG. 261 (E)).

In this example, as a pseudo-error mode, a special image (FIG. 261 (D)) is displayed as if the display contents of the effect display device 1600 were disturbed and solidified (the progress of the effect was stopped). Specifically, a special image (mosaic-like special image) in which the image ((FIG. 261 (C)) at a predetermined timing during the normal reach effect is partially displaced is displayed, and at first glance, the effect display device 1600 is abnormal. It is designed to give the illusion that (error state) has occurred. While the special image is being displayed, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced and displayed on the lower left of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the reduced left, middle, and right decorative patterns are clearly displayed without being partially displaced as in the special image, and are true to the game hall manager, etc. It is made to recognize that it is not an abnormality (error state), and is not misunderstood as an abnormality (error state).

Further, the pseudo-error mode may be a mode that can give the illusion that the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state, and is originally displayed on, for example, the effect display device 1600 in addition to the above-mentioned example of the mosaic-like special image. The image to be output may be displayed in an unfinished state, or the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be displayed as a still image without being updated. Further, an image displayed as a pseudo error mode (such as a mosaic-like special image in which the display content of the above-mentioned effect display device 1600 is disturbed) is prepared in advance (stored as image data in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2). It may be, or it may be generated each time by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out the image data currently displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the SRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the read image data is special. The effect display device 1600 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a mode (mosaic mode, a mode in which the aspect ratio is different from the normal mode, a mode in which the direction ratio is different from the normal mode, etc.). Drawing data for drawing an image may be generated and processed on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a) and displayed. Also, in this example, a message image is displayed as if the player is recovering from the error state, such as "Please wait for a while during recovery" as the pseudo recovery mode, but the player indicates that the pseudo recovery mode is recovering from the error state. It may be any mode as long as it can be recognized, and for example, a mode similar to a computer startup screen may be displayed.

Further, when switching to the pseudo error mode and displaying, a pseudo error sound (for example, the game machine 1 has an abnormality or a failure) that completes the output in a shorter time (for example, 1 second) than the display period of the pseudo error mode (for example, 5 seconds). A special sound that seems to have occurred) is output at the time of switching, and while the subsequent pseudo error mode and pseudo return mode are displayed, no production sound is output or the volume is suppressed. (Including muffling) may be performed, and by executing such a special sound effect according to the pseudo-error mode and the pseudo-return mode, it is easier for the player to think that the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state. can do. In addition, when displaying the pseudo-return mode, a pseudo-return sound different from the pseudo-error sound (for example, a specific sound of "pip-pip ..." as if the upper game machine 1 is restored) is output. However, in order to give the player the impression of recovering from the abnormality, it is exemplified that this pseudo return sound is continuously output during the display period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pseudo return mode. it can. However, since it is necessary for the game hall manager and the like to recognize that it is not a true abnormality (error state), even while it is displayed in the pseudo error mode or the pseudo return mode, a problem occurs or the player In the event of fraudulent activity, the notification sound and notification sound that notify them are output at a loud volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) so that they can be reliably transmitted to the outside without suppressing the volume. .. Further, the pseudo error sound and the pseudo return sound depend on the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d and the volume adjustment based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301, like the other effect sounds. The pseudo error sound and the pseudo return sound may be set to a volume relatively louder than other production sounds, and the volume adjustment and the operation of the production operation unit 301 based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d may be set. Even if the volume of the production sound is changed according to the volume adjustment based on, the pseudo error sound and the pseudo return sound are output at a predetermined volume or higher, further increasing the truth that the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state. It is possible to make the player feel like an illusion.

Further, since the pseudo error mode is displayed immediately after the operation of the effect operation unit 300, the relationship between the operation of the effect operation unit 300 by the player and the pseudo error mode becomes close, and the player operates the effect operation unit 300. It can be recognized that an error has occurred. In this example, the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode are displayed even when the effect operation unit 300 is not operated within the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) when the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that an error state has occurred because the effect operation unit 300 is not operated within the valid period, and give a surprise.

Further, one or both of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode may be adjusted according to the remaining period of the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid. .. Specifically, the period from the display of the operation instruction display 1600a at the timing t1'in FIG. 263 to the end of the display of the pseudo return mode at the timing t5'is always regardless of the timing of the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300. It may be constant. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable effect according to the variable time regardless of the timing of the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300.

After displaying the pseudo-return mode (FIG. 261 (E)), when the timing t5'in FIG. 263 (A) is reached, the normal reach effect and the normal reach effect, which is the effect mode before displaying the pseudo error mode, are not executed. Displays another effect mode (super reach effect) and starts a variable effect. In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is displayed so that the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d face each other in the central portion of the effect display device 1600, and the left, middle, and right decorations are displayed on the lower left of the effect display device 1600. The symbol is reduced and displayed (FIG. 261 (F)). Then, a battle effect is executed in which the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d are confronted. Further, when the received determination result notification command indicates a big hit, the mode in which the main character 1600c attacks the enemy character 1600d as a result of the battle effect is displayed (FIG. 261 (G)), and the main character 1600c is the enemy character. The mode of winning 1600d is displayed (FIG. 261 (H)). On the other hand, when the received determination result notification command indicates an error, the mode in which the enemy character 1600d attacks the main character 1600c as a result of the battle effect is displayed, and the mode in which the main character 1600c is defeated by the enemy character 1600d is displayed. Will be.

Then, at the timing t5 ”, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 stops the variable display of the special symbol and sends a stop display command instructing the peripheral control board 1510 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol, and the peripheral control board. The 1510 stops and displays the decorative symbol in the manner indicated by the determination result command based on the reception of the stop display command, that is, in the example shown in FIG. 261 as the jackpot symbol.

Next, a non-operation pseudo-error effect as a button-related effect will be described. Upon receiving the variation pattern command instructing the start of the variation effect for executing the non-operation pseudo error effect from the main control board 1310 and the judgment result notification command according to the lottery result, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the above-mentioned reception command analysis process. After executing the lottery process related to the notice etc., controlling the display of the effect display device 1600 at the timing t0 "in FIG. 263 (B) and starting the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, the left and right decorative symbols are the same. A normal reach effect is executed in which a reach that stops at a symbol is generated and the decorative symbol inside is fluctuated and displayed at a low speed (FIG. 262 (A)). When a non-operation pseudo-error effect is executed, a lottery process related to a notice etc. In, the lottery result to the effect that the button-related effect other than the non-operation pseudo-error effect is executed cannot be obtained. That is, when the non-operation pseudo-error effect is executed, the other button-related effect is not executed. It has become.

After the effect display device 1600 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the operation instruction display 1600a and the remaining time display 1600b instructing the button operation at the timing t1 of FIG. 263 (B) (. FIG. 262 (B). After that, without starting the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid, when the timing t2 of FIG. 263 (B) is reached, the decorative symbol is changed. After interrupting the sound effect (display and sound during normal reach effect in this example) and switching to a pseudo-error mode as if the pachinko machine 1 was in an error state (FIG. 262 (C)), after a predetermined period has elapsed (Fig. 262 (C)). At the timing t3 "in FIG. 263 (B) shown in FIG. 263 (B) after 5 seconds, a pseudo recovery mode in which the pachinko machine 1 is recovered from the error state is displayed (FIG. 262 (D)).

That is, in the non-operation pseudo error effect, the operation instruction display 1600a is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the player is suddenly switched to the pseudo error mode while instructing the player to operate the button, and the operation instruction display 1600a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, in reality, the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid is not started, and even if the operation signal is output in response to the operation of the effect operation unit 300. The peripheral control board 1510 does not accept the operation signal (the operation signal may not be output even if the effect operation unit 300 is operated outside the valid period). In this way, since the pseudo error mode is suddenly displayed at an unexpected timing, it is possible to surprise the player who is preparing to operate the effect operation unit 300 by giving a surprise.

After displaying the pseudo-return mode (FIG. 262 (D)), when the timing t4 "in FIG. 263 (B) is reached, the normal reach effect is performed without executing the normal reach effect which is the effect mode before displaying the pseudo error mode. Displays another effect mode (super reach effect) and starts a variable effect. In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 faces the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d at the center of the effect display device 1600. In addition to displaying the display, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced and displayed on the lower left of the effect display device 1600 (Fig. 262 (E)), and a battle effect is executed in which the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d are confronted. If the received determination result notification command indicates an error, the mode in which the enemy character 1600d attacks the main character 1600c as a result of the battle effect is displayed (FIG. 262 (F)), and the main character 1600c is the enemy. The mode of defeat to the character 1600d is displayed (FIG. 262 (G)). On the other hand, when the received determination result notification command indicates a big hit, the main character 1600c is the enemy character 1600d as a result of the battle effect. The mode of attacking is displayed, and the mode in which the main character 1600c wins over the enemy character 1600d is displayed.

Then, at the timing t5 ”, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 stops the variable display of the special symbol and sends a stop display command instructing the peripheral control board 1510 to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol, and the peripheral control board. Based on the reception of the stop display command, the 1510 stops and displays the decorative symbol in a mode corresponding to the determination result command, that is, in the example shown in FIG.

In this way, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect as the button-related effect are executed, the variation effect of the decorative symbol (normal reach effect in this example) is interrupted and the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state. After switching to the pseudo-error mode as if it were displayed, a pseudo-return mode in which the pachinko machine 1 is restored from the error state after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds later) is displayed. Further, after the pseudo-return mode is displayed for a predetermined period, the variation effect of the decorative symbol before the interruption is not restarted, but the variation effect of the effect mode different from the variation effect is started. In addition, the super reach effect as an effect mode different from the normal reach effect performed after the display of the pseudo return mode has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect (a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit symbol) is easily derived). Is. Therefore, instead of restarting the normal reach production after the operation trigger pseudo-error production, it is a completely different production mode, and by switching to the super reach production with a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach production and executing the variable production, the game hobby Can be improved.

Further, in the above example, the operation trigger pseudo-error effect and the non-operation pseudo-error effect are executed as the button-related effects during the normal reach effect, and the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal reach effect after the operation trigger pseudo-error effect and the non-operation pseudo-error effect are completed. I try to switch to a high-level super reach effect to execute the variable effect, but even before the variable effect of the decorative pattern is interrupted by the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect, the super reach effect other than the normal reach effect In this case, the effect mode (type of super reach effect) and jackpot expectation of the super reach effect to be executed after the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are decorated. The production mode (different type) that is different from the super reach effect that was executed before the interruption of the fluctuation effect of the symbol and is higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach effect that was executed before the interruption of the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Super reach production). That is, after the operation trigger pseudo-error effect and the non-operation pseudo-error effect are completed, a variation effect that is more advantageous to the player than before the operation trigger pseudo-error effect and the non-operation pseudo-error effect are executed may be executed. .. As a result, not only can the expectation for the jackpot be raised even before the operation trigger pseudo-error effect and the non-operation pseudo-error effect are executed, but also the jackpot expectation after the operation trigger pseudo-error effect and the non-operation pseudo-error effect are completed. By starting a high-level super reach production, expectations for big hits can be raised, and the interest in games can be improved.

Further, the control of stopping the firing of the game ball and the control of stopping the payout of the game ball may be executed in synchronization with the display of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode. That is, the display period between the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode (the period from timing t3'to timing t5' in FIG. 263 (A) and the period from timing t2" to timing t4 "in FIG. 263 (B)) is a game. By stopping the firing of the ball or stopping the payout of the game ball, it is possible to make the pseudo-error state more true and make the player believe that the error state actually occurred, and the subsequent game production You can be amazed at the changes.

In addition, the execution timing of the button-related effect is not limited to the above, and the variation effect of the decorative symbol is interrupted before the reach occurs, the button-related effect is executed, and the reach is generated after the end of the button-related effect. By executing the super reach effect, a variable effect of an effect mode different from the variable effect of the decorative symbol before interruption may be executed, or a decorative symbol that is out of the decorative symbol (a decorative symbol including at least two types of symbols) may be executed. In this case, the left and right decorative symbols may be the same symbol but only the middle decorative symbol may be a different reach symbol, or at least the left and right decorative symbols may be different symbols. After making a temporary stop (a state in which the display is slowly variable up and down and left and right and is not completely stopped), the variation effect of the decorative pattern is interrupted and the button-related effect is executed to perform the button-related effect. After the end of, a variation effect of an effect mode different from the variation effect of the decorative symbol before the interruption may be executed (so-called re-variation or pseudo continuous variation). In this case, if a judgment result command that is out of alignment is received, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner without starting a variable effect of the decorative symbol that is different from the variable effect of the decorative symbol before the interruption after the button-related effect is completed. It is also possible to stop the decorative symbol at least at an outlier symbol in which the left and right symbols are different, and end the variation effect without generating reach.

In addition, the button-related effects (speech notice, operation trigger pseudo-error effect, non-operation pseudo-error effect) are not limited to those described above, and the effect operation involves movement (upward movement, etc.) of the pressing operation unit 303 from the reference position. It may be a movable effect that encourages the player's operation after changing the appearance of the unit 300. In the case of such a movable effect, the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode are displayed, for example, at a predetermined timing during the movement of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, or immediately after the pressing operation unit 303 moves to the ascending position. For example, the movement of the pressing operation unit 303 is stopped at the timing of, and the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode are displayed. Further, in the case of such an embodiment, the pressing operation unit 303 is in a state of being out of the reference position (a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 is stationary in the middle of movement and a pressing operation unit 303 in the raised position) until the pseudo return mode is completed. The pressing operation unit 303, which is out of the reference position at a predetermined timing after the end of the pseudo-return mode, may be restored to the reference position. By generating a pseudo-error mode and a pseudo-return mode along with the sudden stop of the movement of the movable effect operation unit 300 in this way, it is easier for the player to have an illusion as if the pachinko machine 1 was in an error state. can do.

Further, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as the button-related effect, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the dialogue notice is executed as the button-related effect. For example, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as the button-related effects, the super reach effect exceeding the predetermined jackpot expectation is executed after the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are completed. (Or, the execution rate of the super reach effect above the predetermined jackpot expectation is higher than the execution rate of the super reach effect below the predetermined jackpot expectation), and if the dialogue notice is executed as the button-related effect, the dialogue notice is given. After the end of, execute a super reach effect that is less than the predetermined jackpot expectation (or increase the execution rate of the super reach effect that is less than the predetermined jackpot expectation than the execution rate of the super reach effect that is greater than or equal to the predetermined jackpot expectation). It may be. As a result, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as the button-related effects, the expectation of a big hit can be raised and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the jackpot expectation of one of the case where the operation trigger pseudo-error effect is executed and the case where the non-operation pseudo-error effect is executed as the button-related effect may be higher than that of the other. For example, when an operation trigger pseudo-error effect is executed as a button-related effect, a super reach effect equal to or higher than a predetermined jackpot expectation is executed (or a super reach equal to or higher than a predetermined jackpot expectation) is executed after the operation trigger pseudo-error effect is completed. (The execution rate of the effect is higher than the execution rate of the super reach effect below the predetermined jackpot expectation), and when a non-operation pseudo-error effect is executed as a button-related effect, the super reach effect below the predetermined jackpot expectation It may be executed (or the execution rate of the super reach effect less than the predetermined jackpot expectation is higher than the execution rate of the super reach effect above the predetermined jackpot expectation). As a result, the expectation of the jackpot can be changed according to the switching display timing of the pseudo-error mode, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode may be generated at a different timing from the button-related effect described above. As another timing, it is preferable that the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state so that the player can have an illusion. Therefore, for example, the back upper left movable decoration 3310, the back left lower movable decoration 3320, and the back upper right movable decoration 3410. The timing during movement of any of the back right lower movable decorative bodies 3420 and the back right moving arm 3330 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right moving arm 3430 of the back right effect unit 3400 are second from the normal state. Timing immediately after moving to the state, and timing immediately after moving the back left upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 to the second state. At these timings, the movement of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower right movable decoration body 3420 is stopped to perform a pseudo error mode or a pseudo return. The mode may be displayed. Further, the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the front decorative portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the tip of the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. The rotation of any of the step decoration units 3422 may be stopped at a predetermined time during rotation to display a pseudo error mode or a pseudo return mode.

[26. Barbell reach production]
Hereinafter, the barbell reach effect, which is an effect executed during the special symbol change, will be described. The barbell reach effect is an effect performed during the SP reach performed in the present embodiment. The SP reach is an effect that is easy to be executed when the special lottery result of the fluctuation is a big hit, and is difficult to be executed when the special lottery result of the fluctuation is out of order, that is, an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. The barbell reach effect is an example of an effect in which the first index and the second index indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation are promoted, and the other effects shown in FIG. It goes without saying that the production in which the first index and the second index are promoted is executed. Further, the barbell reach effect is an example of an effect in which a pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the change of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. .. "Ending the variation of the decorative symbol" means, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player is made to recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol is once completed, and a mode of the decorative symbol. A mode in which a pseudo-ream symbol (a symbol in which a pseudo-ream is confirmed if this symbol is stopped) is partially stopped. A pseudo-continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called an N-series pseudo-continuous effect, and the M-th variation of the decorative symbol (M is 1 or more N) in the N-series pseudo-continuous effect. The following natural numbers) are called the M-th pseudo continuous production. In addition, while suggesting to the player that the operation may be executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the operation is actually executed again. A production that does not occur is called a "pseudo-gase production". Further, hereinafter, the pseudo continuous production is also simply referred to as a "pseudo continuous production".

Pseudo-continuous effect is generated or continued, that is, the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. Peripheral control IC1510a may stop the pseudo-continuous symbol at at least one of the left decorative symbol, the intermediate decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol when it is confirmed that the pattern is to be used. In the following example, the peripheral control IC 1510a stops a character such as "continue!" As a pseudo-continuous symbol on the intermediate decorative symbol. In addition, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are all odd or even numbers and reach does not occur) may be used as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

[26-1. Fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 265 is an example of a variation pattern pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the main control board 1310. In the explanation of FIG. 233 and the like, an example in which a variation pattern table exists for each winning type of the special lottery result has been described, but in the example of FIG. 265, the variation pattern for each winning type of the special lottery result is described in one variation pattern table. Is defined.

The variation pattern table of FIG. 265 shows the correspondence between the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, the effect outline of the variation pattern, and the distribution. In the winning type, "other than Ho 4" means that the number of special symbol changes held at the time of winning corresponding to the change was 3 or less, and "Ho 4" means at the time of winning corresponding to the change. Indicates a state in which the number of reserved special symbol changes in is four.

As described above, in the example of FIG. 265, the fluctuation pattern information of each special lottery result (winning type including the pending state) is stored in one fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a selects a variation pattern corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the winning and the number of reserved special symbol changes at the time of winning according to the distribution of the variation pattern table.

In addition, "+ pseudo 1" and "+ pseudo 2" described in the effect summary column indicate that two pseudo-continuous effects and three pseudo-continuous effects are executed, respectively. It should be noted that the above-mentioned pseudo-gase effect can be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is "not reach (normal fluctuation time)" or the like. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern is such that "+ pseudo 1" is executed, a pseudo-gase effect suggesting the occurrence of the third pseudo-ream in "+ pseudo 2" may be executed.

The fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern may be defined in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 265. Further, in the following example, it is assumed that the winning probability of the jackpot by the special lottery (the winning probability of the jackpot in the low probability state) is 1/200 when the probability variation state is not activated, and the probability variation rate of the jackpot winning is 1 /. It is assumed that it is 2.

[26-2. About the first index and the second index]
On the effect display device 1600, for example, a first meter for displaying the first index and a second meter for displaying the second index are displayed during execution of the special symbol variation. The first meter and the second meter may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 even when the special symbol fluctuation is not being executed. In that case, "0" may be displayed as the numerical value of the meters. The numerical value displayed at the end of the previous fluctuation may be displayed. The first index and the second index indicate, for example, the jackpot expectation of the special symbol change during execution (in principle, the larger the value, the higher the jackpot expectation), and the change is stepwise during execution. Can be promoted. Both the first index and the second index are composed of a plurality of stages, and the number of stages that the first index can take is larger than the number of stages that the second index can take.

In the example described below, when the second index becomes a predetermined value or more (for example, 100 or more), a predetermined effect having a high expectation of a big hit (for example, SP reach or movie reach (effect display device 1600)) It is confirmed that a reach production)) with a high expectation of a big hit with a predetermined movie flowing above will occur. In addition, the second index shall not exceed the predetermined value until the predetermined effect is started. That is, when the second index is equal to or less than the predetermined value, the second index also suggests the degree of expectation of occurrence of the predetermined effect. Further, when the second index is in a state of the predetermined value or more, the second index suggests only the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation, that is, the jackpot expectation in the predetermined production. Specific details will be described later.

Further, for example, when the first index and the second index reach predetermined values (for example, 777), the special lottery result in the fluctuation may be a big hit confirmation or a probability change big hit confirmation. It is desirable that the distribution in which the predetermined value is displayed is extremely small (for example, the lowest distribution value among the stages existing as the distribution value).

In this chapter, the indicators displayed on the first meter and the second meter will explain an example showing the expected degree of jackpot in the fluctuation during execution, but may indicate the expected degree of any of the pending fluctuations. That is, an effect in which the indexes of the first meter and the second meter change may be executed as a look-ahead effect.

[26-3. Method of determining the first index value]
266 and 267 are examples of the first index determination table. Specifically, an example of the first index determination table is divided into two and shown in FIGS. 266 and 267, FIG. 266 is an example of the left half of the first index determination table, and FIG. 267 is the first index. This is an example of the right half of the decision table.

The first index determination table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The first index determination table stores, for example, an identifier of the fluctuation pattern, an outline of the effect of the fluctuation pattern, and distribution of the final numerical value of the first index displayed on the first meter in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a identifies the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 1310a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the first index determination table and determines the final numerical value of the first index displayed on the first meter in the fluctuation according to the distribution corresponding to the specified fluctuation.

In the examples of FIGS. 266 and 267, the final numerical value of the first index is a value in 25 stages (0, 100, 200, 333, 500, 700, 777, 900, 999, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, It takes one of 3500, 4000, 4500, 5000, 6000, 7000, 7777, 8000, 9000, 9995, 9998, 9999).

The first index displayed on the first meter in the effect display device 1600 in the special symbol variation is gradually promoted toward the selected final numerical value at the promotion timing predetermined for each variation pattern.

At each promotion timing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the promotion lottery with reference to the first promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 268, and promotes the value of the first index displayed on the first meter. It is assumed that the value of the first index of the first meter immediately before the start of fluctuation is "0", which is the lowest value.

FIG. 268 is an example of the first promotion lottery table. The first promotion lottery table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The first promotion lottery table stores the promotion pattern and the distribution of each promotion pattern. For example, when "not promoted" is selected as the promotion pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not promote the value of the first index of the first meter at the promotion timing.

For example, when "MAX" is selected as the promotion pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a promotes the value of the first index of the first meter to the selected final value at the promotion timing.

For example, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects "one-step promotion" as the promotion pattern, the value of the first index of the first meter is promoted by one step at the promotion timing. In addition, "promotion of N steps" (N is a natural number) means promotion of N steps in the final numerical group of the first index that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation can take.

Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation pattern 2 whose production outline is "not reach (normal fluctuation time)" is selected, the final numerical group that can be taken in the fluctuation pattern 2 is "0", "100", It is assumed that it is composed of "200", "500", and "700", and "700" is selected as the final numerical value. The value of the first index immediately before the start of fluctuation is "0", and in this state, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects "three-step promotion" as the promotion pattern at the start of fluctuation, which is an example of promotion timing. The value of the first index displayed on the first meter is promoted to "500", which is a numerical value three steps higher than "0" in the final numerical value group.

If the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects "N-step promotion" in a state where the N-step promotion of the first index exceeds the selected final value, for example, at the promotion timing, the first Promote the value of the first indicator of the meter to the final selected value. Further, when the promotion timing is reached while the first index has been promoted up to the selected final value, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 does not carry out the promotion lottery, and there is a distribution only in "not promoted". The promotion lottery is carried out using the first promotion lottery table, or the promotion lottery result is forcibly changed to "not promoted". As a result, the first index displayed on the first meter can be prevented from exceeding the final value.

Further, when the first index becomes a numerical value for which a big hit is confirmed (“333”, “777”, “7777”, etc.), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 draws a promotion lottery at the subsequent promotion timing regardless of the final numerical value. It is not necessary to carry out the promotion lottery, or it is not necessary to carry out the promotion lottery using the first promotion lottery table in which the distribution exists only for "not promoted". This is to avoid the possibility that the player may be confused if the first index of the first meter is changed from the numerical value in which the jackpot is confirmed to the numerical value in which the jackpot is not confirmed.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may forcibly promote the value of the first index up to the selected final value at the final promotion timing in the fluctuation. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a carries out a promotion lottery using the first promotion lottery table in which only "promotion to MAX" has a distribution at the final promotion timing in the fluctuation. The selected promotion pattern may be forcibly changed to "up to MAX" promotion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 268, a plurality of types of first promotion lottery tables are shown, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has different types of firsts depending on, for example, a fluctuation pattern, a selected final value, promotion timing, and the like. The promotion lottery will be conducted using the promotion lottery table.

Specifically, for example, when the final numerical value with a low jackpot expectation is selected and the first index reaches the final numerical value at an early promotion timing, promotion is not performed at the subsequent promotion timing, so that the game The person may guess at an early stage that the displayed value with a low expectation of big hit is the final value, and the sense of expectation may decrease. On the other hand, if the final value with high jackpot expectation is selected, but the situation with low jackpot expectation is frequently displayed until just before the final promotion timing, the player is promoted at each promotion timing. There is a risk that he will not be interested in the production and will only focus on the final promotion timing.

In order to suppress the occurrence of such a situation, the promotion lottery is carried out using different first promotion lottery tables as follows. For example, the first promotion includes a promotion pattern (for example, 4-step promotion, 5-step promotion, etc.) in which the larger the number of elements in the final numerical group and the higher the selected final number, the larger the number of steps to be promoted. It is advisable to carry out the promotion lottery using the lottery table or the first promotion lottery table in which the promotion patterns with many stages of promotion are often distributed. Further, for example, the fluctuation pattern with a large number of promotion timings and the lower the selected final value, the promotion pattern with a large number of stages to be promoted (for example, 4-step promotion, 5-step promotion, etc.) is not included. It is advisable to carry out the promotion lottery using the promotion lottery table or the first promotion lottery table in which the number of stages to be promoted is small and the promotion patterns are often distributed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may perform the promotion lottery using only one first promotion lottery table.

An example of promotion timing in each fluctuation pattern will be described below. In the following description of the promotion timing example, the timing of arrival is described in the order of earliest. Further, hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is also simply referred to as a “design”. In addition, in the production outline based on each variation pattern described below, at the final promotion timing, the promotion lottery using the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (B) is performed.

(1) When the outline of the production is "shortening fluctuation" (a) Only at the start of fluctuation. Therefore, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the final numerical value of the first index at the start of the fluctuation.

(2) When the outline of the effect is "not reach (normal fluctuation time)" (a) at the start of fluctuation, (b) during high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) when the left symbol is stopped, and (d) when the right symbol is stopped .. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (c), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (A) is referred to.

(3) When the outline of the effect is "not reach + pseudo 1" (a) at the start of fluctuation, (b) during high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) when the left symbol is stopped, (d) when the right symbol is stopped, (e) ) Promotion lottery when the pseudo-continuous symbol stops in the middle symbol, (f) during the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) when the left symbol stops, and (h) when the right symbol stops. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (g), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (A) is referred to.

(4) When the outline of the effect is "normal reach" (a) at the start of fluctuation, (b) during high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) when the left symbol is stopped, (d) when the right symbol is stopped, (e) when a reach telop occurs , And (f) When the same symbol as the reach symbol has passed. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (e), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (C) is referred to.

(5) When the outline of the effect is "normal reach + pseudo 1" (a) at the start of fluctuation, (b) during high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) when the left symbol is stopped, (d) when the right symbol is stopped, (e) during When the pseudo-continuous symbol stops in the symbol, (f) during the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) when the left symbol stops, (h) when the right symbol stops, (i) when a reach telop occurs, and (j) When the same symbol as the reach symbol has passed. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (i), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (C) is referred to.

(6) When the outline of the production is "SP reach first half" (a) Promotion lottery at the start of fluctuation, (b) During high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) When the left symbol is stopped, (d) When the right symbol is stopped, (e) When a reach telop occurs, (f) when the same symbol as the reach symbol passes, (g) when the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed and becomes a white background, (h) when the barbell reach title is displayed, and (i) Immediately before the winning branch of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (h), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (C) is referred to.

(7) When the outline of the effect is "SP reach first half + pseudo 1" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) When the left symbol is stopped, (d) When the right symbol is stopped, (e) ) When the pseudo-continuous symbol stops in the middle symbol, (f) during the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) when the left symbol stops, (h) when the right symbol stops, (i) when reach telop occurs, (j) ) When the same symbol as the reach symbol passes, (k) when the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed and becomes a white background, (l) when the title of the barbell reach is displayed, and (m) just before the winning branch of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (l), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (D) is referred to.

(8) When the outline of the production is "SP reach first half second half" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) When the left symbol is stopped, (d) When the right symbol is stopped, (e) Reach When a telop occurs, (f) when the same symbol as the reach symbol passes, (g) when the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed and becomes a white background, (h) when the barbell reach title is displayed, (i) barbell reach Before the hit branch, (j) Movable decorations (in barbell reach, lower back movable decoration, back upper movable decoration, back upper left movable decoration, back left lower movable decoration, back upper right movable decoration, and back (Lower right movable ornament) When united, (k) When the title is displayed at the beginning of the second half, and (l) Immediately before the winning branch in the second half of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (k), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (E) is referred to.

(9) When the outline of the effect is "SP reach first half second half + pseudo 1" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) When the left symbol is stopped, (d) When the right symbol is stopped, ( e) When the pseudo-continuous symbol stops in the middle symbol, (f) during the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) when the left symbol stops, (h) when the right symbol stops, (i) when reach telop occurs, (i) j) When the same symbol as the reach symbol passes, (k) When the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed and becomes a white background, (l) When the title of the barbell reach is displayed, (m) Immediately before the winning branch of the barbell reach, (N) When the movable decorations are combined, (o) When the title is displayed at the beginning of the second half, and (p) Immediately before the winning branch in the latter half of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (o), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (E) is referred to.

(10) When the outline of the effect is "SP reach first half second half + pseudo 2" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) When the left symbol is stopped, (d) When the right symbol is stopped, ( e) When the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, (f) During the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) When the left symbol is stopped, (h) When the right symbol is stopped, (i) Pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol When is stopped, (j) during the third high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (k) when the left symbol is stopped, (l) when the right symbol is stopped, (m) when a reach telop occurs, (n) the same symbol as the reach symbol When passing, (o) when the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed and becomes a white background, (p) when the title of barbell reach is displayed, (q) just before the winning branch of barbell reach, (r) movable decoration united At the time of (s) when the title is displayed at the beginning of the second half, and (t) just before the winning branch in the second half of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (s), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (F) is referred to.

(11) When the outline of the effect is "movie reach" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) When the left symbol is stopped, (d) When the right symbol is stopped, (e) Reach telop occurs When, (f) when the same symbol as the reach symbol passes, (g) when the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed and becomes a white background, (h) when the movie reach title is displayed, (i) movie reach title Every 5 seconds after the display (for example, 5 times), and (j) just before the winning branch of the movie reach. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (i), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (G) is referred to.

(12) When the outline of the effect is "Movie Reach + Pseudo 1" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) When the left symbol is stopped, (d) When the right symbol is stopped, (e) When the pseudo-continuous symbol stops in the middle symbol, (f) during the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) when the left symbol stops, (h) when the right symbol stops, (i) when reach telop occurs, (j) When the same symbol as the reach symbol passes, (k) the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed and becomes a white background, (l) when the movie reach title is displayed, (m) 5 seconds have passed since the movie reach title was displayed. Every and (n) before the winning branch of the movie reach. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (m), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (H) is referred to.

(13) When the outline of the effect is "Movie Reach + Pseudo 2" (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) When the left symbol is stopped, (d) When the right symbol is stopped, (e) When the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, (f) during the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) when the left symbol is stopped, (h) when the right symbol is stopped, (i) the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol At that time, (j) during the third high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (k) when the left symbol is stopped, (l) when the right symbol is stopped, (m) when a reach telop occurs, and (n) the same symbol as the reach symbol has passed. When, (o) the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed and becomes a white background, (p) when the movie reach title is displayed, (q) every 5 seconds after the movie reach title is displayed, and (r) movie reach. Before the winning branch. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (q), for example, the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (H) is referred to.

In the above-mentioned example of promotion timing, there is a case defined by a period (that is, when the promotion timing is not uniquely determined) such as "all symbols are changing at high speed", but in such an example, promotion is performed. The timing may be any timing during the period. That is, when the promotion timing is "all symbols are changing at high speed", the promotion timing can be any timing at which all the symbols are changing at high speed.

However, for example, the effect outline is "(b) all symbols are changing at high speed" in "movie reach + pseudo 1", and the effect outline is "(b) all symbols are changing at high speed" in "movie reach + pseudo 2". In addition, it is desirable that the timings match for promotion timings that share the same name. Assuming that the timings do not match at the promotion timings with the same name (for example, "(b) All symbols at high speed fluctuating" in the production outline "Movie reach + Pseudo 1" is 1 from the start of all symbols high speed fluctuation. After a second, the outline of the production is "Movie Reach + Pseudo 2", "(b) All symbols are changing at high speed" is 2 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, etc.), and the player will be affected by the difference in the promotion timing. Since the fluctuation pattern can be predicted, the interest in the production diminishes. In order to avoid such a situation, it is desirable that the promotion timings with the same name match. This also applies to the promotion timing of the second index, which will be described later.

[26-4. Method of determining the second index value]
FIG. 269 is an example of the second index determination table. The second index determination table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The second index determination table stores, for example, an identifier of the fluctuation pattern, an outline of the effect of the fluctuation pattern, and distribution of the final numerical value of the second index displayed on the second meter in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a identifies the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 1310a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines the final value of the second index displayed on the second meter in the fluctuation according to the distribution corresponding to the specified fluctuation with reference to the second index determination table.

In the example of FIG. 269, the final numerical value of the second index takes any one of 12 levels (0, 18, 35, 52, 98, 100, 150, 200, 300, 500, 777, 999). .. The second index displayed on the second meter in the effect display device 1600 in the special symbol variation can be promoted stepwise toward the selected final numerical value at the promotion timing predetermined for each variation pattern. In the example of FIG. 269, when the value of the second index displayed on the second meter exceeds 100, (final value of the second index) / 10 (%) becomes approximately equal to the jackpot expectation. As described above, the distribution of the final numerical value of the second index value in each fluctuation pattern is defined. Specifically, for example, when the value of the second index displayed on the second meter is "200", the jackpot expectation is "20.02%", and the second index displayed on the second meter When the numerical value is "500", the jackpot expectation degree is "50.90%", and the numerical value is distributed for each production outline, and the same applies to other numerical values exceeding 100.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern in which neither the SP reach nor the movie reach is included in the production outline, there is no distribution in which the final value exceeds 100. As a result, as described above, when the second index of the second meter reaches 100, the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach with a high expectation of big hit is confirmed, and the player can get an uplifting feeling at that time. it can.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern in which the final value of the second index can take a value larger than 100 (that is, the fluctuation pattern including SP reach or movie reach in the production outline), there is a distribution in which the final value is "100". To do. As will be described later, in the fluctuation in which SP reach or movie reach occurs, the value of the second index "100" in which the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach is confirmed before the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach is displayed on the second meter. This is to make it possible.

At each promotion timing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a promotion lottery with reference to the second promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 270, and promotes the value of the second index displayed on the second meter at that timing. .. It is assumed that the value of the second index of the second meter immediately before the start of fluctuation is "0", which is the lowest value.

FIG. 270 (A) is an example of the second promotion lottery table used at the promotion timing other than during SP reach and during movie reach, and FIG. 270 (B) shows the promotion timing during SP reach and movie reach. This is an example of the second promotion lottery table used. That is, in the variation pattern in which neither the SP reach nor the movie reach is included in the effect outline, only the second promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 270 (A) is used.

The second promotion lottery table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The second promotion lottery table stores the promotion pattern and the distribution of each promotion pattern. The meaning of "N-step promotion" in the second promotion lottery table is the same as the meaning of "N-step promotion" in the first promotion lottery table.

First, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 270 (A) will be described. The second promotion lottery table of FIG. 270 (A) includes a promotion pattern of "promotion to the smaller of 100 or MAX". The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has, for example, "100" as a promotion pattern.
When "Promote to the smaller of or MAX" is selected, the value of the second index of the second meter is changed to the selected final value of the second index and the smaller value of "100" at the promotion timing. (If the final value is "100", promote to "100"). As a result, in the fluctuation pattern in which SP reach or movie reach occurs, the second index displayed on the second meter can be prevented from exceeding 100 before the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach. In a fluctuation pattern in which neither reach nor movie reach occurs, the second index displayed on the second meter can be prevented from reaching 100.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state where the selected final value is exceeded when the second index is promoted by N steps, or 100 is set before the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach when the second index is promoted by N steps. If "N-step promotion" is selected in a state where it exceeds the limit, for example, at the promotion timing, the value of the second index of the second meter is promoted to the smaller of the selected final value and 100. ..

In addition, when the promotion timing is reached in a state where the second index has been promoted to the selected final value, or when the second index has been promoted to 100 before the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach, for example, peripheral control. The CPU of the IC1510 does not carry out the promotion lottery, carries out the promotion lottery using the second promotion lottery table in which the distribution exists only for "not promoted", or forcibly changes the lottery result to "not promoted". When the selected final value exceeds 100 in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern including the SP reach or the movie reach, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value of the second meter to 100 before the occurrence of the SP reach or the movie reach. It may be promoted to a larger value (and less than or equal to the final value).

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has the final promotion timing in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern including neither SP reach nor the movie reach, and before the execution of SP reach or movie reach in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern including SP reach or movie reach. At the final promotion timing, the value of the second index may be forcibly promoted to the selected final value or the smaller of 100.

Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is promoted by using the second promotion lottery table in which the distribution exists only in "promotion to the smaller of 100 or MAX" at the final promotion timing in the fluctuation. The lottery may be carried out, or the promotion lottery result may be forcibly changed to "promotion to the smaller of 100 or MAX".

Next, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 270 (B) will be described. As described above, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 270 (B) is used at the promotion timing during SP reach and movie reach. In the example of FIG. 270 (B), the promotion pattern is "one-step promotion" and Only "do not promote" is included. That is, as compared with before the start of SP reach or movie reach, the number of stages that can be promoted is small, and the number of promotion patterns is increased.

In addition, at the final promotion timing of the fluctuation during SP reach or movie reach, it is preferable to forcibly promote the value of the second index up to the selected final value. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a carries out a promotion lottery using a second promotion lottery table in which only "promotion to MAX" has a distribution at the final promotion timing in the fluctuation. The promotion lottery result may be forcibly changed to "promotion to MAX".

In addition, when the second index becomes a numerical value (“777”) for which the jackpot is confirmed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 does not carry out the promotion lottery at the subsequent promotion timing regardless of the final numerical value, and only “does not promote”. It is desirable to carry out the promotion lottery using the second promotion lottery table in which the distribution exists, or to forcibly change the promotion lottery result to "not promoted".

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may carry out the promotion lottery of the second index by using the second promotion lottery table other than that described with reference to FIG. 270. Specifically, similarly to the first promotion lottery table, for example, there may be a second promotion lottery table that is different for each fluctuation pattern, each selected final numerical value, or each promotion timing.

The promotion timing of the second index in the fluctuation pattern in which neither "SP reach" nor "movie reach" is included in the production outline is, for example, the same as the promotion timing of the first index. However, as described above, the second promotion lottery table referred to at the promotion timing may differ depending on the promotion timing. For example, in these fluctuation patterns, in the promotion lottery other than the last promotion timing, for example, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 270 (A) is referred to, and in the promotion lottery of the last promotion timing, for example, FIG. 270 (C). ) Second promotion lottery table is referred to.

Further, the promotion timing of the second index before the start of SP reach in the fluctuation pattern including "SP reach" in the effect outline is the same as the promotion timing of the first index, for example. In these fluctuation patterns, at the promotion timing other than the last of the promotion timings before the start of SP reach, for example, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 270 (A) is referred to, and the promotion of the last promotion timing before the start of SP reach is promoted. In the lottery, for example, the second promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 270 (C) is referred to.

Similarly, the promotion timing of the second index before the start of movie reach in the fluctuation pattern including "movie reach" in the effect outline is the same as, for example, the promotion timing of the first index. In these fluctuation patterns, at the promotion timing other than the last of the promotion timings before the start of the movie reach, for example, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 270 (A) is referred to, and the promotion of the last promotion timing before the start of the movie reach is promoted. In the lottery, for example, the second promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 270 (C) is referred to.

Hereinafter, an example of the promotion timing after the start of SP reach in the variation pattern including "SP reach" in the effect outline and the promotion timing after the start of movie reach in the variation pattern including "movie reach" in the effect outline will be described.

(1) When the outline of the production includes the "first half of the SP reach" and does not include the "second half" (that is, when only the first half of the SP reach is performed)
(A) When the title of the barbell reach is displayed, and (b) Immediately before the winning branch of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timing of (a), for example, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (B) is referred to, and in the promotion lottery of the promotion timing of (b), for example, the second promotion of FIG. 268 (D). The lottery table is referenced.

(2) When the outline of the production includes "SP reach first half second half" (a) When the barbell reach title is displayed, (b) Immediately before the winning branch of the barbell reach, (c) When the movable decoration is combined, (d) When the title is displayed at the beginning of the second half, and (e) just before the winning branch in the second half of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (d), for example, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (E) is referred to, and in the promotion lottery of the promotion timing of (e), for example, FIG. 268 (D). The second promotion lottery table of is referred to.

(3) When the production outline includes "movie reach" (a) When the movie reach title is displayed, (b) When 7 seconds, 14 seconds, 22 seconds, and 28 seconds have passed from the movie reach title display, and ( c) Immediately before the winning branch of movie reach. In the promotion lottery of the promotion timings (a) to (b), for example, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (F) is referred to, and in the promotion lottery of the promotion timing of (c), for example, FIG. 268 (D). The second promotion lottery table of is referred to.

In the above example, the promotion timing of the first index and the promotion timing of the second index completely match (a fluctuation pattern that does not include both SP reach and movie reach), and the promotion timing of the first index and the second index. An example (a fluctuation pattern including either SP reach or movie reach) in which some of the promotion timings of the above match is explained, but the promotion timing of the first index and the promotion timing of the second index are completely different. You may.

Specifically, for example, there may be a fluctuation pattern in which all promotion timings of the first index do not match any of the promotion timings of the second index. In addition, the second index is not promoted at the promotion timing when the promotion pattern of the first index is promoted by one step or more, or the first index is not promoted at the promotion timing when the promotion pattern of the second index is promoted by one step or more. Therefore, the promotion timing of the first index and the promotion timing of the second index may be completely different.

In addition, referring to the examples of FIGS. 266 and 267, with respect to the first index, even in a fluctuation pattern in which the production outline is frequently selected even when the effect is off, such as “normal reach”, there are not a few distributions of high final values ( For example, the distribution of 9999 is 21). On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 268, regarding the second index, the distribution of the high final numerical value in the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is extremely small (for example, the deviation fluctuation pattern in which the distribution of 999 exists is only "movie reach + pseudo 2". Yes, the distribution is 1). In other words, compared to the second index, the final value of the higher stage is more likely to be selected for the first index even in the case of deviation fluctuation (the final stage of the first index is shown, but the final stage of the second index is not shown. When comparing the jackpot expectation between when and when the final stage of the second index is shown but the final stage of the first index is not shown, the latter is by far the higher expectation). Therefore, the jackpot expectation is higher when the second index of the upper stage is compared with the case where the first index of the upper stage is displayed.
When "999" is displayed in the second index, the big hit expectation is "99.34%", which is almost a big hit, so the ratio of "999" is displayed is extremely low. , "999" in the first index is made to appear frequently. This is because the player wants to experience the phenomenon that "999" is displayed on the meter. For example, it is more preferable to add an effect such that the numerical value displayed on the first index moves to the second index as it is.

[26-3. Overview of barbell reach production]
Hereinafter, a barbell reach effect, which is an example of an effect for promoting the first index and the second index displayed on the effect display device 1600, will be described. 271 to 274 are explanatory views showing an example of an outline of the barbell reach effect. The barbell reach production is an example of SP reach. Both FIGS. 271 (A) to 274 (T) depict the promotion timing of the first index and the second index.

Hereinafter, an example in which a jackpot fluctuation pattern (probability variation) whose production outline is “SP reach first half second half + pseudo 2” is selected will be described. Further, it is assumed that "9999" is selected as the final value of the first index and "999" is selected as the final value of the second index.

On the effect display device 1600, a first meter 1641 for displaying the first index and a second meter 1642 for displaying the second index are displayed. Hereinafter, it is assumed that the color in the second meter 1642 changes according to the numerical value of the second meter 1642. Specifically, for example, when the values of the second meter 1642 are "0" and "18", it is white, when it is "35", it is blue, when it is "52", it is yellow, and when it is "98", it is green. "100", "150", "200", and "300" are red, "500" and "999" are gold, "777" (big hit confirmed) is rainbow, and so on. It is assumed that the color in the meter 1642 changes.

The reason why the color of only the second meter 1642 changes according to the numerical value is that, as described above, the second index of the upper stage is compared with the case where the first index of the upper stage is displayed. This is because the jackpot expectation is higher when compared. However, the color of the first meter 1641 may also be changed according to the numerical value.

Immediately before the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, "0", which is the lowest numerical value, is displayed on both the first meter 1641 and the second meter 1642.

In FIG. 271 (A), when the variation of the special symbol starts, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the variation of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600, and executes the promotion lottery of the first index and the second index. In FIG. 271 (A), "two-stage promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to "200", and "not promoted" is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index. The display on the second meter 1642 remains "0".

In FIG. 271 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a fluctuates all the symbols at high speed in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 271 (B), the first index is used when all the symbols are fluctuating at high speed (the timing may be arbitrary as long as all the symbols are fluctuating at high speed. The same applies to the following description). In the promotion lottery, "two-step promotion" is selected and the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to "500", and in the promotion lottery of the second index, "one-step promotion" is selected and the display of the second meter 1642 is " It has been promoted to "18".

In FIG. 271 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the left symbol during high-speed fluctuation in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 271 (C), "not promoted" is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 remains "500", and "not promoted" is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index. The display on the second meter 1642 remains "18".

In FIG. 271 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the right symbol during high-speed fluctuation in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 271 (D), "three-step promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to "900", and "one-step promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index. It is selected and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to "35", and the color of the second meter 1642 is changed to blue.

In FIG. 271 (E), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the pseudo-continuous symbol (“continued! × 2”) at the middle symbol in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 271 (E), "one-step promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to "999", and "not promoted" is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index. The display on the second meter 1642 remains "35".

In FIG. 271 (F), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes all the decorative symbols to be changed at high speed again in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 271 (F), "not promoted" is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 remains "999", and "not promoted" is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index. The display on the second meter 1642 remains "35".

In FIG. 272 (G), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the left symbol during high-speed fluctuation in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 272 (G), "1 step promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to "1500", and "1 step promotion" is displayed in the promotion lottery of the second index. It is selected and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to "52", and the color of the second meter 1642 is changed to yellow.

In FIG. 272 (H), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the right symbol during high-speed fluctuation in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 272 (H), "two-stage promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to "2500", and "not promoted" is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index. The display on the second meter 1642 remains "52".

In FIG. 272 (I), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the pseudo-continuous symbol (“continued! × 3”) at the middle symbol in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 272 (I), "not promoted" is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 remains "2500", and "one-step promotion" is displayed in the promotion lottery of the second index. It is selected and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to "98", and the color of the second meter 1642 is changed to green.

In FIG. 272 (J), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a changes all the decorative symbols at high speed again in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 272 (J), "one-step promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to "3000", and "not promoted" is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index. The display on the second meter 1642 remains "98".

In FIG. 272 (K), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the left symbol during high-speed fluctuation in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 272 (K), "two-step promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to "4000", and "one-step promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index. It is selected and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to "100", and the color of the second meter 1642 is changed to red.

At this point, since the display of the second meter 1642 is set to "100", the player can be made to recognize that the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach has been confirmed. Further, as described above, after this, the numerical value of the second meter 1642 is not promoted until the barbell reach production, which is the SP reach, is started.

In FIG. 272 (L), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the right symbol during high-speed fluctuation in the effect display device 1600 in the reach state. In FIG. 272 (H), "promotion to MAX" is selected in the promotion lottery for the first index, and the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to "9999". At this point, the first index displayed on the first meter 1641 has been promoted to the final value, so that the value of the first meter 1641 is not promoted thereafter in the fluctuation.

In FIG. 273 (M), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a reach telop indicating that a reach has occurred in the effect display device 1600.

In FIG. 273 (N), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a fluctuates the middle symbol at a low speed in the effect display device 1600, and passes the same middle symbol as the reach symbol between the middle symbol and the right symbol.

In FIG. 273 (O), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the effect display device 1600 to change the middle symbol again at high speed, and further, for example, displays other than the first meter 1641, the second meter 1642, and the decorative symbol. Delete it to display the background of the effect display device 1600 in white. The display suggests that it occurred in the further reach production.

In FIG. 273 (P), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a title indicating that the barbell reach effect, which is the SP reach, has started in the effect display device 1600. Since the barbell reach effect, which is the SP reach, has started, the promotion lottery for the numerical value of the second index displayed on the second meter 1642 is started again. In FIG. 273 (P), “not promoted” is selected in the promotion lottery for the second index, and the display of the second meter 1642 remains “100”.

In FIG. 273 (Q), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the barbell reach winning / branching effect on the effect display device 1600. In the winning branch production, the special lottery result is notified (big hit or miss), or the development of the barbell reach production with a higher expectation of big hit to the latter half production is notified. In FIG. 273 (Q), "one-step promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery for the second index, and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to "150".

In FIG. 273 (R), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a barbell reach winning / branching effect on the effect display device 1600. In the winning branch production, the special lottery result is notified (big hit or miss), or the development of the barbell reach production with a higher expectation of big hit to the latter half production is notified. In FIG. 273 (Q), "one-step promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index immediately before the notification in the winning branch effect, and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to "200". In addition, in FIG. 273 (R), it is shown that the movable decorative body appears on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 to develop into the latter half effect of the barbell reach effect, but the execution timing of the operation of the movable decorative body. May be before or after the win is shown in the first half of the barbell reach production.

In FIG. 274 (S), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a includes the back lower movable decoration body 3110, the back upper movable decoration body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back left lower movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and After moving the lower right movable decorative body 3420 to the first united position, it returns to the original position. The operation of these movable decorative bodies is an example of an effect of notifying the development of the barbell reach effect to the latter half effect. In FIG. 274 (S), "two-step promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery for the second index, the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to "500", and the color of the second meter 1642 is changed to gold. ..

In FIG. 274 (T), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a barbell reach winning / branching effect on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 274 (T), immediately before the notification in the winning branch effect, "two-step promotion" is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index, and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to "999". Therefore, at this point, the player can be made to recognize that the special lottery result in the fluctuation is a big hit (only the movie reach is displayed as "999" on the second meter 1642 and does not become a big hit. Because the revealed reach is a barbell reach equivalent to SP reach).

In FIG. 274 (U), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the same middle symbol as the reach symbol in the effect display device 1600 as a winning notification effect in the winning branch effect of the barbell reach, and the special lottery result in the fluctuation is a big hit. Is notified and the fluctuation is terminated.

In the promotion lottery at a certain promotion timing, it is confirmed that the numerical value of the second meter 1642 is promoted to a numerical value with a high expectation of big hit or a fixed big hit (for example, 999), and immediately before the promotion timing. When the value of the first meter 1641 is the same as the value after promotion of the second meter 1642, the peripheral control IC 1510a has an aspect in which the value of the first meter 1641 moves to the second meter 1642 in the effect display device 1600. May be displayed to promote the value of the second meter 1642.

As a result, the player can guess that there is a relationship between the first index indicated by the first meter 1641 and the second index indicated by the second meter 1642 and enjoy the effect. In particular, in the above-mentioned example, the jackpot expectation when the second index is promoted to the higher stage is lower than the jackpot expectation when the first index is promoted to the higher stage, but such an effect is executed. As a result, the player can get a sense of expectation about the display of the first meter 1641. In the above example, even if "999" is displayed in the first index, the degree of expectation for a big hit is not so high, but when "999" shown in the first index moves to the second index, This is because it will be a super hot production.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may execute a predetermined effect when promoting the numerical value of the first meter 1641. Specifically, for example, when the peripheral control IC 1510a promotes the value of the first meter 1641, the value in the first meter 1641 is fluctuated at high speed, and the first meter 1641 is sorted according to the distribution shown in the effect color selection table described later. A white or red effect (for example, a flame-like effect or an aura-like effect) is displayed in the surroundings, and then the numerical value selected at the promotion timing is displayed.

FIG. 275 is an example of the effect color selection table in the first index. The effect color selection table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The effect color selection table stores the distribution of each effect color (white and red) in each of the special lottery results (big hit or miss) of the fluctuation.

Peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the effect color selection table of FIG. 275 (A), for example, when the second meter 1642 has never been promoted before the promotion timing of the fluctuation. Peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the effect color selection table of FIG. 275 (B), for example, when the second meter 1642 has been promoted even once before the promotion timing of the fluctuation.

In the example of FIG. 275, the special lottery result of the change is out of the case when the second meter 1642 has been promoted even once before the promotion timing of the change. When is, red is more likely to be selected. In other words, when the meter display of the second index is promoted (the stage is up) even once, when the meter display of the first index is displayed in stages, the effect color that is considered to have a high degree of expectation ( By facilitating the appearance of (red color in the example of FIG. 275), the player can be given an uplifting feeling.

[27. Bulletin board notice production]
[27-1.1 Bulletin board notice production in fluctuation]
The bulletin board notice production, which is an example of the suggestion production of the special lottery result, will be described below. 276 and 277 are explanatory views showing an example of an outline of the bulletin board notice effect. For example, in the fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the reach is executed, the bulletin board notice effect using the two bulletin boards is executed at a predetermined ratio.

For example, the first bulletin board 1610 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a normal game state other than the jackpot game state and in a state in which a special effect such as SP reach is not executed. The first bulletin board 1610 is displayed, for example, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600. For example, the first bulletin board 1610 displays a model description of the pachinko machine 1, a display prompting the operation of various operation units such as the pressing operation unit 303, and a display suggesting the development and continuation of the pseudo-continuous production during the fluctuation of the above state. , A display suggesting the content of the production that develops in the fluctuation or the fluctuation of the look-ahead target, and a display as a mere liveliness with a low correlation with the jackpot expectation.

Further, the effect display device 1600 includes a hold display area 1620 located in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, and the hold display area 1620 displays, for example, a display indicating the number of pending fluctuations in the above state, and holds the display. The display pedestal is displayed. For example, in the examples of FIGS. 276 and 277, the number of black circles indicates the number of pending fluctuations and the number of white circles indicates how many more fluctuations can be pending. That is, in the examples of FIGS. 276 and 277, one variation is pending and three more variations can be pending.

First, in FIG. 276 (A), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts to change the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 276 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a "may have something" on the first bulletin board 1610 displayed on the upper part of the effect display device 1600, for example, at the same time as the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A fan message such as "?" Or a lively message with a low correlation with the jackpot expectation is displayed.

Subsequently, in FIG. 276C, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays on the first bulletin board 1610 indicating that the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation such as "chance!" Is high. In addition, in FIG. 276 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, on the first bulletin board 1610 suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and then re-displays the decorative symbol in the pseudo-continuous effect. After making the fluctuation, the transition to FIG. 276 (D) may be performed.

Further, when there is a pending change, in FIG. 276C, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, on the first bulletin board 1610 suggesting the execution of the pending change effect such as "change!" The hold change effect may be executed, and the effects after (D) may be executed in the variation corresponding to the hold. Regarding the display of the first bulletin board 1610, only one of FIGS. 276 (B) and 276 (C) may be carried out, and in addition to or in place of FIGS. 276 (B) and 276 (C). Another display may be implemented.

Subsequently, in FIG. 276 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a urges the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611 described later, such as "Look at the bulletin board below !!" on the first bulletin board 1610. Display. Further, in FIG. 276 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the mode in which the hold display area 1620 vibrates, for example, in the effect display device 1600, suggesting that the hold display area 1620 may move. Perform the production to be done.

In FIG. 276 (E), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has an aspect in which at least a part of the hold display area 1620 disappears from the effect display device 1600 by moving the hold display area 1620 downward in the effect display device 1600. Is displayed. That is, for the display such as "Look at the bulletin board below !!" on the first bulletin board 1610, the hold display area 1620 moves (or the area of the hold display area 1620 in the effect display device 1600 decreases). It is also a suggestive display, and when displaying "Look at the bulletin board below !!" on the first bulletin board 1610, a predetermined display among multiple types of displays such as red characters and the background color of the bulletin board is red. If the effect is such that the reach or more (or SP reach or more) is confirmed when it is performed, the effect on the first bulletin board 1610 suggests that a predetermined reach occurs in addition to the reduction of the reserved display area 1620. It is also a production to do. This also applies to other examples described later.

Subsequently, in FIG. 276 (F), only a part of the hold display area 1620 (for example, only the area where the number of holds can be recognized) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may erase the entire hold display area 1620 from the effect display device 1600. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a makes, for example, a display capable of recognizing the number of holds (for example, the number itself indicating the number of holds) sufficiently smaller than the hold display area 1620 and having a size that the player can recognize. It is desirable to display on the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, in FIG. 277 (G), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the second bulletin board 1611 to appear on the effect display device 1600, and the second bulletin board 1611 has a high expectation of a big hit such as "Big chance !!". Display as shown. As in the examples of FIGS. 276 and 277, the display in the second bulletin board 1611 suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the display in the first bulletin board 1610 (the second bulletin board 1611 itself itself. It is desirable that the jackpot expectation is high when it appears). The area where the second bulletin board 1611 is displayed is at least one of the areas before the hold display area 1620 moves (that is, the area where the hold display area 1620 was displayed in FIGS. 276 (A) to 276). It overlaps with the part.

Subsequently, in FIG. 277 (H), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the decorative symbol in the reach state on the effect display device 1600, and then executes the effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays in the first bulletin board 1610 and the second bulletin board 1611, for example, at the start of the SP reach when the SP reach is executed, and at the end of the fluctuation when the SP reach is not executed. Erase. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is, for example, at a timing before the appearance of the second bulletin board 1611, a timing at which the second bulletin board 1611 appears, or a timing at which the above display is performed on the second bulletin board 1611. You may erase the display in.

In the examples of FIGS. 276 and 277, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the display in the first bulletin board 1610 and the display in the second bulletin board 1611 before the reach development, but executes them at other timings. You may. For example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the display in the first bulletin board 1610 after the reach is developed, and immediately before the development to the reach with high expectation of big hits such as SP reach, the second bulletin board 1611 is displayed on the reach. Display suggestive of development may be performed.

In the bulletin board production, it is desirable that the time when the characters are displayed on the second bulletin board 1611 is longer than the time when the characters are displayed on the first bulletin board 1610. In particular, as in the above-mentioned example, when it is suggested that the content displayed in the second bulletin board 1611 has a higher jackpot expectation than the content displayed in the first bulletin board 1610, the player This is because the expectation of the above can be maintained for a longer period of time.

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 276 and 277, even after the characters are displayed on the second bulletin board 1611, the characters are still displayed on the first bulletin board 1610, but the appearance of the second bulletin board 1611 or the second bulletin board 1611. Even after the characters are displayed, the display in the first bulletin board 1610 may be deleted. As a result, the player's consciousness can be directed to the second bulletin board 1611, which displays with higher expectations.

Further, it is desirable that the number of types of contents that can be displayed on the second bulletin board 1611 is larger than the number of types of contents that can be displayed on the first bulletin board 1610. Since the first bulletin board 1610 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a longer time than the second bulletin board 1611, it can be used for various effects because the number of types of contents that can be displayed is large.

Further, for example, when characters or the like are displayed on the first bulletin board 1610 and when characters or the like are displayed on the second bulletin board 1611, the sound output from the speaker, the lamp that emits light, the emission color of the lamp, etc. May be different from each other. In particular, for example, among the displays that may be displayed only on the second bulletin board 1611, when a high display indicating that the jackpot expectation is high is displayed on the second bulletin board 1611, a dedicated sound is output from the speaker. Alternatively, a dedicated lamp may emit light.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 276, on the first bulletin board 1610, the display of the mode in which the jackpot expectation level gradually develops, as shown by the display of "chance!" After the display of "maybe something?" However, on the second bulletin board 1611, such a stepwise development display may not be performed. In particular, when only the display with a high jackpot expectation is performed on the second bulletin board 1611, the appearance of the second bulletin board 1611 is synonymous with the high jackpot expectation, and the appearance of the second bulletin board 1611 It can give the player a feeling of exhilaration.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may make the second bulletin board 1611 appear and display the second bulletin board 1611 without displaying the display prompting the first bulletin board 1610 to see the second bulletin board 1611. It is desirable that the appearance rate of such a pattern is set lower than the appearance rate when the first bulletin board 1610 is displayed to encourage the viewing of the second bulletin board 1611, and the jackpot expectation of the pattern is set. Is preferably set higher than the jackpot expectation when displaying a message prompting the first bulletin board 1610 to see the second bulletin board 1611.

As a result, the player can feel the unexpected feeling due to the sudden appearance of the second bulletin board 1611. Further, for a player who knows the existence of the pattern, even if the first bulletin board 1610 does not display a prompt to see the second bulletin board 1611, the expectation that the second bulletin board 1611 will appear. In addition to being able to maintain the feeling, an uplifting feeling can be obtained when the second bulletin board 1611 appears in this case.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the second bulletin board 1611 to appear, displays a message prompting the second bulletin board 1611 to see the first bulletin board 1610, and then displays a big hit such as "chance!" On the first bulletin board 1610. A display indicating that the degree of expectation is high may be displayed. It is desirable that the appearance rate of such a pattern is set lower than the appearance rate when the first bulletin board 1610 is displayed to encourage the viewing of the second bulletin board 1611, and the jackpot expectation of the pattern is set. Is preferably set higher than the jackpot expectation when displaying a message prompting the first bulletin board 1610 to see the second bulletin board 1611.

As a result, it is possible to realize an effect different from the usual effect mode in which the second bulletin board 1611 appears after the characters are displayed on the first bulletin board 1610, and the player can feel an unexpected feeling.

278 and 279 are explanatory views showing another example of the outline of the bulletin board notice effect. Differences from FIGS. 276 and 277 will be described. In the examples of FIGS. 278 and 279, the hold display area 1630 is displayed in the lower area of the effect display device 1600. The hold display area 1620 described with reference to FIGS. 276 and 277 has a shape that covers only the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, but the hold display area 1630 extends over the lower left area and the lower right area of the effect display device 1600. The shape.

In the example of FIG. 278, the left part of the hold display area 1630 is displayed to indicate the number of pending fluctuations, but the right part of the hold display area is also displayed to indicate the number of pending fluctuations. May be good. Specifically, for example, the left part of the hold display area 1630 shows the number of pending fluctuations of the first special symbol, and the right part shows the number of pending fluctuations of the second special symbol. May be done.

Regarding FIGS. 278 (A), (B), and (C), the points other than the shape of the hold display area 1630 are the same as those of FIGS. 276 (A), (B), and (C), and thus the description thereof is omitted. To do. Further, since the display contents of the first bulletin board 1610 after FIG. 278 (D) are the same as the display contents of the first bulletin board 1610 after FIG. 276 (D), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 278 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays in the effect display device 1600 that, for example, the right portion of the hold display area 1630 vibrates, and the right portion of the hold display area 1630 may move. Perform a production that suggests that there is.

In FIG. 278 (E), in the effect display device 1600, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a moves the right part of the hold display area 1630 downward, so that at least a part of the right part of the hold display area 1630 is the effect display device. The mode of disappearing from 1600 is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 278 (F), the right portion of the hold display area 1630 disappears from the effect display device 1600.

In FIG. 279 (G), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the second bulletin board 1611 to appear on the effect display device 1600, and displays on the second bulletin board 1611 indicating that a big hit expectation such as “Big chance !!” is high. Do. The area where the second bulletin board 1611 is displayed is the area before the right part of the hold display area 1630 moves (that is, the right part of the hold display area 1630 is displayed in FIGS. 278 (A) to 278 (D)). It overlaps with at least a part of the area. Subsequently, in FIG. 279 (H), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the decorative symbol in the reach state on the effect display device 1600.

In FIGS. 278 and 279, the right part of the hold display area 1630 moved and the second bulletin board 1611 appeared. For example, the left part shows the number of pending fluctuations of the first special symbol. , In the case where the display indicating the number of pending fluctuations of the second special symbol is displayed on the right part, the part of the right part and the left part where the number of pending fluctuations is 0 moves. Then, the second bulletin board 1611 may appear.

[27-2. Look-ahead production using bulletin board notice production]
FIG. 280 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of a look-ahead effect using the bulletin board rehearsal effect. First, in FIG. 280 (A), there is no pending fluctuation, and the game ball wins the first starting port 2002 while the first fluctuation is being executed. The second variation, which is the variation corresponding to the winning, is the variation of the look-ahead target, and the bulletin board notice effect is executed as the look-ahead effect.

In FIG. 280 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is displayed on the first bulletin board 1610, for example, at the same time as the winning, or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the winning and during the execution of the first variation. The same display (display of a fan message, a lively message with a low correlation with the jackpot expectation, etc.) is performed.

In FIG. 280 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays on the first bulletin board 1610, for example, at the end of the first fluctuation, which is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, indicating that the jackpot expectation in the second fluctuation is high.

In FIG. 280 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays on the first bulletin board 1610 in the same manner as in FIG. 276 (D), for example, at the start of the second fluctuation or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the second fluctuation. (Ii) A display that prompts the player to pay attention to the bulletin board 1611). Further, in FIG. 279 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays in the effect display device 1600 in a manner in which, for example, the hold display area 1620 vibrates, and the hold display area 1620 is displayed as in FIG. 276 (D). Perform an effect that suggests that it may move. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may display the first bulletin board 1610 in the first variation, which prompts the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611. Since the effects after FIG. 280 (D) are the same as the effects after FIG. 276 (E), the description thereof will be omitted.

[27-3. Bulletin board notice production using the operation unit]
Hereinafter, an example in which the bulletin board notice effect changes depending on the operation by various operation units will be described. FIG. 281 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of a bulletin board notice effect using the pressing operation unit 303. FIG. 281 (A) shows a state in which the first fluctuation has started and the second fluctuation, which is the look-ahead target fluctuation, is suspended.

In FIG. 281 (A), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays on the first bulletin board 1610 to prompt the player to press the central pressing operation unit 303a at the start of the fluctuation or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the central pressing is performed. The operation unit 303a is set to the operation enabled state. As in the example of FIG. 281 (A), the display of the first bulletin board 1610 suggests that when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, some change may occur in the lower part of the effect display device 1600. It is desirable that the display be displayed.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation enabled state, in FIG. 281 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, prompting the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611, and the operation is effective. Exit the state. If the central pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of FIG. 281 (A) was performed on the first bulletin board 1610, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is set to the first bulletin board. The display of 1610 is deleted, the operation valid state of the pressing operation unit 303 is terminated, and after the end of the first variation, the process proceeds to FIG. 281 (D).

Subsequently, in FIG. 281 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the combination of decorative symbols having at least one different number in order to end, for example, the first variation which is an out-of-range variation. The display of the first bulletin board 1610 in FIG. 281 (B) remains, for example, continuing.

In FIG. 281 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a continues to display the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611 in the first bulletin board 1610, as in FIG. 276 (D). At 1600, for example, the hold display area 1620 is displayed in a vibrating manner, and an effect suggesting that the hold display area 1620 may move is executed. Since the effects after FIG. 281 (D) are the same as the effects after FIG. 276 (E), the description thereof will be omitted.

Although FIG. 281 has described an example in which the bulletin board notice using the operation unit is executed as a look-ahead effect, it may be executed as an effect in one variation.

FIG. 282 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of an outline of a bulletin board notice gassing effect using the pressing operation unit 303. In FIG. 282, although the appearance of the second bulletin board 1611 is suggested, the so-called ghost effect that the second bulletin board 1611 does not appear is executed. FIG. 282 (A) shows a state in which the first fluctuation has started and the second fluctuation, which is the look-ahead target fluctuation, is suspended. In FIG. 282 (A), the same effect as in FIG. 281 (A) is executed.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation enabled state, in FIG. 282 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has a low expectation of a big hit such as "..." on the first bulletin board 1610, for example. Is displayed and the operation enabled state is terminated. If the central pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of FIG. 282 (A) was performed on the first bulletin board 1610, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is set to the first bulletin board. The display of 1610 is deleted, the operation valid state of the pressing operation unit 303 is terminated, and after the end of the first variation, the process proceeds to FIG. 282 (D).

Subsequently, in FIG. 282 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a ends, for example, the first fluctuation which is an out-of-bounds fluctuation. The display of the first bulletin board 1610 in FIG. 282 (B) continues from the display to a predetermined time or the end of the first fluctuation, for example. Subsequently, in FIG. 282 (D), the second variation starts.

[27-4. Bulletin board notice production using multiple operations of the operation unit]
Hereinafter, an example in which the bulletin board notice effect is changed by a plurality of operations by various operation units will be described. 283 and 284 are explanatory views showing an example of an outline of a bulletin board notice effect using the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. In FIG. 283 (A), first, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a presses the central pressing operation unit 303a on the first bulletin board 1610, for example, at the start of fluctuation or after a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 281 (A). Is displayed to the player, and the central pressing operation unit 303a is set to the operation enabled state.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation enabled state, in FIG. 283 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, prompting the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611, and presses the center. The operation enabled state of the operation unit 303a is terminated.

If the central pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of FIG. 283 (A) was performed on the first bulletin board 1610, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is set to the first bulletin board. The display of 1610 is deleted, the operation valid state of the pressing operation unit 303 is terminated, the bulletin board effect does not progress, and the effect defined in the variation pattern of the variation is executed.

In FIG. 283 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a continues the display prompting the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611 in the first bulletin board 1610, as in FIG. 276 (D). At 1600, for example, the hold display area 1620 is displayed in a vibrating manner, and an effect suggesting that the hold display area 1620 may move is executed.

In FIG. 283 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is at least a part of the hold display area 1620 by moving the hold display area 1620 downward in the effect display device 1600, for example, as in FIG. 276 (E). Displays a mode in which is disappearing from the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 283 (E), at least a part of the hold display area 1620 disappears from the effect display device 1600.

In FIG. 283 (F), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the second bulletin board 1611 to appear on the effect display device 1600, and the rotation operation unit 302 such as "Geki ... turn !!" on the second bulletin board 1611. The jackpot expectation is extremely high when the player is prompted to rotate and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated (for example, the jackpot expectation of the display displayed on the first bulletin board 1610 is higher than the highest jackpot expectation). ) A display indicating that the display is likely to be executed (in the example of FIG. 283 (F), a display reminiscent of the player being displayed as "extreme heat" when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. ) To put the rotation operation unit 302 into the operation valid state.

When the rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the operation enabled state, in FIG. 284 (G), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays on the second bulletin board 1611 that the expectation of a big hit such as "super heat !!!" is extremely high. Is performed, and the operation valid state of the rotation operation unit 302 is terminated.

If the rotation operation unit 302 does not rotate even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of FIG. 283 (F) was performed on the second bulletin board 1611, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may use the second bulletin board 1611. The display is deleted, the operation enabled state of the rotation operation unit 302 is terminated, the bulletin board effect does not progress, and the effect defined in the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation is executed.

Subsequently, in FIG. 284 (H), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the decorative symbol in the reach state on the effect display device 1600, and then executes the effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation.

In the examples of FIGS. 283 and 284, the effect proceeds by operating different operation units (center pressing operation unit 303a and rotation operation unit 302), but a plurality of one operation unit (for example, only the center pressing operation unit 303a). The production may proceed by the operation of the times.

Further, in the production in which the display indicating that the jackpot expectation is high is performed on the second bulletin board 1611 by the operation of the operation unit, for example, when the operation of a plurality of operation units is used, the operation of one operation unit is performed a plurality of times. When using, when using one operation of one operation unit, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation is higher in this order. As a result, the motivation of the player to operate the operation unit is improved, which in turn improves the interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine (rotary type). It can also be applied to a game machine) or a fusion game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused (a machine that plays a slot game using a game ball). Here, a slot machine as a rotating cylinder type game machine will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 223 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 223, the slot machine 6000 is configured to include a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body portion 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the main body portion 6004 by inserting the key into the keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with this hinge as the center of rotation.

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door 6002, and a protrusion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door 6002. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010, 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window, an effect device (not shown), and the like are displayed. It can be seen through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the front door 6002.

On these variable rotating bodies, a translucent symbol band on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a game machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from the top to the bottom from the above-mentioned display window. It is designed to look like.

The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and a peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable effectors, the drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, etc., based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above.

In the main control board 1310, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

In the fusion game machine, the medal insertion port 6008 becomes the ball insertion port 6008', and the main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of game balls as a game medium into the ball insertion port 6008' to operate the start lever 6014. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of the game ball as a game medium to the saucer 6026.

1 ... Pachinko machine, 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Door frame, 4 ... Main body frame, 5 ... Game board, 5a ... Game area, 558 ... External terminal board, 559 ... Frame ground board, 560 ... Payout unit, 570 ... Ball Guidance unit, 580 ... payout device, 580a ... payout passage, 580b ... ball ejection passage, 581 ... payout device main body, 582 ... payout device rear lid, 583 ... payout device front lid, 584 ... payout motor, 585 ... drive gear, 586 ... first transmission gear, 587 ... second transmission gear, 588 ... payout gear member, 588a ... payout gear, 588b ... detection piece, 589 ... payout blade, 589a ... blade piece, 589b ... ball accommodating part, 590 ... blade rotation detection Sensor, 591 ... Payout detection sensor, 592 ... Movable piece for ball removal, 593 ... Ball removal lever, 600 ... Upper full tank path unit, 610 ... Lower full tank path unit, 630 ... Power supply board, 630a ... Power switch, 630b ... Noise countermeasure circuit, 630c ... Rectification circuit, 630d ... Power factor improvement circuit, 630e ... Smoothing circuit, 630f ... Power supply creation circuit, 630g ... Power supply destruction circuit, 633 ... Payout control board, 1300 ... Main control unit, 1310 ... Main Control board 1500 ... Peripheral control unit, 1501 ... Cover body, 1502 ... Base body, 1503 ... Wiring cover body, 1510 ... Peripheral control board, 1520 ... Peripheral data ROM board, 1530 ... Liquid crystal output board, 1540 ... Shield board, 1545 ... Conductive elastic member, 1600 ... Production display device

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that draws lots based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and gives profits to the player based on the result of the lottery.
The luminous body used for the production in the process of the game,
A light emitting decorative substrate on which the light emitting body is mounted and
With
As the light emitting body, it has a side view type specific light emitting body capable of irradiating in a direction parallel to the surface of the substrate to be mounted.
As the light emitting decorative substrate, a specific light emitting decorative substrate on which the specific light emitting body is mounted is provided.
The specific light emitting decorative substrate has a front mounting surface on which the specific light emitting body is mounted and a back mounting surface on which the specific light emitting body is not mounted.
A white coating film is provided on the surface mounting surface of the specific light emitting decorative substrate on which the specific light emitting body is mounted, and a specific notation portion corresponding to the specific light emitting body is a yellow paint on the white coating film. Formed by
The specific illuminant has a white exterior.
Further, the specific light emitting body is a gaming machine characterized in that it can emit light in multiple colors. An electronic component different from the light emitting body is mounted on at least one of the front mounting surface and the back mounting surface of the specific light emitting decorative substrate.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.